Home

GR Recorders User`s manual, 43-TV-25-41

1. 206 Section BS SSC IM seriinin ROC DE E CAD dd BL DOM nM UE UE ERN RM MER HUE 207 Password Security ith cente nba r r ER Er Eee saasa 207 Users and GTOUDS i iei catastali bide a c Fete rete ERR PEORES 207 LUInnumH 208 Pa ssword Policy seco ai SEN EEEE NES 210 User Interface TEQUITEMENIS 210 Ait Trail EE 210 Level Permissions aceto eripi tei rere ED eie er prie 211 Default Password ACCESS mE 214 Hardware Configuration Lock eene 224 Section 6 Screen Configuration eee 225 Process Screen OVerview iiie oii ROTE EGIO Hee EEA 225 Menu Bar TT 226 Screen Menit BG s t etn et a e eee PES RR ER RS EFE ERE eae pea een eh 227 Replay 228 Chart Speeds ian Aena E REST Bo SUI A ete Ae es 235 5g 235 Sereen AGIWVIL aiino o EAA OER is p ERE 236 Section 7 Firmware Options sssennssunnneennnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nenna 241 Firmware Credit System eee ee eee e esee esses senes tae tn tna ss senses esoo dsv nen 241 Firmware Options tette ets etsettettst tot ERE ER ERE ERSTES REESE REERE ERE re ER E ites 243 Section 8 Communication xsckicununEnkRuE E RS REA NA nEN NM MUS MNRAGR AN NUN NUI QUAE Comms Configuration Standard Communication Interfaces eee eee esee eee en seen te
2. Switch hub Uplink optional to Mains other networks Mains 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Hardware Installation Local Area Network setup This is a group of computers and or associated devices e g Honeywell devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server within a local geographical area e g within an office Figure 8 2 LAN Setup Realtime data from the device to the Comms Server Comms Database Server p gt Server Software Software i I Y Disk data shown n in dotted is gt E 5 Realtime data from imported from the CO the Comms Server to L device to the the TrendServer Bal STR Database server TrendServer Links to Remote Networks Communications is not just limited to local networks Devices and databases on remote net works can be accessed using the TrendServer software via remote comms servers and remote database servers Remote servers means it is not directly connected to your PC Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer on page 251 shows an example of two local systems having access to each others remote servers TrendServer 1 can access Comms Server 2 and Database Server 2 and all the devices within the databases on those servers Similarly TrendServer 2 can access the dev
3. Total 7 0 00 0001 Turbine 1 gt E 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 18h 3 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 p 100 00pas 1 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 14 42 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 _ 60 000 en 2 M E nupt E c EDGE 42 500 0 000 2900 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 20 900 35400 409005 3 0 00 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 56 550 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000Pen 4 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 29 000 en 5 20 00 40 00 50 00 80 00 100 00 94 03 en 5 11 533 en 7 22 77 Pen 8 42 05 DPMs and Scales Vertical Chart 8 Horizontal Bars and 8 DPMs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 57 Functions and Features eZtrend GR Standard Screens The eZtrend GR recorder has up to 12 screens available for displaying combinations of charts scales and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below 72a 4 gj Standard Screen 1 Menu Screen 29 Jun 06 09 33 43 09 28 00 03 i Pen 1 29 J 06 8 Jun 06 3 i 23 294 36 Pen 2 33 405 36 Apu i Standard Screen 2 Om 15 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 47 33 Pen 2 31 200 Max 52 000 Min 233 067 9 3 2e 03 96 96 ax thE Max 444 Min _0 0e 00 Min _0 0e 00 Pen 5 Pen 6 2499 0 36 Abu NI Standard Screen 4 Om 19 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 56 04 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 20 881 Pen 2 0 000 10 000 20 000 30 000 40000 50 000 32 352 o ez 9 9e 4 13 DO
4. 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 217 Figure 5 5 Default password access from the Edit Menu Field I O Menu I O AMS2750 if enabled Engineer Access All of this menu requires Engineer access Permission Area 35 fy Field 1 0 P Lj P Analogue In gt gt Analogue Out je on e Alarm Digital 10 lt q B fran A e Pulse Inputs Linearisation Event 1 Event 1 Event 2 Event 2 Event 3 Event 3 Event 4 Event 4 Event 5 Event 5 Event 6 Event 6 Back P Finish a buttons Events Counters menus Supervisor Access All of the Events and Counters menu require Supervisor access Permission Area 27 u Edit Recording Pens Menu Supervisor Access Permission Area 26 Pens 1 v Pen 1 0 00 to 100 00 D gt e Pens 2 v Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 J gt Pens 3 Pen 3 1069 to 10622 p gt Pens 4 v Pen 4 1061 to 1066 p gt Pens 5 Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 Pens 6 Pen 6 20 00 200 00 B gt Ba Copy To M Field IO d Back B Finish d Events Counters gt a Recording T a a General 5 w 8 e e Scheduled Storage Bias Storage Alarm Ident Localisation Fac
5. i Track Usage Type Expendable Y Renewed On D2 09 2009 Track Cal Y Next Cal Date 02 09 2009 M Track Usage Check this if you wish to track the usage of this TC Type expendable Designed for a single use not reusable non expendable thermo couple Designed for more than one use refer to AMS2750 spec Number of uses usually 0 this is overridden to allow reuse of salvaged thermocouples this is clearly logged Load TC Check this if this is the Load TC TC s attached directly to parts that are being heat treated are usually bare and called load thermocouples Only calibrated thermo couple wire be used when making TC s Refer to AMS2750 spec Table 1 Renewed On Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the sensor was last renewed i e the current TC was connected on this date Track Cal Check this to track the calibration information of this sensor Next Cal Date Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the next calibra tion is due for renewal Cal Adjust Cal adjust for each TC up to 9 cal points Extrapolates between those points Calibration adjustments can be added and deleted by selecting Add or delete In the Cal Point Deg C column use the touch screen and the on screen keypad to enter the calibration point value In the Correction Deg C column enter the amount by which the sensor can be allowed or from the Cal point in
6. Wire seal Earth screw ground 12 to 30VDC 12 to 20VAC Input Instrument power Power Supply USB host Ethernet AC supply 100 240VAC Analogue Input card Slot B op tion Alarm or Digital I O Slot G option Up to 6 Analogue Inputs and Ethernet std 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 10 3 eZtrend GR Spares 1 50071921 501 eZtrend GR 3CH Processor 1GB Credit Option only 50071921 502 eZtrend GR 3CH Processor 2GB 50071921 507 eZtrend GR 6CH Processor 1GB 50071921 508 eZtrend GR 6CH Processor 2GB 2 51453006 502 eZtrend GR Analogue Input 6CH Assy Requires Expansion card item 3 3 50012927 501 eZtrend GR Expansion Board Assy Required for items 2 4 and 6 4 51453018 501 eZtrend GR Digital I O 8CH Assy 4 51453021 501 eZtrend GR Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 eZtrend GR Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 51453015 505 eZtrend GR Power Supply AC Mains 51453015 504 eZtrend GR Power Supply 12V 30VDC 12 20VAC 51453015 502 Power Supply AC Mains with TX Power 7 50083237 501 eZtrend GR 5 7 Black Display Touch Screen Assy 50083237 504 eZtrend GR 5 7 Grey Display Touch Screen Assy 16 50083254 501 eZtrend GR Black Bezel Touch Screen Assy 50082354 503 eZtrend GR RAL7032 BEZEL TOUCH SCREEN ASSY 50083254 504 eZtrend GR Grey Bezel 19 50081204 501 eZtrend GR 5 7 QVGA Display 50059722 501 5 7 EZ QVGA DISP
7. eeeeeee eee 363 Error Messages vs tess 363 vi 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities 377 AMS2750 and the GR Series Recorders ccce eene eee eee ee enne eene neon 377 AMS2750 Process mode 14 eo oro sese ves oa ese se nep oFo EE oe STU EFE gene eS EF Po eo Eo eUE eo E REOS 378 AMS2750 Credit Option ette tr ee eei REO eve 378 AMS2730 Process Meni n iae ie eo mto RETE EE E ERR iE 379 AMS2 750 Process SCHON iui iicet reiten cete tole nai aaa Ead 379 SAT sassiceeeess 383 I O AMS2750 Process Mode esee eterne AMS2750 Button Process Mode esee Pens for TCs Process Mode eese eene tnter tnnt Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 essere TUS mod Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Mode AMS2750 TUS Credit Option esee AMS2750 TUS SCEE n hp tice pete toi diets VO AMS2750 TUS iiit tiet nti e eene o n ates Detenido i EP ER AMS2750 MeniiLUS s ctii i as EE e eer te ben Pens for TC s TUS Mode ise eite thereto pne EERE TUS survey process SCTOOW a eae rettet trei r oir HUS PU rH rT SA G AFEA SUIVEY EA E EE RE O E EE O D rne SUFVEY eor anr da boas chat cy E nA Si I E Events AMS2730 on rn EE E RNA Audit Irdil AMS2720 x i nior aret DE Ec R S eae Ee e oet TUS Data file isses ntes
8. Setup only Close When From network is selected the dialog A x box will change ource Location issus Hit the Set up button The dialog box ex H 160 221 36 29 ECT z tends to allow you set up your recorder to al Set up Batch Schedule low FTP transfers General options Recorder information imported by FTP will not update in the Modbus Profile tool To en sure the recorder details are updated in the Modbus Profile tool setup must be imported manually using removable media X Series FTP options Connection speed Fast 5 mbps Tendon V5 FTP one See for more details Modbus profile tool ownload from data update on page 265 Disk drive C PC Card r NOTE Hit F1 for help on using FTP Press the Add button to add a new recorder to the list Ftp Recorder Setup up ero er Manes Recorder Location IP Address Eg 192 168 1 1 Recorder Name IP Address 160 221 36 33 X Series network name xs 100089 Look up IP address descriptive name for the recorder Furnace OK Cancel Edit Remove Enter the IP address from the recorder that you noted earlier If you don t know it select the Look up IP Address button The other method is to select the Find Device button This will search for all GR recorders on the network using their Network ID eg xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s serial number Give a name for the recorder
9. User Action Select a User Action for placing a Mark on the Chart as a cause to trigger and event Or add a Hot Button which can be displayed on an active Trend screen ee The Hot Button function when active as a cause The user can click the Hot Button on the active screen and the corresponding event that the user needs to set will be triggered The hot button will display on active trend screens in top right of screen if enabled Batch Use a batch control as a cause to trigger an event effect An event cause can be set up so that when you Start Stop or Pause a batch it will cause an effect to occur Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups on page 142 TUS Temperature uniformity Survey This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or AMS2750 Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select either Start or Stop TUS When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect See Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 AMS2750 Timer This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or the AMS2750 Proc ess option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select TC Timers or Process Timers as a cause and set the Alert Type to Warning or Expired See Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 TCHealth Monitor TC Health Monitoring allows monitoring the healt
10. Loading a Layout into a Recorder Loading a Template into a Recorder Software sse Screen Designer AMS2750 coerce DUPGOHL LAN cna tecn oes ax a a Screen Markers m Screen Menu caeca miden Calibrate ecco herein Charts xac deem Clean Screen ssec Replay cientes ue E Ren IRE EIUS Screen List ueniet ette diete etd ieee Screen Saver Tabular Display Touch Test 2s Screen Menu Bar Edit Screen Properties Replay eec eee es Screen Saver Brightness senesinin ae Dim Saver E CFEENS Luiaraottagt tan ihidienen Tabular Screen Script Function Application Examples 331 Script Timers Event Effects ssoae esce iei Process Ment sierra eee ette Scripts Trigger Events is Secure Comms sssri 457 Secure Communications Secure FTP WSD sese Secure FTP Secure FTP for Trend Server 254 DOCET P ipe NUM ERI NEUTER Security Messages Security Overview Send Recorder Events Chart Controls ee Sensor Compensation Analogue Input Calibration 351 Dual Point Cal Multi Point Cal Single Point Cal Sensor Config Menu TUS 399 Sensors Config Menu Process Mode 386 Server Name Email 22 s 106 Server Name SNTP SeFVIGES s ds ttiv oret ede indt DEMN OS P Thermocouple Adjustment Factor Disable 174 Time amp Date 173 Volume Sound Eff
11. Paper Size A4 Orientation Landscape Printer Name Muk22nt2nijd2 Colour Printer x am mcns JR em Ji The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer The printer option displays a Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Lan guage printer For details on suitable printer types see Print Support USB 2 0 on page 44 Allow Printing Tick to enable On and Off Paper Size Toggles between A4 and Letter 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 141 142 Orientation Toggles between Landscape and Portrait Printer Name Enter the printer name as found on the network For a local printer that is connected directly to the recorder via USB ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 If the printer is to be a network connected printer the printer name would be the IP address or network path to the printer so a configuration like pa62NT001 printer name might be used Colour Printer Tick if a colour printer is being used for the screen capture facility Screen captures can be printed as an Effect of an Event See Events Cause and Effect on page 113 If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice When complete go to Finish Commit to implement the new set up Groups Configure Setup Edit Setup General Groups This menu is used for re naming the groups Groups are used as a part of the concurrent batch system Ea
12. eese Reports Event Effects Pen Report Information Process Menu Reset All RUD esos View Archive Reports Menu Reset Setup Layout Data All sss 136 Reset Passwords sees 167 Reset at 16M TOfalISGESutie ceste tee E eer anette ei ETE 92 Resistance Thermometers 30 S SAT Report Wizard sss 425 SD CARD tette 50 SD CARD Handling precautions 51 SD CardFormat ciicecccccecscccsesscesessesssssseestsssessesssees SD card ettet SMTP Status SNIP ete n srt Client Server Network SX Rear Connections SX Standard Screens OVERVIEW 4 cieseietiteitii te cdit ci 56 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK A A AAEE E VE Battery Data sss Hazardous Voltage Static Electricity n SYMBOLS ideam one peperere Safety and Symbol Identification Save Layout NAS iiaiiendiud tes Save Setup Saving Message Screens sss Saving Status Screens sss Scale Ment cece eididuetc RIDES Scheduled Events Event Causes 116 Scheduled Export sisscusanntaccintininieiinds 148 Screen Activity Alarm Markers eee Charts Speeds oe Deviation Alarm Markers Mark on Chart Pen Pointers Ws Screen Markers merisier iaia Screen Change Event Effects Screen Configuration Menu Bar Process Screen Overview Screen Designer Screens Screen Menu Bar iss Screen Designer
13. sees 378 Furnace Config Menu s 385 nog 388 Meni 3i en endete d a Eae 379 Process Screen 12 usesscseeet reete retentione 379 Sensors Config Menu eee 386 AMS2750 TUS Mode sesessssssueusieneneneen 392 Copy Cal Adjust eene 400 Credit Option 4 entree tern 393 Furnace Config Menu 1 396 TIE ON PERLE UE 399 hin A Sensor Config Menu fU S oic Eas 394 AMS27950 Capabilities ccc 377 AMS2750 Process mode sss 378 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool 421 Acknowledge Alarm sssri 175 Active X Control sssri 277 Add Sereen rssnnonnananomausonniri 159 Administrator Passwords sss 165 Alarm Event Causes ict entere Hee RE ERES 115 Alarm Acknowledge Event Effects sno negent reticere enia 122 Alarm Markers sissies 236 Alarm Marker Flash Colours 236 Alarm Messages 187 Alarm Relay Card Connections 38 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards 38 Channel Numbers eee 39 Alarm Digital IO Diagnostics 202 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Alarm Digital IO Menu Alarm Relay Card Digital IO Card ET Alarms Appendix D sss Alarms Men eee etre tcs Acknowledge Alarm Change Log Speed E Configure Alarms eee Deviation M Email Alarm High and Low Mark Chart oo Rate Up or Rate Down View Alarms Ala
14. Stable All TC s within soak and stability for less than 30 minutes if over 30 min utes will show Done Done A soak has been completed where all TC s have remained within tolerance for at least 30 minutes after stability Failed Indicates that stability was achieved for a setpoint but did not remain within the required limits for at least 30 minutes Max TC Shows the maximum temperature reached for a soak period whilst in stability and the TC that made the measurement Min TC Shows the minimum temperature reached for a soak period whilst in stability and the TC that made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max TC Diff Shows the largest difference between the Maximum and Minimum TC s In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max TC SP Diff Shows the largest difference between the measured temperature and the setpoint and which TC made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Max Ramp Overshoot This will monitor the maximum overshoot entering soak before stability is achieved and which TC made the measurement In the case where more than one TC is at the same level the first TC to reach this level is displayed and recorded Ramp D
15. X Series amp GR Recorder Screen Designer Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Screen Designer is a separate software package that enables the user to design unique display lay outs for transfer to the recorder s screen Screen layouts can be created using a combination of indi cators such as Trending Charts Digital Panel Meters and Bargraphs Flexibility allows each type of indicator to have elements of its appearance changed to create an individual presentation The Screen Designer software package is compatible with all Minitrend GR and Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorders Layouts can be transferred on to single or multiple recorders of the same type which contributes to continuity and standardization of process data 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 279 Database Management Tool Database Management Tool this software application works with TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro to provide safe administration of data with tools to archive sort move copy and delete the data stored in local and remote databases The Database Management Tool software is supplied with TrendServer Pro Report Generation Tool AMS2750 PC software that uses a TUS data file generated by the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorder to generate a temperature uniformity survey report It produces a report that documents the uniformity performance of a furnace based on the AMS2750 specification AMS2750D is the specification that covers pyrome
16. 3 A box will appear and prompt you to enter a User name enter Admin This is the first time user login Access to the first time login is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset No password is required for first time login No password is required for first time login 4 From the Main menu press the following buttons Configure Passwords User Admin Add User Select Blank User and type in your new administrator user name Default User name minimum length is 4 characters Allows the use of alpha symbol and numeric characters no spaces Default User name maximum length is 20 characters 5 In the Add User menu your new user name will be displayed select this default Opera tor and change the User Level to Administrator Select Finish and Commit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 6 A box will appear when you have successfully added a user press OK 7 The recorder will return to the process screen You have now added an Administrator User Level to the password system You must now give the new user a password Administrator Password 1 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here 85 2 A box will appear and you will be prompted for your Administrator user name which you have just created in items 1 to 7 listed above 3 The Password dial
17. Logging Configuration Port Number Database Configuration Connected Database Servers Channels available to be logged Pen 1 Temp Pen 2 Pen 3 Pen 4 Pen 5 lt Summary of all changes Device ID Number Database Currently Logging To Initial Database Add All Channels This example of the logging configuration box was produced by right clicking on a specific recorder Some of the areas have been auto populated 1 Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Con figure Logging from the resulting menu 2 Right click on Communication Ports in the left window and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 3 Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 4 Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box If this screen is selected from either a comms port or a device then the comms port information will already be inserted If the screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will need to be assigned Select the device ID number if necessary from the drop down menu The next section is Database Configuration a list of connected database servers and a list of databases that are currently being logged to In this section is a window showing the channels available to be logged As channels are selected fr
18. This button produces another button bar for quick access to Batch Controls Batch Detail Mark on Chart or Message details The number displayed is the number of new messages that have been registered since the menu was last checked Select this to produce another button bar with access to Batches Shortcut to enter details to start a new batch or to control a batch that has already been started See Batch Setup Batch Groups on page 180 Detail Gives detail of the current batch status for all batches running If you are displaying a screen that has been set up specifically to show a batch then the details will be just for that batch Mark on Chart Select the Mark button to enter a Mark on Chart Embedded process val ues can be entered which will display pen information on the marker See Embedded Process Values on page 119 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Message Detail Press this button for quick access to the Messages screen where each message is put into a category or All Messages can be viewed See Messages Menu on page 187 Exit To return to the process screen Screen The Screen button produces the Screen menu bar Figure 6 2 Screen Menu bar Press to print or Select to check or change Previous and Next buttons save the current the screen properties and scroll back and forth through process screen set Layout Settings the screen list e i d Prin Edit Replay List Prey Next Exit Histo
19. 1 Use the database icon with a sign in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on Database Servers in the top left window Connect to a Database Server 1 Select Database Servers in the left window and then right click on the server to be connected in the servers list in the main window 2 Connect to database server dialog box will appear enter an IP address and a descrip tion to identify the database server Delete a Database Server 1 Right click on the database server to be removed and select the delete option 2 A dialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted If this is correct click on OK All database servers can be removed except for the Local Server Add a Device There are three ways to add a device they all deliver the same dialog box 1 Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window COM1 to COM8 or Ethernet and select Add Device from the resulting menu 3 Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add Device from the resulting menu Add a Device via Ethernet Double click the ethernet icon in the left column This will activate ethernet the red cross will change to a tick Now the recorder must be added To do this click the add new device button The first in the row of three This will bring up the Device Details box All these m
20. Any damage caused to the recorder or the contents should be reported immediately to your shipper Unpacking Remove the contents check the packaging and remove all documentation and accessories supplied Retain the box and any packaging for future transportation Contents Check that the contents and accessories are correct against the order or Model Selection Guide using the model number on the recorder Contact your authorised Honeywell dis tributor or Honeywell immediately should there be any query The contents are based on Unit Model Number ordered and will vary from unit to unit The following list is provided as a general guide and not specific to any single unit Recorder specification as ordered check against the Model Selection Guide Mounting fixings Mounting clamps and panel gasket Connector kit mating half connectors to recorder spec Including a CJC connector for Thermocouple operation Quick Start Guide to get you started First time Password system instructions for ESS recorders only CD Viewer software documentation Plastic stylus x 2 for use with the touch screen Manual optional Hard copy English French or German Any other items ordered as an option Model Selection Guide Re packing NOTICE Should the original packing be destroyed or lost new packaging can be ordered or as a last alternative then ONLY pack the recorder in polystyrene granules if the recorder is FIRST sea
21. Build Number 25 Beta Production Bridge Firmware Platform Boot Loader Mac address 00 d0 6e IP Address 160 221 Front USB Host Mode Internal Mem Id This number is made up from the size of the memory card and what type of format it is Eg 256T16 256MB size formatted to TFAT16 Database Size Mb SD Card MB MB USB 1 MB MB USB2 Empty Password Node Type Standalone 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 195 196 Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media See Database Size Management on page 261 Options Main Menu Status System Options Displays a list of firmware options available and which ones are enabled For more information see See Section 7 Firmware Options on page 241 Table 4 12 Options Credits Enabled Full Math 4 V o X Scripting Full Maths Note 2 6 Y o X Events 6 Y or X Fast Scan Note 2 5 Y or X Totals 4 Y or X Custom Screens Note 2 4 Y or X Reports 3 Y or X AMS2750 Process Note 3 5 Y or X Maintenance 2 Y or X Printing 2 Y or X AMS2750 TUS Note 3 10 Y or X Batch 5 Y or X Counters 3 Y or X Modbus Master 10 Y or X Remote View 3 Y or X Email 3 Y o X Pwd Net Sync 5 Y or X Secure Comms 3 Y or X Extra Pens 2 4 pens Total
22. NS mryo 05 p c 14 History screen in replay 228 History MA ad 09 40 06 Nee 1 N N 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Cursor On the right hand side of the replay screen DPMs can display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Note You can do replay on Bar Charts and Digital Panel Meter process screens and this will jump into a trend replay screen with the DPM s showing the Min Max values When using Custom Screens you can only replay 8 pens on the Minitrend GR and DR Graphic and 18 pens on the Multitrend GR recorder even though you can have more pens than this on the custom screen Custom Screens are not available on the eZtrend GR Single Cursor Dual Cursors 39300 10 40 00 X07 10 42 00 Jan 06 10 Jan 06 x 10 Ja 06 936 4 1e 04 96 5 8e 01 96 444 14 21 07 80 28 Apr 07 h 36 49 82 36 74 09 36 100 00 RA B8J In Out Cursor Speed Exit 10 Jan 06 y 522 Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Speed Exit Replay toolbar Switch between the Cursor moving on the chart or the Chart scrolling behind the cursor amp Tl jm A Print Single Dual Jump Exit The Action button produces the Action toolbar The Dual button will change the icons on the replay tool bar to enable you to swap between cursors and or link them together Re
23. channels that can be set outputs Digtal 1 04 x D4 Input gt P Each channel displays Digital 1 0 5 DS Output Relay 24V gt its individual settings Digital I O 6 D Output Relay 24V gt M channel to edit the con E e figuration of each input 20 kl 2 For all cards select an Alarm Digital to display the configuration menu Each Alarm Digital has a list of menu items to be configured Select a numbered Enabled Toggle On and Off Digital Type Set to Output Relay contact Power for the Alarm Relay cards Toggle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital IO card On the 4 Relay Alarm card only output type is available Channels 1 to 6 on the 8 Alarm Relay card are out puts channels 7 amp 8 can be either inputs or outputs Note Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G 17 to 20 for slot H and 33 to 36 for slot l Output Output only The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or Single Pulse A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state unless acknowledged For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state remains If the output is set to Single Pulse when the alarm is activated the signal will display a single pulse for the duration
24. 1 Transaction 1 Register 1 to Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 10 Enabled he m Friendly Name Slave Device 1 Comms 5 ODBUS Y master savel d Enabled ID Direction In Command Coil Status 1 wein ef ee lisi am No Of Items 10 SC 1 1 10 Each Master device can have up to 32 slaves and each slave can perform up to 8 transactions g Slave ili RS 485 Protocol Modbus Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Slave Device Port Select this for a list of availible ports either Ethernet or RS485 ports For port configuration see Ports on page 96 Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use the Ethernet or RS485 ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device If you are using the Communication Server on TrendServer Pro the same Slave ID number must be entered 1 254 RS485 Baud Rate Select this for a
25. 4 20mA 4 Analogue Output channels Ana Out12 X A012 Pen No 1 4 20mA Pach chalne displays Ha individual settings Select a numbered channel to edit the configuration of each output m ec Jm id Press the Analogue Out button to display all the analogue outputs available Click on indi vidual Analogue Out number to set up each channel profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Allow Overrange Toggle On and Off Disabled as default this will allow the output sig nal to go overrange to 21mA if disabled the maximum is 20mA Transmit Pen Eg Select a pen to output 4 20 mA loop This will take the scale value from the pen it is transmitting and convert to 4 20mA output signal eg if the scale is 0 50 this signal will fit the scale so 4mA 096 and 20mA 50 For 0 20mA output sig nal with the same 0 50 scale this would read 0mA 0 and 20mA 50 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Output Select either 4 20mA or 0 20mA Label Select and enter an identification label Select and use the on screen keyboard Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Alarm Digital lO Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Alarm Digital IO The Alarm Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs outputs available Click on each individual Alarm IO or Digital IO numbe
26. Click on the sign to activate expand Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers Listed under each Server are the Databases Listed under each Database are the devices gh This is the Database Server icon tl This is the Database icon The bottom window has three actions Client connections Database logging and Diag nostics When a device is selected from the top window details of the device s activity is displayed here A device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server Realtime data will display in the Client connections tab The Diagnostics tab can be activat ed by going to Administration Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box this will display properties and vales of a selected device Database Size Management Although there is no fixed maximum size for a Honeywell Trendview recorder database we recommend that they be limited to some practical limit rather than just letting it increase in size unchecked Large databases will impact the performance of your PC the larger the database the slower the performance of your PC will be eventually the PC would stop as the hard drive is filled up Another concern should be the protection of your database and archiving of the data in the event of a hard drive failure Larger databases increase the time and effort required to back up the data and increase the
27. Four Relay output card 8 Relay 2 Digital Inputs card 6 fixed Outputs 2 Configurable DI DO 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 8 Configurable Digital Inputs Discrete 24V Output card 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 43 44 Electrical Installation USB Devices Print Support USB 2 0 Print Support is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system refer to the Options item in Credits on page 131 Not all printers will be compatible with the print support feature on the recorder The guide lines are they must be a USB printer that shows as a standard PCL3 Printer Command Lan guage The system will not support multi function devices or printers that require specific drivers Avoid photo printers and printers that allow stand alone operation with cameras or media specific printers such as pictbridge There isn t a constant factor to which printers work and those that wont We recommend that you follow the guidelines outlined here and plug it in and see To set up your printer configuration go to Printer Menu on page 141 Keyboards All keyboards are native USB 2 0 keyboards English and US keyboards are recognised as US layout QWERTY for all languages except French and German keyboard layouts French and German keyboards are activated when the recorder is set to that language There is no keyboard support for Asian languages Chinese simplified Japanese or Kore an USB Keys USB 2 0 Please t
28. Input Channel Average Cancel m x BETTE a e m Channel Mapping Objects To select an object activate the Expert button on the Screen menu bar Objects have blue grab handles around the edge Select Map from the Screen bar to display the Setup information as described in Channel Mapping Setup screen on page 177 If the object is an Alarm Marker the data will always be from Alarm for Pen Select the Pen number and the alarm number to be shown Pen Pointers just need to be mapped to a Pen 178 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Parent Pens This does not apply to charts as charts normally have more than one pen displayed The parent channel is the initial channel to be configured on a widget All objects added to a wid get except charts and pen pointers automatically default to using the parent channel The parent itself allows the user to quickly make all of their objects update to use the pen number indicated by the parent Replay Main Menu gt Screen gt Replay The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay mode The Replay screen con sists of a chart and DPMs The chart is vertical or horizontal depending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen If any Hot Buttons have been configured to Enter Replay Screen then when
29. Jump Select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen See Heplay on page 228 If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available Save Save the message screen to removable media Clear This will delete all the messages for the particular message screen you are in Print Select this and choose to print All the Messages in the list or the Current page that will fill an A4 or Letter size page Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or website for a list of possible error messages 188 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Message Format Table 4 10 Message Types Icon Type Description Alarm Red Bell in Alarm and not acknowledged Alarm Green Bell out of alarm Green Bell Black outline 2 out of alarm and Alarm acknowledged Alarm Green Yellow bell out Alarm not acknowledged Alarm Red Green bell in Alarm and acknowledged System Diagnostics Information General eg System check System Diagnostics Warning eg media error FTP failure Timeouts System Diagnostics Error eg Password failure power failure no media E vV O 0 gt O gt Ep Dpp p Security Security audit trail Security Log In open padlock S
30. NNM90 58 to 698 50 to 370 2 0 1 1 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 698 to 2570 370 to 1410 1 4 0 8 0 72 0 4 N Nicosil Nisil 328 to 212 200 to 100 5 8 3 2 0 01 C 5 8 3 2 212 to 2372 100 to 1300 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 Chromel Copel 58 to 1112 50 to 600 1 1 0 6 0 01 C 0 54 0 3 P Platinel 32 to 2534 0 to 1390 2 5 1 4 0 01 C 1 4 0 78 D 32 to 356 0 to 180 6 3 3 5 0 01 C 6 3 3 5 356 to 3344 180 to 1840 4 2 2 4 2 2 3344 to 4515 1840 to 2490 11 7 6 5 11 7 6 5 312 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Input Actuation Range Accuracy Temp Stability PT100 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT200 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT500 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT1000 o 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 121 0 6 0 01 C 100 ohm Nickel 76 to 356 60 to 180 0 9 0 5 0 01 C 120 ohm Nickel 112 to 500 80 to 260 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Cu10 328 to 500 200 to 260 5 5 g 0 01 C Cu53 32 to 302 0 to 150 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Reference Temperature 22 C Reference Humidity 65 RH 15 Reference Sample Rate 2Hz 500msec Long term stability 0 2 year Does not includes reference junction calibration of 1 0 C using the standard ice bath method of calibration Factory accuracy can be im proved by performing a field calibration Also does not include any error
31. OK to reset the data or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Reset All This will remove the current setup current layouts and chart and log data from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset All Warning box will appear with a message This will reset all data including setups layouts and chart and log data This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Are you sure you wish to continue Select OK to Reset All or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Localisation Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings including Language Select native language menu prompts from list For French and German the corresponding keyboard layout will be selected Help Language Select native language for Help Files currently English only availa ble Time Zone Select the corresponding time zone from the drop down list Daylight Saving Toggle On or Off to activate daylight saving if applicable When the time zone is selected and daylight saving is active the recorder will change the daylight saving hour automatically The date this occurs depends on the time zone selected Some time zones do not have daylight saving Data being recorded will be affected either with a 1 hour gap of data or a 1 hour overlap of data Temp Units Select the Tempera
32. Program when next survey and calibration is due Any recorder type can run separate on side of the oven as part of the process instru ments Note Instrumentation and Instrumentation Calibration refer to AMS2750 sections 3 2 3 3 and Ta ble 3 Note It is recommended that the recorders be used with the rear cover in place when using them for recording data for AMS2750 applications or any thermocouple measurement to minimize the ambient effects on the cold junction compensation measurement High Limit Control TIC TIC TIC TIC Vacuum Hot Cold Gauge Control Output to Heating Element 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 377 AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Process mode 378 AMS2750 process is used when the recorder is attached to the process in the role of a re cording device All Multitrend GR Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic re corders can operate in the Process mode and can be used as a process recorder to monitor process timers for calibration due dates and thermocouple usage set by the user Process mode adds some new status screens and timers to the recorder to help with AMS2750 compliance of the process giving a countdown to SAT and TUS intervals as well as control TC and instrument calibration The standard GR Series recorders are capable of performing this task by enabling the appropriate number of credits in the Credits Option This additional functionality provides you with an easier to use more c
33. Screen Batch to enter the batch details If Allow Direct Access has been setup in the Batch Menu on page 138 then a Barcode Reader can be used to make entries for all the items listed in this menu See Barcodes for Batch on page 183 Note For batch mode state and count in Maths scripts see Maths Variable and Func tion Tables on page 322 For batch mode state and count in embedded variables see Embedded examples on page 120 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 4 5 Batch Setup screens using Batch Wizard D Wi o tee or rne opm un Mame Quo Moro oes dienen Enter Batch Name Batch 017 Name Batch 017 Mast User ID 017 Lot No Lot 1 Desc Start Batch 17 Enter Additonal Comments optional am Je Figure 4 6 Batch Setup screens using Single Screen Batch bate 017 User ID i start batch 017 m Comment test m Press the Finish button if all the Batch details are correct and you wish to start the batch immediately Use the Back button to return to the Batch setup and not start the batch 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 181 0001 Turbine 1 1n d9mn nc 18 Jah 6 18 Jab 06 18 Tah 06 67 When a Batch is in E progress the icon changes on the batch screens that are running a batch group tart Batch Mark on Chart Batch Mark on Chart A Batch marker will be placed on all process screens that have a chart displayed The next time you pr
34. Specification for Sterilisation The definition Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250 F 121 11 C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different processes however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temperature is not specified for exam ple F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C See Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation on page 349 Displaying Totals Totals can be displayed by setting up a separate pen to display the totalised value Totals are best displayed in a DPM screen If you use a separate pen to display a total be aware that if the total is stopped the pause symbol will not appear as it does for a totaliser pen First select a pen you are going to use to display the total of another pen Extra pens are available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 131 For this example this will be Pen 4 To Start Stop Reset and View totals see Totals on page 190 In the pens menu for the totalising pen Pen 4 select Edit Maths and enter T followed by the pen numbe
35. Temp Units Time Zone Log On Off Logging A Event Effects Look up Tables M Main Menu Alarms Menu een Batch Commands mm Batch Mark on Chart Batch Setup Control is COME SULE Linien tereti een Layout iussionem RS Messages Menu nn Passwords ene Process Menu eee Recording Menu Screen Menu eee Setup Menu Status Menu sese Main Menu Access Maintenance Back gli coi dett eret eret dues Calibration c Cleaning iso huna a AA Operating Temperature Touch Screen sss Maintenance Status E Map button rrr Mark Chart Alarms Mark on Chart Event Effects ee Maths Credit Options acidi eventa Maths Error Messages Maths Expressions ied duene ane Full Maths e T Full Maths amp Script Processing Maths Variable and Function Tables Script Function Application Examples Maths Variable and Function Tables 322 Max Mins Reset Event Causes 115 Max Mins Reset Event Effects 124 Max Min Reset tees 190 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation sss 8 DirmiensiODS eiit sa i rerit Installation Instructions Mounting and Viewing Angles 8 Panel Mounting eerte 13 Panel Mounting Clamp Installation
36. The 4 methods of cold junction compensation are described below All diagrams show passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 337 Thermocouple CJC Compensation Thermocouple CJC Compensation The different methods for connecting thermocouples according to the type of reference are shown below Internal Automatic Input terminals on rear panel of Measuring recorder junction lt oe aes a converts i M C D voltage read ing to tem C perature Thermocouple CJC Reading ode in volts i gt Thermocouple Temperature Reading Table readirid do in C maths expression Internal Auto This is connected to the input terminals of the recorder and the temperature atthis junction is being measured by a temperature sensor on the rear panel of the recorder The reading from this sensor is read off against a value taken from the thermocouple table which corresponds to the type of thermocouple being used The corresponding reading in volts for the temperature measured by the sensor is then used as a reference for the reading from the thermocouple Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 338 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Thermocouple CJC Compensation Ext 0 C Reference Thermocouple Copper wire cable Look up ta
37. This should be something recognisable all recorders should be given different names Press OK On pressing OK then Done you will return to the External Import dialog box as above Check that Setup only and from Network FTP are still selected Then drop down the list and select the recorder you have just added The recorder name and IP address are in the list Finally select Import TrendServer Pro will download the setup from the recorder and this will be displayed in a setup window Press OK and this recorder setup will be added to the recorder list Note The recorder will be added to the list under the Recorder Name as set in the re corder itself This is the name that appears in the top right corner of the recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK screen when in normal logging mode NOT the name you gave the recorder when set ting up the FTP If you select the Recorder button on TrendServer Pro this will show a list of all recorders currently logged with a setup The recorder just added will be the last one on the list This name will be used to set up the Modbus Profile in Comms Server for the recorder Recorders IE INE Importing Data via FTP Select type of import as Data this is the same as for Importing from a directory except that when im porting data via FTP you will have a choice of New data or all data The All function will import all the data in the recorder s memory to the externa
38. communications port and Modbus RTU master and slave mode via an RS485 port Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic only USB ports allow the use of an ASCII barcode reader Email sent to your network connected PC triggered by an Alarm or an Event Independent Display Chart Speeds and Logging rates logging rates can be pro grammed completely separate from the chart display speed allowing the data to be dis played and stored at the rates that best suit the application Language Support standard language prompts for English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovak Czech Turkish Romanian Russian Greek Portuguese Chinese Jananese Korean and Bulgarian Also Asian languages including Chinese simplified Japanese and Korean options Logarithmic Scales all displayed scales can be set as linear or logarithmic max 99 decades Enclosure rating Standard NEMA 3R IP55 for Multitrend GR recorder NEMA3 IP55 for Minitrend GR DR Graphic recorders and eZtrend GR recorders NEMA 4X IP66 available as an option Fuzzy Logging this standard feature provides a unique method to increase the storage capacity of the recorder The data is monitored to determine changes in process data if no changes are observed data is logged periodically If data is changing rapidly it is recorded normally at the programmed rate By not logging data that is static data compression of up to 100 1
39. d3uni a3o08d 43H LO ubis jeaoiddy uequinN SuieN 1eauiDu3 yool aunpaooid LVS DuipesaM iueunusu JOjE2IDUI 159 JOS Bulpesy jueunjsu uoneoipul Josuas i581 EN ie3rssed E MED Nee ise pepenooun epiooejjelonuoo uoneuuoju juseuie2e d ejdnooouueu L eunjeuBis eAnejuesajdes Auedwos uoneuqiiea LYS aanejueseiday Auedwos uoneqies LYS asnoy ul euop 30u jj aweN Auedwos uoneiqies LYS ssvio c ueAQ SJUSLUILUOD jeuonippv Vd uojbuiuseA 14 uone2o eoutJe ol jainpejnuejy usAO Dig Jammaeynueyy Josuas jo1uo2 S338UIj qgi awen ueAO AMS2750 Report Generation Tool SAT Report example Bo11sa oeiunooy wajs g 427 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 428 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool TUS Report Wizard When you select TUS Report menu option the wizard will be started This will help creation of the TUS Report Appropriate fields such as Instrument Info Site Info and Furnace layout image are pre pop ulated with previously entered furnace information if the furnace ID of the currently loaded TUS data file is found to match a previously stored furnace ID Where no stored information is found the relevant fields will be left as default usually blank Step 1 Select TUS file TUS File Location Enter the TUS file location file path or use the browse button to locate the TUS file required to create a TUS report The file extension for the data file is tus The Next button will validate
40. gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Stability Detect During the TUS the recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability all sensors must re main stable for a minimum of 2 minutes in order to progress to in soak in stability mode no TC s can drift by more than X degrees within a 2 minute period for stability to be achieved X defaults to 0 5 Deg C See During survey on page 410 This time is determined by how you set up the stability parameters whether you base it on time or the degree temperature variation The tolerance hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user this defines how stability is determined in the soak Stability detect is measured in 3 ways 1 Timeout see below 2 Automated detection see below 3 Manual stability the user can determine when stability has been achieved and can use the manual override button on the TUS screen to register stability Edit Setup I O AMS2750 AMS2750 Timer Enable v Time 10 Mins T grt ET T Auto Enable Degree Change 0 5 Deg C Timer Enable Default is off Check this to enable the Stability Detect Timer Time default 10 mins Timer based stability the system will be deemed stable after the defined period of time that all TC s remain within tolerance from the point at which they all enter the soak band Auto Enable Default is off Automatic stabili
41. in stability mode If any sensor falls outside of the soak tolerance then the recorder falls back to an out of soak mode The time between the first and last sensors entering soak is recorded TC Stabilized A manual override of in stability can be performed The T C s Stabilized button can be pressed if the trend graph shows all requirements are within the defined limits to start this stability run This button is not active until the stability conditions have actually been met but once they are achieved it allows you to start the uniformity test rather than waiting for the pre defined conditions to be met 412 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Restart Soak The setpoint run can be restarted if required Under certain conditions the AMS2750 spec allows bad T C s to be removed from the survey and Restart Soak button provides the abil ity to do that These conditions are defined within the AMS2750 spec and depends on the quantities of T C s that are in the survey and their relative positions Stable in soak mode Stable Yellow the actual period that the survey data is being collected gt ia 0001 Multtrend SX 29 Aug 08 15 45 48 Menu 17h 133 RA Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 Model No QW 234 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 24m 39s Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running pred Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff
42. latched not acknowledged Grey Out of Alarm Pen Pointers Pen Pointers appear on a scale next to a chart when no bars are present They move to dis play the real time value Each pen pointer is numbered according to its associated pen and will flash yellow when that pen goes into an alarm state Pen pointers will change direction and point up or down when a pen signal goes off scale 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mark on Chart There are two different types of Mark on Chart automated or user An automated Mark on Chart can be set up for An Alarm going in and out of an alarm state Start Stop or Reset Totals Batch control such as Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Generated by an effect of an Event A user Mark on Chart is activated by first selecting a process screen that is displaying a chart Go to the Messages List button on the Main Menu bar and select Mark A text box will appear enter the message you wish to be displayed as a mark on chart on the screen using the on screen keyboard or a USB keyboard Pen out of alarm Batch stopped Pen into alarm Totals started User Ta Figure 6 5 Mark on Chart 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 237 238 Screen Markers Table 6 2 Screen Markers on page 238 shows different types of markers that may appear on the screen during normal data activity and where they would appear The markers change depending on if the signal goes H
43. messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device Comms Server must the same number must match Recorder Name This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the recorder or found in Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Ident gt Name The entered name will be used within comms server to reference the recorder Serial Number This is a read only box displaying the serial number for devices already on the network This will display as Not Available when adding a new device Status This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become active This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen Socket This number should not need to be changed only by advanced users for network ing When every thing has been entered use the Test button to make sure that everything is set up correctly The Test Profile button enables the Add Device settings to be validated It can be used to determine whether the recorder is configured for Modbus or Modbus X Because we are using Modbus X the Modbus X column gives correct readings the Modbus column returns wrong readings Vice versa if using Modbus If the column shows the correct reading the recorder must be communicating correctly 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server Press Done Test modbus devic
44. recording Export Required In XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours minutes and seconds left until the internal memory buffer starts to be over written Exporting does not remove the data from the recorder but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 322 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Schedule Displays the frequency of a scheduled export only if a scheduled export has been set up see Edit Recording on page 148 Media Full In Displays how long before the external media selected for the scheduled export is full FTP Export required XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours min utes and seconds of safe recording time available An FTP export must be completed before the FTP buffer is full and the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 322 Pre Trigger Status This will show if the pre trigger system is active along with its cur rent state The dialog automatically refreshes periodically Export Now Export Now will transfer data from the internal memory to the external media such as SD cards USB key or Network Share NAS Exporting does not remove the data from the re cor
45. then Number of Addresses 2 but if Byte Count 5 Number of Addresses 3 As an example to send the 5 character message Start to a slave address 02 the com plete message would be Start Start No No agave mon addr Addr Addr Addr 53 e Data crc CRC High Low High Lo 02 10 00 04 00 03 05 53 74 61 72 74 CRC CRC The response follows the normal response for function code 16 given in section 3 7 and so to the above message the response would be 02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC Analogue Input Value Analogue readings in engineering units 4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Communications Input Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block using command 16 up to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block these values can be displayed on the pens i e P1 CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function code 16 Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Pen Values Pen values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Figure 22 1 Comms variables Comms variable to be used in Maths block PT EC CV1 CV32 m d CV33 CV96 So ECV1 9 2400 is a different modbus comms regi
46. this will be prompted when Next is se lected 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 429 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 3 Recorder Certificate Information This refers to the recorder calibration certificate Please enter Calibration Certificate number of the test recorder used to complete the TUS Enter Certificate Expiry Date MM DD YYY enter the expiry date of the Recorder Cali bration Certificate If the survey date is past the certificate expiry date a warning box will be prompted when Next is selected The message says Certificate Expiry date is past the survey date would you like to continue The generated report shall also highlight the expired date TUS Report Wizard Recorder Certificate Information Please enter the Calibration Certificate number of the test recorder used to complete the TUS Enter Certificate Expiry Date MM DD YYYY 430 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 4 Furnace Instruments Instruments 1 to 5 There are five instrument information boxes available associated with the furnace TUS All the screens are the same as shown here Enter the Furnace instrument information including the instrumentation associated with the furnace such as the Temperature controller Recorder etc TUS Report Wizard Thermal Processing Equipment Instruments Instrument 1 Please enter the details for the control measuring and recording instrumentation of
47. ues can be altered to effect calculations without having to change the configuration SD Card is available on the eZtrend GR as a credit option See Figure 22 1 Comms variables on page 361 Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 as Slave Comms Variable Slave No Transaction 1 Item 1 Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Add Returns the result of the addition ACos acos x Returns the Arc COS of x ASin asin x Returns the Arc SIN of x ATan atan x Returns the Arc TAN of x Ceiling ceil x Round up x to the nearest whole number Clear Event CLRE x Where x is the event number to be cleared 1 to 20 Cos cos x Returns the COSINE of x CosH cosh x Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x Damp damp x y z x input y Pen pen variable being used and z damping limit in engineering units See Damping examples on page 326 Divide Returns the result of the division Eval eval x Returns 1 if x is non zero otherwise returns zero Exponent exp x Returns the Exponential of x 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Floating Point Absolute fabs x Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x Floor floor x Round down x to the nearest whole number Get Screen Number GETS x returns the c
48. when a survey is running you cannot enter setup The user will have to complete or abort the TUS to enter configuration mode You can press the start button this will return to the process screen and start the TUS mon itoring When the TUS is started an event will be triggered identifying this and a message will be logged into the system events Warning messages may appear if a previous TUS file has not been exported Only one TUS file is saved in the memory Events can be set up to Start or Stop a TUS See Events AMS2750 on page 416 During survey Once a survey has been started the TUS process screen will be set to the Running condi tion Each soak is allocated a separate status line with all soaks being shown in this fixed format The system will detect when all relevant TC s are within the acceptable soak limits and will populate the information in the line of the relevant soak The TC s Stabilized button will only be enabled available when a soak has all TC s within the soak and acceptable tolerance pressing the button will override the stability detection and put the current soak from soak mode to stable mode The Configure TUS and Export TUS button will be disabled whilst a TUS is running Survey status Once a TUS is started the recorder moves between three operating modes this helps auto mate the process and provide feedback as to how the survey is performing 1 See Detect mode o
49. z V Enable Protected Mode requires restarting Internet Explorer Resetto uedium high default Default level A NOTICE Please ensure any firewall settings on the desktop are permissive of the Comms Server Trend Server and that ports set up in the configuration default 8955 TCP and 8956 UDP are allowed passage through the firewall 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 9 PC Software Suite The TrendManager Pro Software Suite The TrendManager Pro Software Suite complements the capabilities of the GR Series recorders by providing the benefits of viewing configuration network communications database man agement data analysis and report generation using a personal computer It ties the process together providing for real time or FTP communications with the recorders through a Local Area Network LAN TrendViewer This is the standard software provided with the recorder that displays and prints data imported from the storage media used by the recorder TrendManager Pro This is an advanced data analysis archiving software package providing full configuration of the re corders TrendManager Pro is a stand alone package that delivers to the user total recorder con figuration allowing the user to archive graph print and export data It also allows files to be exported using comma separated variables CSV format that can be imported into most computer software TrendServer Pro This is a fully n
50. 1 is to the right from the rear of the unit 24V DC Instrument Power Input O ON O 24V DC instrument power is available on all GR Series re corders as an option It is connected using 3 way connector mating half is supplied Diagram shows a view looking from the GND rear of the unit RS485 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorders Lod The RS485 port is fitted as standard as a part of the processor card O OO and uses a 3 way connection After connection select the RS485 port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from A B GND the Protocol menu eg Modbus Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the unit See Comms Services Menu on page 101 SPNC Relay Minitrend GR Multitrend GR recorders Single Pole Normally Closed 2 way connector This is a fail safe relay which means if the power goes off the relay closes and can be set to trigger an alarm So should the power fail the relay is in a fail safe condition Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the unit Either pins can be Common or Normally closed O Om NOTE Once the recorder is powered up if there are no active alarms associated with the Fixed Relay the contacts will open When the alarm is on they will close eZtrend GR Expansion Card This is an interface card that is required when fitting the following option cards Analogue Input card in Slot B up to 6 channels
51. 109 Peers Sets up the recorder to be identified on a network Peer to Peer See Peers on page 110 Standard Communication Interfaces Rear Ethernet Communication Port The rear of the recorder is fitted with an Ethernet10 100 port and RS485 except for the DR Graphic recorder which has these communication ports inside the recorder housing which supports RS485 Modbus protocol and TCP IP Modbus Web Browser See Web on page 106 Rear RS485 Port Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder RS485 2 wire to support Modbus RTU 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 101 102 The RS485 connector plugs into the back of the recorder Recorders can be setup as either Master or Slave devices See Modbus Master Communications on page 103 Front and Rear USB Communication Ports The front and rear of the Minitrend GR and Multitrend GR recorders are fitted with a USB communication port The eZtrend GR recorder has a USB port at the front as standard 2 USB ports for the DR Graphic are extended inside the case to a dual panel mount re ceptor above the power supply USB peripherals wires can be connected on the panel mount connector inside the case The USB Host ports will provide an interface for Save and Load Data Save and Load Setups External keyboard amp mouse Barcode reader Mass storage device USB key Local printer 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Modbus Main Menu gt Configure
52. 13 Panel cut out size sss 8 Media Config d M 137 Media Diagnostics 205 Memory Maps and Function Codes 355 Menu Bar Screen Menu Path Message Format Message List 1e eet b tiri treten Dind M Message Types T Alarms Al enea Diagnostics Security System USE tee A A MERERI Message list printing 188 Messages Menu Alarm Messages All Messages Diagnostics Messages Message Types Messages Format Messages List Security Messages System Messages User Messages eet eie merat des Messages Screen printing sss 187 Minitrend OX Rear Connections 59 Minitrend OX Standard Screens 57 Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case 284 294 Modbus Susubxd suani avast divx adhue 103 Modbus Capabilities sss 275 Modbus Function Codes 362 Modbus Status s 204 Modbus profile tool data update 265 Modbus Comms ees 246 Mounting Clamp Diagram for 45mm panel oH ir MR MR 17 Mounting and Viewing Angles 8 Multi Point Cal ss 352 Multitrend SX Portable Case 290 Multitrend SX Rear Connections 61 Multitrend SX Standard Screens OVGIVIEW 56 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK NAS EXDOFUNOW tentem ur tethtedi ai 185 Save or Loa
53. 19 characters Alpha numeric Class Enter the Furnace class 1 to 6 numeric Mat Type Enter the type of material or load Parts or Raw material furnace Instrument Type A to E Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 1 Into cycle at used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses When the furnace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set in the menu below this is a complete temperature cycle Eg Into cycle is set to 110 can go higher in use once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg Out of cycle is set to 90 the cycle is complete Out of cycle at Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle When all the furnace details are complete select Finish and Commit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 385 386 AMS2750 Process mode Sensors Button Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt O AMS2750 This button produces the Sensor Configuration Menus Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O Sensors Refer to AMS2750 section 3 1 and Table 1 and table 2 for Thermocouple information NOTE As per AMS2750 Standard the Noble metals T C s R S amp B do not require tracking of the number of uses but do require Tracking Calibration see page 388 The Track Usage will not be available in the menu for these types of T Cs The number of sensors available depends on the hardware fitted in the re
54. 20 n G go gc aaa aaa aaajja aa aaaaaaauauszau m 24V LED OV Figure 2 16 Transmitter Power Supply card for the Multitrend GR recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 37 38 Electrical Installation Alarm Relay Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards The Alarm Relay Cards and the Digital Input Output Cards are both options available for the Minitrend GR Multitrend GR eZtrend GR and the DR Graphic recorders To fit these option cards into the eZtrend GR recorder it requires an expansion card to in terface to the recorder All Alarm Relay card outputs provide 240V AC isolation channel to channel and channel to recorder Digital Input Outputs will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage not for mains connection All digital inputs have volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max The Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and the DR Graphic recorders have only one slot avail able for digital inputs and relay outputs for either a 4 or 8 channel Alarm Relay card or an 8 or 16 channel Digital I O card fitted in slot G the position is identified on the rear panel The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend GR recorders The Multitrend GR can have up to three Alarm Relay cards fitted in any combination of Alarm Relay card or Digital I O cards The first Alarm Relay card or Digital I O card is fitted in slot G any additional cards will locate in positions H and I A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Digital Input
55. 2015 UK 225 226 Menu Bar At the top of each process screen is the Menu bar Recorder ID and Name alternates with the Screen Name gt 1 18h 78 scho 10 Jan 06 13 40 67 10 Jan 06 13 40 4 0001 Turbine 1 RISE Date and Time Menu This gives direct access to the Menu System to set up the recorder See Section 4 He corder Setup on page 63 Alarm bell 1 The second button shows the Alarm status When the alarm bell is green this means there are no active alarms If the bell is red then an alarm is active and the number of active alarms will display below Press this button to produce the Alarm menu bar Here there is an Acknowledge button to confirm any latched alarms that require acknowledgment See Alarms Menu on page 88 There is a View button that displays all pens currently with alarms set up The De tail button will take you straight to the Alarms menu see Alarms Menu on page 175 Time Left 18h This button shows how much time is left before data will fill the internal memory and an ex port of the memory to an external device is required before data is overwritten Select this button to go to the Recording screen to export the data now or set up a timed export using the Scheduled option See Recording Menu on page 184 If the Time Left button shows two green arrows this means that the memory rp buffer is full and the oldest data has started to be over written List 78
56. 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug08 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 Detect blue is when the TC s are coming up to temperature including any under or overshoot and begins to level out around the setpoint Soak unstable magenta begins when the first TC s are within the tolerance band and begin levelling out around the setpoint As soon as the first TC goes into soak the set point turns magenta Stable soak yellow is a minimum 30 minute test period of the stable TC s Check spec for stable soak time as it depends on size of oven and load and some ovens require longer stable soak duration It enters this stage based on the Stability criteria that was set up during the AMS2750 setup Done Red or Green the setpoint survey step has completed minimum of 30 min utes and recorder indicates whether that survey setpoint was successful or not stopped and not complete and Red when a TC has failed First column Number of the thermocouple Setpoint Tol The configured setpoint or soak level this is the level configured for each soak within the AMS2750 setup configuration Status This shows the current status of the soak and can be one of the following Blank A soak for the setpoint has not been started yet 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Detect The first stage starts when the temperature is ramping up towards the set point Soak All TC s have entered the soak level and are in tolerance but not yet stable
57. 247 recorders talking Modbus due to a requirement that the Comms Server must have a unique ID for each device in the network Additional Honeywell V5 recorders using the Trendbus protocol could be supported on the network as long as their device IDs remain unique With Modbus connection anywhere between 24 and 64 devices are supported at a rate of 1 reading per second again depending on the complexity of the device configurations As the rate is decreased the number of devices supported increases 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 275 Web Browser 5 The maximum number of pens supported at once per second for a given device is 32 Up to 64 pens supported at once every 5 seconds Then all 96 pens at once every 10 seconds for the Multitrend GR recorder The above specifications should be used as a guideline because factors such as network speed and reliability could impact performance Web Browser 276 The Web Browse function can be enabled disabled from the recorder This allows you to view the recorder information only The web button can be password protected if passwords are enabled See Web on page 106 This is a firmware option that first needs to be ac tivated in Options see Credits on page 131 The Remote Viewer is a firmware option that can be added to allow access to the recorder from a web page The Remote viewer op tion needs to be activated in the Firmware options screen see Credits on page 131 To access your reco
58. 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic can supply up to 200mA to external trasmitters Multitrend GR up to 1A 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 55 56 Functions and Features Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Standard Screens The Multitrend GR recorder has up to 32 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 4 examples below X00 M Trend 7376 2623 52 01 3260 72 44 55 44 51 67 1 20 3646 70 28 26 61 16 Digital Panel Meters Horizontal Chart 8 Vertical Bars amp 8 DPMS showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen 16 Horizontal Bars showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen 10 000 78 1041 Charts Menu Circular Chart and DPMs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Minitrend GR Standard Screens The Minitrend GR recorder has up to 20 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 F 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 40 4 Pen 1 81 26 en 1 en 2 en 3 a 4 3 30 396 1 400 396 3 200 96 3 000 95 Horizontal Chart 4 Vertical Bars and 4 DPMs 0001 Turbine 1 2 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 Pen 2 8 900 L Total 1 0 00 936 Total 2 0 000 L Total 3 0 000 Pen 5 Total 5 0 00 Pen 7
59. 27s sr Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual 400 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO TC2 445 3s 0 Mins Override 10 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 403 95F 600 00F TC0 TCO TCO TCO 0 0 Mins 10 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 1000 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins 10 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F NA NA Restart Soak 13 40 00 13 0 4 20 00 14 30 0 z 14 40 00 14 50 00 15 00 00 uen 415 000 23 Aug 08 2x 23 Aug 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug Max TC TC2 409 85 Haos A Min TC TCS 405 55 F 395 000 TC Diff 4 30 385 000 The recorder enters this mode when all sensors have been within the soak tolerance for a qualification period This is based on the survey setpoint and the defined class of the fur nace The recorder switches to the second survey phase defined as the Soak phase When this happens the recorder changes the trend graph from a full scale graph to a Zoomed in dis play The recorder begins to check for the time it takes before all the survey inputs are within the soak band The amount of overshoot if any and the time it took to reach this first survey setpoint The recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability all sensors must remain sta ble for 2 minutes in order to progress to in soak
60. 339 Thermocouple CJC Compensation External Input Reference Copper wire rr Normal signal processing T Input A terminals Temperature on rear reading to maths panel of Thermocouple CApIESSION recorder Table convert R T A ye temp to Volts C Reading in Volts PT100 lt V j D ladded __ converts C D voltage read ing to tem perature Inputs Volts Look up table Thermocouple Copper cable wire External Input Reference The reference temperature reading in this method is provided by a separate temperature measuring device connected to another input usually RT This input is processed in the normal way and then passed back into the thermocouple signal processing system as a temperature reading 340 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix D Alarms Alarms Menu Main Menu Alarms Acknowledge Configure and View alarms from this menu amp Main Menu wd Alarms a 7 ajag d iE po Configure Alarms Screen Ack Alarm Configure View Kd u E Batch Recording Messages 102 Process Status Finish Acknowledging Alarms User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only latched alarms can be acknowledged If a latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu then a latched relay will mainta
61. 389 TC Usage Tracking AMS2750 390 TCP IP tette umen DNS WINS MDNS IP Address eniin iere reete iei POTIS TUS Data file aossockditvctenme TUS Logged data TUS Mode AMS2750 sesssssssssesesesenonee 392 TUS Report Wizard oecennene tee 428 TUS Start Event Causes i acere hcec de redes 115 TUS Stop Event Causes o ee eio en eredi 115 TUS survey process screen 402 Tabular Display iasunnscsnsepturteppen int 146 Tabular Screen sssri 146 Technical Data amp Specifications 303 Analogue Output sse 303 Field IO E E E E EORR 303 Input Range Performance Accuracy Table 312 Pulse Input Card sees 303 Relay Alarm Digital Input 304 Specification Tables sss 307 lemp UNUS es 136 Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS 392 D ring a SurVey eene nette teens 410 Ending the Survey sse 416 Start a Survey Survey status Detect Mode 33i ero bem 411 Soak Mode 42 3 titre 412 Stable in soak Mode sss 413 LG Stabilized aei dts 412 Temperature overshoot esse 411 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS Logged data sess 418 Thermocouple Adjustment Factor Disable 174 Thermocouple Connections External Reference eee How Thermocouples work e Internal Reference Thermocouple CJC Compensation Thermocouple Conne
62. 4 4 DIO board could not be initialized suspect I O board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid mode sent to FlagintPulseChan Messages Arguments of the message 3 4 4 Illegal channel number requested in message Invalid channel Diagnostics were invalid number sent to SetAcqTimerFreq Messages Arguments of the message 4 4 4 Config change message can not change to raw mode acquisi Diagnostics were invalid tion Attempted to set raw mode via config change use SetRaw Messages Mode Arguments of the message 5 4 4 Active burnout was selected on a channel configured as a RT Diagnostics were invalid Attempted to set active burnout with RT input Messages 364 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code The message had an invalid N A N A The message sent to the I O does not match it s CRC Diagnostics CRC Messages The message was incom N A N A A incomplete message was detected by the I O card Diagnostics plete Messages The configuration operation N A N A General failure of an operation that queried or changed configu Diagnostics was not successful ration Messages Unable to determine N A N A Unable to determine the firmware revision number so some Diagnostics firmware version number functions may not operate correctly Messages Unable to determine N A N A Unable to determine the firmwa
63. 4 GLO May 2015 UK Pulse Inputs Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware gt Pulse Inputs Not available for the eZtrend GR Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B C D E or F the Pulse Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Frequency Count Displays the input mode fixed as Frequency in Hertz Input Displays the current Pulse Input reading for this channel in Hertz Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Events Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Events iz Event Events Event 2 Event 27 C1 Alarms Into Alarm P2 Alarm s 1 E1 Display Alert Alert Pen 2 30 Event 3 Event 3 gt C1 User Action Mark Chart E1 Logging Multiple Pens P1 P2 Event 4 Event 4 gt C1 Max Mins Reset P1 P2 wv This status screen displays all the currently enabled Events as they occur Each event displays the event number lt Event 1 gt followed by the event information C1 Cause 1 C2 Cause 2 C3 Cause 3 C4 Cause 4 E1 Effect 1 E2 Effect 2 E3 Effect 3 E4 Effect 4 If an Event has not been enabled no event will be listed in the status screen If part of an event is not enabled one will appear next to the incomplete cause or effect If a Cause is enabled but not an Effect or an Effect is enabled but not a Caus
64. 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance Instrument Care and Maintenance The GR Series range of recorders contains no parts serviceable by the user except for a fuse on the DC power supply see Fuses on page 22 In the event of a recorder failure contact your nearest Service Department or an author ised agent to arrange for the return of the unit for repair Cleaning Instructions The recorder s touch screen can be temporarily disabled for cleaning see Clean Screen on page 179 Cleaning the unit should be done with a soft lint cloth and warm soapy water or screen cleaner recommended for use on a PC Solvents and prolonged exposure to detergents can cause damage to the front panel It is recommended that any cloth used for cleaning is damp but NOT wet to avoid water collecting in the unit For Nema 4X IP66 rated recorders option refer to the Nema 4X standards Backlights 1 MTTF Mean Time To Fail is defined as the time at which 5096 of a batch of backlights remain in excess of half their original brightness i e a display has a greater than 50 chance of being half its original brightness when used at 100 after 55 000 hrs for the Minitrend GR Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 86 000hr if used at 80 43 000 hrs for the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 67 000hr if used at 80 40 000 hrs for the eZtrend GR Maximum luminosity 450 cd m2 6
65. 5 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Idle error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 0 2 2 Host SPI Port OverRun error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 1 2 2 Host SPI Port Receive Buffer Overflow error Diagnostics Messages Error with Host SPI 2 2 2 Host SPI Port Software Receive Buffer Overflowed Diagnostics Messages Master SPI ADC or DAC 0 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Receive Buffer overflowed and was Diagnostics Receive buffer overflowed reset Messages Clock monitor failure N A N A The I O card clock monitor failed Diagnostics occurred Messages Error with master SPI ADC 0 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Over run error Diagnostics or DAC Messages Error with master SPI ADC 1 1 1 Master SPI Adc or Dac Receive Buffer Overflow error Diagnostics or DAC Messages Waited too long without 0 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for SPITransfer Diagnostics response Messages Waited too long without 1 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for AdcSpiSend Diagnostics response Messages Waited too long without 2 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for ResetADC Diagnostics response Messages 370 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Waited too long without 3 4 4 I O card has timed out waiting for CheckSelectedAD Diagnostics response Messages An error has occurred with N A N A General er
66. 8 18CE 6351 Pen 8 A 8 18D0 6353 Pen 9 A 8 18D2 6355 Pen 10 A 8 197E 6527 Pen 96 end address A 8 Totalisers 64 totalisers max Address Address Description Toe 51 52 25 66 1B00 6913 Totalisers 1 start address A 10 1B02 6915 Totalisers 2 A 10 1B04 6917 Totalisers 3 A 10 1B06 6919 Totalisers 4 A 10 1B08 6921 Totalisers 5 A 10 1B0A 6923 Totalisers 6 A 10 1BOC 6925 Totalisers 7 A 10 1BOE 6927 Totalisers 8 A 10 1B10 6929 Totalisers 9 A 10 1B12 6931 Totalisers 10 A 10 1B7E 7039 Totalisers 64 end address A 10 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 357 358 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Alarm Value 96 Pens Allows you to read and write the value of the alarm level over Modbus Table below shows Alarm 1 Pen 1 to Alarm 1 Pen 96 Address Address pm Tue 51 52 25 66 1C00 7169 Alarm 1 Value Pen 1 start address A 16 1002 7171 Alarm 1 Value Pen 2 A 16 1C04 7173 Alarm 1 Value Pen 3 A 16 1C06 7175 Alarm 1 Value Pen 4 A 16 1C08 7177 Alarm 1 Value Pen 5 A 16 1COA 7179 Alarm 1 Value Pen 6 A 16 1C0C 7181 Alarm 1 Value Pen 7 A 16 1COE 7183 Alarm 1 Value Pen 8 A 16 1C10 7185 Alarm 1 Value Pen 9 A 16 1012 7187 Alarm 1 Value Pen 10 A 16 1CBE 7359 Alarm 1 Value Pen 96 A 16 The address range continues from Alarm 2 up to Alarm 6 96 pens for
67. A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will indicate the current log rate Alarm Rate Displays the alarm rate in Hertz if this has been set up to change when the pen goes into an active alarm state A tick denotes if itis enabled and a star will indi cate the current log rate Pre Trigger Each Pen will display it s pre trigger enabled status from within the Pen logging status display Group Displays the name of the group that this pen has been assigned to Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Diagnostics Main Menu Status Diagnostics The Diagnostics button will become active when Maintenance is selected as a firmware op tion To enable this go to Options on page 196 Hardware Hardware Status on page 201 Events Events Status on page 203 Comms See Comms Status on page 204 Media See Media Status on page 205 Diagnostics a isa i Hardware Events Comms Finish 200 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Hardware Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Complete diagnostics are shown for each of the following categories Analogue In Status See Analogue In Status on page 201 Analogue Out Status See Analogue Out Status on page 202 Alarm Digital IO Status See Alarm Digital IO Status on page 202 Pulse Input Status See Pulse Inputs Status on page 203
68. AMS2750 Each configuration requires TUS specific entries these are as follows Ramp and soak configuration there are up to six ramp and soak settings available these specify the different soak dwell temperatures required for the TUS Timers the timers associated with the TUS soak and ramp detection can be adjusted to suit the user The tolerance hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user this defines how stability is determined in the soak Furnace on page 396 e Stability Detect on page 397 e Setpoint on page 398 Edit Setup I O AMS2750 Furnace 1 Grahams Parts Oven Stability Detect v Timer Enable Auto Enable v Setpoint 1 X 1500DegC v Setpoint 2 X 3000DegC v Setpoint 3 X 5000DegC v Setpoint 4 X 7500DegC v Setpoint 5 X 11000DegC v Setpoint 6 X 13000DegC amp us Ja sm g 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 395 396 TUS mode Furnace Configuration Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Furnace Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 and Tables 6 7 8 amp 9 Furnace EN EN Edit Setup I O AMS2750 AMS2750 Class Meas Units Height 8 0 Metres Width Grahams Parts Oven Manufacturer Joe Bloggs XRH56748 Mat Type Parts Shape Rectangular 5 0 Metres A number of parameters are needed for each furnace requiring a TUS they are stored in a fu
69. Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End Pwd Net Sync 5 Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group Secure Comms 3 Secure Comms WSD is a web service that can run on devices and conforms to the Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS Recorder device will host web service and have server certificate installed on it Desktop clients will have root authority certificate of server in trusted root certificates Whenever client connects to WSD service SSL handshake will take place and on successful handshaking secure communi cation channel will be established and data flowing between these two end points will be encrypted Extra Pens 4 pens 2 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum is up to 16 extra pens for the Minitrend GR 12 extra pens for the eZtrend GR recorders and 48 extra pens for the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorder Hardware Lock 2 Uses the password permission area
70. Aug 08 239 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 Max TC TC2 449 63 Min TC TCi 447 80 When the Stable time period specified in the recorder s configuration has been satisfied the recorder will determine if the uniformity survey for that survey setpoint has passed or failed to meet the requirements for the defined class of furnace If it passes this is indicated by setting the colour for this survey setpoint to green and indi cation the Status as being Done It also indicates the level of the furnace class that was actually achieved which could be better that the class specified in the recorder set up If it fails the indication is shown as Red 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Failure If a sensor fails during a TUS causing a test fail the recorder allows you to disable that particular TC and re run that setpoint This action is permitted under AMS2750 but the number of TC s that can be disabled is in accordance with AMS2750 i e for a 9 TC test no failures are permitted The recorder does not take into account TC position when allowing a failed sensor to be removed and it is your responsibility to ensure conformance with AMS2750 Remove TC s If the TC fails goes out of tolerance The Remove TC s button can be used to eliminate that TC from the calculations setpoint rerun This will ask you which one is to be removed and do you want to rerun This is t
71. Bitmaps can be inserted into a layout in Screen Designer and then loaded into the recorder just like any other layout lay m Template 1 Screen 22 Aug 06 14 03 25 100 0 0 0 0 240 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 7 Firmware Options Firmware Credit System The credits system is a flexible way of changing the recorder features without having to up grade the firmware Simply purchase a number of credits to cover your current and possibly future requirements and the recorder is delivered with the credits loaded The credit value in each recorder is displayed in the Factory menu Select the Options button and by activating and de activating the options in the credit list the recorder will change its functionality Go from Main Menu Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value Full Maths Note 1 4 Full Maths this can handle math expressions that can consist of expressions up to 100 charac ters in length Full Maths with 6 A powerful multi line scripting ability available to solve complex state based applications Eg Scripting Notes 1 amp 4 building an application for If X happens then Y will happen else Z will occur Events Note 3 6 Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and dat
72. CARD 50086625 504 4GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50017290 501 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Blank Not shown ing Plate for I O Slots 2 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 Minitrend GR Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 Minitrend Multitrend GR and Not shown eZtrend GR Power cord 250V AC Minitrend GR Portable Case Dimensions A Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth m 165 1 235 re 6 50 9 25 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Multitrend GR Recorder 90 GNE 86 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 285 GS 3 9 se e host 286 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 20 to 55V DC 20 to 30VAC Input Common Relay Instrument supply Output Analogue Input or Analogue Output GJG Sensor Analogue Input or Pulse Input Alarm Digital IO 24V TX Power RS 485 Supply Output 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 287 288 Table 10 2 Multitrend GR Spares 50071918 501 50071918 502 50071918 503 Multitrend GR Processor 1GB SD Card Multitrend GR Processor 2GB SD Card Multitrend GR Processor 4GB SD Card Note Customer must supply model number and Serial number of existing unit when placing and order for processor board kits 2 51453006 501 Multitrend GR Analogue Input 4CH Assy 514
73. CJC reading available Diagnostics available Messages The last CJC value was not N A N A The last CJC value was not read correctly Diagnostics read correctly Messages ADC chip failed self test 0 1 1 Did not pass the self test value read wasn t the expected default Diagnostics chan on given channel Messages Detected open circuit load N A N A The AO channel has an O C load i e load has been removed Diagnostics on an enabled AO channel Messages Requested more than 21mA N A N A The AO channel has been requested to retransmit 21mA Diagnostics output Messages Ambient temperature out of N A N A The AI card ambient temperature is outside of operating limits Diagnostics limits Messages Active burnout almost failed N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has almost burnout how Diagnostics on Al channel ever a value can still be measured T C almost failed O C Messages Active burnout S C detected N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has burnout failed O C Diagnostics on Al channel whilst set to active burnout mode Messages Active burnout degraded on N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has degraded performance Diagnostics Al channel however a value can still be measured Messages Out of burnout on Al channel N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has recovered from a burn Diagnostics out condition Suspect a bad connection failing T C Messages Upscale burnout on Al chan N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel h
74. Counters See Counters Menu on page 126 Preset Markers See Preset Markers on page 127 Time Sync See Time Sync on page 127 Preset Markers Events Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Events Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system All Event occurrences can be viewed in Events Status on page 203 Edit Setup Edit Setup Event J Event 1 Eventi B Enabled Event 2 X Event2 Tag Event 1 Event 3 X Event 3 Cause 1 Alarms Event 4 amp Event 4 Cause 2 x Event 5 amp Events Alarm Ack Event 6 amp Event 6 p M v Totaliser Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represent ed on a graph 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 111 112 An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm Select the first available event eg Event 1 In the Event 1 menu tick to enable and change the Event tag if required Each Event has four Causes and four Effects available these can be used in different combinations NOTICE Remember that any of the Causes will trigger All the Effects Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked Anevent can have up to 4 causes t
75. Effect A Mark is placed on the Chart In summary every 30 seconds a scheduled interval will cause a counter to increment by 1 When the increments reach 50 a mark will be placed on the Chart 118 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Event Effects Enabled Tick to enable Type Choose from Mark on Chart Logging Totaliser Digital Outputs Alarm Ack Email Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sounds Display Alert Batch Reports and Update Tabular Readings Depending on the Type of effect selected the menus will change as follows Mark on Chart If a pen goes into an alarm state the effect would be a mark will be placed on a chart and will display for example Pen 2 Alm 1 Into Alarm 37 Select Marker Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 127 Select the Marker Type as User Defined to add pen information using Embedded Proc ess Variable Embedded Process Values Adding Embedded Process Values in a Mark on Chart means you can display information such as Table 4 5 Embedded Process Variables Variable Description V Value T Tag Z Zero range S Span range U Unit Text time v Time in HH MM SS format date v Date in DD MM YY format td v Time and Date in HH MM SS and DD MM
76. End User Counters User Counter Max Mins Reset Reset Max Min values Power On Setup Change System Internal Mem Low Export Mem Low FTP Mem Low User Action Mark Chart Hot Button Batch Start Batch Stop Batch Pause Batch TUS Start Stop AMS2750 Timer TC Timers Process Timers TC Health Monitor Analogue Inputs Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sound Display Alert Batch Reports Update Tabular Readings Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen Change Chart Speed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 113 Figure 4 8 Event 1 example Event 1 example Adding Cause 1 A Mme 0 into alarm otom Digital Outputs Alarm Ack Select which Pen number and which alarm on that pen will have the alarm acknowledged Event 1 example Adding Effect 2 Makcat Logging Enabled Pa Digital Outputs Totaliser Alarm Ack Sub Type Start 114 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Event Causes Alarms Set to cause an event when a pen goes Into Alarm Out of Alarm or an Alarm is Acknowledged Set the pen number and the Alarm that will trigger this event Totalisers Set to cause an event when a totaliser Starts Stops is Reset or a Rollover is required Select which pen has been set up as a t
77. Equipment M P6 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Protocols used in this manual Static Electricity All circuit boards and electronic modules associated with this recorder contain components which are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge Should it be necessary to handle such components appropriate precautions in accordance with ANSI ESD 820 20 Electrostatic Discharge Control Program Standard should be observed Protocols used in this manual Safety and Symbol Identification Table 1 3 Symbol Description A WARNING The WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION This CAUTION symbol may indicates a potential ly hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTICE A NOTICE symbol indicates important informa tion that must be remembered and aids in job performance Warnings and Safety Precautions Do s and Don ts 1 DC inputs to the product should be provided by SELV power supply 2 The inputs of the product are supplied from SELV and should not exceed 50V 3 Before any connections are made to the recorder ensure the protective earth terminal is connected to a protective conductor before applying power or any other connections y WARNING IMPROPER INTERRUPTION OF CONNECTIONS Any interruption of the protective conductor outside the re
78. Equipment Furnace 1 LLL LLL eewem p O O All channels shown are corrected OOOO yo oO P1800 7F ps OOS All channels shown are corrected ELI All channels shown are corrected Ramp Time EMSS SP1 950 0 F 00 03 02 SP2 1200077 All channels shown are corrected ag ime HHAMM SS 5P19500 F All channels shown are corrected Pre TUS instrument Comments Post TUS Instrument Comments All soaks have been completed the survey was stopped automatically Survey Instrument Type X Series SX Recorder Survey instrument Serial No Report Generated By 4M52750 TUS Report Tool All measured values excep the comro TC are corrected Page 2 of 12 442 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Survey Instrument Certificate No amp JUXA593 Start Time amp Date 1 7 2009 15 26 46 End Time amp Date 1 7 2009 16 36 03 Survey Engineer NM Identification Of the Testing Company If not performed In House Signature for the Testing company If not performed In House OO hemseture Tolerance Furnace Class S Pomi esoo enum Bex ee oe Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the comro TC are corrected Page 3 of 12 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 443 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345
79. Events Comms and Media This is an option and requires firmware credits to be activated See Diagnostics on page 200 TC Usage For AMS2750 TUS and Process modes only Please refer to Thermo couple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 390 Saving Screens All Status screens can be saved as portable rtf files onto removable media These can be transferred to another location and kept for records or sent via email for troubleshooting and maintenance issues 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Printing Screens All the Status screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be configured in Network Admin on page 98 and in the Printer Menu on page 141 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support USB 2 0 on page 44 The Print function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu Credits on page 131 System Main Menu Status System The System status menu is divided into three more sub sections General Options and IO Cards Each one will display the current status of the recorder for each category General Main Menu Status System General Displays the version status for the different types of firmware hardware and current recorder information Table 4 11 Example System Version Status Options Version ID 0001 Name Minitrend GR Serial No BS E Processor MHz Firmware 100 1 Firmware Data 16 33 33 Oct 11 2006
80. F S 0 01 C Ohms 4000 0 to 4000 0 1 F S 0 01 C Input Actuation Range Ref Accuracy f remp Stability Field Field T Cs F C 4 F C Cal Cal Deg Deg F C B 500 to 1000 260 to 538 8 1 4 5 8 1 4 5 1000 to 3300 538 to 1816 4 0 2 2 0 01 C 2 0 1 11 E 454 to 328 270 to 200 21 6 12 21 6 12 00 328 to 94 200 to 70 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 3 1 1 7 94 to 1832 70 to 1000 1 3 0 7 0 8 0 44 J 346 to 32 210 to 0 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 0 8 0 44 32 to 2192 0 to 1200 1 2 0 7 0 63 0 35 K 454 to 94 270 to 70 36 20 0 01 C 36 20 00 94 to 2502 70 to 1372 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 R 58 to 500 50 to 260 6 7 3 7 0 01 C 6 7 3 7 500 to 1202 260 to 650 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1202 to 3214 650 to 1768 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 S 58 to 500 50 to 260 5 9 3 3 0 01 C 5 9 3 3 500 to 1832 260 to 1000 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1832 to 3110 1000 to 1710 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 3110 to 3214 1710 to 1768 2 5 14 1 0 0 56 T 454 to 346 270 to 210 9 7 5 4 0 01 C 9 7 5 4 346 to 752 210 to 400 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 L 328 to 32 200 to 0 2 2 1 2 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 32 to 1652 0 to 900 1 3 0 7 0 7 0 39 G W_W26 32 to 212 0 to 100 45 25 0 01 C 45 25 212 to 600 100 to 316 11 2 6 2 11 6 6 2 600 to 1526 316 to 830 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 1526 to 2759 830 to 1515 3 1 1 7 1 6 0 89 2759 to 4199 1515 to 2315 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 C W5 W26 32 to 356 0 to 180 4 5 2 5 0 01 C 4 5 2 5 356 to 2228 180 to 1220 3 6 2 1 8 1 0 2228 to 4199 1220 to 2315 6 7 3 7 6 66 3 7 M NiMo NiCo
81. Figure 4 7 on page 109 Server Name up to 32 characters Only available when Client Enable is active This is the name of the Network Server that can be used for time synchronisation Enter the server name to be used for time synchronisation this could be a Time Server on the internet or on your network If a recorder is acting as the Server the Client recorders must have the recorder s network ID eg xs nnnnnn this is the 6 digit Serial number See System on page 195 for the recorder s serial number Period Only available when Client Enable is active Select and enter the time period in seconds required between checking and updating the time using the on screen key board X Series recorders have a period limit of 60 to 3600 seconds GR Series recorders have a period limit of 600 to 3600 seconds Threshold Only available when Client Enable is active This is a specified amount of time in seconds that the recorder clock must be within to ensure synchronisation with the network server Eg if set to 3600 the recorder time must be within 1 hour of the net Work server to ensure time sync will take place 108 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 4 7 Client Server network When using time synchronisation via SNTP always make sure that the recorders and the PC if any are configured to the same time zone See Localisation on page 136 Client Server Network Figure 4 7 on page 109 shows a Network Server at th
82. Level 1 Name Engineer Second highest permission level Level 2 Name Supervisor Third highest permission level Level 3 Name Technician Fourth highest permission level Level 4 Name Operator Fifth highest permission level Unrestrict allows the Administrator to de restrict access to certain areas so menus will be available even without logging in Menu Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the menus This is always enabled for ESS Menu Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in a password protected area before logging out 20 to 3600 seconds Web Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the web page This is always enabled for ESS Web Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in the web page before logging out Enter the time in seconds 20 to 3600 seconds Old Passwords Select how many previously used passwords are locked from use as a new password Max 12 previous passwords 0 for disabled Cannot be disabled for ESS recorders 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 165 166 Username Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 characters 4 to 20 for ESS recorders Password Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 6 to 20 for ESS recorders Username Min Set the minimum amount of characters
83. Logging is a real time Data Compression technique Patent no US 6 405 155 B2 developed at Honeywell as an alternative to the more standard methods of recording data Paperless Recorders are primarily used for exception recording They spend most of their life trending and recording straight lines Fuzzy Logging has been developed to improve the efficiency of data storage and is particularly effective in exception recording examples where normal operation consists of generally static inputs Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream in real time whether they are hor izontal climbing or descending A straight line made up of say 10 points can be equally well represented by 2 points one at either end the other 8 points are redundant Fuzzy logging works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant points What s it for Becta To help the user in the trade off between Scan Rate Disk capacity and Recording Time after all the Pie is only so big Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help maximise all three sections in effect increas ing the size of the Pie The Recording Pie Scan Rate Bi Storage Capacity The result is a technique that delivers a host Recording Period of real world benefits over the more traditional recording methods 1 Disks take longer to fill changed less frequently less site visits 2 Faster scan rates can be used for a
84. Multitrend GR Recorder has 6 available slots with up to 8 analog inputs each the input sam pling rate is dependent on actuation type DR Graphic Minitrend GR Multitrend GR All Inputs 100mS 10Hz 200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz DR Graphic Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Fast Sampling 20mS 50Hz mA mV Ohms and Volts only eZtrend GR200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz and 100mS 10Hz Analogue Input expansion card option Scales Linear amp Logarithmic Normal and Scientific notation Decimal Point automatic or programmable Engineering units user definable 10 characters Logarithmic 38 min to 38 max recommend up to 20 decades on one screen to ensure clarity Input Isolation 300VAC channel to channel channel to ground Resistance thermometers are not isolated on the eZtrend GR Noise Rejection at 50 60Hz 2 Analogue Input card std Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 80dB 5Hz 25dB Analogue Input expansion card option Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB 10Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 85dB 5Hz 80dB 10Hz 48dB Specification Logging Logging Method Sample Average Min Max can be set independently per pen Logging Types Continuous Fuzzy Logging Rate DR Graphic Minitrend GR Multitrend GR 20 msec to 60 hours per pen eZtrend GR100 msec to 60 hours per pen Fuzzy Logging A secure data storage technique which delivers dat
85. NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NO C NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NO Normally Open C Common Digital Input Card Channel Numbers The Digital input cards are either 8 or 16 channels with a full length connector taking up 16 channels even if only 8 channels are in operation Both the digital input cards can be used as a relay card if required Table 2 9 Digital Input card 8 channel Digital Input card 16 channel Card Channel Channel Card position position number number Slot G 1 to 8 Slot G 1 to 16 Slot H 17 to 24 Slot H 17 to 32 Slot 33 to 40 Slot 33 to 48 The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend GR DR Graphic recorders Digital I O card slot position and channel number mapping Table 2 10 Digital Input card 8 channel Digital Input card 16 channel Card position Channel number Card position Channel number Slot B 1to8 Slot B 1 to 16 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 41 42 Electrical Installation Communications Connections Ethernet The Ethernet port is fitted to all GR Series recorders as standard and uses a standard RJ45 Ethernet connection After connection select the Ethernet port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol menu eg Modbus 2 4 6 8 OOO QOO B 87654321 1 5 5 d OA amp gele RJ45 Pin
86. Number of messages being transferred successfully 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Bad Messages Number of corrupt or rejected messages eg a checksum failure nternal Errors Number of Hardware errors SMTP Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for Email transfers FTP Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms FTP EE Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for FTP trans ers Peers Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms Peers Displays all recorders available on the network The screen will display the recorder name what version of Firmware is installed ID number and Network Name and IP address It also displays the recorder s network sync status to show if the recorder is part of a pass word group It will display either Master Slave or a Stand Alone recorder not belonging to a net sync group The last column displays which Password Net Sync group each recorder belongs to Stand Alone recorders will be blank The Peers Diagnostic Status screen only gets updated when a rescan is done if you remove a peer from the network it still shows in the Comms Diagnostic Peers Status screen until another rescan A rescan will be done when a recorder come online startup or a change is made to password netsync If you experience any security issues using peers see I
87. On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On Button Log Off Button Process Log On User is presented with a user name and password entry box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu will turn to Log Off once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen First Time Log On The first time the system is used with ESS a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset For more detailed information see Section 5 Security on page 207 Re Start Recorder NOTICE After re start if the recorder asks for Scan and Fix or Continue always select Scan and Fix If you chose Continue you may lose the data In case of Scan amp Fix the recorder may take couple of more minutes more than normal to re start up to 2 3 minutes 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 3 Local Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Localisation All text is displayed in the currently selected language Help system language can be se
88. Output card channels must not be connected to any hazardous live volt ages no higher than 30V AC rms or 60V DC Alarm Relay Card channels Alarm Relay Card channels can be connected to hazardous voltages up to 300V AC at Measurement Category CAT II Overvoltage Category II Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 16 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lb in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards The 24 way connector for the Alarm Relay Card connects to 3 A 240 VAC SPCO relays The pin outs for 4 and 8 relay Alarm Relay cards are numbered from left to right and they read as follows for each channel NC normally closed C common NO normally open Devices driven by the relays are connected via two 12 way screw terminal plugs The last two channels 7 amp 8 23 amp 24 or 39 amp 40 can be used as digital inputs connect across Common C and Normally Open NO 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation CAUTION IMPROPER MAINS SWITCHING For 8 channel Alarm Relay cards Switching mains on the normally open contact on channels 7 and 8 is not recommended as surges and spikes on the mains supply could cause damage to the input circuitry The normally closed contact is unaffected and can be used like all the other channels A Form C dry contact relay is u
89. Secondly download the file to another SD card or USB key See Storage Media Format on page 184 for formatting information of SD cards and USB keys SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Note The network share folder cannot be used to upgrade firmware remotely Firmware up grade needs to be done locally using local USB or local SD card To check the firmware upgrade has been successful see the Status Menu General on page 195 Calibration Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Calibration Cards will be calibrated in the factory All ranges are factory calibrated and set to the default range of 12V Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table on page 134 Date amp Type of last calibration is stored in Maintenance on page 198 Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card Select the Al or CJC cal ibration button to go to the next menu Recommend use of CJC Clips and the Rear Cover to help maintain a uniform temperature around the terminal blocks and cold junction when using thermocouple actuations Al Calibration In this menu there is a button for each Analogue Input card fitted in the recorder Calibration is done per channel Cards may be reset to original factory cal i e a card holds two sets of calibration constants factory amp user for all ranges Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table on page 134 Factory Cal The recorder is calibrated in
90. See Batch Setup Batch Groups on page 180 Recording Start or Stop recording Export Now will transfer data to external media such as SD card USB key or Network Share folder NAS See Hecording Menu on page 184 Messages The messages screen will display certain message areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories or all messages can be viewed See Mes sages Menu on page 187 Process Controls for any process in use eg Max Mins Totals Counters User Varia bles Script Timers and Reports can be controlled from this screen See Process Menu on page 190 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Status Displays status information screens that are available to the user these will provide information for reporting and diagnostic purposes See Status Menu on page 194 Finish When an operation is complete use the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later See Finish on page 206 Help The Help icon appears as a question mark on all menu screens The Help files are context sensitive and will supply information for each menu screen where the icon appears See Help on page 66 Configure Menu Main Menu Configure The Configure screen gives access to the Setup Layout Password menus and Settings Time and Date The majority of the recorder configuration is done in the Setup menus Setup In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires stores and act
91. T 4 3 3 9E 996 8 F T pS cr Message cr Ar T J o m m m TUS TUS Exported a 22 TUS TUS Stopped 2 e AX A x g TC TUS Soak 3 Completed OK re i TUS Auto Stability achieved i5 Diff T 5 4 7 E TUS ALL in soak 3 ramp 397s lag 55s E TUS New soak started for soak 3 limits 990 00 to 1010 00 z D TUS Try to detect new soak 3 limits 990 00 to 1010 00 or EE TUS Soak 2 Completed OK aj 14 33 05 PM 9 4 2008 TUS Auto Stability achieved a 14 36 38 PM 9 4 2008 TUS ALL in soak 2 ramp 104s lag 18s a 14 36 19 PM 9 4 2008 TUS New soak started for soak 2 limits 590 00 to 610 00 Aj 14 34 53 PM 9 4 2008 TUS Try to detect new soak 2 limits 590 00 to 610 00 il 10 58 02 AM 9 4 2008 TUS Soak 1 Completed OK aj 10 27 34 AM 9 4 2008 TUS Auto Stability achieved a 10 25 32 AM 3 4 2008 TUS ALL in soak 1 ramp 163s lag 85 a 10 25 24 AM 9 4 2008 TUS New soak started for soak 1 limits 330 00 to 410 00 E 10 22 49 AM 9 4 2008 TUS Try to detect new soak 1 limits 390 00 to 410 00 Aj 10 22 48 AM 3j4f2008 TUS Started a 3 45 35 AM 9 4 2008 Session 466 LCM 466 a 3 45 31 AM 9 4 2008 Power On Off for 3m 43s 9 45 30 AM 3 at2nna 4 gt TUS Data file Once a TUS is stopped a TUS data file is created with all the information required for the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a TUS report The data file is only available for export from the recorder to front
92. Tighten the two hex screws that attach the brackets to the case 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Hole Pattern millimeters Reference inches 181 36 7 14 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation 163 32 6 430 Figure 2 15 Surface Mount on wall or panel 21 Electrical Installation Electrical Installation 22 Installation Category Installation category Installation category Il Pollution degree 2 Follow National and local electrical codes for installation in a Class 1 Div 2 area For voltage frequency and power refer to the appropriate Specification sheet See Sec tion 12 Technical Data amp Specifications on page 303 Fuses There is a fuse situated on the DC input version power supply type 2A time delay this can be replaced by the user Replacement of fuses should be carried out by qualified service personnel If the fuse should blow again there is probably a problem elsewhere within the unit and the recorder should be returned for inspection to your authorised Honeywell distributor or Honeywell Service department Cables To fully comply with the requirements of the CE Mark all cables connected to the rear of the unit should use screened cable terminated at both ends A low impedance earth cable 50 mQ must be connected to the earthing stud on the rear of the recorder to ensure that the recorder is always earthed Before performing any installation plea
93. Touch Screen 50084843 503 Assy GR SX RAL7032 MULTITREND TOUCH SCREEN ASSY 31 50084213 501 Multitrend GR XGA 12 1 Display 36 51453098 501 Multitrend GR Case and Back Plate 39 50084218 501 Multitrend GR Inverter 50084214 501 Multitrend GR LVDS Cable kit 42 50005458 501 Multitrend GR Rear Terminal Cover Not shown kit 46 51453095 501 Multitrend GR Chassis kit 50 50000871 501 Multitrend GR Panel Gasket 51 50004292 501 Multitrend GR Panel Clamp Assy Not shown Qty 2 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 54 50086625 502 1GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50086625 503 2GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50086625 504 4GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50017290 502 Multitrend GR Screen Protector Kit Not shown of 5 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50017181 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Not shown Blanking Plate for I O Slots 2 50001249 501 Multitrend GR Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and Not shown eZtrend Power cord 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 289 Multitrend GR Portable Case Dimensions Height 336 6 13 25 Width Depth 336 6 336 6 13 25 13 25 290 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK eZtrend GR Recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 291
94. UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description Not equal to l Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are not equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 OR Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other or both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 XOR x Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other but not both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 Functions for Scripts Scripting is not available on the eZtrend GR Scripts evaluate at whatever the Analogue sample rate is set to There is 500 character limit for scripting Table 14 7 Functions for Scripts Syntax Description Else else Steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return else return y Elseif elseif x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return elseif x gt 4 return y First run FIRSTRUN Returns true if the script is being run for the first time otherwise returns false if x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run If false steps to next test without operating the contents of the brackets Next step will be either e seif or else Must always finish with a return If x5 return y Set Changed SETUPCHAN GE
95. View Alarms No Login Configure Alarms requires Operator access Permission Area 9 View Alarms requires No Login Permission Area 5 Ack Alarm menu Operator access Permission Area 8 All of the Acknowledge Alarm buttons require Operator access Back Finish Figure 5 7 Default password access from the Screen Menu and Edit layout menu Qi E g a 0001 QX p Map Snap Expert xit 11 May 06 14 54 10 50 00 4 52 00 4544 100 00 pen 1 1 25 18 14 500 11 May o Appearance ee d Finish Eu NET Gian esent E ud Screen Edit Edit layout Supervisor access All of the Edit functions in the status bar re 5 quire Supervisor access Custom Screens Back Finish are not available for the eZtrend GR Screen menu No Login required Permission Area 2 Edit Supervisor access Replay No Login required List No Login required Clean Screen No Login required Calibrate Engineer Access Touch Test Engineer Access Calibrate and Touch Test Engineer access Used to cal ibrate the touch screen Premission area 40 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 219 Figure 5 8 Default password access from the Process Menu Process Menu No Login required Max Min No Login Totals No Login Counters No Login User Variables Operator Script Timers Operator Reports Operator Totals Menu No Login required Start Stop and Reset Totals butt
96. YY format name v recorder name id v recorder ID serial v serial number 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 119 120 Table 4 6 Embedded examples Text Entry Function Examples P1 V will embed the current Value of P1 lt lt 16 233 gt gt P1 T will embed the current Tag of P1 Pen 1 gt gt P1 2 will embed the Zero point of P1 lt lt 0 gt gt P1 S will embed the span point of P1 lt lt 100 gt gt P1 U will embed the Unit text of P1 deg C gt gt time v will embed the current time lt lt 11 51 23 gt gt date v will embed the current date lt lt 10 11 06 gt gt td v will embed the current time and date 11 51 23 10 11 02 name v will embed the current recorder name lt lt Furnace1 gt gt id v will embed the current recorder ID lt lt 21 gt gt serial v will embed the recorder serial number lt lt 200034 gt gt BATMD1 v will embed the batch mode 1 Running 2 lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Stopped 3 Paused Stopped gt gt BATMD1 t will embed the batch name lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Group 1 gt gt Batch mode is for each group BATMD1 to BATMD6 Used in embedded variables as BATMD 1 v will also allow the current batch name to be embedded using BATMD t Maths variables as embedded variables Other information can be accessed by exchanging the Pn with the following variables see Figure
97. a map on the slave side of the Modbus master this allows another master to get access directly to another master s slaves data without the master having to re process that information Or a Modbus master can process the data and expose it to the network as its own pens in Modbus 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 103 104 Modbus master must be enabled as a firmware option and requires Full Math or Scripting to assign values to a pen see Credits on page 131 GR Series Other Master Master 485 or TCP IP Slave network TCP IP Slaves Full Modbus status can be viewed in Modbus Status on page 204 Refer to the Modbus Master Installation Instructions that are on the CD to help set up other modbus devices to talk to the recorder Instruction sheets 43 TV 33 89 43 TV 33 102 Master Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Master device Poll Rate Enter a time period in seconds of how often there is a request for data Legacy Ethernet Tick this to connect to Honeywell V5 recorders Slave 1 32 Up to 32 slaves can be setup per master device Setup each Slave in turn starting with number 1 ee Enabled Toggle On to enable Slave ee Friendly name Enter a name to easily identify this slave device ee ID This is to connect to slave ID ee Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port con
98. a web page Internet access is required The Web button is password protected if passwords are enabled For web browsing information see Web Browser on page 276 and Internet Security Settings on page 277 See Level Permissions on page 211 for information on how to Web Browse and have full remote control of your recorder from your PC The Remote View function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu Credits on page 131 Email Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services Email Set up this email menu in order to send emails for the following 1 When an Alarm is triggered see Email Alarms in the Alarms Menu on page 88 2 An Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In to Out of or Acknowledged Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End For more information on setting up events that will send emails see Event Effects on page 119 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Server Name EN84EV402 global trains com Authentication v Username loc 511500 Password Seo ser Address phil d gap underground com Recipient ddr s Recipient Addr s Server Name Enter your server name that will handle the transfer of the emails Ask your IT Admin for
99. a whole hour and the configuration is committed at 17 minutes past the recorder will wait until 20 past before starting the schedule interval As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure alignment with a whole hour Count Only available when Interval Specific Days or Month End are selected as a Sub Type This is how often you want this to occur The recorder will carry on with this schedule for the amount entered in the count Eg If 24 is entered into the count the scheduled event will occur at the specified time for 24 hours A count of zero will carry on indefinitely Days of the Week Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the days of the week when this scheduled event is to occur Time of Day Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the Time Of Day when this scheduled event is to occur User Counters User Counters are quite simply counters that are set up by the user User Counters can be used as a Cause to trigger an Event Effect The User Counter information must be setup in the before it can be used as a part of the event system See Counters Menu on page 126 For a User Counter to be used as a Cause a User Counter must already be set up and be counting something eg a User Counter as an Effect of another Event An example of this could be First setup your counter in the Counters menu Enable it Name it enter the number the count will St
100. amp A2 gt A3 amp amp A2 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1 3 and 4 GLBV1 2 If yes then set display indicator to meter 2 return A2 And return the current flow reading elseif A8 gt A1 amp amp A3 gt A2 amp amp A3 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 3 is more than 1 2 and 4 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 331 332 Full Maths amp Script Processing GLBV1 3 If yes then set display indicator to meter 3 return A3 And return the current flow reading else If none of the above are true then 4 is biggest GLBV1 4 So set display indicator to meter 4 return A4 And return the current flow reading In this application the flow meters are connected to inputs 1 2 3 and 4 at the rear of the recorder and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4 P1 A1 P2 A2 P3 A3 P4 A4 Pen 5 has the script above which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four Pen 6 is set to record and display the input between 1 and 4 that is the highest rate P6 GLBV1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 Example 2 In the same application as above the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has the highest flow rate on occasion a surge in flow meter 3 causes problems The user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 reading exceeds th
101. an alarm and optionally after the event Post Trigger where the information can then be viewed in TrendManager Pro for analysis Configuration The pre trigger system is simply configured by selecting which pens they wish to be included in the pre trigger by enabling the Pre Trigger item in the pen logging menu Logging Menu on page 86 and setting the desired pre trigger time which is common to all pens this is done here in the recording menu Pre Trigger Time The pre trigger system can be configured to allow between 1 and 10 minutes at whole minute increments of pre trigger data to be stored for each pen each pen will store the same time span The default will be set to 5 minutes Post Trigger Time specified in seconds from 0 disabled and the default to 3600 for 1 hour of post trigger time extending the alarm log rate for all pre trigger pens by the specified time after the last pre trigger pen alarm has cleared Acquiring In the running state the pre trigger buffers are being filled with pen readings dependant on the alarm logging rate when no pre trigger pen alarms are asserted The buffer will cycle when they reach the maximum pre trigger time as configured If power is lost when the pre trigger is acquiring then the pre trigger information will be lost Event processing All pens enabled for pre trigger will be put into their alarm logging rate and remain in the alarm logging rate while any pre trigger pen alarm is
102. and Marker Mark on Chart can also be changed x Bl Graduations OO Colour Replay L Colour Replay O Alarm a Chart Graduations This will change the colour of the graduation lines on the chart Default Recent E EE B ENN Chart Colour This will change the colour of the background of the chart Chart Alarm This will change the colour of the background of the chart when it goes into an alarm state Replay Graduations This will change the colour of the graduation lines on the chart when the recorder screen is in Replay mode Replay Colour This will change the colour of the background of the Replay chart Replay Alarm This will change the colour of the Replay chart when it goes into an alarm state 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 161 162 Time Stamp This will change the colour of the time stamp and date at the top of the screen Marker Colour This will change the colour of any Mark on Chart displayed on the screen The Default button will return all colours to their original factory settings The Colour Picker On the right side is a selection of default colours which can be used as they are When a colour is selected it will appear in the New box with the Current colour next to it Use the sliders labelled Red Green and Blue to vary the colour displayed in the New box As you move the slider the colour shade number will change in the box below the
103. and the use the Associated Slaves field to pick from a list of availa ble recorders in order to make up the password group membership 9 Ifa recorder is a part of a password group and the network becomes disconnected then the recorder will notify you of the available options concerning its associated password group This will occur if you have to update a password or if you have the Alert function set up to provide an Alert message that says the network cable is unplugged of if you do a rescan of the system 10 To remove a recorder from a password group set the recorder back to a stand alone device and deactivate the Password Net Sync option in the Firmware Credits menu This will cause the recorder to reset This recorder will no longer be available for use in a password group But the password system and policies will still be active using the last group password 11 If a Master is removed from a password group a new master can be assigned or all the recorders can be returned to Stand alone recorders and the password group is dis solved 12 As soon as confirmation is made in the Password Net Sync screen using the tick then the information will be passed on to all recorders in that password group 168 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 13 When a password is changed or recorders are added or removed from a password group a password synchronisation occurs automatically 14 A password group can be set up from the Master recorder with
104. areas Access levels can change for each menu for example Operator or above access is required to get to the Configure menu Once in the Configure menu the operator level can only ac cess the Passwords button Setup is Technician or above access and Layout and Settings are Supervisor or above access 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 5 1 Default password access from the Main menu Configure Menu Operator Access See Figure 5 2 for Configure menu access Permission Area 13 a Configure a LZ JLB J Setup Layout Passwords Batch a Le ILS ILS J Stop se Abort Batch Control Operator Access All of the Batch Control menu buttons require Operator access Permission Area 10 Process Wi Max Min vi 2 UVa User Variables Script Timers Process Menu No Login required See Figure 5 8 for Process menu access 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Alarms Menu No Login required See Figure 5 6 for Alarms menu access Alarms P uas Ack Alarm Back Configure Main Menu 45 ME Configure Alarms Screen E gt a Batch Recording Messages 102 Process Status ish OQ status a System Pen Overview Maintenance f a E i8 Recording Diagnostics TC Usage Back Finish Status Menu No Login required All of the Mes sa
105. current status of the thermocouple within the furnace in process mode A thermocouple has to be configured to be tracked for either calibration or usage within the sensor configuration If a thermocouple is set to be tracked but has no expiry or recalibration requirement the number of days in use will be shown as opposed to a countdown till expiry Up to 16 sensor status buttons will be displayed on a DR Graphic amp Minitrend GR or eZ trend GR and 24 on an Multitrend GR If more sensors are available than fit on a single page then the Next button will be available and will show the remainder of the sensors To activate a TC to be tracked see AMS2750 Info Process Mode on page 388 or AMS2750 Info TUS Mode on page 399 Figure 24 1 Thermocouple Usage Da s Left N jaws Len A Bays Left NA Uses Left 26 Uses Left 26 Davs Left NA Davs Left NA Days Left NA Uses Left 30 Uses Left 30 Uses Left 30 Pen Overview fe sar tid fh lea 11d I Lise oid Days Left NA Uses Left 30 Diagnostics Sertsor Input 5 Expendable Type K Base metal Serial Number 0123 Certificate No NA958 K Installed on 02 11 2008 Days Left 0 Uses Left 30 Calibration Due 02 09 2009 The status for each sensor is shown as a status button and shows the following top level information Sensor Input Thermocouple ID Overall health Green TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired Cou
106. display Panel cut out size for the Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR recorders 138 00 7 43 Panel Panel 138 00 H Cut out Cut out 5 43 7 00 gt 6 00 0 Ed 0 237 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 1 Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR Panel cut out 8 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation Panel cut out size for the Multitrend GR recorder 281 00 11 067 Panel Pop 281 00 Cut out PEE 11 06 220 00 0 787 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 2 Multitrend GR Panel cut out The Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and eZtrend GR recorders are DIN Standard sizes and should be panel mounted Panel cut out size for the DR Graphic recorder Physical considerations The recorder can be mounted flush in a panel or on the surface of a panel or wall using the mounting kit supplied with the recorder Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation and servicing Overall dimensions The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the recorder are shown in Figure 2 3 322 56 12 70 Figure 2 3 gt DR Graphic recorder Panel cut out Panel 322 56 Cutout 12 70 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 9 Mechanical Installation Minitrend GR Dimension details Figure 2 4 Miniitrend GR Recorder Dimensions and Mounting slots including 45mm pan
107. eZtrend GR recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT I Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 24 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lbf in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG American Wire gauge equivalent to 22 14 SWG Standard Wire Gauge AWG metric 0 6426 2 052mm in diameter or SWG metric 0 71 2 03mm in diameter 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 29 30 Electrical Installation Rear Covers Optional rear covers are available for these products except for the DR Graphic recoder which does not require a rear cover and it is recommended to use
108. example in Figure 4 5 shows the alarm acti vating at 4096 which is the set low alarm level The alarm is not de activated until the signal is at 50 which is 10 past the set alarm level So the Hyst Level would be set to 10 Reverse the process for a high alarm Damping Toggles On and Off Damping is a time delay that works going into alarm only When switched On the alarm level must be breached for a specific period of time before an alarm is triggered Damping Time Set the amount of Damping time in seconds Damp level can be from 1 seconds to 64800 seconds Reflash Toggles On and Off Activate this to re enable an active alarm that has been acknowledged Set the Reflash Time Reflash Time Only enabled when Reflash is active Set the time period after the alarm has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in an alarm state When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup Figure 4 5 Hysteresis Level 100 l Alarm de activated at this point 50 10 Hysteresis level o 4096 Low Alarm Level Alarm activated at this point 096 Totaliser Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Totaliser The Totals option must be active to use this option See Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 241 To Start Stop Reset and View Totals see Totals on page 190 The Totaliser function is normally associated with flow monitoring appl
109. expected or permitted it will report an error However the fault being reported may be on a previous line caused by the missing or incorrect function Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or web site for a list of scripting error messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix C Thermocouple Connections How Thermocouples work Thermocouples produce a voltage dependant upon the temperature gradient between the hot and cold junctions The hot junction is the measuring junction of the thermocouple the cold junction is the point where the thermocouple wires are connected usually the connec tion block on the back of the recorder 20 C 100 C B o CJC Hot Junction Cold Junction If the hot measuring junction is at 100 C and the connection block of the recorder is at 20 C the thermocouple will produce a voltage corresponding to 80 C the difference between the hot and cold junctions For the recorder to correctly report the 100 C it needs to know the temperature at the cold junction There are 4 options of cold junction compensation CJC on the recorder that are detailed below The simplest and most common is to use the Internal Automatic compen sation This uses a CJC sensor built onto the Al board to measure the connector tempera ture In this case it will measure 20 C this will then be added to the 80 C measured by the thermocouple to give a displayed reading of 100 C
110. for remote control Active X There is also one port for FTP control which should be opened Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Active X Control Depending on your set up and if passwords are active a dialog box will appear for Internet Explorer Digitally Signed Active X Control if prompted select Yes To browse multiple recorders IE8 or higher version is required 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 277 Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Administrator approved Select a zone to view or change security settings Disable 19 Display video and animation on a webpage that does not use i i 3 Disable E Internet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted Enable sites 19 Download signed ActiveX controls Internet 7 Sass Disable This zone is for Internet websites Enable not secure except those listed in trusted and iisa 9 Download unsigned ActiveX controls Disable recommended Security level for this zone Enable not secure Allowed levels for this zone Medium to High Medium high 3 Intalze ACHVEX controls not marked as safe fors Appropriate for most websites _Nieshle fracammended 4 m T Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Takes effect after you restart your computer Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded x m Reset custom settings y M i j
111. gt Setup gt Edit Setup Comms gt Comms Services gt Modbus Modbus is available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 131 Modbus can be used with the Ethernet or RS485 ports The Modbus protocol defines a mes sage structure that devices will recognise and use regardless of the type of network over which they communicate RS485 is not available for the eZtrend recorder m 52 MODBUS Master Finish Modbus Master Communications The recorder can communicate with up to 32 slave devices on both RS485 and or Ethernet at a maximum poll rate of 1 second slowest 1 hour Each slave can perform up to 8 trans actions where a transaction can retrieve or send 1 or more registers from a slave or re treive or send 1 or more Pens to a slave When requesting multiple transactions it is recommended not to request more than 24 at one time to allow the recorder to process the information So for 32 registers pen values we would recomend 2 requests of 16 devices Access to slave registers within the maths function has been provided using SCV Slave Comms Variable For example SCV x y z where x Slave number y Transaction Number and z is the each successive register retrieved starting from 1 Item The Modbus master can be used in conjunction with the Modbus slave functionality of the recorder to enable the recorder to act as a communications bridge Data from the slaves connected to a Modbus master is made available as
112. has been set not to be tracked the status will be shown as good TUS Configuration Confirmation tc Poston o Front Bottom Right Good Front Bottom Left Good Front Top Right Warning Front Top Left Expried Back Bottom Right Good Back Bottom Left Good Back Top Right Good Back Top Left Good Middle Good 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 9 Change Sensors TUS Configuration Screen 2 A coloured icon will be listed on the line of the TC as a visual aid to identify issues quickly The colours will be defined as Green for good Amber for warning and Red for expired Change Sensors button will take you directly to the sensor status page for thermo couple usage This helps to identify the exact issue relating to a thermocouple and take the appropriate action as described in the section TC Usage status screen see Ther mocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 390 If none of the thermocouples have been configured to be included in the usage tracking then the Change Sensors button will be greyed out The Cancel button will simply cancel the dialog and return to the process screen but this will not cancel any changes made in change sensors option The Done button will prompt the Start a TUS now dialog to be displayed Select No to return to the process screen or selects Yes to start TUS The next screen to be dis played will be the start TUS note entry screen see Start a Survey on page 410 43 TV 25 41 I
113. is taken As it already knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next point should be assuming it s on a straight line if the measured value does not equal the pre dicted value the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines at any angle Not just on the horizontal Do you have any examples Example 1 Flow amp Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure A recorder was installed to monitor the flow of a mains water supply At peak demand the mains pressure had been subject to sharp drops in pressure and flow rate and it was nec essary to find the cause of the problem The recorder had to have a fast scan rate in order to capture the glitches The recording period would be over many days if not weeks so storage capacity was at a premium A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a day which was not acceptable As this application consists of long periods of little activity relatively constant flow rate and short periods of high activity rapidly changing flow rate itis ideally suited to Fuzzy Logging During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant the Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times However as soon as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points Example 2 Cold
114. it will be relegated to be a Slave the next time it comes online at start up Notes 1 Password NetSync is heavily dependent on a reliable network If the system seems to be suffering from apparently poor network connectivity then try splitting the password group up into multiple password groups with each group on a separate Set Please see the Manual for more details on Sets 2 Running Password NetSync without the Master of the password group powered up and connected to the network is an error condition Please rectify this situation as soon as possible as Password NetSync cannot be expected to function properly without a pass word group Master being present NOTICE The Password NetSync function in the GR Series recorders uses a Peer to Peer communications protocol to synchronize passwords between the various recorders within the Network Synchronization Group While these systems have been rigorously tested with various network topologies Honeywell cannot guarantee that it will work with every combination of network switches hubs and other Ethernet network communications equipment and settings Users of the Password NetSync function who experience issues with the recorders not being found or losing contact between various Password Slaves and the Password Master will need to troubleshoot their own network to insure proper operation of the Password NetSync function 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 169 Figure 4 1 Example of Peer Net
115. list on as Modbus profile tool data update TrendServer Pro software will generate a modbus profile when data is imported from USB key SD card from a Network Share folder NAS or when it is manually imported via FTP This applies to FTP of setup and FTP of pen data The automatic or scheduled FTP import of data from a recorder does not result in an up dated modbus profile being generated Once a modbus profile has been generated it is im mediately available to the Comms Server but will not be automatically used by the Comms Server 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 265 266 Communications Server Any new connections created in the Comms Server will use the most recent modbus profile that has been generated when importing data on that PC For existing device connections go to the relevant device and press right mouse button for the context menu Select Edit Device and then press OK on the resulting dialog The updat ed modbus profile will now be in use and this should be evident if you graph the data a cou ple of minutes later give enough time for some data to be logged to the database using the updated modbus profile So in summary when updating an GR recorder configuration import the setup or pen data that use the new setup into TrendServer Pro software Do this either via USB SD Card Network Share folder NAS or a manual FTP operation then go to Comms Server and bring up the Edit Device dialog as describ
116. list of available Baud Rates This is the speed in bps bits per second at which data is transferred Byte Options Select this button for a list of available Byte Options The Byte Options consist of 3 digits comprising of Parity set to None N Even E or Odd O 8 Data Bits and Stop Bits signifying the end of the character string 1 or 2 Line Turn Around This is for a 2 wire line type Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can be turned around and data can be received or vice versa Reply Delay Enter a delay time in milli seconds before the recorder sends a reply Recommended delay should be set to 12mS min if using the Comms Server 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 105 Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order which is reversed for application compatibility To check communications connections and trouble shooting network settings versus SCV parameters see Comms Status on page 182 This screen will help to identify which area to focus on if the recorder connections are not doing what you expected When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Web Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services Web The Web browse function is enabled disabled from this menu Select this to enable and al low the recorder to be browsed on
117. lo x y Returns the lower value of x amp y Lo4 lo4 x y x1 y1 Returns the lower value of x y x1 y1 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 3 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description Outside outside x y z Returns x if outside of y amp z otherwise returns 0 Over over x y Returns x if it s larger than y otherwise returns 0 Under under x y Returns x if it s less than y otherwise returns 0 Table 14 4 Script Timers Timers Syntax Description Tget tget x Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start Tpause tpause x Pauses the timer x Treset treset x Resets the timer x Trun trun x y Starts the timer x in y mode Mode 1 reset to 0 and run Mode 0 resume from previous value Timers must return a value All timer commands must have BLKV1 the variable e g BLKV1 tpause 1 Value returned is the same as tget 1 Timers count in seconds Maximum of 20 timers available 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 327 328 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 5 Accessors Syntax Description Ai Ai x Get the value of Analogue Input number x Alamct Almct x y Get the current alarm count for Pen x Alarm y the alarm number as identified in alarm mes sages Alamrt Almrt x y Get the current alarm number for Pen x Alar
118. menu Menu path to current menu Edit Setup Enabled Peni Span 100 000 Maths Type Basic Maths Zero 0 000 Scale Type Linear Divs Select Auto Major Divs None k me B Select the Scale button to take you to the Scale menu Click on Scale to set up each scale profile per pen Units Scale measurement Units Select this and enter the units Up to 16 characters Span This is the highest value of the scale Select to enter the Span value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 85 Zero This is the bottom of the scale Select to enter the Zero value Scale Type Toggle between Linear or Logarithmic Log Divs Select Only available with Linear Scale Type Toggle between Auto or User Defined Major Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the major division position Minor Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the minor division position Start Decade Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the start value of the first decade No Decades Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the number of decades required Max 99 decades although not all will be displayed on the recorder Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format The scientific format displays
119. notification Including Powered On Last powered On Time On since power up Total On time Total Off time Longest Off time Lithium cell life Backlight life left at 10096 brightness Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations last configuration change Print Support optional Enables the printer option to print from various Status screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Language printer AMS2750 TUS AMS2750 TUS activates the TUS screen and the AMS2750 TUS configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750D specification including Thermocouple tracking All of the survey information can be exported to a Report Generating tool 314 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Options Batch Groups The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens within each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Maximum 32 pens per group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user and used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches Counters User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other co
120. on page 395 Other information displayed includes The start time is entered into the started field in the top panel and the elapsed timer shows how much time has passed since the survey was started this will be updated within a 2 second period The Condition field will display the sta tus of running The Start Stop button This displays the configuration confirmation wizard if accepted it starts the TUS running see Configure Confirmation Wizard on page 403 This is only available when a TUS is not running and can be password protected See Passwords AMS2750 on page 419 The Stop button is available when a TUS is running it prompts the user for confirmation to stop the current TUS this button is password protected When the TUS is started an event is triggered and a message is logged into the system events The Configure TUS button The configure TUS button allows you to quickly check and modify the relevant TUS informa tion before starting a TUS this will not start the survey It displays the TUS Configuration Confirmation wizard of which there are two screens It is only available when a TUS is not running and is password protected The Export TUS button The export button allows you to export the most recently completed TUS data file and will prompt for a USB key external SD card or Network Share folder NAS as follows The tus file can be loaded into a PC to be read by the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool whic
121. or higher version is required 280 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Minitrend GR Recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 281 Ethernet 24X TX Power Supply Common Relay 12VDC 30VDC Output 12VAC 20VAC Input Instrun Analogue Input wa or Pulse Input Em CJC Sensor Analogue Input Analogue Output Alarm Digital IO 282 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 10 1 Minitrend GR Spares 50071918 501 50071918 502 50071918 503 Minitrend GR Processor 1GB SD Card Minitrend GR Processor 2GB SD Card Minitrend GR Processor 4GB SD Card Note Customer must supply model number and Serial number of existing unit when placing and order for processor board kits 51453006 501 51453006 502 51453006 503 Minitrend GR Analogue Input 4CH Assy Minitrend GR Analogue Input 6CH Assy Minitrend GR Analogue Input 8CH Assy 51453027 501 51453027 502 Minitrend GR Analogue Output 2CH Assy Minitrend GR Analogue Output 4CH Assy 50001017 502 Minitrend GR Pulse Input 4CH Assy 51453009 501 Minitrend GR Mother Board Assy 51453018 501 51453018 502 Minitrend GR Digital I O 8CH Assy Minitrend GR Digital I O 16CH Assy 51453021 501 51453021 502 Minitrend GR Relay Alarm 4CH Assy Minitrend GR Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 51453015 501 51453015 502 51453015 504 Minitrend GR Power Supply AC Mains Minitrend GR Power Supply AC TX Minitrend GR Pow
122. other notes related This will reflect in TUS Report Add Custom Allows user to add custom images The TC Positioning Layout Form will be displayed see 7C Positioning Layout Form on page 435 Custom images are the re 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool sponsibility of the user and the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool will notify you if the image fails to meet certain requirements ie file type size limitations Remove Custom Button This button remains enabled for only custom images If this but ton is pressed it removes the selected image from the database TC Positioning Layout Form When Add Custom button is used the TC Positioning Layout box appears so you can up load your own image Enter the Layout name and then select the Upload Image button Upload Image Once image is selected it will be shown in Thermocouple Layout image box Image should be in BMP or JPEG format Supported image size is around 260 x 250 pixels If the image is not supported then Error icon is shown besides the Thermocouple Layout image label TC Positioning Layout Layout Name Thermocouple Layout image Upload Image 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 435 Step 8 TUS Offset Information These are offsets information As Found and As Left in which customer would put into the controller to create a bias if they needed to do TUS Offset As Found 5j Note Enter 0 if not used in
123. outputs available for the Multitrend GR Recorder a pen drives each output Analog inputs totalised values or any mathematical result can be re transmitted Update Rate 250 msec all channels Accuracy 0 1 0 500Q load 0 25 500 1KQ load Type 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA Maximum Load Resistance 1000 Ohms Resolution 0 00296 Isolation 300VAC Digital Input Output optional 8 I O or 16 I O all channels may be selected freely as either digital inputs or outputs The Digital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1KHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 16 I O not available for the eZtrend GR 4 relay outputs all four channels are relay outputs only 8 relays 2 DI card two outputs can be configured for use as digital inputs A digital input is provided by a volt free contact between the normally open NO and the common C terminals of an output relay If the 2 Digital inputs are used only 6 relay outputs are available Closed 500 ohms Open gt 300 kohms Transmitter Power optional DR Graphic Minitrend GR eZtrend GRhave 200mA 24VDC 3VDC Multitrend GR has 1 Amp 9 24VDC 3VDC Agency Approval optional cCSAus cULus approvals for Multitrend GR Minitrend GR and DR GraphicRecorder cCSAus Approval for eZ
124. printer connected directly to the recorder via USB no domain is required Ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 see Printer Menu on page 141 Domain For network printers enter your network domain No domain is required for Local printers connected directly to the recorder via USB Use Share Path Check this to enable or disable the Share path Share Path enter network path to folder Note Share Path Should be in lt Machine Name Shared Folder Path gt Format Machine Name should not be IP address 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Share Path Access This network shared folder must have Permission and Security rights read for loading files or write for writing files or both for loading as well as writing files to access the shared path for each user If the user does not have access rights to shared path then user will not be able to access shared path General Publish Share Permissions Security Group or user names e Everyone Gulhane Swapnil E505040 PA4CRIM1 ds honepwell com Add Remove Permissions for Gulhane Swapnil Allow Deny Full Control Change Read Cancel Apply This must be done on a local pc or server where the user wants to have access for any par ticular folder User Administrator of local pc or server needs to right click on any folder that needs access for any particular folder General Publish Share Permissi
125. production TUS Offset As Left 20 Note Enter 0 if not used in production 436 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 9 Plot Readings Form TUS Report Wizard Plot Readings Start the graph plot for each SetPoint when TC s are within 30 Deg F of the SetPoint Time to show readings once stability reached 30 E Minutes Start the graph plot for each Setpoint when TC s are within X Deg of the Setpoint This indicates that it will only start the readings table and graph once all thermocouples are within X degrees of setpoint For example A setpoint is at 100 Deg C and you enter 30 then it will start plotting when all thermocouple readings reach to 70 Deg C This does not affect the data in the TUS file only the data being graphed for the report Time to show readings once stability reached X Minutes This is to allow only spec ified period of recorded data to be in tabular form after TC s are defined as stable or until the temperature moves outside the range detailed For example Only 30 minutes of data shall be in tabular form once stability has been reached 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 437 Step 10 Results and Affirmation This screen summarises each setpoint temperature result by stating which furnace class it met during the TUS and prompts you to enter general survey comments and an affirmation field where you will make the statement as t
126. pulse input channels that can be set up Pulse Input PI4 Frequency Measure Hz Each channel displays its individual settings Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura tion of each Pulse input cc Press the Pulse Input button to display the available pulse inputs Click on individual Pulse Input number to set up each channel profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Hertz Fixed as Frequency Measure in Hertz Update Rate Fixed at 1Hz Label Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input Select and enter a label Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Linearisation Tables Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Field I O gt Linearisation Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input signal to be dis played on the recorder By entering a set of non linear signal input values X into the line arisation table the recorder will use the table to generate linear output Y in engineering units to be displayed and or log on the recorder Select the next available table and rename it for ease of identification by selecting the name button Select the Values button to take you to the st
127. re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being overloaded 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 125 by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrespective of the CLRE x being called for that event Set clear a digital output This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output See Table 14 2 Maths Function Table on page 324 Counters Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event Setup a User Counter Select the next available Counter number Enabled Y Name Counter 1 Start At Rollover At d Enabled In the Counter menu tick to Enable Name Name the counter for ease of identification Start At Enter the number at which you want the counter to Start At Rollover Enter the number at which you
128. ready installed If Adobe Reader is required you will be prompted to begin installation An installable version is provided on the product envelope 422 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Introduction This document provides information regarding AMS2750 Report Generation Tool user inter face and will help you in understanding how this application works and what the various Screens are This application is used to create TUS and SAT Reports based on the AMS275 standard Reports will be created in PDF format Splash Screen This is the first screen that appears when you run the application It remains on screen for around one second and then disappears This indicates that AMS2750 Report Generation Tool application is about to start Report Tool User Interface When the tool opens it will be blank At the top are two tabs labelled Reports and Help TUS Report SAT Report Browse Logo Exit Reports tab select to create a TUS report or a SAT report using the creation wizard The Browse Logo option is here so you can select a logo to use as a header on your report Exit will produce a question asking if you want to close the application Yes will close the application Help Tab this opens the Help menu and the About sub menu gives version information of the application 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 423 424 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Browse Logo You can insert your own company Logo imag
129. recorders up to 2GB for eZtrend GR Removable SD card and USB storage See Storage Media Format on page 184 for formatting information of SD cards and USB keys SD card is an option for the eZtrend GR No moving parts all solid state flash memory Security Stringent Total Data integrity Password Protection 21CFR Part 11 ESS Extended Security System Password Newtwork Synchronisation Hardware Configuration Lock Plus Health Watch for preventative maintenance Remote Access Advanced Software Data Analysis at your PC Independent Chart and Logging speeds Global Language Support Rapid review and replay of data at recorder Approvals CE cCSAus UL FM approval for the Minitrend GR Multitrend GR NEMA 4X IP66 option AMS2750 functionallity option Active X control French and German USB keyboard compatibility Time Sync on Digital inputs Password Net Sync a group of up to 32 recorders 1 sync 31 Temperature Uniformity Survey functionality option AMS 2750 only Multitrend GR and the DR Graphic recorders Logging speed up to 50Hz 20 msec 10Hz 100msec for eZtrend GR Upto 16 Analogue Inputs for the Minitrend GR and the DR Graphic Up to 48 Analogue Inputs for the Multitrend GR Upto 12 Analogue Inputs for the eZtrend GR 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Remote Viewer via the recorder web page Events set up occurrences to trigger a
130. risk of unintended data loss if there is a PC failure and the data is not backed up The PC s performance is dependant on the size of the database and the PC characteristics e g Performance Memory Hard drive space along with how many recorders are connect ed to it An initial recommendation would be that if your process involves archiving to remov able media DVD for example then the Database should be kept to 4GB to ensure that it fits onto a DVD for long term storage This would provide good PC performance make ar chiving of the data easier and limit the risk of data loss between archives As with any rec ommendation you need to evaluate this relative to your needs this is your data and it is important that a suitable process is put in place to ensure that it remains protected and se cure while achieving adequate process performance Comms Server Setup The comms server software can be run independently to the main application software by creating a shortcut to the Startup folder If over writing a previous version of GR comms server only the local server will retain the database information and load all the devices and settings from the databases Any other remote database servers will have to be added man ually Comms Server new user Using the comms server from scratch requires 1 Add a new device to a Communications port Devices will appear under the Communi cations Port when selected in the left window and will appe
131. sage in question Select Jump and the toolbar buttons will change to Prev ious and Next Use these to jump to the previous or next message on the screen See Figure 6 3 on page 229 Action Prev Next Exit to return to the Replay screen Messages List links to Replay Screen To locate the time of an occurrence on a chart you can select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available 230 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Hide Pens When in replay mode all pens are initially displayed to allow for better analysis Pens in re play can be quickly turned off leaving just the pens you want to analyse by pressing the dig ital panel for a pen the trace will be removed off the chart and the digital panel will go dark grey but still showing the pen name Press the digital panel of a removed pen to reinstate At least one pen must remain on the replay screen and any pens removed will be reinstated after exiting replay Tem deg C 7 28 Apr07 27 23 27 23 Pen 2 deg C 27 540 27 538 Pen 3 96 1 2e4 01 1 1e 01 Pen 4 96 p 6e 01 5 6e 01 In the Replay screen the Pen 5 36 traces for pens 5 and 8 have Pens 9 been hidden to allow for 56 80 56 74 viewing Touch the DPM on Pen 7 96 the scr
132. selecting this button and changing the date using the on screen date selection This will reset the next control thermocouple calibration date Process Inst Displays status of the thermocouple usage tracking this shows the rolled up status for all TC s being tracked the colour of the box determines the state of the TC closest to expiry If the user presses the TC Status button this goes directly to the TC tracking status screen See Thermocouple Usage on page 390 Note this button shows the status for ALL thermocouples being monitored for usage in the system not just for group being displayed Timer Reset When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed you may be asked to enter a user name and password if enabled See Passwords AMS2750 on page 419 The dialog box shows the next suggested date for SAT and TUS depending on Furnace class material and instrumentation type or provides a date 1 month in the future for Control TC or Instrument calibration SAT System Accuracy Tests SAT AMS2750 Section 3 4 defines what equipment requires SAT the frequency waiver condi tions and the test procedure to use Refer to the section on AMS2750 Process mode on page 378 onwards for more details on SAT I O AMS2750 Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Normally labelled Field IO this button has been modified for AMS2750 configuration All other analogue inputs are
133. server is used to configure logging and manage databases and reflect each devices status See Commu nications Server on page 258 SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Comms and Trend Manager Suite Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer Logged to Database Comms Software Server 11L ik p M TrendServer 1 Database Server 1 Software Data base BICI Logged to Database Comms Software Comms and Trend Manager Suite Server 2 in CUIR TrendServer 2 Data base Database Server 2 Software Data base Data base TrendServer software is required to set up and run communications to and from the de vices and the PC software TrendServer offers the ability to download and import data using FTP File Transfer Pro tocol via the Ethernet Interface To use it you must have a device with communications fitted as standard or as an option on the eZtrend recorder with Ethernet as your active port and the FTP enabled TrendServer is part of the TrendManager Suite complete with its own Communica tions Server function TrendServer is a fully network aware package which allows data viewing archiving and communication over Ethernet and RS485 Ethernet can provide com munication
134. set As you move the slider to the right towards Chart you will notice the allocated internal flash memory space for the chart data will increase in the bar above the slider As you move the slider to the left towards Log you will notice an increase in the internal flash memory for the Log data in the bar above the slider Log Chart Coverage Control Log Total Available Space 69MB Chart H inna nnnennneeeenen nn ee eee ne eee eee eee eee H Alloc 32 5MB Min Required Alloc 37 0MB Chart Total 10 Pens Running Fast 94d Medium 54w Slow 7 2w Log Total Pens Logging Reset Shortest Pen 1 2Hz 9 5h 286 0KB Longest Pen 3 2Hz 11 3h 357 5KB Default Storage Bias screen 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 149 150 The Total Available Space bar also contains minimum chart and log memory allocation this is shown in the hatched areas at both ends of the bar You cannot use this reserved internal flash memory The Reset button will return the slider and the memory allocation to its original position when you entered the Storage Bias screen The screen also shows chart information regarding how many pens are currently enabled and how much time it will take to fill the chart memory depending on the chart speeds se lected When you move the slider to increase the chart memory the amount of time to fill the chart memory will also increase If you decrease the chart memory thus increasing the log memory the amo
135. slider If a specific colour is required enter the colour number by selecting the box under the Red Green and Blue sliders and the colour will be change accordingly in the New box When the desired shade has been chosen select the tick box to confirm you choice Each new colour will be saved and will appear in the Recent tab Save Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Save Layouts can be saved to SD card USB key removable storage media or to a Network Share folder NAS Plug in a removable storage media device and the corresponding button on the screen will become active select the relevant media button Enter the file name required in the File name box Maximum of 50 characters File format is ay click on the Save button For Network Share folder select the NAS button and the Save Layout to NAS dialog will open Enter the Layout file name in Filename and click on Save The SD card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 SD card is available as a credit op tion for the eZtrend GR Device Selection E 2 SD Card USB 1 Free 82 6 MB Free 195 5 Size 122 0 MB MB Size 247 2 MB lt 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK For Saving and Loading Layouts NAS button will only be enabled if Use Share path is tog
136. table the following other items are copied Table 24 1 TUS Mode Process Mode Track usage flag Track usage flag Serial number Manufacturer Type Type Renewed On date Renewed On date Track Cal flag Track Cal flag Next Cal date Next Cal date Cal Adjust table in full Cal Adjust table in full Certificate number Certificate number Cert No enter the certificate number for the sensor 20 alphanumeric Any sensor correction factor is deemed to be a single point cal configured within the Ana logue input configuration menu Note All above information is copied from the source channel as is and the user would need to go to each designation channel and adjust the specific information that would be different for the designation channels Pens for TC s TUS Mode This is not available in TUS mode available in Process mode only 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 401 TUS mode TUS survey process screen A survey status screen is available as a standard process screen in the DR Graphic amp SX recorder it is available at all times and the screen cannot be deleted See AMS2750 TUS Screen on page 394 This screen is only available when TUS is selected in the credit system See AMS2750 TUS Credit Option on page 393 The survey status screen displays information about the TUS and provides on screen but tons to control the survey Start Stop
137. the Pon 57 0 Pan am value to the power of 10 shown here Notice the 96 ry value has been rounded up aeng Normal Scientific Auto Toggle Between Automatic number for matting and User Defined After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When this pen setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup for all other pens Logging Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Logging Menu path to current menu L Enabled Enabled Type Continuous Type Fuzzy Rate Units Seconds Rate Units Seconds Rate 10 Sec Rate 10 Sec Alarm Rate Units Milliseconds Auto Fit Alarm Rate 500ms 2Hz IY Band 1 95 Y zs juo jid B JH Pen Logging can be set to log as Continuous or Fuzzy 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate logging for this pen Type Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen Sample Average or Max Min Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored Fuzzy Logging has intelligent resources to enable the most effective and efficient way of using
138. the TUS file location and move you on to the next screen The Cancel button shows a message box Do you like to exit TUS Report Wizard If Yes the wizard is cancelled TUS Report Wizard TUS File Location This TUS Report creation wizard will create the report based on selected TUS file Please select the TLIS file for processing TUS File Location 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 2 Certificate and Procedure Number TUS Report Wizard Certificate and Procedure Number Please enterthe Report Reference Number for this completed TUS Please enter the Procedure Number used for this TUS process Next Survey Due Date Editable MM DD YYY 10 31 2008 October 2008 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 7 8 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 Next Survey Due Date Editable MM DD YYYY 10 24 2008 Q Next Survey Date should be greater than current date Please enter the Report Reference Number for this completed TUS Please enter the procedure number used for this TUS process Next Survey Due Date Editable MM DD YYYY This field is derived from the TUS data file using the fields Instrument type A to E Material Type Parts or Raw Material and Fur nace class Calendar select button is available If the next Next Survey Due Date is past the Survey date a warning box will appear Next Survey date should be greater than current date
139. the Thermal Processing Equipment This information will be included in the TUS report Purpose Asset Tag Model ID Serial Number Cal Certificate No Cal Due Date MM DD YYYY Purpose what is it used for a part or raw material Asset Tag enter for the instrument Model ID Model number of the instrument Serial Number Serial number of the instrument Cal Certificate No Calibration certificate number for the furnace instrument Cal Due Date MM DD YY Y If date is valid then it is compared with Survey Date and if the date is past the survey date then message box will be shown that Calibration Due Date is past the Survey Date would you like to continue The number of instrument boxes to be completed depends on the furnace class and the in strumentation used on the furnace complete as many as required based on AMS2750 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 431 Step 5 Furnace Comments Enter the serial number for the furnace or oven Allows you to enter any general comments concerning the furnace these will be included in the report TUS Report Wizard 432 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 6 Site Information Enter the Customer Name Location Address and Contact Name that will be entered onto the report Please enter the name of the Survey Testing Company if the survey is not performed in house If the survey is performed in house
140. the chart speed on all screens that have charts The Settings button will auto hide in 4 sec onds touch the chart again to activate To change the chart speed from Slow Medium or Fast return to a process screen with a chart and touch the chart This will produce the Settings button in the top right of the screen select this to display the current chart speeds setting for Fast Medium and Slow The cur rent selection will be highlighted To change the actual chart speed setting for Fast Medium and Slow see Charts on page 144 rp p Ze TO Oey c D 6 Screen 5 03 22 00 09 24 00 TAL 2 1 06 MINIM Press the Hot Button LAT Fast 600mm h 23 to trigger an event Medium 20mm h Ll AJ Touch the screen to produce the Settings button Select Settings to NET m ee produce the chart speeds menu QuickView Changing chart speeds can be used as quick view of the data at different resolutions Hot Button This function is disabled by default To enable the Hot Button go to Settings on page 160 The hot button has a customizable caption name up to max 7 characters The Hot Button function when active as an Event cause enables the user to select the Hot Button on the active screen and the corresponding event that the user needs to set will be triggered The Multitrend GR and DR Graphic supports 4 hot buttons Minitrend GR supports 2 hot buttons eZtrend GR supports 1 hot button If enabled hot buttons will al
141. the current pen value and fills the queue with that average causing the damping effect to be baselined at the current reading No prfill will cause the first few samples to have a greater effect on the average as they will not be diluted by 60 samples but 1 2 3 4 up to 60 after the 10 minutes Group This pen can be allocated to a Group with other pens to display information be used for batch control or run reports on groups of pens Select this to display the list of available Pen Groups If you select a group here this pen will be added to it Maximum24 pens per group for Multitrend GR 16 for DR Graphic and Minitrend GR and 8 for eZtrend GR The group can then be renamed to rename these groups see Groups on page 142 Groups are used as a part of the Batch system see Batch Menu on page 138 Groups are also used as a part of AMS2750 see AMS2750 Process Menu on page 379 Colour Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if required Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour Trace Width Select and set the Trace Width for this pen when it is displayed on a chart The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Scale Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Scale Individually configure each scale per pen in the scale
142. the equivalent Hot Button is selected eg HB1 in a Process screen the Replay screen will be started This does not apply to Non Process screens The Hot buttons will appear in the top right of the screen but will not activate on a non process screen The replay screen has many features and functions so go to Heplay on page 228 Screen List Main Menu Screen Screen List The Screen button produces a list of all available screens Select to make this the current Screen active on the recorder To add a new screen go to Add Screen in Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Lay out on page 157 Clean Screen Main Menu Screen Clean Screen The Clean Screen function disables the touch screen for 30 seconds so that the screen can be cleaned A dialog box will appear informing you You have 30 seconds to clean the Screen Press escape if you wish to close this dialog early The escape key option would only be available if a USB keyboard was plugged in The box will also display a time bar to show the 30 seconds of time lapsing See Cleaning Instructions on page 301 Calibrate Main Menu Screen Calibrate Your touch screen on the recorder is calibrated before leaving the factory If when you use the recorder the screen does not match where you are touching it then calibration will be required Select the Calibrate button and follow the on screen instructions to calibrate the touch screen Touch Test Main M
143. the error alert box will disappear If Auto Clear is switched off you will be required to press OK on the screen error alert message Enable Reflash If Reflash is enabled and a time set the error alert message will appear again at the time specified until the error is resolved With Reflash enabled pressing the OK button on the screen message will only make the message disappear until the next reflash time occurs Reflash Time Set this to how often you want the error alert message to repeat until the problem is solved When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Display alert as an event effect This feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker See Event Effects contin ued on page 122 130 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Factory Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory The Factory menu contains information on the Firmware Credit System Upgrading the re corder Firmware CJC and Analogue Input Card Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup function and a Localisation menu we Si FW Upgrade Calibration Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial no of the recorder how many credits are available displays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active Se
144. the factory These are pre stored calibration val ues that cannot be changed by the user If the recorder is re calibrated to a User Cal the factory values can be restored at any time User Cal User calibration can be applied at any time To meet the accuracy values spec ified see Input Range Performance Accuracy Table on page 312 calibration source should be accurate to 0 01 full scale or better 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK On initial power up the Factory Cal and the User Cal are the same 5 z T SAI Calibration Calibrate AI Slot A T Lee ife o S tate Jz Jle Slot amp unida fejejsj sjsjsjsjs Use Factory Settings 8 Use User Settings HB Recalibrate The AI Calibration menu displays a button for each Analogue Input card fitted Select the desired slot button and select the Range required to be calibrated from the drop down list eg 50V Each card has channels numbered 1 to 8 Underneath each channel is the type of cali bration Select the button below the corresponding channel number and select the type of cali bration from the list in this case Recalibrate The Recalibrate icon will appear under that channel Table 4 8 Analogue In Calibration Calibration Type Factory User Recalibrate Recalibrate All Factory All The Calibration Positive Range box appears with instructions to connect the top limit of the input ra
145. the rear cover to protect the wiring and to minimize external effects that could impact the performance of the CJC For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 281 Analogue Input Channel Numbers Analogue Input cards are either 4 6 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even if only 4 or 6 are operational Table 2 3 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Analogue Input card Card Position Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1108 9 to 16 17 to 24 251032 33 to 40 41 to 48 Table 2 4 eZtrend GR Analogue Input cards Card 3 CH 6 CH 9 CH 12 CH A 1 8 1 6 1 8 1 6 B 9 14 9 14 Analogue Input Connection Details Current Input For Current mA Input fit a 10 resistor across the and pins of the 12 way mating half analogue connector Figure 2 15 shows a 10 2 30 196 resistor fitted to channel 5 for a current mA input Thermocouples Ensure polarity of thermocouple is correct Resistance Thermometers If using 2 wire R T the and terminals must be linked together See Figure 2 16 Input signal wiring on page 31 Analogue Input Signal Wiring A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel eg 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges Do not apply a voltage above 1 2V to the pin Fa
146. the scan rate storage capacity and record ing time See Appendix F Fuzzy Logging on page 345 Rate Units Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the logging rate units from the drop down menu Rate This is the speed at which data is required to be logged If the Millisecond option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Fastest rate is 20mS and slowest is 60 hours Alarm Rate Units Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Set the Units for the Alarm logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu Alarm Rate Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an active alarm state To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an alarm state see Change Log in the Alarms menu If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Alarm Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry PreTrigger activate pre triggering for that pen any alarm on that pen will cause the pre trigger system to be activated Only the first 16 pens can be configured for pre trig gering For details on the Pre Trigger function and configuration for the pre trigge
147. the set up to and allow for naming the setup file Maximum of 50 characters File format is set The SD card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Load Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Layout Setups can be loaded from SD card USB key or Network Share folder NAS The Load but ton will produce a list of source files to load setups from The SD card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Back Button Takes you back to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Edit Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Edit Setup will access the main configuration of the recorder through further sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 206 G Edi
148. to NV EEP 4 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on Al card ReadDe Diagnostics ROM faultAlCal Error writing Al calibration to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 5 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on Al card Diagnostics ROM MakeEmptyAlCalHist Error writing Al calibration history to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 6 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on Al card Error Diagnostics ROM writing Al calibration history to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 7 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on AO card Error writing to Diagnostics ROM AO Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 8 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on AO card ReadDe Diagnostics ROM faultAOCal Error writing AO calibration data to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 9 3 3 Board calibration could not be persisted on AO card MakeEmp Diagnostics ROM tyAOCalHist Error writing AO calibration history to EE Messages Error writing to NV EEP 10 3 3 Board calibration history could not be persisted on AO card Diagnostics ROM Error writing AO calibration history to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 11 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on digital I O card Diagnostics ROM Error writing to DIO Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 12 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on alarm card Error writing to Diagnostics ROM AR Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Er
149. to change the chart speeds Permission Area 43 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 223 224 Hardware Configuration Lock The Hardware Configuration Lock feature is located on the Processor board and works in conjunction with the Credit function to prevent any configuration changes once the configu ration switch has been set to the unlocked position See Options on page 196 With the credit function active the switch must be set to the unlock position to make configura tion changes By default the configuration will not be locked Only in case of regulatory requirements the factory can lock by adding the cap JP2 on this connector It can be locked simply by a small plastic cap placed on the JP2 link which will short the jumper in the hardware which in turn is sensed by Firmware and it will lock the recorder configuration The lock can be easily accessed just by removing the back panel and simply adding to lock or removing to unlock this cap link from the board Figure 5 15 on page 224 shows the Processor board with the Hardware Lock in a red box This is simple two pin jumper Con nector Header designated as JP2 on board This operation should be performed by au thorized personal The JP2 lock unlock on the Processor board is the same for the Minitrend GR Multi trend GR and the DR Graphic recorders Figure 5 15 Hardware Configuration Lock Processor board Hardware Lock location on Processor board Unloc
150. to the original setting Reset Passwords Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Heset Password This will produce a text box warning that if you reset the passwords all the current settings will be lost and the password system will return to the factory default setting Select whether to Continue or Stop the reset procedure Ensure that passwords entered by customers are mix of capital letters small letters num bers and special characters Change Passwords Main Menu Configure Passwords Change Passwords The Change Password function can be accessed by all users Select Change Password and enter your user name and old password you will then be prompted to enter your new pass word twice to confirm 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 167 Password Network Synchronisation Password NetSync Main Menu Configure Passwords Pwd NetSync Passwords can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a mas ter of a password group and other recorders can be added to that password group as slaves The master will ensure all passwords and password policies are synchronised with all re corders in its password group Limited changes can be made on slave recorders eg the user may change passwords and this will be propagated to all the other devices in the pass word group Password Net Sync Rules Before starting read through this check list 1 To enable a recorder to use Password Net Sy
151. unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 140 Field 2 Props Defaults to Description Same as Field 1 Props but for Description Field 3 Props Defaults to Comment Same as Field 1 Props but for Comment Single Screen Batch The Single Screen Batch allows you to view and enter all the batch details on a single screen If this is not selected the Batch Wizard will enable separate screens to enter the same information The batch fields are Batch Name User Id Lot Number Description and Comment are available for viewing and entering details on a single page using the Single Screen batch enabled if disabled a separate screen will be required for each field See Batch Setup Batch Groups on page 180 The Lot number is unique for each batch on a recorder and can be modified by the User The Lot number starts at 1 and increments by 1 or can be selected from a predefined list This is irrespective of whether the user is using Batch Wizard or Single Screen Batch to enter the batch details Groups must be set up see Groups on page 142 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 139 Group In the Batch menu select a Group Auto Pop Wizard When enabled this will automatically populate the Batch Control screen with the properties entered into that specific Group Auto Pop Name This is the name of the group that will have it s properties populate the Batch Control screen Zero Pad Coun
152. volatile count then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 333 334 Full Maths amp Script Processing Example 3 The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of time that Input 1 is the highest of 1 2 3 amp 4 Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement The Pseudo code is written as If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value then display the timer If input 1 is not the highest input value then stop totalising time and return the current timer value We know that in Example 1 the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1 and as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer this could be modified to allow the user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows if D11 1 if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the DI 1 is not set If it isn t then Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to chan
153. ways be visible on the top status bar at right corner below recorder name and date time la bels To set up a Hot Button as an Event cause go User Action sub menu in Event Causes on page 115 After setting up the event cause user can set up event effect See Event Ef fects on page 119 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 235 236 Screen Activity Alarm Markers Alarm markers appear when an alarm is setup in the Pen Alarms menu Hi A Y and Low alarm markers appear as a triangle on a DPM or Bar pointing up for a Hi alarm and down for a Low alarm See Alarms Menu on page 88 Deviation Alarm Markers These are diamond shape markers Deviation is how far this pen can de viate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Alarms Menu on page 88 to set up the alarm Type Deviation Level and the Ref Pen Rate of Change Alarm Markers There are two types of rate of Change Alarms Rate Up and Rate Down ail i They will appear on a DPM or Bar when a Rate Up or Rate Down type alarm has been set up in the Alarms Menu on page 88 and has been triggered The Rate Up Alarm Marker will slope up to the right and the Rate Down Alarm Marker will slope down to the right Alarm Marker Flash Colours For Hi Low and Deviation alarms Table 6 1 Alarm Markers Flash Colour E Magenta flash In alarm not acknowledged A Yellow flash In alarm acknowledged latched alarm A Cyan blue flash Out of alarm
154. window The main window will split to give additional in formation for databases showing comms port and device details Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port the device can then be configured for logging The devices appear in the database and these databases are held within database servers Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview on page 258 shows the comms status screen in the left window from the top is displayed Database Serv er Local and remote database and devices held on the Local database All Logging config uration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms Server Connected databases are displayed with a green icon If the database is in red it is not con nected check the P Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected on the device Un tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data base connection This section looks at the Comms Server s main elements displayed in the Status Screen Database Servers Local and Remote Servers Databases Communication Ports Data base logging and Client connections Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other databases on a remote database server in another location To connect to a remote data base server the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held Items with a sign signifies there are items listed within
155. without having to change the configuration The variables can be used within the Maths and script using UV1 to UV32 and can also be set within the maths using the func tion UVSET x y where x the user variable number 1 to 32 and y is the value The User variables are also non volatile See Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 321 Script Timers Main Menu Process Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired Previously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event system Select a Timer that can be stopped started and reset 5 Access to timers via the script is still available in Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 322 Reports Process Main Menu Process Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event system to show dai ly weeks monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports Menu on page 153 To trigger a report using the event system see Event Effects on page 119 e iailieports Reset d Run This will list the reports that are available Before a report can be r
156. 0 enter 1801 First 10 addresses and end address shown in all tables for reference Analogue Input value 48 inputs max Address Address TUS Tm 51 52 25 66 1800 6145 Analog In 1 Start Address A 6 1802 6147 Analog In 2 A 6 1804 6149 Analog In 3 A 6 1806 6151 Analog In 4 A 6 1808 6153 Analog In 5 A 6 180A 6155 Analog In 6 A 6 180C 6157 Analog In 7 A 6 180E 6159 Analog In 8 A 6 1810 6161 Analog In 9 A 6 1812 6163 Analog In 10 A 6 185E 6239 Analog In 48 end address A 6 Relay Output Digital Input 48 inputs max Allows you to read digital inputs and set relay outputs over Modbus Address Address Description Hex Decimal 1 9 1 9 Relay Out Digital In 1 9 1 start Address A F 10 15 Relay Out Digital In 10 15 10 19 16 25 Relay Out Digital In 16 25 1A 1F 26 31 Relay Out Digital In 26 31 20 29 32 41 Relay Out Digital In 32 41 2A 2F 42 47 Relay Out Digital In 42 47 30 48 Relay Out Digital In 48 48 end address 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 355 356 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Communications Inputs 32 comms values max Address Address Descrip
157. 07 00 00 10 mins div Po ioos 28513 replay chart o A Chart Exit 100 04 00 00 06 07 Jul 06 07 10 00 quo 07 20 00 07 07 Jul 06 07 Mj 06 07 Jul 06 07 4 hour div replay chart Zoom Soo 20 076 In 5 mins div Fast chart ws zs replay chart speed Zoom 600mm hr Out g vw A Out Chart Exit 06 00 00 2 00 00 10 00 00 07 Jul 06 b7 Jul 06 7 Jul 06 07 14 00 07 16 00 07 18 00 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 2 hour div 2 mins div replay chart 23 043 27309 replay chart die 28947 2d 05 Slow chart speed aa En EA M bmm hr Rev 06 00 00 07 00 00 08 00 00 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 07 14 00 07 19 00 07 16 00 07 Jul 06 07 J 06 07 Jul 06 1 hour div replay chart one 755 isa 1 min div Medium bbios 24547 replay chart chart speed 20mm hr Print Rev a 9 Print Rev Fwd In Out Chart Exit 234 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Chart Speeds This is the speed at which the chart travels across the screen not replay mode There are three categories Slow Medium and Fast default chart speeds that can be set up in Charts on page 144 To change the chart speed gently tap the touch screen on a chart to activate the Settings button in the top right of the screen Press the Settings button to produce a drop down list of the 3 chart speed categories Select the desired speed and this will immediately change
158. 1 Alarm Status continued Bit 0 is Alarm 1 Bit 1 is Alarm 2 Bit 2 is Alarm 3 Bit 3 is Alarm 4 Bit 4 is Alarm 5 Bit 5 is Alarm 6 this is decoded as follows Bit number 0 2 4 5 Alarm Number 1 3 5 6 Decimal 1 4 16 32 So if you request the alarm status from Pen 1 and it returns the value 41 that number is made from 32 8 1 i e bits 5 3 and O In other words alarms 6 4 and 1 are active 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 359 360 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Totalisers Totaliser values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Input Text message This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the chart and added to the message log The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of ASCII characters which need not be null terminated It operates by utilising modbus function code 16 0x10 Preset Multiple registers and the unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map Table A 1 The modbus message format follows that shown in section 3 7 of the document cited The Start Address will be 00 04 and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the follow ing text message As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16 the Number of Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to give the lowest integer such that Number of Addresses 2 Byte Count For example if Byte Count 4
159. 1 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written to EEPROM on configu Diagnostics ration change Error writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 2 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written to EEPROM on configu Diagnostics ration change Error writing AO config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 3 3 3 The digital configuration could not be written to EEPROM on con Diagnostics figuration change Error writing DIG config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 4 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change Error writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 5 3 3 The AO configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change Error writing AO config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 6 3 3 The digital pulse configuration could not be written on configura Diagnostics tion change Error writing DIG config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 7 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after ChangeRange command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 8 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after ChangeAcqFreq command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 9 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnost
160. 1 45 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 3 16 51 45 08 03 2008 Upscale bumout on chan 2 16 51 45 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 1 16 51 43 08 03 2008 Session updated Commit to 11 16 51 08 08 09 2008 TC 4 expired on number of use 16 51 07 08 09 2008 Setup Changed 16 51 07 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan amp 16 51 07 08 03 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 5 he gt e ore Tee m es When the end of life of a thermocouple is reached a message is added to the system mes sage list to indicate a thermocouple has reached end of life for each thermocouple When the recorder is in AMS2750 process mode as an option in the credit menu you can not select the Track Usage option for B R or S type Thermocouples Per AMS2750 these are considered noble metal thermocouples and should be tracked based on when they require recalibration and not based on uses The other types of ther mocouples can be selected for the track usage function but the B R or S types greyed out and cannot be selected 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 391 TUS mode 392 TUS mode Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Mode The Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS is a key requirement for a Nadcap audit The ba sic test is to determine how well a furnace performs relative to it s design In particular the uniformity of the temperature within the volume of the working area of the furnace compared to the programmed setpoint There ar
161. 10 AMS2750 TUS activates the TUS screen and the AMS2750 TUS configuration menus for fur naces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermocouple tracking All of the survey information can be exported to a Report Generating tool Multitrend GR and DR Graphic only Batch Groups 5 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens with in each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches Counters 3 User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other counters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master 10 Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ether net and RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slave device while also being a master RS485 is not available for eZtrend GR Remote Viewer 3 Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email 3 Setup email accounts to send the following When an
162. 15 UK Shutdown Server If the Communication Service Ul is open with Non Admin privileges the following message will appear Select OK and the Communication Service UI will be closed but the TrendServer soft ware will still be running TMS Communications Service is not installed or Failed to open the service If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges the following message will appear Select OK and the Communication Service UI will be closed and TrendServer software is also successfully stopped Communications ServiceUI Ci TMS Communications Service successfully stopped Select No and no actions will be taken Modbus Capabilities 1 The Comms Server is a Modbus master It has no slave capability 2 The maximum speed of data transfer over Modbus is 1 one reading per second per channel 3 The maximum speed of data logging of realtime Modbus data is 1 one reading per second per channel 4 The maximum number of devices depends on whether the connection is serial or ether net On the serial port there is a physical limit of 31 devices The Modbus comms can sup port anywhere between 4 and 10 devices at a rate of 1 reading per second depending on the complexity of the recorder configurations As the rate is decreased from 1 one reading per second the number of supported devices increases On the Ethernet connection the current physical limit is
163. 2 500hr if used at 80 For this recorder the backlight cannot be changed separately so the display has to be replaced Reducing the brightness can significantly improve the life of the backlight 2 At extended temperatures these times are reduced 3 The backlight is a consumable item and will NOT last forever 4 A maintenance schedule of exchanging backlights should be every 5 years to maintain the optimal screen clarity Operating Temperature Operating temperatures are described in Specification Tables on page 307 Prolonged operation at temperatures over 50 C will accelerate degradation of the display backlight If the unit has been moved from a cold environment into a warm one ensure that the unit has reached a minimum temperature of 12 C or is left to stand for 1 hour at room temper ature before applying power to ensure no condensation remains in the unit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 301 302 Instrument Care and Maintenance Touch Screen Care should be taken with the touch screen when handling the unit Sharp and hard objects may pierce the touch screen and damage the display Only use the stylus provided for screen selection Clean the screen using a suitable touch screen cleaner Abrasive materials will damage the touch screen Protective Screen covers are available to provide additional protection against abrasive ma terials See Section 10 Spares List on page 281 Calibration It is recommended
164. 2015 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description HPC1 to HPC48 HPC1 High Pulse count using Pulse cards Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter nal memory starts to recycle over write IOC1 to IOC48 IOC1 Digital Input Output counters for Digital in and relay out LPC1 to LPC48 LPC1 Low Pulse count using Digital IO cards in pulse count mode Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n 1 to 96 Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n 1 to 96 Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n 1 to 96 Pen report Maximum Value prmax x y Z Gets the Pen Maximum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Minimum Value prmin x y z Gets the Pen Minimum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Average Value prave x y Z Gets the Pen Average value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Totaliser Value prtot x y z Gets the Pen Totaliser value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month
165. 25 to 28 33 to 36 41 to 44 Pulse Input Connection Details Do not connect anything to terminals marked NC Not Connected For Frequency and Volt age levels see Specification Tables on page 307 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 NC NC NC NC 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Transmitter Power Supply Card The Minitrend GRand the eZtrend GR Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 200 mA andis fitted to the 24V OV power supply card within the unit Connection is made via a 2 way connector at the rear of the unit the mating half O Q is supplied with this option For connector position see page 24 The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolat Minitrend 24V DC TXP ed from the recorder and is not referenced to ground The Multitrend GR Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 1 A and is fitted below the power supply card within the unit Connection is made via two 10 way connectors see page 24 mating halves supplied with this option The Multitrend GR transmitter power supply is isolated from the recorder A red LED light will illuminate when there is voltage on the connectors The LED is situated between the two connectors at the back of the unit See page 24 Recommended wire size for termination connector 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 123456789 10 1112151415 16 7 18 19
166. 30 seconds after it was registered 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 317 318 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix A Quality and Safety CE Mark Honeywell GR Series recorders are compliant with Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC as amended by 93 68 EEC and the Electromagnetic Capability Directive 2004 108 EC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Safety The product range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 2010 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and labo ratory Use and UL 61010 1 3rd Edition and CSA 22 2 No 61010 1 2012 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be im paired 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 319 320 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix B Maths Expressions Full Maths amp Script Processing The GR Series recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions Add Subtract Divide and Multiply There are two further options that can be added Full Maths and an extremely powerful Scripting processing module Scripting delivers an additional level of enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing Full and Scripting Maths must be activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option Scripting is not available on the eZtrend GR When a recorder setup is loaded into the TrendManager software the Maths capabilities will be transferred with the setup If you are creat
167. 34 H 288mm 11 34 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 80mm 3 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors Cutout 281 x 281mm 11 06 x 11 06 Weight Minitrend GR Recorder 2 7 Kg 6lb max Multitrend GR Recorder 10 Kg 22 Ib max eZtrend GR Recorder 2 4 Kg 5 3lb max Colour Bezel Grey std or Black option Wiring Connections IEC Power Plug Removable terminal strip for input and alarm connections 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 311 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Input Range Performance Accuracy Table Analogue Input standard and expansion cards Input Actuation Accuracy m Input Impedance Linear Range Temp Stability Millivolts DC 5 to 5 10 to 10 0 2 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 100 to 100 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 250 to 250 500 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 1000 to 1000 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms Volts DC 0 3 to 0 3 0 6 to 0 6 1 5 to 1 5 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 3 to 3 6 to 6 12 to 12 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms Milliamps 4 to 20 0 to 20 0 2 F S 0 01 C Ohms 200 0 to 200 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 500 0 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 1000 0 to 1000 0 1
168. 4 7 Table 4 7 more embedded variables Syntax Syntax Syntax An GLBVn HPULn BATMDn HPC1 LPULn BLKVn INTHRS RAn CFFREE IOC1 RTCOMPn CJCn LPC1 RTCALn CJCnC Pn Tn CVn PnAnL UC1 Dn PnMINU USB1FREE DIOn PnMAXU USB2FREE EC1 PSTVn UV1 FTPHRS PRC 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK In Figure 4 12is an example that shows pen information can be used as an embedded var aible An example for pen information in Mark on Chart enter name v P1 T P1 V P1 U Figure 4 10 Embedded variables for pen information Mark Chart Text mma FSERESFRESPSITRCRFS FS name v P1 T P1 v L P1 U Boala Jr Ja Ses This will display the marker as Furnace1 Temperature is 14 81 Deg C If Pen 1 name is Furnace1 Tag is Temperature the current value is 14 81 and the Unit text is Deg C Embedded process variables can be used for Pen reports See Pen Report Syntax on page 156 Embedded variable are not case sensitive and spaces are allowed B D001 Furnace1 38h 125 Screen 15 Nov 06 11 45 56 Temp 14 806 Pen 2 24 858 Pen 3 3 2e 01 Pen 4 8 2e 01 Pen 5 20 333 Pen 6 46 61 Pen 7 4 11 Pen 8 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 121 Event Effects continued Logging Is an event effect that can Start or Stop logging enter which one in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the r
169. 53006 502 Multitrend GR Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 Multitrend GR Analogue Input 8CH Assy 2 51453027 501 Multitrend GR Analogue Output 2CH Assy 51453027 502 Multitrend GR Analogue Output 4CH Assy 2 50001017 502 Multitrend GR Pulse Input 4CH Assy 3 51453024 501 Multitrend GR Mother Board Assy 4 51453018 501 Multitrend GR Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 Multitrend GR Digital I O 16CH Assy 4 51453021 501 Multitrend GR Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 Multitrend GR Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 50001182 501 Multitrend GR Power Supply AC Mains 50001182 502 Multitrend GR Power Supply 20 55VDC 20 30VAC 6 51453030 501 Multitrend GR Transmitter Power Supply board 11 50084844 501 Multitrend GR Black Display Assy 50084844 504 Multitrend GR Grey Display Assy 50084844 503 GR SX RAL7032 MULTITREND DIS PLAY ASSY 14 50003590 504 Multitrend GRStd Nema3 Door 15 50009119 504 Multitrend GR Nema4 IP66 Door 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 10 2 Multitrend GR Spares 23 50001782 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Speaker Assy 27 50006787 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Bat Not shown tery kit of 5 28 50086626 505 8GB External SD memory card Not shown 30 50084843 501 Multitrend GR Black Touch Screen Includes Bezel Touch 50084843 504 Assy Screen and Display Multitrend GR Grey
170. 6 F Max Difference between Survey TC s amp Controller Setpoint During Measurement 2 6 F Stari Paint 1 7 2008 155000 End Point 1 7 2009 18 02 00 Vert nl grid ines show the Stable messurement period Very Light Grey rectangular ores on the graph shows error band SetPoint 85500 F VeTolerance 3800 F VeTolerance 9400 F TG TC2 m3 ma TCR TCR TT TCR TG Report Generated By 4M52750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the control TC are corrected Page 10 of 12 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 447 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Graph 3 Continuous Survey Run Ternperature In Deg F 3 2 s g 308 Time Tat T Ths TC4 TCR TOR TOT TCR TR Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except rhe control TC are corrected Page 12 of 12 448 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Index A AC POWET auus e REM REE AI Calibration Factory Calibration eee 132 AMS2750 Audit Trail 222 nro r dre ted Events PasSWOrds scissors Screen Designer TC Cal Adjust TC Usage Tracking TrendManager Pro Software 420 AMS2750 Process Mode sss 385 Countdown Timers AMS2750 381 Credit Option
171. 630 hours left at full br SD Card 277 inserts Lowest temperature 11 4 Deg C wv Highest temperature 41 9 Deg C Once enabled this screen will keep the following information Powered on How many times the recorder has had the power turned on Last Power up The last time the recorder had been turned on Time On since power up The amount of time since the recorder was last turned on Last Setup Modified displays the last Day Month and Time the setup was last modi fied Total On time How much time the recorder has had the power turned on Total Off time How much time the recorder has had the power turned off Longest Off time How long was the longest time period the recorder was powered off Lithium cell life Approximately how much battery time is left Backlight Life Approximately how many hours of Back light time left SD Card How many times the SD card has been inserted SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Lowest temperature Displays the lowest ambient temperature detected so far Highest temperature Displays the highest ambient temperature detected so far Allast factory cal When the last factory calibration was made to this Analogue Input card Eg in card slot A 198 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Allast user cal When the last user calibration was made to this Analogue Input card Eg in slot position A input 1 All channels will be listed per cha
172. 7 Alarm Relay Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards eee 38 Communications Connections ae USB Devices iiie uncpn THE eine es ins ER RH ERI S RIOT HS Section 3 Overview Section 4 Recorder Functions and Features Recorder Functionality Pn CIIM T Options GP WHE eio ea n ren HEURE ERO Eee eii te ie rh SEIUD ence eee een cere eRe ia Re mene fren E EDD D MUN Powerup 1 Menu Access 2 LOB ON Of aio Den ene t ERR UU MNT UR 64 4 Tinie and Date Setlings uie ttti pristine ri rero e Re oet sp esed ede 65 Ds Firmware mn c 65 B duo EDT 65 Help 66 Configure Menu ME 67 SetupMeniti iet edet seite eost ern o RU aga e E Cn o reete 68 Edit Recording cct oot II DEOR EEG SGT HEREREURRN ROI OE 148 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK MOD euae 157 POSSWOTAS 164 AI MC M 173 Alarms Ment een ein ede ied e ee teeees pine ede e tend 175 SCHON Mag P 176 Batch Setup Batch Groups eese 180 Recording MENU ERER 184 Messages MCN si ccos nain rara qe did ete in e rtr ba regt eene 187 Process MON 190 Status MA CPU eateseige 194 Ion m
173. 90 5 to 90 5 to 95 Vibration Frequency Hz 0 0 to 70 0 to 100 0 to 100 Acceleration g 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 Mechanical Shock Acceleration g 0 1 5 20 Duration ms 0 30 30 30 Mounting Position from Vertical Tilted Forward 5 40 40 Any Tilted Backward 5 65 65 Any Tilted to Side 5 65 65 Any 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 315 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions Power Requirements Mains Voltage Vrms 120 to 240 100 to 240 90 to 264 N A Low Voltage AC Vrms 18 2 12 to 20 Minitrend GR amp 12 to 20 Minitrend GR amp N A eZtrend GR eZtrend GR 20 to 30 Multitrend GR amp 20 to 30 Multitrend GR amp DR N A DR Graphic Graphic DC Voltages 24 2 20 to 55 DR Graphic Mul 20 to 55 DR Graphic Multi N A titrend GR trend GR 12 to 30V Minitrend GR amp 12 to 30V Minitrend GR amp eZtrend GR eZtrend GR Frequency Hz 49 8 to 50 2 47 to 63 47 to 63 Power Consumption Minitrend GR eZtrend GR AC 40W max DC 40W max Typical 20W Multitrend GR AC DC lt 60 W max Typical 30W DR Graphic AC 50 VA max DC 40W max Typical 25W Warm Up 30 minutes minimum Seismic Qualification Complies with IEEE 323 1974 and or 1983 and IEEE 344 1975 and or 1987 option Hardware includes an IEC bracket except DR Graphic The maximum rating only applies up to 104 F 40 C For higher temperatures the
174. Analogue In Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Analogue In HB Analogue Input Statu Channel 1 v A 2 2 v A3 3 v ad 4 v A 5 5 v 4 6 6 v As 7 v A 8 8 v 0 71 mY 0 01 mY 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V 0 02 V Type J 250mV Type T 25mY X12V X12V 12 12 12 12 Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Factory Sample Rate lf 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms 2Hz 500ms XXXXXXX Sensor comp Pen Mone Dual Dual None None None None None aes I ETE Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B or C D E F the Analogue Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Input Displays the current Analogue Input reading for this channel See Thermo couple Active Burnout Status on page 202 Range Displays the current Range Type set for this channel eg 12V Calibration Displays the type of calibration for this channel either Factory or User Cal Sample Rate Displays the current Sample rate for this channel SQRT If ticked the square root extract is enabled on this channel to linearise a non lin ear input Sensor Comp This will display if any type of sensor compensation applied to this channel Pen Displays which Pen scale is being used to display thi
175. At the top of the TUS screen It will also indicate the process is Running along with other status information concerning this particular survey The recorder is in Detect mode when any or all sensors are outside any of the pre defined soak temperatures and the point value for that survey setpoint begins to rise The recorder monitors all sensors in this mode checking them with each soak level when all sensors levels fall within one of the soaks for a qualification period of 2 minutes then the recorder proceeds to in soak mode The Detect out of soak mode is timed this tracks the ramp time until in soak is achieved Temperature overshoot Temperature overshoot is detected logged and displayed An overshoot is deemed as a failure if outside the soak limits defined by the class of the furnace Overshoot will be the highest value recorded for a TC after it enters the soak band but before stability occurs This could be a negative value if the TC does not reach the setpoint before stability is activated 411 TUS mode Soak mode Soak Magenta starts when all T C s for the survey are within the tolerance limits for the defined furnace class but stability period has not started u ww b B AVEZ750 TUS 2 Aug 08 1517723 Menu 0 17h 118 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 15 54 x Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1m
176. CF USB key or Network Share folder NAS the TUS instrument is portable and stand alone and extraction of this file via network is not a requirement Firmware jinnrade ta HG The tus file contains logged data at 2 minute intervals This is independent of the logging in the recorder Configuration details the furnace sensor and ramp soak configuration details are included within the file 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 417 418 TUS mode TUS Logged data Data is logged for each sensor pen within the TUS at the configured rate The data is time stamped and any power outages indicated within the format The algorithm in the recorder is acquiring data once per sec evaluating the Max and Min TC The logging in the TUS is every 2 mins The chances of the 2 minute data point recording the highest TC reading at the same time as the recorder 1 sec data point is 1 in 120 Looking at the recorder logged data 1 per sec it could show the highest temp TC at 652 3 but the TUS logged data 2 min might miss that point and its highest recorder TC could be 651 7 Check the recorder logged data that runs at 1 per sec to find Max amp Min TC readings TUS logged data only logs once every 2 minutes so it will only correspond to the Max Min read ings for those data points If the logged data is set to 1 per second the readings for Max Min on the TC s are the same as the recorder logged data The same data can be logged to ot
177. Comms Server Database 274 COMMS Server Overview L sss 258 Comms Server Setup sss 261 Comms Server Start Up iacere 258 Comms Server Status Screen 270 Comms Overview Communications Connections Ethernet Connections 42 Concurrent Batch Mode 2 7 138 General Batch Properties 138 Groupft Batch eese 140 Configure Alarms sssini 175 Configure Menu sssi 67 Edit Layout Layout saas Load Layout i ette tette 163 PassWOES 2 3 e catereei ets coner aede eee ve eee eren Save Layout Setup Menu Control TC Copy Cal Adjust AMS2750 TUS Mode 400 Countdown Timers es 381 Counters Event Causes oadsoseninien rene aT 117 Bvent Effects 15 123 Counters Process View and Reset 191 Counters Menu Credits Cursor Custom Screens 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK D DC Input 24V auoousedtumedis dated DC Power ees DNS WINS MDNS DR Graphic recorders Digital I O card channel number mapping sss 41 DR Graphic recorders Digital I O card slot position sees 4l DR Graphic recorders alarm card channel number mapping sss 39 DR Graphic recorders alarm card slot position 39 Data Logging and Transfer 249 Data Storage Overview sss 49 Database Management Tool 280 Database Size Management Daylight Saving Default Time Zone Delayed Event Event Effects D
178. Customer Heat Treatment Plant Eauip p mes imace 1 es o HEN derived from TC Cal Ja BEEN GLA mmu Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except rhe control TC are corrected 444 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Qualified Work Area Wang wmecue Em WegmpiR 5 Nets pem O PH Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values excep the control TC are corrected Page Sof 12 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 445 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Temperature Uniformity Survey Results SP1 950 0 F SP2 1200 0 F All channels shown are corrected Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values except the conirol TC are corrected Page amp of 12 446 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Graph 1 SetPoint 1 950 0 F Measurement Results Mat Class 1 Furnace Max Temp 952 6 F Min Temp 949 8 F Ramp Tims HH MM SS 00 03 02 Lag Time HH MM SS 00 00 05 Soak Status Passed Max Difference across Survey TC s During Measurement 2
179. D Returns true if the setup has been changed otherwise returns false Time Changed TIMECHANG ED Returns true if the time has been changed oth erwise returns false 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 329 Full Maths amp Script Processing Full Maths Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for the user to carry out numer ous mathematical functions Some examples are shown below Table 14 8 Full Maths examples Full Maths examples P4 lo A1 A2 Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either A1 or A2 P3 A1 A2 SQRT A3 Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1 added to Analogue input 2 all multiplied by the square root of Analogue input 3 P4 GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Script Function Application Examples Scripting is not available on the eZtrend GR To enter a script for a Pen ensure that Maths Type in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting Example 1 4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend totalise and record daily flow The application requires that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow at any particular time This can of course be derived from the fo
180. D This is a unique 4 digit identifier specific to this recorder It is advised to change the ID as all recorders will default to 0001 If Modbus communications are used it is highly recommended to use the same number as the Modbus slave ID When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Alert Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Error Alert A new alert system has been implemented to allow on screen alerts to be displayed for se rious errors and for early warning on potentially serious issues like available media space When an alert is detected a large message box will be displayed on the screen it has a flashing border for which colours are user defined and will display the current error state An acknowledge button is available and a re flash can be set to warn the user again if the error condition is not rectified Error Types 3 Error s Bkg Colour LI Edit Setup gt Genera Error Alert Network Unpl AuoCea Y Enable Reflash v Int Mem Alarm Reflash Time 60 Mins Export Alarm a res FTP Mem Lo Error Types The following conditions are available to be enabled ee Network Unplugged will detect hub switch failure also e Internal Memory Alarm Display when internal memory is going to start
181. Digital Outputs sss Display Alert us Email eese Embedded Process Values Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen LOGGING ann eeumenepeneden Mark on Chart sss Max Mins Reset Play Sound Preset Markers Print Screen 12er tee manes REPOS Lettre times Screen Change Script Timers sss Time Syne e TOtallSeE rco tcd rds eR OH Update Tabular Readings Event Status Diagnostics aderit tein etes 203 Event triggering from Scripts 125 Events AMS2750 sss 416 Events Menu Event Causes Event Effects Events Overview Events Counters Exit Replay Screen Event EFfects assueti erret entend 125 Export Format File Ty p rannan Export NOW usses As Network Share folder NAS m PEEL P P M 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK F F sub 0 Totaliser 90 F sub zero Sterilisation Appendix G 349 FIP mI OUR MEM 109 FTP Status sees 205 Factory Calibratioft sicsnccncinnacunsosuntn 132 Factory Menu AI Calibration CJC Calibration Calibration CHOI een tette Daylight Saving Firmware Upgrade Language Localisation Media Config nest teniente terere Temp UNNS ii eter oret ge Time Zone Field IO Menu Alarm Relay oenen eoio siese teretes de
182. For Rate Up and Rate Down enter as a percentage how far the signal can deflect before an alarm is triggered Ref Pen Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Deviation Select and enter the pen that this alarm is referenced to This works like an actual pen that dynamically tracks a designated pen Time Period Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Rate Up or Rate Down Enter in seconds how long the signal is allowed to deviate at the specified deviation level before an alarm is triggered Tag Enter a tag or name to identify this alarm Up to 17 characters Allow Change If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to this alarm level from the Alarms Configure button on the Main Menu This does not change the original setup Relays Out Select and choose which Relay Output s is triggered by this alarm on this pen only The Fixed button will use the common relay output on the power board 24V relay Common relay output is not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Latched A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker or pen pointer is displayed until it is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Acknowledging Alarms on page 341 A Reflash option is available to keep the alarm flashing whilst in an alarm state even after
183. Fuzzy This is where the toler ance is set for the input signal Specify as a percentage of the scale range the toler ance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value Fuzzy Band 2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off This is to enable a second tolerance to be set configure it to be On to activate Only used in conjunction with Autofit On to specify the Band 2 95 Band2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where a tighter tol erance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a per centage of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup Alarms Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Alarms This is for setting up alarms on this pen only a maximumu of 6 alarms per pen are allowed Select the first available alarm eg Alarm 1 and configure each alarm Alarm 1 Hi 90 00 P1 Alm 1 Alarm 2 Lo 10 00 P1 Alm 2 erm 3 None pe Alarm 4 None EB Menu path to current menu Enabled Enabled Always ES eed r Relays Out None hd PR Alarm 5 None p Alarm 6 None EB The Pen Alarms screen displays up to alarm set points per pen Each alarm displays its individual alarm sett
184. Honeywell GR Series and DR Graphic Recorders DR Graphic Multitrend GR Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table of Contents Section 1 Preface Preface Thank you for choosing a Honeywell GR Series recorder Documentation ier eem a eo ern ene td EE Pa D Caire 1 p m 2 Static Electricily odas ei o anb re iras dera edP e a OD e ERE Rex Protocols used in this manual Safety and Symbol Identification Warnings and Safety Precautions DO S and DOn S asian aute a RHENO E ONIS EU OT AER 3 Hazardoi s Voltage tete et b a E eere eer e e etg tte os 4 For use in hazardous locations eese 2 Section 2 Installation METER TERN Environment and Location Mechanical Installation eessseessoeesooessecessecessesesooessececsececseeesossesocessesscsesscssesessee Installation Instr cti ns iiie oi rRNA ONU BIENES Electrical Installation esee eee ee eee eee ee eren eee eren eene ee etn nest to set to sese tna s ta Installation Category iere ee OH D Op Eee Analogue Input Card iso ie rrt iv diiit ed ite Un eti a e eZtrend GR Analogue Input Standard card eee 32 Analogue Output Card ic ee Ret Or ene OE H ORE CREER EGER UE ERE ARE 33 Pulse Inpul Card ecieti ect tiro tere ele pee baee din e De RIRs 35 Transmitter Power Supply Card eene enne 3
185. Hubs or Switches Hubs and Switches come in all different shapes and sizes Both are used as a common connection point for devices in a network They are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN A hub contains multiple ports and when a packet Of data arrives at one port itis copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets Switches work in a similar way but send the data directly from one port to another On a busy net work this can be quicker and can have less data collision incidents Ethernet cable to device Ethernet cable to PC Spare Ethernet ports for additional devices Ethernet Uplink option to other networks DC Power Supply 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 247 Hardware Installation Getting connected IP Address Stand alone system This is for connecting a local device direct to a PC using an Ethernet crossover cable By using a crossover cable the PC is able to receive data transmitted from the device Contact your IT systems administrator for setting up this link The TCP IP properties are displayed showing the PC s IP address and the Subnet mask Make a note of the IP Address and the Subnet mask If there is no IP address or Subnet mask displayed contact your IT systems administrator When this information is entered the next stage is to configure the device See TCP IP on page 94 Figure 8 1 Stand Alone system
186. Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 47 48 Functions and Features Example of a recorder menu path from the Main Menu to change the Pen Scale configuration with clear rapid navigation Alarms HB E gt B a E Wm Recordin Messages 102 Wm Status p Auto None 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Features Display 5 7 Colour Active TFT for the Minitrend GR and 12 1 Colour Active TFT for the Multitrend GR and the DR Graphic and 5 7 Colour Active TFT for the eZtrend GR with more than 256 000 colours makes it easy to interpret process data and take action with the intuitive bar charts digital values trends or customised displays A screen saver function can be set from 1 to 720 minutes to extend the life of the backlight Touch Screen the heavy duty durable touch screen provides easy data entry and rapid navigation though the menus Help Files A complete contextual help system can be accessed and visualised on the screen of the recorder Communications Ethernet Connectivity the Ethernet DHCP standard connection with support for vari ous protocols provides comprehensive connectivity to local area networks LANs The standard Ethernet interface makes networking of the recorder to a LAN or the world wide web fast and convenient Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP automatically acquires the settings IP add
187. Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Analogue In Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Analogue In For AMS2750 mode the Analogue In button will change to Sensors Please refer to Sensors Con figuration Menu Process Mode on page 386 Press the Analogue In button to display all the analogue inputs available Click on individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile Each channel has a list of menu items to be configured Refer to connection details and Analogue Input Channel Numbers on page 30 Menu path to current menu m In 9 v A9 Volts 12 mq e A9 Volts 2 12V 5 AnalogIni10 v A10 Amps 0 20mA 2H2 f The Analogue In screen displays all the available AnalogInil v A11 Ohms 1K 2Hz P d Analogue Input channels Each channel displays its Analog In 12 A12 TC Type K 2Hz individual settings Analog In 13 413 RT PT100 10Hz Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura AnalogIni A14 Volts 50V 5Hz Jv tion of each input Enabled Toggle On and Off Type Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20ms is available as a firmware option not available for the eZtrend GR recorder See Firmware Credit System on page 241 Arranged in 2 banks of 3 inputs and sample rate must be the same within
188. Jm Jl Analogue Output el or Pulse Input SIot A Slot B Alarm Relay or Digital I O Slot G RS485 Earthscrew ground 24V TX Power Supply Output LED CJC Sensor position in the middle of the Analogue Input connector Slots A F Electrical Installation AC supply 100 250 VAC SPNC Relay 24V TX Power Supply Output CJC Sensor Ethernet USB Host Figure 2 10 Minitrend GR Rear panel AC supply 100 240 VAC Analogue Input Analogue Output or Pulse Input Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Alarm Relay or Digital I O Slot G Slot H Slot Ethernet RS485 USB Host Figure 2 11 Multitrend GR Rear panel 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Card and Slot positions Table 2 1 Card priority positions Carda i ds dior n ud DR Graphic Analogue Input card A B A B C D EF A B option A B Analogue Output card B E F B Pulse Input card A B A B C D E F A B Alarm Relay or Digital I O G G H G B card 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 25 26 Slot A Electrical Installation DR Graphic card positions 24V AC DC Input 24V TX Power Supply Output AC Supply 100 240 VAC SPNC Relay 000000000000 Ethernet CJC Sensors 0 0 0 0 0o o 0 o o o o o ESLa M o o o ovo o o o o o o o
189. LAY CABLE 23 50001782 501 eZtrend GR Minitrend GR Multi trend GR Speaker 24 50012896 501 eZtrend GR Case and Back Plate Assy 27 50015474 501 eZtrend GR Back Plate 28 50006787 501 eZtrend GR Minitrend GR Multi Not shown trend GR Battery Kit of 5 29 50086626 505 8GB External SD memory card Not shown 43 50012896 502 eZtrend GR Case Handle and Termi Not shown nal Cover 44 50012915 501 eZtrend GR Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 293 294 Table 10 3 eZtrend GR Spares 45 50020664 501 eZtrend GR Left amp Right Hand Chas sis kit 48 30755050 502 eZtrend GR Mounting Hardware kit 2 Not shown Mounting Brackets 49 51453083 501 eZtrend GR Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit pack of 5 53 50021404 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector type Not shown 54 50086625 502 1GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50086625 503 2GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50017290 503 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 eZtrend GR Minitrend GR Multi Not shown trend GR Blanking Plates 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 eZtrend GR Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and Not shown eZtrend GR Power cord 250V AC Minitrend and eZtrend GR Portable C
190. Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Cass TC s Stabilized Manual rci TCa Tc1 Tee TC 2mi35 EC 12 Mins Override F 402 66F A3F 5 09F 405 29F 2 amp 0000F TCO0 Tco TCO TC0 Too TCO 10 0 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 3 1000 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 10 0 f 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F 4 NA 14 10 00 14 20 00 14 30 00 14 40 00 14 50 00 15 00 00 15 10 40 15 20 00 15 40 00 415 000 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 23 Aud 0B 29 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 s Max TC X x A d d i E ax Tc 405 00 Min TC TC1 403 34 395 000 jf The recorder enters this mode automatically when all sensor signals are within soak AND have remained stable within tolerance limits for the qualification period A manual override button is available only when the in soak mode has been present for at least 2 minutes See TC Stabilized on page 412 A timer is started to measure the stability period achieved this continues to count up until the configured amount of time for the TUS has been reached If at any time one or more sensors fail the stability but remain in soak then the in soak in stability recorded history is checked and a new in soak in stability time generated If this time is less than one minute then the mode drops back to in soak 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 413 414 TUS mode The recorde
191. Mechanical Installation Figure 2 9 Flush Mounting in a panel cutout NOTE Mounting brackets and attaching hardware are included in kit 30755065 501 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 15 Mechanical Installation Mounting Clamp Diagram Figure 2 10 Minitrend GR Mounting Clamps 2 mounting clamp positions required on two opposite sides of the recorder Nema 4X requires all 4 clamps to be fitted Mounting clamp slots 4 mounting clamp positions 2 shown 2 clamps are re quired on opposite sides of the recorder 16 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mounting Clamp Diagram for 45mm panel thickness Figure 2 12 Minitrend GR 45mm Mounting Clamps 6 mounting clamp positions 3 shown for mounting in 45mm panel thickness Mounting slots shown in Figure 2 4 Only 2 mountimg brackets need to be fixed in opposite positions Figure 2 13 Multitrend GR 45mm Mounting Clamps 4 mounting clamp positions 1 shown for mounting in 45mm panel thickness on opposite sides of the unit Mounting slots shown in Figure 2 4 Both mount ing clamps are required to be fitted F c c c c c c c c c c c c c c 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 17 Mechanical Installation Panel mounting recorder with NEMA4 Refer to Figure 2 14 and follow the procedure below to panel mount your recorder if it has a NEMA4 1 Place the panel gasket onto the rear flange of the recorder case 2 Install fo
192. NO NC C NO NC C NO Relay contacts position e Channels 7 and 8 can id pines ee be set as Digital Inputs caries Use C and NO NO Normally Open 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Card The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the eZtrend GR recorders The Digital Input Output Card has 1A 24V DC rated relays that are connected via two 16 way connectors the left connector for the first 8 channels and right connector for the second 8 channels The pin outs for 8 and 16 I O cards are labelled from left to right 1 to 16 on the left side and 17 to 32 on the right Each channel can be set up as an input or an output For output the relay is normally open type A Form A dry contacts relay is used for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs NOTICE For Digital Inputs short together the 2 pins of the channels with a switch or a relay Pulse Inputs The 8 and 16 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Figure 2 18 Digital Input Output card connector details CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 NO C
193. O 36 ES E6 3 2 03 5000 00 2499 04 96 E3 E4 Pen 6 20 00 2400 68 00 112 00 156 00 200 00 89 95 oo O 36 Horizontal Bars and DPMs 58 1 si Chart n 3 Vert bars Screen 29 Jun 06 12 37 46 135 000 50 000 100 00 Menu m 41 2137310 12 213713 12 37 40 Jun 0b 29 Jun 06 29 6 29 Jun 06 000 0296 wey 7 Horizontal Chart 3 Vertical Bars 3 vert bars Screen 29 Jun 06 13 34 34 3 Horizontal Bars Pea si Chart n 3 Horiz bars 0 Om 42 Screen 29 Jun 06 12 38 25 7 000 14 000 21 000 28 000 35 000 eee 00 0 oO 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 20 00 40 00 60 00 1 80 00 100 00 ae OP T 29 Jun 06 12 33 10 29 Jun 06 P2 Alm 1 Out of alarm 9620 12 38 00 Pen 10 Vertical Chart 3 Horizontal Bars and 3 DPMs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Minitrend GR Rear Connections Earth screw Wi ground Ire sea 12VDC 30VDC 12VAC 20VAC AC supply 100 240VAC Instrument power option Common Relay Output SPNC Analogue Input 24V TX Power Analogue Output Supply Output or Pulse Input Slot A Slot B CJC Sensor Alarm or Digital I O Ethernet Slot G 100 240VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard USB Host RS485 configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is recommended when using Thermo couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and termina
194. Pens Hardware Lock 2 Y or X Password CFR Note 1 NA Y or X Total Credits no used no available NA Note 1 Password CFR ESS Extended Security System This will only appear in the list if this feature is ena bled in the recorder It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system contact Honeywell for details Note 2 not available for the eZtrend GR Note 3 AMS2750 Process and AMS2750 TUS credits cannot be enabled at the same time Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK IO Cards Main Menu Status System IO Cards This will display the Slot position of each card in the recorder The Card Type is identified as Analogue I P Alarm Digital I O Analogue O P or Pulse Input The number of Channels on each card eg Digital I O 1 16 The Firmware Version of the card is displayed and the Board Revision Table 4 13 Example of IO Card Status for a Minitrend GR Slot Card Type Channels FW Version Board Revision A Analogue I P 1 8 A 00 0 B Pulse 9 12 A 00 1 G Digital I O 1 16 A 00 0 Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Pen Overview Main Menu gt Status gt Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details Pen Displays the pen number and ticked if it is enabled V
195. Pulse Input 25 to 28 Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40 Pulse Input 33 to 36 4 Analogue Out 33 to 36 Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48 Pulse Input 41 to 44 4 Analogue Out 41 to 44 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1t04 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20 8 Relay 2 Digital In 17 to 24 8 Digital Input Output 17 to 24 16 Digital Input Output 17 to 32 Slot 4 Relay Output 33 to 36 8 Relay 2 Digital In 33 to 40 8 Digital Input Output 33 to 40 16 Digital Input Output 33 to 48 71 eZtrend GR un Channel Slot position Card type numbers Slot A 3 Analogue Inputs 1to3 6 Analogue Inputs 1to6 Slot B option card 6 Analogue Inputs 9to 14 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 DR Graphic un Channel Slot position Card type n mbars Slot A 4 Analogue Inputs 1to4 6 Analogue Inputs 1 to6 8 Analogue Inputs 1 to 8 4 Pulse Inputs 1 to 4 Slot B 6 Analogue Inputs 9 to 14 8 Analogue Inputs 9 to 16 4 Pulse Inputs 9 to 12 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 2 Analogue Outputs 1 to2 4 Analogue Outputs 1 to 4 To fit the Analogue Input option card Slot B into the eZtrend GR recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See eZtrend GR Analogue Input Stan dard card on page 32 43 TV 25 41
196. R Graphic recorders on page 42 Not available for the eZtrend GR Front and Rear USB Communication Ports inside the case for DR Graphic USB communication ports can be found one at the front and one at the rear of the recorder The eZtrend GR only has one USB 2 0 port at the front fitted as standard 2 USB ports for the DR Graphic are extended inside the case to a dual panel mount receptor near power supply USB peripherals wires can be connected on the panel mount connector for the DR Graphic inside the case The USB Host ports will provide an interface for Save and Load Data Save and Load Setups External keyboard amp mouse Barcode reader Mass storage device USB key or Hard drives 250 GB USB Barcode Header 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 245 246 Standard Communication Interfaces USB ports allow the use of a USB barcode reader Protocols Protocols are an agreed upon format for transmitting data between two devices The pro tocol determines the following the type of error checking to be used data compression method if any how the sending device will indicate that it has finished sending a message how the receiving device will indicate that it has received a message The following Protocols available are Modbus Modbus primarily sends data no setup information is transferred via Ethernet or RS485 ports The device ID and Serial number is held in the setup and this information is requir
197. RH spec is de rated to maintain constant moisture content 316 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification LED Flash Codes LEDs are fitted on the Analogue Input card Analogue Output card Pulse Input card 4 and 8 Alarm Relay cards and the 8 and 16 Digital IO cards The LEDs can be seen through six holes on the left side of the Minitrend GR eZtrend GR recorders and 18 holes on the Multitrend GR recorder looking from the front For DR Graphic recorders the LEDs are not directly visible They can be seen on the left side of the IO cards chassis if the unitis ON amp IO card chassis is rested on the bottom stand Table 12 3 ES s Sequence Type of Fault 1 1 flash once pause flash once pause etc Hardware 2 2 flash twice pause flash twice pause etc Communications 3 3 flash three times pause flash three times pause etc Memory 4 4 flash four times pause flash four times pause etc Other 1 2 flash once pause flash twice more quickly pause CJC fault flash once etc added as CJC could be unplugged 1 3 If another error is also present with CJC error flash CJC fault once pause flash 3 times Red LED flash codes relate to the first fault stored in the error buffer With no faults the red LED remains off When the red LED is flashing the green LED stays lit The green LED flashes for normal operation The board outputs the flash code for about
198. Romanian Russian Greek Portuguese and Bulgarian Also Asian languages including Chinese simplified Japanese and Korean Temperature Units C F K Recorder Identification Status bar Alternately displays Recorder ID and Recorder Screen Name Displays Time and Date 308 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Design Attributes Clock Accuracy 20ppm 1 minute month 25 C Summer Winter manual or automatic time adjustment or via communications SNTP Client and or Server included for synchronising over Ethernet Recorder Time Synchronisation on Digital Input Alarm Set Points 6 per pen integral soft alarm set points easily set by user to announce selected out of limit condi tions user can select if an alarm triggers a change in the screen background colour Alarm triggers can be set for Hi Lo Deviation latched or unlatched for alarm acknowledgement Alarm Damping 1 sec to 3600 seconds Hysteresis 100 of pen scale Common relay output 1A 24V can be activated on any alarm Not available for the eZtrend GR Data Replay Mode Data replay facility on chart displays at normal fast or slow speeds with zoom and cursor Display Chart Speeds Chart rates 1 mm hour 5 mm hour 10 mm hour 20 mm hour 30 mm hour 60 mm hour 120 mm hour 600 mm hour 1200 mm hour 6000 mm hour Combinations of rates can be mixed and c
199. Section 8 Communication Comms Configuration Once the recorder has been set up for Comms the TrendServer software and Communi cations Server requires configuring to allow the recorder to connect with your PC To set up Comms in the recorder go to Comms Services Menu on page 101 For Comms wiring details in the recorder see Communications Connections on page 42 Follow these stages for successful communications Read about the different Comms interfaces used by the recorders See Standard Communication Interfaces on page 245 Setup your PC Network connections See Hardware Installation on page 247 Configure the TrendServer software See Comms and Trend Manager Suite on page 251 Comms Server software set up See Communications Server on page 258 Standard Communication Interfaces Before we start here is some information about the comms interfaces that are used in the setup of the TrendServer software and Communications Server Minitrend GR Multi trend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic Rear Ethernet Communication port inside the case for DR Graphic The rear of the device is fitted with an Ethernet 10 100 port which supports Modbus TCP IP See Modbus on page 246 Web browser See Web Browser on page 276 Rear RS485 port For the Minitrend GR and the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorders RS485 2 wire half duplex to support Modbus RTU is standard See RS485 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and D
200. Single will allow you to select which User Counters you wish to reset View will display all the User Counters that have been set up Event Counters Reset All will reset all of the Event Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Event Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Event Counters that have been set up Digital Input Counters Reset All will reset all of the Digital Input Counters Reset Sin gle will allow you to select which Digital Input Counters you wish to reset View will dis play all the Digital Input Counters that have been set up Relay Output Counters Reset All will reset all of the Relay Output Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Relay Output Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Relay Output Counters that have been set up Pulse Counters Reset All will reset all of the Pulse Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Pulse Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Pulse Counters that have been set up 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 191 192 User Variables Main Menu Process User Variables User variables provide the user the ability to set values for up to 32 variables to be used with in the maths and script Modify allows the user to set and edit the variables View the user can view the variables The User variable function allows a system to be setup where values can be altered to effect calculations
201. Static IP is On A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device Please see Entering IP address details on page 95 DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name System WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Man aged Data Network Services See DNS WINS MDNS on page 96 Please see Entering IP address details on page 95 Ports The Port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port See Ports on page 96 Entering IP address details The IP Address in TCP IP Settings can be set in different number systems Octal Decimal and Hexadecimal The number system depends upon the leading character of each octave Ox for Hexadecimal 0 for Octal and decimal otherwise Using the SIP to enter the IP address the number gets stored in a Decimal number system and will be displayed in decimal number system only Below left is the snapshot for octal representation of IP Address and to the right is the snap shot after it gets converted to decimal IP Address Edit Setup FCP IP Settings 077 077 077 07 sate Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS WINS M Automatic b 80 502 b mr Rome jid Octal IP address entered Decimal IP address representation The Address range that can be entered in different number system is as shown
202. Storage Temperature Measurement A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the cold storage rooms Conventional sample recording had shown that temperature variations were present but was not of high enough resolution to pinpoint the cause Again as in example 1 the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant readings interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature In order to track the cause of these variations it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data This appli cation was ideally suited to the Fuzzy Logging data storage technique as the periods of in activity would result in compression rates of over 50 times Example 3 Logged Data Example The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method top and Sample Logging method bottom derived from the same analogue input 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 347 348 It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden tical trace Fuzzy Logged j m Sampled Logged Diagram 2 Note This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run which resulted in approx imately 1 Mbyte of sample data and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data A compression ratio of 25 times Anything else it can do Yes Fuzzy Logging can be used as a One Hit recording button In applications wh
203. Sys tem Diagnostic Security or User messages One or more selections can be made For more information see Message Types on page 187 Counters Select which type of Counters are required for your report Alarm User Event Digital Digital Input Relay Output or Pulse One or more selections can be made For more information see Events Counters on page 111 Include Digital Inputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Include Digital Outputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Footer Style Choose between one or two lines of footer at the end of the report The extra footer lines give you the option to add fields such as Cheked By and Date etc See Fig ure 4 8 on page 193 Email Tick to enable the Email function See Figure 4 8 Email Report example on page 193 The report is sent as a Word document and to view all the options eg Footers you may have to change your View to see these options View Print layout Recipients only available when the Email function has been enabled Select from a list of email recipients Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email on page 106 Print Set to a tick to enable the Print function The printer settings must be set up before this feature will operate see Printer Menu on page 141 Export Device Select from a list of options if you require your report to be exported to an external media device SD card USB key Network Share
204. TC Depending on Instrument type refer to AMS2750 specification section 3 3 If a TC is set to be control TC i e the input is spliced into the control TC all func tions will remain the same as for all other survey TC s except there will be no calibra tion adjustments for the Control TC Track Usage Check this if you wish to track the usage of this TC Serial Number Batch or Serial number of this sensor 40 Alphanumeric Position of thermocouple enter the position of the sensor in the furnace Eg Top left front or Bottom right back Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the sensor 20 alohanumeric Type expendable non expendable thermocouple Number of uses usually 0 this is overridden to allow reuse of salvaged thermocouples this is clearly logged Renewed On Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the sensor was last renewed i e the current TC was connected on this date Track Cal Check this to track the calibration information of this sensor Next Cal Date Enter a date using the date selection screen for when the next calibra tion is due for renewal Cal Adjust Cal adjust for each TC up to 9 cal points Extrapolates between those points Calibration adjustments can be added and deleted by selecting Add In the Cal Point Deg C column use the touch screen and the on screen keypad to enter the cali bration point value In the Correction Deg C column enter the amount by which the sen
205. TUS Configure TUS and Export TUS Top panel shows a summary of the survey details plus TUS operation buttons Es Mi AMS2750 TUS 25 Sep 08 15 38 14 19 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Stopped Furnace Time p nd Name Parts Oven Username NA Started NA Model No XRH56748 No of TC s 65535 Elapsed NA C Start TUS Wie Configure ta i unl Tus Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Stopped NET IN a Setpoint Status Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Clas TC s Stabilized Manual 150 002 TC0 TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins Override H8 4 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 300 00C TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 60 f 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 0 00C 500 00C TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 6 0 d 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 NA 0 Mins 0 Mins Middle panel displays the setpoint information plus manual stability override button Lower panel displays two thermocouples Max and Min temperatures plus a third reading of the difference between them e See Top Panel on page 403 e See TUS Survey Process screen Middle panel on page 406 e See TUS Survey Process screen Lower panel on page 408 402 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Top Panel The top panel shows a summary of the survey including the furnace details and TUS control buttons All information displayed here has been entered in the See AMS2750 Menu TUS
206. TUS is not running If passwords are enabled in the recorder these buttons are password protected This will re strict unauthorized access to start stop and configure the TUS Thermocouple Usage Pressing the configure button will prompt for a password if passwords are enabled in the recorder Thermocouple usage tracking is shown as a status screen within the recorder It shows the current status of the thermocouple within the furnace in process mode Process mode You can reset the date time for SAT or TUS providing another new target time date for the timers Upon reset a message will be logged into the system message list If enabled this is password protected for tracking Timer reset dialog When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed they will be challenged to enter user name and password if passwords are enabled This is to restrict unauthorized access when resetting new dates 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 419 TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 Refer to the TrendManager Suitesoftware manual 43 TV 25 11 for full details on AMS2750 functionality AMS2750 includes Process or TUS Mode selection in hardware wizard setup Furnace configuration for Process and TUS modes Setpoint and Stability configuration for TUS mode Event Cause to set TC Timers or Alert Timers and Event Cause to Start Stop TUS Screen Designer AMS2750 Tabular mode canned screen
207. Ztrend GR models Scroll down the menu and select AMS2750 TUS AMS2750 Process and AMS2750 TUS options are mutually exclusive 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 393 TUS mode AMS2750 TUS Screen To enable the AMS2750 TUS screen go from the Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens The next available screen will default to AMS2750 TUS when this option is selected in the credits This TUS screen is fixed to that screen number and cannot be changed to another Screen type unless the credit option is disabled Edit Layout Standard Screen 1 Standard Screen 2 Standard Screen 3 Standard Screen 4 For complete details of the Screen menu go to Screens on page 157 Use the Screen button at the top of the recorder screen to change the screens using the Next and Previous buttons I O AMS2750 TUS Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Normally labelled Field IO this button has been modified for AMS2750 configuration All oth er analogue inputs are not affected This menu includes Furnace Configuration Menu TUS on page 396 AMS2750 button Sensor Configuration Menu TUS on page 399 fry 1 0 AMS2750 a BS BS nnm iz e Sensors Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO 4 FT Linearisation AMS2750 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode AMS2750 Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt O AMS2750 gt
208. a compression ratio of 100 1 or more self teaching storing the data at a variable rate to match the process Specification Physical Parameters Enclosure Bezel Zinc plated steel case with high impact resistant polycarbonate bezel scratch resistant lens Pol yethylene Terephthalate NEMA3 IP55 for Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR models only and NEMA3R IP55 for Multitrend GR protection rating standard with NEMA 4X IP66 Front face only protection rating as an option 310 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Physical Parameters Mounting Panel Unlimited mounting angle For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed Minitrend GR 55 from the left or right 40 looking down and 50 looking up at the recorder dis play Multitrend GR 70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 looking up at the recorder dis play eZtrend GR 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder dis play Mounting adjustable for panel thickness of 2mm to 20mm Adapter kits available for covering existing panel cutouts Dimensions Minitrend GR eZtrend GR Recorder W 144mm 5 67 H 144mm 5 67 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 80mm 3 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and sig nal connectors Cutout 138 x 138mm 5 43 x 5 43 Multitrend GR Recorder W 288mm 11
209. a lower time resolution here is a representation of what this could look like Data 2 week 4 weeks 6 weeks 8 weeks 12 weeks Fast speed Medium speed Slow speed The lines represent absolute time coverage So if you go right back to the earliest time on the slowest chart shown by in this example you cannot zoom in any more as the medium speed coverage does not go back that far Zooming Capabilities The example in Figure 6 4 on page 234 shows 10 different replay screens covering the full zoom in zoom out capabilities When the screen is switched to replay the chart speed is set to Fast 600mm hr and the replay screen displays a 4 hour chart The replay chart can be zoomed out two more times to 10 hours then to 12 hours It can be zoomed in from 4 hours to 2hrs 1hr 1hr with bigger divisions 20 mins 10 mins 5 mins 2 mins and 1 min The Medium chart speed 20mm hr and the Slow chart speed 5bmm hr are also shown in the example 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 233 Figure 6 4 Zooming on a Replay screen 00 00 00 07 Jul 06 07 00 00 08 00 00 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 12 hour div 1 hour div B replay chart replay chart amp 25043 27309 Mn 3 A divisions o A Chart Exit a2 wo Out Chart Exit 00 00 00 i 07 Jul 06 OF Jul 06 7 00 00 07 10 00 07 20 00 07 30 00 7 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 10 hour div replay chart b3o36 2d 76
210. able for the eZtrend GR Channel Displays the Slot position eg B E or F the Analogue Output number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled TX Pen Displays which pen is transmitting the signal Range Displays the Output range set A tick here will indicate this is over range Output Displays the current Analogue Output reading for this channel Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Alarm Digital IO Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Digital IO Channel Displays the Slot position eg G H or I the Digital IO number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Fixed refers to the com mon relay output on the power board 24V relay Input Output Pulse Displays what activity is on this channel Input Output or Pulse Input Alarm Displays the Pen number and the Alarm number that activates the digital output when the alarm is active The Alarm has to be set to Relay out Status Displays the current state of the digital input on this channel or pulsed if Pulse Out is selected The relay is displayed as open or closed Counters Displays the counter number when active Duration Displays the Output Pulse duration set Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 202 43 TV 25 41 Iss
211. ables on page 307 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Note Once you enable the screen saver it will not turn off the backlight if at the time of the Timeout there is a penin alarm The screen will stay on until the alarm is gone and the Time out is passed Once the Saver is active and screen is Dark backlight is off it will turn back on if a pen goes into alarm Exit Screen Saver If the screen saver is active on the recorder any of the following will deactivate the screen saver User touches the recorder screen Any USB device is plugged in or unplugged Onalarm An alarm is triggered the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state is inactive and another screen saver time out period has expired Charts Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Charts The Chart Speed sets how fast in mm hr the chart moves across the screen The recorder has 11 different chart speeds There are 3 categories that can be set Slow Medium and Fast From each of those categories the actual speed of the chart can be selected Figure 4 12 Strip Chart Speed selection 6000mrm h 1200mm h 20mm h v Cancel g ee Fast Speed Medium Speed Slow Speed Fast Speed 60mm h 120mm h 300mm h 600mm h 1200mm h and 6000mm h Medium Speed 10mm h 20mm h 30mm hr 60mm hr and 120m
212. accessible for op erators to touch any channel within the same input bank must be limited at all times to a maximum of 55Vac or 140Vdc This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained The inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank and inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank A voltage of up to 150V AC common mode can be applied on one bank as long as any safety low voltage circuits are on the other bank The recorder is protected against accidental connection of a voltage up to 240V AC common mode which might occur as a temporary fault condition provided there are no safety low volt age circuits connected to the same input bank as the channel with the fault Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel this reduces to 33Vrms or 70Vdc if any channel within the input bank is configured as an ohms or R T measurement Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel e g 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges The pin should be connected only as part of ohms or R T measurements Ohms and R T measurements share a common connection pin with all channels in the same bank the inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank a
213. acy Table eene 312 Input Actuation ET 312 Input ACUaliofnusaecosc eoe DR Drev be a Qa ele SR AR UG VO MO VINEA 313 LED FlashiCodes dee o e ete e deren eevdbree a 317 Appendix A Quality and Safety eese 319 a EN TET SER 319 n 319 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix B Maths Expressions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne nennen 321 Full Maths amp Script Processing eese eee ee eese ene ee eene n ens tn aestas tn stn sunu 321 Maths Credit Options omera pip ra eO IIO e eg 321 Maths Variable and Function Tables eese 322 Full Maths vases es Script Function Application Examples Maths Error Messages see reset eater ERE I S EE EOE ETE YER NEG Appendix C Thermocouple Connections eee How Thermocouples Work eerie eee entente enne sensns senses tensa sns Thermocouple CJC Compensation reset eese enses etn st tn tensa sonn Internal Automalic iiu o toe eee eir ie YO e a e ROREM Oe eee Ext 0 C Reference eie teet rte rere tea inii aereis External with a Specified Temperature External Input Reference eee e e eee eee eee ette eene nnne inte tn tette E tnet Appendix D ry Ae Alarms Menu Appendix E Ethernet 1 reenics
214. ad Certificates Permission Area 29 General Pens Alarms Hardware Remote Viewer lt Comms Services Finish Comms Services Engineer ac cess Permission Area 29 Modbus Permission Area 30 Web Permission Area 31 Email Permission Area 34 SNTP Permission Area 32 FTP Permission Area 31 Peers Permission Area 29 Figure 5 12 Default password access from the Web page 0001 QX 2336 Screen 15 May 06 12 03 02 12 02 00 100 00 Info 3 Support 3 Sales Website Take Control Pen 1 18 78 36 Pen 2 25 536 35 Pen 43 0 00 Pen 50 80 74 Pen 51 0 12 Web page Engineer access View Status Permission Area 37 Full Control Permission Area 39 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 5 13 Default password access to clear a pop up Alert Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 ged data is being lost Clear Pop up Alert Technician access To OK or clear the error alert message Technician permission level is required Permission area 42 en 4 5 3e 01 Pen 5 LLL Pen 6 48 98 Pen 7 14 64 Pen 8 0 00 Figure 5 14 Default password access to use the Context menu APY E M 32 40 09 Jun 07 09 Jun 07 09 Context menu Technician access Touch any chart process screen to produce the Settings button in the top right of the screen Select the Settings button
215. ailed to initialize the CJC driver Diagnostics Failed to enable CJC Driver Messages Can t initialise the SPI for N A N A General error that the I O card channel specified has failed to Diagnostics ADCs make a measurement Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 0 1 1 One or more measurements on an Al channel have failed Diagnostics ranges etc Error selecting input pair on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 1 1 1 One or more measurements on an Al channel have failed Error Diagnostics ranges etc setting relays P1 P2 on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 2 1 1 An invalid configuration has been sent to the Al board Diagnostics ranges etc Error setting filter value on initialisation of Al board Messages Can t initialise ADC speeds 3 1 1 An Al channel could not be reset on the Al board Diagnostics ranges etc Error while resetting ADCs more detail on channel specific Messages faults Can t initialise ADC speeds 4 1 1 An Al channel could not be initialized on the Al Diagnostics ranges etc Error initialising an ADC channel Messages Can t initialise the CUC 0 1 2 CJC failed to initialize Check that CJC is fitted Failed several Diagnostics attempts to initialise CJC device on Al board Messages ADC not ready for requested 0 4 4 ADC conversion timed out perhaps ADC filter value too slow for Diagnostics op chan acq Rate ADC not ready Messages Failed to reset ADC convert 0 1 1 An Al ch
216. al Client 19 Pen 4 1sec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 5 isec Sample ey Local Client 1 Pen6 isec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 7 lsec Sample Local Client 1 Pen8 isec Sample Client connections Database logging Local Server Pen 1 Temp Local Server Pen 2 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 3 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 4 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 5 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 6 1 sec Sample Local Server Pen 7 1sec Sample Local Server Pen8 1sec Sample Client Connections tab displays any Pens being graphed N Database Logging tab displays any Pens being logged Database logging Client connections Comms Server can be minimised now it will continue to run in the background Client Connections Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communica tions status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software Once data is active on a client connection this window will display details of the device selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being communicated Database Log ging 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the de vice that is selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to So
217. alarm active or when the power is removed See Failsafe Relay Positions on page 306 Relay Output Specification The Minitrend GR recorder will provide the ability to have at least 1 relay output for each analogue input i e 16 Multitrend GR recorder will also provide at least one relay output for each analogue input i e 48 there are three available slots for Digital inputs Relay Out puts Up to 8 relay outputs are available for the eZtrend GR and DR Graphic recorder Common Alarm Output The common alarm output include a single alarm relay This relay is the same rating as those on the 8 amp 16 Digital I O cards This relay is NC normally closed and can be activated by any alarm This relay will close when power is removed This relay is identified as Fixed in the relay output pick lists Rating 24Vdc 1A Resistive Load Digital Input Cards Three options for digital inputs are available 8 Digital Inputs 8 Digital I O card this 8 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be either relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive load 16 Digital Inputs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 305 306 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder 16 Digital I O card this 16 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be ei ther relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive
218. alue When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to the Furnace or Stability Detect menus 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Sensor Configuration Menu TUS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors Refer to AMS2750 section 3 1 and Table 1 and Table 2 for Thermocouple information The number of sensors available depends on the hardware fitted in the recorder The menu configuration is the same as Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 386 Sensor Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors gt Sensor The menu configuration is the same as Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 386 except for the AMS2750 Info menu AMS2750 Info TUS Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt Sensors gt Sensor gt AMS2750 Info In TUS mode DR Graphic amp Multitrend GR recorders only each sensor requires addition al information this information is stored separately to the recorder configuration allowing it to be reused for multiple furnaces or recorder configurations 123456 top left front Furnace Rite TUS TC Control TC Track Usage Serial No Position Manufacturer Type Renewed On Track Cal Expendable 01 09 2009 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 399 400 TUS mode TUS TC Check this to include this TC in the TUS Control
219. alue Displays the current reading for this pen Name Pen name or number Maths Displays any Maths calculation applied to this pen or the Analogue Input chan nel for this pen Summarised to M for any Maths expressions Scale Displays the High and Low limits of the scale range for this pen n Alarm Displays the current status of the alarm tick active and a cross inactive Pen Rate This displays the fastest of all dependencies Alarm Displays how many alarms are enabled on this pen Total This will be ticked if a totaliser has been enabled on this pen Group Displays the group number if this pen has been allocated to a group Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 197 Maintenance Main Menu Status Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventa tive maintenance notification The Maintenance button will become active when Maintenance is selected as a firmware op tion To enable this go to Options on page 196 ove Maintenance Item Value Powered on 463 times Last powered up Thu Sep 04 2008 09 40 44 Time on since powerup 38m 45s Last Setup Modified Thu Sep 04 2008 10 09 19 Total On time 546d 3h 07m 56s Total Off time 223d 22h 23m 30s Longest Off time 23d 12h 06m 19s Lithium cell life 24626 hours left Backlight Life 50
220. an be configured users can then be allocated to a level and they will inherit those permissions Permissions Permissions may also be customised for an individual user their permissions can be changed to become a customised user However for global access restrictions the user must be allocated a security level of Engineer Supervisor Technician or Operator even though the individual permissions will differ First Time Password System Setup The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset ESS Extended Security System CFR21 Part 11 The password system allows for user names to be typed in All logging in and out activity is automatically stored in the audit trail If your recorder is fitted with the ESS password system follow these instructions First Time Password System Setup Add System Administrator Your recorder is configured with ESS Extended Security System This is a password system that cannot be switched off Follow these steps on first time power up Administrator User name 1 Switch the recorder On 2 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here
221. an be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously To upgrade sounds the user must have a compatible sound file format of wav the wav file needs to be renamed to the internal format which is as follows S lt n gt lt name gt wav Where n is number 1 to 20 and name is a short name to describe the sound this file name will be shown in the pick lists Eg S1 Alert wav So a user could replace the default sound 1 which is S1 Two Tone Slow wav with S1 User Sound wav and this is what they will then see in their list To update the sounds a prompt will be displayed and the system will request the correctly named files be available on external media in the recorder once confirmed the system will scan the media for correctly named wav files and will replace the internal files with the new ones NB the wav files can be up to 100KB in size Prepare Sound Files The system will now update the sound files Please ensure files on the external media are in the format S lt no gt lt name gt way e g S1 Alert wav 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 173 174 AMS2750 Main Menu gt Configure gt Settings gt AMS2750 Disable Thermocouple Adjustment Factor One method of checking the recorder calibration is to connect a temperature calibrator TC simulator and inject known values These can be read on a standard DPM summary screen and checked against requirements So for example if 800 degrees is injected
222. and Off With this deactivated the Windows Internet Name Service can be changed from the default if required Pri WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Sec WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Auto MDNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off This will deactivate the Managed Data Network Services When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup Ports Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms TCP IP Ports The port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are setto a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that enables Web browsing Select and enter the desired port number if required Defaults to 80 Modbus communications protocol used for automation applications Select and enter the desired port number if required Defaults to 502 When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 97 98 Network Admin Main Menu Configure S
223. and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted Figure 2 6 eZtrend GRrecorder dimensions DR Graphic recorder Dimension details 2 984 Figure 2 7 DR Graphic recorder dimensions 12 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation Panel Mounting Clamp Installation The Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and the eZtrend recorders slide into the panel cut out and are held in place by two or four panel clamps 6 clamps for Minitrend GR recorder with 45mm panel thickness The panel clamps should be fitted on diagonally opposite sides of the unit and tightened against the rear of the panel using two fixing screws The mounting clamp assembly and fitting instructions differ slightly for the two recorders Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR See Figure 2 6 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness Use either a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit 4 Take the first clamp and locate the two lugs on the clamp into the slots on the unit 5 Take the second clamp and do the same but in the diagonal position to the opposite side Repea
224. ange set the total will reset to the minimum range set When Use Remainder is active it will carry over any amount in excess of the maximum range set Temp Input Units For Sterilisation select the temperature input units Start Temp For Sterilisation select the Start Temperature Ref Temp For Sterilisation select the Reference Temperature ZFactor Temp For Sterilisation select the Z factor temperature Include Cooling For Sterilisation Include Cooling if required Completion Value For Sterilisation if cooling is not required enter a Completion Value The totaliser will stop at this value Resetat 16M Enabled by default The upper limit for the totaliser count is fixed to 16777215 to prevent an inaccuracy The totaliser will get reset after this count To go above the 16M limit disable this function but be aware that the count will add some inaccuracies in the calculation above this upper limit see Table 4 2 on page 93 Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format Auto Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined e After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sterilisation
225. annel cannot be reset correctly Diagnostics ers Failed to reset ADC on Al board Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 371 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Factory cal read from EEP 0 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the factory calibration on power Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power up return to factory or try user calibrating Error reading an Al Messages up factory calibration from EEPROM on power up Factory RT cal read from 1 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the RT calibration on power up Diagnostics EEPROM was corrupt on return to factory Error reading Al RT calibration from EEPROM Messages power up on power up User cal read from EEP 0 3 3 An error occurred whilst reading the user calibration on power Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power up try re user calibrating Error reading an Al user calibration Messages up from EEPROM on power up User cal read from EEP 1 3 3 Several errors occurred whilst reading the user calibration on Diagnostics ROM was corrupt on power power up try re user calibrating Multiple errors reading Al user Messages up cal on power up factory calibrations set Both cals read from EEP N A N A Both factory and user calibrations read from EEPROM were cor Diagnostics ROM were corrupt rupt Messages There is no CJC reading N A N A There is no
226. ar in the initial database on the local comms server See Add a Device on page 262 2 Click on Communication Ports in the left window to display a list of the ports in the main window Tick the port that the device has been added to See Comms ports on page 260 3 For a realtime connection check device connection status by clicking on the device under its comms port in the left window to display the device status in the top main win dow Green LED s will show a realtime connection is made If grey LED s are showing and the device displays Unconnected and if Red LED s display then there is a problem with connection Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put computer to sleep which will stop real time data logging 4 The data from this device can now be logged to a database by using the Configure log ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting up a destination database See Logging Configuration on page 268 5 When the realtime data is being run eg graphed to the application server software this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 261 Communications Server Add a Database To add a database to a server right click on the server eg Local Server select Add Data base and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device Add a Database Server
227. arately implemented within a class where there is one instance per group furnace 6 in total Each timer has a date to expiry the date is initially set to zero this indicates that the relevant timer is not required or has not yet been used A timer processing class coordinates the class instances for the thermocouple usage timers and the individual TUS SAT Control TC and Instrument Cal Countdown Timers The timer can be disabled by clearing the timer to zero it will then be shown as unused TUS Due In SAT Due In The TUS and SAT countdown timers track the next date for survey test and displays this in formation on a the AMS2750 process screen The user is alerted when these timers are about to expire 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 381 382 AMS2750 Process mode SAT Timer Reset Please enter the date for the next SAT The suggested date for Furnace 1 based on its class instrument type and last SAT date is 09 Oct 2008 Enter the new date to change it and use OK to confirm or Cancel to exit You may also enable disable this timer SAT date Lm p 7 x When a SAT timer is reset a message is posted to the system message queue When a SAT timer enters a warning period or expires a message will be posted to the system message list Upon expiry for SAT or TUS the recorder displays non compliance and logs a message to the system message list You can reset the date time for SAT or TUS providing another new ta
228. are configurable from within Screen Designer The TUS process screen is not accessible from within Screen Designer this is a fixed screen that is always within a TUS enabled DR Graphic amp Multitrend GRrecorder 420 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool AMS2750 Report Generation Tool The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool is a stand alone software package and operates in dependently of the TrendManager Suite software The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool is used for generating a TUS report using data from the recorder The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool also provides the ability to produce a SAT template report for manual entry or populated within the tool Overview TUS reports are generated using the self contained data file from the recorder and is out putted in PDF format for printing and sign off Data files generated by the recorder are imported directly from the SD card or USB key plugged into the PC or Network Share folder NAS There is no facility for remote commu nications SAT report templates can be generated by the tool from fixed format the templates can be stored for re use by furnace SAT report templates can be output to PDF and printed for users to fill in manually SAT reports templates can be filled out within the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to pro duce a completed SAT report the reports can be exported in PDF format for printing and sign off Once a completed TUS or SAT repo
229. art At and enter at what number it will Rollover and start again See Counters Menu on page 126 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 117 Event 1 has been set up with Cause 1 as a Scheduled interval every 30 seconds The Effect is that User Counter 1 is set to increment by 1 When the scheduled interval occurs every 30 seconds Counter 1 will increment by 1 jub Type User Edit Setup JEvents Cou Events Enabled lv Tag Event 1 Edit Setup JEvents JEvents Event 1 Cause 1 v Scheduled nabled Cause 2 x Type Scheduled Effect 1 x Counters Edit Setup JEvents JEvents JEvent 1 Interval Effect 2 E Enabled Y Period Om 30s Fi Type Counters Alignment Day Count D Repeat 5 Fi user Counters 1 Event 1 example Increment By 1 0 am gl Cause Scheduled interval every 30 seconds Effect User Counter increments by 1 A second Event can then be set up using the User Counter Effect in Event 1 as the Cause for Event 2 In this example the Cause will be triggered by User Counter 1 in Event 1 reach ing an count of 50 The Effect of this will be a Mark on Chart e p paeme mM i ae 2 gt events event 2 Jeauso 1 Event 2 m Enabled opa type MB User Counters Counters Mark Chart Text User Counter 1 every 50 Event 2 example Cause User Counter 1 triggers at 50 increments 4 Bak Jic fy jid
230. art of a new table Press the Add button to produce the first line Up to 50 points are availablie in the table More than one set of points are required to do the conversion Edit Setup Field I O Name 0 104 table Values 2 Points Click into the text entry boxes under the X and Y boxes and enter the required values or leave it if your table starts at 0 The Signal Input X goes in the first column and the Engineering units Y in the second column To add aline at the bottom click on Add To ad a line above or below click on a line and use the Insert Above and Insert Below buttons To delete a line click in the line and select Delete 0 10V table 0 10V table moe X Xa input xGeween vem X X Signal input input Y Eng units units When you have finished your table select the tick box this will also verify the table and produce a Data Error box if there are any problems Data Error box If incorrect vales are entered a Data Error box will appear saying Data line is invalid This will appear when you select the tick box at the bottom of the screen The error box will indicate which line has the error There may be more than one error in the table if so the data error message box will appear for each error starting from the top line down going to the next as each error is fixed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 81 82 Linearisation Table examples Figure 4 3 shows an exa
231. as burnout failed O C Diagnostics nel The pen has gone upscale as stated in the setup Messages Downscale burnout on Al N A N A The T C on the specified Al channel has burnout failed O C Diagnostics channel The pen has gone downscale as stated in the setup Messages Al channel dual point com N A N A Dual point compensation was specified but one or more points Diagnostics pensation error using single were invalid therefore setup has been defaulted to single point Messages point 1 compensation using point 1 Al channel User analogue N A N A User limits were required for the specified analogue channel Diagnostics high and low limits are same however both limits were incorrectly detected with the value Messages 372 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Al channel removing fast N A N A Fast scanning option is disabled or is illegal for board channel Diagnostics scanning support but was specified in the setup file Messages Al channel updating illegal N A N A The acquisition rate specified in the setup for an Al channel was Diagnostics acquisition rate not allowed for board and option selected Messages AO channel incorrect N A N A The setup for the given AO channel specified an invalid pen to Diagnostics retransmit pen retransmit Messages Slot number of channels N A N A The I O card is the sa
232. ase Dimensions A Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth 165 1 i E 235 6 50 9 25 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK DR Graphic Recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 295 CJC Sensor RS485 USB host Ethernet 296 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 297 Table 10 4 DR Graphic Recorder Spares 50099056 501 Case amp latch Assy Includes case latch bracket screws split lock washer and latch pin 2 32300506 501 Door Assembly without Bezel and Touch Panel Assembly display 3 50092996 501 Door Assembly Bezel 12 1 Touch Panel Assem bly Speaker and Display 4 32300081 501 Display Kit 12 1 Display with Cable assembly and display bracket 5 50098928 501 USB Cable Extender 6 32304412 501 Misc Hardware Hinge Pin Circlip Conduit Plugs 2 Nos Cord Bushing Not Shown 7 32304395 501 Door Handle amp Latch Kit Includes latch assembly parts 8 30755065 501 Mounting Bracket Kit Standard 9 30755065 502 Mounting Bracket Kit NEMA 4 10 32304373 501 Speaker Kit Speaker and its Retainer 11 32304377 501 Cables Kit Earth Braid GPIO DC LOOM Assy LVDS Cable BL Cable RTP Exten sion Cable Not Shown 12 32304379 501 Chassis kit Plate Base Chassis Shallow Case Recorder Cover Front Chassis Shallow Case Recorder Stand Chassis Shallow Case Re corder Hinge Pin Cir
233. asserted Once one or more alarms on a pre trigger enabled pen s fire the readings in the pre trig gered buffers will be saved to internal flash memory The pre trgger system will request an export to be performed if scheduled export is enabled If Post Trigger is enabled the alarm log rate will continue for this period after all alarms have cleared If during the post trigger time a pre trigger alarm re occurs but the previous pre trigger event has not been exported then the post trigger timer will be reset and will start again after all pre trigger alarm have cleared Pre trigger information is only secure when it has been saved into the internal flash memory or ex ported Export The pre trigger files are exported from the internal flash memory via the scheduled or man ual export to the externally selected device OR when an FTP download occurs The pre trigger data is appended to the Pen data files during export 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 151 152 It is recommended to set up a scheduled export as the pre trigger files will only be exported once and to the first device on which an export occurs following a pre trigger event occurring If power fails when the pre trigger information is waiting to be exported or is being exported then the System will restart into the export state allowing the files to be exported If the power fails before the the Pre Trigger alarm is activated data will be lost and the recorder will resta
234. at of flow meter 2 The code consists of the two flow meter readings and a change counter that totals the number of times that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2 The pseudo code is written as If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2 check to ensure that it was already greater than meter 2 if it was return the latest change count value If it was not greater than meter 3 last time set a flag to indicate a change and increment the change counter by 1 then return the latest change counter If flow meter 3 is less than 2 simply return the change count value with no increment Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing if A32A2 if BLKV1 1 return BLKV2 else BLKV1 1 BLKV2 BLKV2 1 Return BLKV2 else BLKV1 0 Return BLKV2 Tests if A3 is bigger than A2 If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last time period If it was return with the current change counter If not then Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2 Increment the change counter by 1 Return the new change counter total If A3 is not bigger than A2 Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time Return current change counter With script above BLKV all Variables are used to maintain values It should be noted that BLKV s do not persist over a power removal and if the application were to require a non
235. ata will display a gap in data until it is resumed Clear this will clear all the data from the chart being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped This will not clear recorder data from the memory only the chart ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading A stopped chart cannot be prefilled Clear All Messages this will clear all the messages in the message list See Mes sages Menu on page 187 Delayed Event This will allow one event to trigger one or more other events after a specified period of time The time period can be set in seconds from 1 to 3600 1 hour Select Delayed Event and select the event s this will apply to Enter the time delay Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired pre viously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK event system allowing them to be stopped started and reset Script timers can also be viewed in Script Timers on page 192 Access to timers via the Maths scripting feature is still available see Table 14 4 on page 327 Play Sound Sound effects can be used to alert the user that an event effect has occurred Set the Sub Type to Start to reveal two more menu options Sound name and Play Mode The user can pick fr
236. base Server a Use this icon button to connect to a database server either a Local or Remote Serverthat has been added to the database servers list Connection can be made by selecting Database Servers in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space in the top window displaying the database servers list 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 259 260 Communications Server Comms ports The Communication Ports is a list of ports available COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet As de vices are added they are displayed under the port name Click on Communication Ports to display a list of all the ports in the main window tick the required port to enable Click on a port and the main window splits into two windows top and bottom The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device D No de vice Name Mode and Status show if the device is connected how many Channels the device has enabled an Active button to activate the device and the device s IP Address As devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server Database Servers The Database Server will list databases and display the devices within each database as they are added Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of that item are displayed in the main
237. be acknowledged When a Latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu and a latched relay is configured it will maintain its active state until the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until it is acknowl edged and it is out of alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 236 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm All Select this button to acknowledge all active latched alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge latched alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu By Pen Select this option to acknowledge latched alarms for individual pens Configure Main Menu Alarms Configure This is a short cut to change alarm levels this will display all available pens with alarms set up To change the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Pens Alarms menu and select the relevant alarm number then activate Allow Change View Main Menu Alarms View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 175 176 Screen Menu Main Menu Screen The Screen Menu contains an Edit button to configure screen settings for standard screens or Pen Channel Map
238. be con figured in Network Admin on page 98 and in the Printer Menu on page 141 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support USB 2 0 on page 44 The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu Cred its on page 131 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 187 Saving Screens All Message screens can be saved as portable rtf files onto removable media These can be transferred to another location and kept for records or sent via email for troubleshooting and maintenance issues Message List All messages will conform to the following format Type Time Date and Format Message 10 39 45 10 04 2008 P2 Alm 2 Into Alarm S092 LH 10 39 30 10 04 2008 Session 1103 LCM 1103 10 38 56 10 04 2008 Session updated Cornmit to 11 10 04 2008 Power On Off for m 34s 1 Y 10 04 2008 10 38 52 10 04 2008 RESET REQUIRED Options 10 03 27 10 04 2008 Setup Changed 10 09 21 10 04 2008 Session updated Commit to 11 09 41 06 10 04 2008 LOCAL UI june Valid Access t 09 41 06 10 04 2008 LOCAL UI june Login SuccessF 09 40 51 10 04 2008 Session 1101 LCM 1101 F 09 40 47 10 04 2008 Power On Off for 7m 48s The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages i i il i i il i A i i Message button bar The message button bar runs along the bottom of all messages screens The button are Back Takes you back to the main Messages screen
239. be secured with SSL certificates and can work over HTTPS Secure FTP To ensure secure data upload in the GR Seriesrecorders WSD Web Services on Devices should be used with GR Seriesrecorders Recorder device will host web service and have server certificate installed on it The Trend Serversoftware will have root authority certifi cate of server in trusted root certificates Whenever TrendServer software connects to WSD service SSL handshake will take place and on successful handshaking secure com munication channel will be established and data flowing between these two end points will be encrypted Only WSD clients with valid certificates can connect to WSD service Data transfer between Recorder and TrendServer software will be in secure mode 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Comms Services Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Comms gt Comms Services 5 Comms Services a Modbus Communications protocol for Ethernet and RS485 See Modbus on page 103 Web Browse your recorder using the web browse feature See Web on page 106 Email Setup email accounts to send alarm and event information See Email on page 106 SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server See SNTP on page 108 FTP File Transfer Protocol used to transfer data to and from the recorder See FTP File Transfer Protocol on page
240. ble T converts volt Volts a dina t ge reading to lt 0 c 0 Volts y EE dU Measuring junction Reference Input junction held terminals ato C on rear Temperature reading panel of to maths expression recorder Ext 0 C Reference By keeping the reference junction at 0 C then the negative input is act ing as a 0 Volt reference so the voltage reading from the thermocouple can be passed di rectly to the tables where the corresponding temperature reading can be found Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for External with a Specified Temperature Thermocouple Copper wire ae Inputs Look up table us c 0 Volts VD gf added Volts converts C D voltage read Measuring ing to tem junction Input r perature terminals Reading in volts Reference on rear junction held panel of O Thermocouple Temperature at 45 C recorder Table reading to Per maths imp expression External Reference with a specified temperature The reference junction is kept at a con stant known temperature other than 0 C This temperature can be specified in the setup menus This reference temperature is then used in the same way as the reading from the temperature sensor using the Internal Reference method Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK
241. ccessfully This may take up to two minutes synchronised Finish This message will appear when the All recorders in this group have had their recorder is scanning the network passwords synchronised successfully 172 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Settings Main Menu Configure Settings Set Time Set up the Time and Date for the recorder s real time clock Check that the correct Time Zone is set before setting the clock See Localisation on page 136 Date Select each button to set the day month and year This will automatically update and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen Time HH MM SS Select each button to set the hours minutes and seconds The hours selection provides a list and the minutes and seconds require a numeric entry This will automatically update and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen The recorder uses a 24 hour clock Tick to confirm the setup changes and return to the Settings menu Select the cross to ignore any changes and return to the Settings menu From the Settings menu select the Finish button to commit the changes or select the Back button to return to the previous menu Set Volume Set the volume here for the sound effects Use the slider to increase and decrease the vol ume Press the arrow button to the right of the slider to test the volume Update Sounds The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these c
242. ce Alarm Digital IO wee see Analogue In Menu Analogue Out sss Digital IO Pulse Input Field IO Specification s 303 Analogue Output sese 303 Pulse Input Card sese 303 Finish COMME iieri eda nia OR HORE Commit Later Discard Finish button Firmware Credit System s 241 Firmware Options 243 Firmware Upgrade iui ainda 132 First Time Password Setup ESS 208 Full Maths ass ni ration Penta nr ee HAUS 330 Full Maths amp Script Processing 321 Function Codes and Memory Maps 355 Functions and Features Overview 45 Furnace Config Menu Process Mode 385 Furnace Config Menu TUS 396 nr e EE 22 Fuzzy Logging Appendix F 1 4901155011120 345 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK G General Batch Properties General Menu nss Batch Menu Error Alert ondanoiieanecee an iH Rodi Factory Groups Identity Printer Menu eee Getting connected IP Address Group Batch GTOUDS cetus tede ahi lanai H Hardware Configuration Lock 224 Hardware Lock ses 242 Hardware Options Overview 55 Hardware Status Diagnostics sss Hazardous Voltages Header and Footer report information 440 Help Files Jer 66 High and Low Alarms s 88 Hot Button Enable uestes ERES Event Cause User Action Hubs or Switche
243. cett tete orb tees daas pede TUS Logged datas uc pe HR ERR DA M Ede Rr eden Passwords AMS2750 crece eene esee ee eee eren eee eene tnos totas se ena sesta sese ena a ese TrendManager SuiteSoftware AMS2750 Screen Designer AMS2750 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool e s seeseseesereesoesesoesosoecoeseesoseesoreesoreesoesesee Installation id tenir D IEEE ERO HOO I reris Introducti omainen a a pietre ee eet inte p per Tintin Report Tool User Interface eese nennen BrowseL09g0 cas bei n e n eed on HER Ee e osi ee odiis SAT Report Wizard inuieisauepiiodua ee mte miteiireieida re neris TUS Report Wizard cie dtes a on ii aUe e a eta m A 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK vii viii 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 1 Preface Preface Thank you for choosing a Honeywell GR Series recorder Thank you for purchasing the newest in our range of electronic data recording for GR Ad vanced Graphic Recorders The Minitrend GR Multitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic paperless chart re corders are the latest development of the solid state replacement for traditional paper re corders Many options features and functions are available to meet a wide range of applications and requirements including Power Water Treatment Thermal Processing Food and Beverage Pharmaceutical Biotech and Manufacturing industries This manual explains the product functionality operation configuration and
244. ch batch is associated with a group pens are assigned to a group and all the pens within group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by group 1 See Batch Menu on page 138 Up to 32 Pens in any single batch group The same pen can only be associated with one group To add a pen to a Group see Pens Menu on page 84 Groups of pens can also be used in order to Acknowledge Alarms in pen groups Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min in pen groups Start Stop and Reset Totals in pen groups When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Screen Menu Screen Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Set up the recorder s screen configuration 3 Screen Setup S si dE FA Screen Saver Charts Brightness Tabular Disp lt 91 Finish Screen Saver In this menu you can configure the Screen Saver functions See Screen Saver on page 143 Charts In this menu you can set the Fast Medium and Slow chart speeds See Charts on page 144 Brightness Adjust the brightness of the screen using the instant brightness slider See Brightness on page 145 Tabular Display Configure Tabular Screen Display When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the pre
245. clip Cover Top Chassis Shallow Case Recorder 13 50071918 501 Processor 1GB SD Card Note Customer must supply model 50071918 502 Processor 2GB SD Card number and Serial number of exist 50071918 503 Processor 4GB SD Card ing unit when placing an order for processor board kits 14 51453006 501 Analogue Input 4CH Assy 51453006 502 Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 Analogue Input 8CH Assy 15 51453027 501 Analogue Output 2CH 51453027 502 Assy Analogue Output 4CH Assy 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 10 4 DR Graphic Recorder Spares 16 50001017 502 Pulse Input 4CH Assy 17 51453018 501 Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 Digital I O 16CH Assy 18 51453021 501 Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 19 50098156 501 Backplane Board Assy 20 50001182 503 AC Power Supply 21 50001182 504 AC Power Supply with Transmitter Power Supply 22 50001182 505 24VDC Power Supply 23 50006787 501 Battery kit of 5 24 50086626 505 8GB External SD memory card 25 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 26 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each Not shown connector type 27 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of Not shown 8 28 51453051 501 Power cord 250V AC Not shown 29 50020410 507 2GB USB Pen Drive Not shown 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 299 300
246. commended when using Thermo couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and terminals For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 281 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 61 62 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 4 Recorder Setup Power up Configuration of the recorder is performed in the Menu screens and the data is displayed in the Process screens This section takes you through the Menu system and how to set up your recorder See Section 6 Screen Configuration on page 225 for information on setting up screens to display the data User Interface Control All user actions can be performed via the touch screen using the stylus All on screen selec tion and navigation areas are large enough so the unit can be operated without falsely se lecting an adjacent option using the stylus provided The stylus is to be used to operate the touch screen It has a rounded end to avoid damage to the screen Only a light touch is required to activate the screen Two styluses are provided and there is a special slot at the top of the recorder to slide the stylus in from the right If the touch screen does not match correctly to where you are touching it with the stylus the screen may need calibrating See Calibrate on page 179 Other User Interface Control All user actions can be performed using a mouse or keyboard attached to a USB host port 1 Menu Access When the recorder is powere
247. communication as well as Safety Precautions Installation amp Wiring Recorder Setup Troubleshooting and Spares List It is recommended that the user reads the manual before installing and operat ing the recorder Documentation A full set of manuals for the software and the recorders including some language ver sions are available on the CD provided and from our website www honeywellprocess com Also Application Notes and Installation Instructions first time password setup and data base tool information Supplementary documentation to accompany these recorders are Table 1 1 Supplementary documentation Manual Part number TrendManager Pro Software Suite 43 TV 25 11 Screen Designer 43 TV 25 31 Notes The contents of this manual are correct at the time of issue The contents may change at any time without prior notification This is due to continuous develop ments to the recorder and it s functionality Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document however should there be any anomalies found please contact your nearest Honeywell supplier See back page for contact addresses All rights are reserved No part of this manual should be copied or repro duced stored on a retrieval system or transmitted in any form without the prior permission from Honeywell International Inc Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 and Windows 2012 Se
248. conductive pollution such as condensation or conductive dust is present ade quate air conditioning filtering and or sealing must be installed 7 This recorder contains one battery on the Processor board which must be treated and disposed of with care Batteries must not be short circuited Batteries should be dis posed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be disposed of with normal refuse 8 Improper signal and supply wiring WARNING A WARNING IMPROPER SIGNAL AND SUPPLY WIRING Signal and supply wiring should be kept separate Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring Where signal wiring is carrying or could carry under fault conditions hazardous voltage defined as gt 30 V rms and 42 4 V peak or gt 60 Vd c double insulation must be used for all signal wiring Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 9 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be inadequate 10 The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the measuring communications or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltages Hazardous Voltage Hazardous Voltages are defined by EN61010 1 as follows A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS Voltage levels above 30V rms and 42 4V peak or 60V dc are deeme
249. corder Edit Setup I O AMS2750 Sensor 1 Al TC Type J Track 2Hz Sensor 2 A2 TC Type T Track 2Hz P Semor3 v B3 TC Type K Track 2H2 fe zd a Pam sr o3 e rem SJ SS mu AMS2750 Info y TrackUsag Sample Rate 2Hz S00ms Damp Level Burnout Type Passive Y CNET P Select a Sensor Enabled Toggle On and Off Type Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs AMS2750 Info See AMS2750 Info Process Mode on page 388 Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20ms is available as a firmware option not available for the eZtrend GR recorder See Firmware Credit System on page 241 Arranged in 2 banks of 3 inputs and sample rate must be the same within each bank only for eZtrend GR recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode Damp Level The damping filter is an advanced algorithm offering improved response over more traditional methods It works by producing configurable levels of damping but at the same time being able to respond rapidly to large input changes Enter the Damp Level in Engineering Units Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to TC Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a
250. corder or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the recorder dangerous under some fault conditions Intentional interruption of the protective conductor is dangerous Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury In order to comply with the requirements of safety standard EN 61010 1 2010 the recorder should have one of the following as a disconnecting device located within easy reach of the operator and be clearly labelled as the disconnecting safety device Aswitch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC 60947 1 and IEC 60947 3 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 3 Warnings and Safety Precautions Aseparable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool Aseparable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 4 Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired the recorder should be made inoperative and secured against operation The manufacturer s service centre should be contacted 5 Repair is not to be attempted by a customer Any adjustment or maintenance expected of an operator as part of the normal operation of the product is referred to as Opera tional Maintenance Any maintenance not expected of the operator is referred to as Corrective Maintenance and is to be carried out only by authorized service personnel or returned to an authorized repair centre 6 Where
251. corders in TrendServer Pro much easier This is set in the recorder Ident menu see recorder user manual The first thing to do is to get the recorders setup into TrendServer Pro This may be achieved by saving the setup at the recorder to SD card or USB key then putting it into the PC and using the Import button This method has to be used for a recorder on an RS 485 network and can be used for a recorder on Ethernet Alternately the setup can be saved to the recorder by importing the setup that has been placed in a Network Share folder NAS TrendManager Suite for the GR Series has options for adding X Seires recorders in cluding Import of Setups and Pen Data from Directory Location If Import is from the Net work either FTP or Secure Comms credit option at that time it will not display the options Also the mode of communication i e Secure Comms or FTP will be decided at runtime based on availability of Credits for Secure Comms Secure Communications Secure Comms is a Credit Option See Credits on page 131 The Secure Comms pro tocol uses WSD and can be used to transfer data to and from a recorder recorder s For information on Secure Comms WSD and Secure FTP see Secure Communications on page 100 Secure FTP The Trend Server software will have root authority certificate of server in trusted root cer tificates Whenever Trend Server software connects to WSD service SSL handshake will take place and on successfu
252. ctions Single and concurrent batch capability Print Support Counters Modbus master communications Alert System Sound system add sound effects to identify occurrences Email facility the recorder will email an event notification and include a screen shot of the occurrence as an attachment Pre and Post Trigger alarm function CSV Export Recorder Functionality GR recorders provide flexible electronic data acquisition and recording in a high functional ity instrument Minitrend GR is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 7 VGA display and the Multitrend GR is a large 12 1 diagonal VGA display format recorder The eZtrend GR is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 7 QVGA display The Minitrend GR and the DR Graphic recorders have up to 16 Analogue inputs and the Multitrend GR has up to 48 Analogue inputs and the eZtrend GR has up to 12 Analogue inputs Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and the DR Graphic recorders have 1GB to 4GB of expandible non volatile flash memory available plus additional removable storage media the eZtrend GR has 1Gb to 2GB All recorders use digital colour TFT LCD screens to provide easy to read displays with wide viewing angles for the best all around data viewing The touch screen operator interface provides fast easy access to the recorder menus mak ing set up and data analysis quick and efficient Navigation through the menus and text entry are direct and intuitive 43 TV 25 41
253. ctions Appendix C 337 Time amp Date Nignubp X Time Sync Time Zone Timer AMS2750 Event Causes Totaliser IBN Displaying Totals eee Event Causes E Event Effects F SUDO siisii eerte tren Sterilisation sess Totals Start Stop Reset ius Touch Screen sssri Touch TeSt uu E Trademarks sssri Transmitter Power Supply Card TrendManager Pro Software AMS2750 sees TrendManager Pro eee TrendServer Pro sese Trend Viewer i n xen eo ire eta Troubleshooting Error Messages sse 363 U USB Comms Ports 102 USB Devices eee 44 Keyboards 5 emet his Print Support USB Keys teme USB Devices Overview sss 50 USB Key Format ueteres 184 USB Keys rd 44 Update Tabular Readings Event Effects ue a E 125 User Action Event Causes Hot Button User Calibration User Counters Event Cause User Messages User Variables Process Menu creen 192 Users Passwords 167 459 VWXYZ View Alarms sss 175 WSD Web Services on Devices 100 Warnings and Precautions Web Browser Auto DNS Web Enable Zoom In Zoom Out ZOON O REC IERP ZOOMING Capabilities xs nnnnnn Auto DNS L sess 460 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sales and Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or na
254. ctive Burnout is not available Onms measurements must have the link between positive and negative CJC Connectors The CJC connector resides between channel 4 and channel 5 on the Analogue Input card For information on connecting the CJC sensor see Figure 2 15 Analogue Input connec tor on page 31 For the eZtrend GR recorder this is available on the Analogue Input card option eZtrend GR Analogue Input Standard card The eZtrend GR is fitted with a standard Analogue Input card in Slot A with up to 6 chan nels The card is also fitted with an Ethernet port as standard Connection is made via 1 x 18 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit To fit up to a further 6 analogue input channels see Analogue Input Card on page 29 Figure 2 17 eZtrend GR Analogue Input card std Slot A 123456 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 150V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit i e is
255. current The T C is wired differ ently for Active and Passive Burnout see Figure Figure 2 16 Input signal wiring on page 31 Active Burnout is not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Active Burnout checks the health of the thermocouples every 30 seconds if your proc ess requires continuous check of the thermocouples to see if they are in burnout you should use Passive Burnout Active burnout is an implementation of thermocouple health and provides error warning messages for a range of thermocouple activity failure conditions Passive burnout does not provide any error warning messages If the thermocouple wiring changes and the channel is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change to update burnout settings Show Burnout Only available when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation See Thermocouple CJC Compensation on page 338 e nt Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref erence temperature Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV refer ence external to the recorder Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera ture Sp
256. cus tomers would expect to see 800 degrees on all the inputs allowable tolerance If the TC Cal Adjustment factors have already been entered those TC offsets will be being applied and that changes the displayed temperature Whilst not technically incorrect it has lead to user confusion so a temporary means of switching the TC cal adjustment factors off has been added To access this switch navigate to the Configure menu and select the Settings button Once selected an AMS2750 button is shown and selecting this will let the user switch on or off the TC calibration adjustment This button is only be displayed if the AMS2750 Survey mode is enabled In order to ensure that the values are not omitted from an actual survey run the instrument automatically switches on these TC Cal Adjustment values if they have been mistakenly left off In addition a User Message will entered into the message list when this switch is turned Off or On which will enable users and auditors to demonstrate a traceable line of action if re quired 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Alarms Menu Main Menu Alarms Acknowledge and Configure Alarms by categories xd Alarms 4 2 Ack Alarm Configure Finish Acknowledge Alarm Main Menu gt Alarms gt Acknowledge Alarm User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only Latched alarms can be acknowledged Normal alarms cannot
257. cy menu eg Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Select each user level eg Engineer and setup the permission areas for that particular level of user Each Permission Area will give the user access to selected menus in the recorder The level permission has a set of default settings that are defined in Level Permissions on page 211 Permission areas can be customised for each level if required see Users on page 167 Add User Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Add User The Administrator enters each new user name then selects the new user and assigns their Level of permission The Administrator can set up a new user but cannot assign a password A dummy password is set and the new user is prompted to change the password when they first Log on The same user name cannot be used User names must not contain numeric characters The Administrator can add more than one user at a time They will not be added until the configuration has been Committed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK When a new user is added a default password password is set When a new user first logs on they are prompted to change the password The new user is responsible for remem bering their own password The Administrator will not be able to access this information But the Administrator is able to reset the password for any user Users Main Menu Conf
258. d therefore the AO setup will be used Messages instead of the pulse Slot setup mismatch DIO in N A N A A DIO board was detected on the previous run but now an alarm Diagnostics setup updating to Alarm board has been detected therefore the alarm setup will be used Messages instead of the DIO Slot setup mismatch Alarm N A N A An alarm board was detected on the previous run but now a DIO Diagnostics in setup updating to DIO board has been detected therefore the DIO setup will be used Messages instead of the alarm Slot setup unspecified for Al N A N A A warning that a new Al board has been fitted Diagnostics card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new AO board has been fitted Diagnostics AO card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new pulse board has been fitted Diagnostics pulse card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new DIO board has been fitted Diagnostics DIO card Messages Slot setup unspecified for N A N A A warning that a new alarm board has been fitted Diagnostics Alarm card Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 373 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Firmware upgrade N A N A Notification that the recorder has just detected that the software System Status and has been upgraded from the last successful run Messa
259. d Layout sss 163 Share Pathi 22 99 teens ers ee tese en ieu 98 NAS Button Device Selection ees 162 Network Settings COMMS Server essen 259 Network Share Path NAS 98 O Operating Temperature sss CORON ue rU NIRE DH MN ERE QvervleW L ssssssseeetetetentteettenntennes lr E n COMMS eret a HR EH EHE Rasi Functions and Features Minitrend QX Rear Connections Minitrend QX Standard Screens Multitrend SX Rear Connections Multitrend SX Standard Screens Options Hardware QX Rear Connections QX Standard Screens QXe Rear Connections Recorder Functionality Remote Control Viewer SX Rear Connections s SX Standard Screens SeC rIty Mie USB Devices 32 ennemis eZtrend QX Rear Connections eZtrend QXe Standard Screens P PC Ethernet Connections s 247 Panel Mounting Panel cut out size Password Net Sync Configuration 170 Rules 55er i iret edes 168 Password NetSync sssrin 168 Password Network Synchronisation 168 Password Policy osse etd Uie 210 455 Password Security Audit Trail BSS ideedendandeitenniutet iniret First Time Password Setup ESS oe 208 Level Permissions Table Log On Off searring Users and Groups icis Passwords onus Add User Administrator Change Passwords Delete Us
260. d objects or where electrical noise is present Doing so can result in shock or damage Do not disassemble or modify the SD memory card Doing so can result in damage Do not physically shock bend or pinch the SD memory card Doing so can lead to malfunction During reading writing of data do not turn OFF the power apply vibration or shock or pull out the card Data can become corrupt or permanently lost Only use Honeywell SD memory cards Operation cannot be guaranteed with other brands of card When inserting the SD memory card into the instrument make sure you orient the card correctly face up or down and that you insert it securely If not inserted cor rectly the card will not be recognized by the instrument Never touch the SD memory card with wet hands Doing so can lead to shock or malfunction Never use the SD memory card if it is dusty or dirty Doing so can lead to shock or malfunction You can use SD SDHC cards 1GB to 32 GB 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 51 Functions and Features Remote Viewer This is a firmware option that extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing remote viewing of the unit launched from a web browser Full remote control is available as an option which is password protected to prevent unauthorized access Compatible with Microsoft Internet explorer 6 to IE10 Separate Remote View application available for viewing the recorder screen remote
261. d to be Hazardous Live Ensure operators are not exposed to hazardous voltage levels Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Warnings and Safety Precautions For use in hazardous locations only applicable to recorders with FM approval A WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not remove or replace the Connectors Fuse holders while circuit is live when Flammable or Combustible atmosphere is present A WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present A WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not open the enclosure or replace the battery when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is present A WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not connect ro disconnect the equipment or memory card or USB device unless the power has been swithced off or the area is known to be hazardous NOTICE The Front door is tool secured and do not intended to open during live condition or when flammable or combustible atmosphere is present Ensure to lock the door for use in hazardous location In case of GR Mini Multi the front door is tool secured with cable tie whereas in DR graphic recorder the front door is tool secured with Hex head Screw 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 2 Installation Damage checks
262. d up the display will show a splash screen followed by an ini tialisation screen displaying the default language flag The first screen to appear on the recorder is a default process screen with the menu bar at the top Select the Menu button to access the menu system to configure the recorder The Menu button takes you to the Main Menu From the Main Menu you may be required to Log In if the Password function is active see 2 Log On Off on page 64 If not the next configuration required is to set the recorder to the correct local settings see 3 Local Settings on page 65 Figure 4 1 Default process screen Access to Main Menu A 0001 gt a E m iy 4 Screen 20 Feb06 10 49 21 10 47 00 10 48 00 10 49 00 100 oo Pen 1 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 50 00 Pen 2 50 00 Pen 3 50 00 Pen 4 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 63 64 2 Log On Off If Password ESS Extended Security System 21CFR security is active on your recorder a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available without logging on For ESS recorders only locate the First Time Password System Setup sheet included in with your recorder or see First Time Password System Setup on page 208 All Users When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log
263. dditional functions Firmware Options Applying your Firmware credits To activate the Firmware options follow this file path Main Menu Configue Setup Edit General Factory Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what firmware Options are currently active Serial No read only and cannot be edited Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality including the total credit value Options Code the Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that contains information that enables certain functionality including credit value Options Select the Options button This displays how may credits are currently in use Select Options to produce a list of Firmware options available with their credit values The number or credits required is shown in brackets Toggle each option On or Off to enable the feature within the recorder More credits are available from your supplier Edit Setup Credits Edit Setup Ycrecits 4 Serial No 100089 Maths 4 6 Full Maths Credits 30 Events 6 Options Code 100089890302109 Fast Scan 5 Options 28 Credits in Use EB Totals 4 Custom Scrn 4 Maintenance 2 M TT 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 243 244 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK
264. degrees C before being regarded as out of calibration EG cal point 1 100 5 cal point 2 300 1 0 cal point 3 500 75 Looks for the setpoint 150 and works out the sensor cal for 150 See Thermocouple Calibration Adjustments on page 389 Copy Cal Adjust the ability to copy settings from one input to another See page 400 Cert No enter the certificate number for the sensor 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode Pens for TC s Process Mode Set up and configure pens to display the readings for each thermocouple Pens can be allocated to a Group with other pens to display information Pens are required to be put into a group and then the group is selected in the Screen menu and displayed on the Process screen See Pens Menu on page 84 To run reports pens must be in a group Up to 6 groups of pens can be created The screen has a group name selection where you can select the groups 1 to 6 See AMS2750 Process Menu on page 379 Groups 1 to 6 relate directly to furnaces 1 to 6 as configured in O AMS2750 Process Mode on page 383 Furnace configuration menu Thermocouple Calibration Adjustments If a thermocouple has been calibrated the calibration points can be added to the additional TUS info for each sensor the calibration will then be added to the existing single or dual point cal Instrument cal under process conditions and the relevant corrections for each soa
265. der Ident Error Alert Factory Batch Printer set up and Groups Pens menus See General Menu on page 128 Screen This button displays a sub menu containing Screen Saver Chart speed and screen Brightness set up See Screen Saver on page 143 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 69 70 Recording Set up Scheduled export to media and specify the Storage Bias for record ing logged and chart data Edit Recording on page 148 Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event sys tem to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media The report details must be set up first before a report can be run see Reports Menu on page 153 To run a report see Reports Process on page 192 Field IO Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Field lO Select which type of Field Inputs Outputs are required for configuration depending on what type of cards are fitted in the recorder For AMS2750 mode the Field IO button will change to O AMS2750 Please refer to Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 Bs Pun e Analogue In Analogue Out AlarmjDigital IO sa or Pulse Inputs Linearisation Finish Analogue In Select this to configure each Analogue Input channel See Analogue In Menu on page 73 If AMS2750 mode is selected in the credits this button w
266. der but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data The Network Share option NAS can be used for loading and saving of layout lay and or setup files set saving exporting reports any messages Diagnostic system etc loading sound files from this network share to recorder This can also be used to print to file and this file can be saved to this network shared folder The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network con nectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Scheduled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder It is advisable to use other media USB SD for scheduled export Select the Export Now button to go to a sub menu of available external storage devices Buttons become active when a device is fitted Once fitted the size of the device memory and the amount of available space is displayed Select the desired device to export to and this will display two options New and All The All function will export all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will just export any new data since the last export was made to this port If the scheduled export is enabled for a particular drive then only the New option is selectable not the All option If an Export Now is requested within 5 seconds of a Scheduled export being activated the manual exp
267. diss sexu cronkdu scd codd da do ud DEUS nu rav d ixi IEEE Ethernet EM General operation of the e mail system eerte 344 Appendix F FUZZY Logging 1 2 22i ia cunis td asusascakvR KE nana S urR DFRL IE RES S nnmnnn 345 Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation eese 349 Thesignificance of EO vete ea eei rete teret TE Ae 349 Appendix H Calibration 4 coarse tutari sa dri kou da cad du sa cu mida a 351 AI Calibration and CJC Calibration eee eee eese eese eene stent n tensa an 351 Sensor Compensation S 351 Appendix l Battery Date sessioni dp aix RUE RS NIU EE nC eU nic DURUM GE 353 Location Processor Board eerie eene eene en sensn sns tn seta tns tn sen statuae 353 Safety Guidelines ais eicesesoco citant cei iet i E et eR e EE ecce ples 353 Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps Modbus Memory Map Supplement Totalisers Input Text message Analogue Input Value stitit statt rtt he een eee eu ee aea eee nea eee Ea Communications InpWl sene oni eie tte tetto he Pee EE EF pee ste Siete sta peer PER Se Pen Value Siors insae aa lae um e n ettam ete e ea eb edd dete Modbus Function Codes scssssssssssssssssssssosssoosessesssocvesenssesesevesess booa beoe sd ossseosens Appendix K Troubleshooting
268. ds Spares List angie HI pP Minitrend QX Minitrend QX and QXe Portable Case Multitrend SX sse Multitrend SX Portable Case QX and QXe Portable Case eZirend Xe sinirine A mii aer Specification Tables i Specifications sse Standard Communications Interface DAUD MTM WC Start a Survey AMS2750 ss Static Electricity Safety se Status Menu eee Alarm Digital IO Analogue In Analogue Out sse ns COMMS P c Diagnostics esee Event Status sess General Status Hardware Status IO Cards 12d oet itetetemn nire Maintenance sse Media nosse aenstetenermintelto ODLODS icio riii etm trennt t reip ih Pen Overview sse Puls Inputs irsinin risas RECOPGING ceci E SYSE ia n R E ER 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sterilisation isses thins cin E ER UTOR UOS Storage Alarm Storage Bias Storage Media Format 122 184 SIUS esena nudas dur ieee aration teas 63 Survey Status AMS2750 sss 410 Symbols Safety udis dote d BeH nha Dd 2 System Event Causes sse 115 System Accuracy Tests SAT 383 System Menu General Status 1 restes IO Cards 1e heise ned ert erret nn M System Messages System Requirements System Status eee T TC Burn Out Event Causes 115 TC Cal Adjust AMS2750 ss
269. e Credits on page 131 FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder See Firmware Upgrade on page 132 Calibration Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card See Calibration on page 132 Demo Traces A set of demo traces are available for demonstration or simulation pur poses See Demo Traces on page 135 Reset Setup Select this to clear the current setup A Warning message will appear before activating the reset See Resets on page 136 Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings See Localisation on page 136 e Media Config contains the list of Storage media with Save and Load Options See Media Config on page 137 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Credits Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active Serial No read only and cannot be edited Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality Options Code The Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder
270. e Minitrend GR DR Graphic Multitrend GR 8 inputs 24V Power Supply 24V Transmitter Power Supply Minitrend GR Multi trend GR and DR Graphic Common Relay Output Y Communications Key FTP TCP IP 10 100 Ethernet Web and Email USB ports for keyboard and mouse i Option P RS485 Modbus slave except boos a 4 eZtrend GR Standard Crystal Clear Display Minitrend GR has a 5 7 Digital Colour LCD TFT VGA Resolution 640 x 480 pixels e Multitrend GR has a 12 1 Digital Colour LCD TFT VGA Resolution 1024 x 678 pix els e eZtrend GR has a 5 7 Digital Colour LCD TFT QVGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels e DR Graphic has a 12 1 Digital Colour LCD TFT XGA Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 45 46 Functions and Features Clear and intuitive operation Industrial rugged Touch Screen with rapid navigation Custom build screens in the recorder or using Screen Designer not eZtrend GR Comprehensive Connectivity 10 100 Ethernet DHCP Web and E mail FTP and TCP IP transfer of encrypted data by using Trend Server Pro software e RS485 Modbus Protocol not available for the eZtrend GR USB ports for keyboard mouse and printer Data Storage On board non volatile Flash memory up to 4GB for Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and the DR Graphic
271. e 4 6 8 12 or 16 input channels Multitrend GR recorder can have 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 40 or 48 input channels eZtrend GR recorder can have 3 6 9 or 12 input channels Input Types mV V mA with external shunt provided as standard Thermocouple RTD and ohms Minimum Input Span Range is fully configurable with span limitation of the operating range selected with 496 under range to 4 over range capability 50V Range 2 Burnout T C Active High or Low Passive and Health watch Maintenance option Cold Junction Compensation Internal compensation with the ability to manually adjust values External Input for compensation External CJC value specified Input Resolution 0 0015 16 Bit ADC Input Impedance Current loop resistance 10 ohms use 0 1 external resistor Volts gt 1MQ all other gt 10MQ 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 309 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Analogue Inputs Source Impedance T C and RTD 100 ohms per lead maximum CU10 15 ohms not available for the eZtrend GR A single point cal on Slot A of the eZtrend GR recorder will improve accuracy for lead resistance above 10 ohms Square Root Extraction Available as standard on every input type Sensor Compensation Single point and Dual point Input Sampling Rate DR Graphic recorders Minitrend GR eZtrend GR Recorder has 2 available slots and the
272. e 6 classes of Furnace Class 1 to 6 based on how well they maintain the temper ature within the furnace working area with class 1 being the tightest and Class 6 the least stringent The TUS is performed on a regular basis to insure the furnace continues to meet the uni formity that is defined by the process procedures and the requirements for heat treating a particular part or material Refer to AMS2750 spec The TUS also involves the soak time and the amount of temperature overshoot observed if any Another key factor in the heat treatment process is monitoring the number of times the T C s have been used and the temperatures they have been exposed too to insure they are accu rate and reliable This type of capability for doing uniformity surveys and documenting the results has been added to the DR Graphic amp Multitrend GR recorder and provides an easy to use and un derstand TUS process screen along with a PC analysis software Temperature uniformity survey TUS mode can be performed using an DR Graphic amp Mul titrend GR recorder that is configured to be used as a TUS test instrument The DR Graph ic amp Multitrend GR recorder provides a custom display for the user and outputs a custom data set enabling the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a TUS report This is a dedicated mode especially for TUS surveys and is only available on the DR Graphic amp Mul titrend GR recorder TUS mode on the DR Graphic amp Multit
273. e Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are adjustable All temperature limits are adjustable Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications See Sterilisation on page 93 Tag Select and enter an identifier for the pen Up to 17 characters Add to Msgs Toggles On and Off Select this to add a totaliser to the messages screen Eg Total1 Total 1 Reset Units Normal Totaliser only This is the Units of Measurement for the totaliser Select and enter the units Up to 12 characters Time Factor Normal Totaliser only Time factor Totaliser adds a value once per sec ond so you need to Divide by this factor For example If your flow meter is in units second Time factor is 1 If your flow meter is in units minute the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 60 so every 1 second 1 60th of the unit is added If your flow meter is in units hour the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 3600 so every 1 second 1 3600th of the unit is added Unit Factor Normal Totaliser only The Totaliser adds the engineering unit from the instrument onto the total after the time factor is applied You then need to Divide by the unit factor For example 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 91 If your flow meter is in litres time a
274. e Options and must be enabled using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options in the recorder or they will not be available See Firmware Credit System on page 241 Maths Credit Options Full Maths firmware credit option will allow the functions listed in Table 14 1 on page 322 and Table 14 2 on page 324 Scripting firmware credit option will allow the Full math functions plus the scripting func tions in Table 14 3 on page 326 Table 14 4 on page 327 Table 14 5 on page 328 Table 14 6 on page 328 and Table 14 7 on page 329 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 321 322 Full Maths amp Script Processing Maths Variable and Function Tables Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level n is Pen number 1 to 96 and x is alarm number 1 to 6 Analogue Input Eng values An Get the value of Analogue n 1 to 48 in Engi neering units Analogue Raw Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n 1 to 48 in values Electrical values Batch Mode BATMD1 to Per group Returns 12 batch running 2 batch BATMD6 stopped or 3 batch paused Batch comment list blcomm x Get index of Batch comment list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch description list bldesc x Get index of Batch description list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch lot numb
275. e SINE COS TAN Log Parenthesis eg A1 A2 comm variables free memory and access to any data item variable A1 P1 D1 etc Scripting is not available for the eZtrend GR Front and Rear USB Ports USB host ports front and rear for data and setup transfers through these ports External devices keyboard or mouse Barcode reader or external mass storage device USB ports are internal for DR Graphic Standard Screens and Custom Fully programmable display values in engineering units Time amp date stamp on every division pro Screens viding the current time and date Sets of Standard screens are available to display data on a chart digital reading bargraphs or numerous combinations thereof Screen properties can be modified on the recorder and custom ised to suit Custom screens created in the Screen Designer software can be imported into the recorder for specialist applications Custom Screen firmware option is required Digital values displayed include alarms on bars engineering units pen name tag time and date 20 character description and totalised values Custom Screens are not available as an option for the eZtrend GR 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 307 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Design Attributes Data Storage Removable Media SD card card supports up to 8 0 Giga bytes SD card is available as an option for the eZtrend GR Local Mass Storage Options USB memor
276. e communications The goal of this test is to help determine which Modbus protocol variant Modbus or Modbus X the device being added has been configured to use The slave address and COM port IP address from the setup dialog are used to get data from the First input register in the modbus device profile selected For the device The data is retrieved using both Modbus and Modbus X By programming a set value on the first channel of the device it is possible to confirm the specific protocol that the device is using Modbus slave address IP Address Modbus profile 1 160 221 36 31 Recorder ID 1 64 628510 25 532473 0 000028 24 152302 6 706206E 016 4 714286 0 000000 37 500000 0 000000 25 000010 1 203979E 011 45 204956 5 910645E 022 86 447815 0 000000 0 000000 Find Device button This can be used to find GR record ers on the network It uses the re Locate Device corders unique Network ID to identify them and populate this list Select your device from the list and Select device to connect to from the list below press the Use Selection button to Pump Station 1 xs 100061 160 221 36 22 H Pump Station 12 xs 100062 160 221 36 56 insert the recorder details into the Avon Creek west xs 100075 160 221 36 76 Add Device box Avon Creek north Furnace 1 xs 100089 160 221 36 33 When you get back to the Add De vice Detail Box press OK The recorder you have set up will now be added to the device
277. e if there is no Analogue Input card fitted Examples of var ious inputs are available without having an actual signal input coming into the recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 75 76 ee Demo Type Select this for a list of available Demo Type inputs Cycle Time Enter the Cycle Time in seconds of the Demo Input Select and use the on screen keyboard Add Noise This is to Add Noise to the Demo Input as a percentage value Select and use the on screen keyboard When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Thermocouple Wiring Changes If the recorder is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change Analogue Out Menu Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Analogue Out Only available when an Analogue Out card is fitted as an option 2 or 4 outputs are available per card The outputs are factory calibrated to meet the published specification and cannot be field calibrated Refer to connection details and Analogue Output Channel Numbers on page 35 Edit Setup Field 1 0 D ana Out Menu path to current menu Ana Out 9 A09 Pen No 1 0 20m Ana Outi0 4010 Pen No 1 4 20m4 The Analogue Out screen displays all the available Ana Outii A011 Pen No 1
278. e of an occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes currently include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Stop Pause The Event Effects currently include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Acknowledge Single pen Pen group All pens Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefill Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Fast Scanning mode 5 For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per sec Note 4 ond 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the Minitrend GR amp DR Graphic and 8 inputs for the Multi trend GR Totalisers 4 Each pen can be associated with a totaliser Using extra pens the totalised values can be dis Sterilisation played and recorded multiple totals can be calculated out of the same variable weekly monthly calculation Note 1 etc The totaliser function can handle Fo a
279. e recorder uses a new and powerful method for recording Data is acquired at pen spe cific rates processed and stored in the large on board Flash memory This memory oper ates in a cycle mode such that the oldest data is over written by the newest When data is exported from the recorder this does not delete that data from the recorder but retains it for further or future downloads With this method the user can export multiple cop ies of the same encoded data giving extreme security rus m MW wm Now Recording 5 pens recording Export Required In 34d 6h 00m 00s Schedule 10 Minutes to SD Card Media Full In gt 1 Year FTP Export Req In 314d 3hi20m 00s Pre Trigger Status Acquiring ae A Storage Media Format New SD cards and USB storage keys are pre formatted for use in the recorder and PC If you have a used SD card or USB key we recommend you erase it Formatting of SD cards and USB keys can be done through your PC The formatting types accepted by the recorder are FAT FAT16 TFAT and FAT32 SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Start Stop Recording The Recording screen will allow the user to manually Start and Stop recording Select either the start or stop buttons to activate the function for All pens a Group of pens if a group is defined or By Pen to identify an individual pen s Recording Displays the current pen recording status and the number of pens currently
280. e top a recorder acting as both a server and a client in the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom A recorder can be set up to be a server and a client Setting it as both means this recorder will synchro nise time with the network server But will also allow other recorders to time sync with it This saves many recorders trying to time sync with the network server When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu FTP File Transfer Protocol Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Comms Services FTP This is a method of transferring data and setups to and from TrendManager Software Suite and the recorder Enabled Tick to enable FTP transfer Allow Upload Tick to allow FTP transfer from TrendManager Software Suite to the recorder Allow Download Tick to allow FTP transfer from the recorder to TrendManager Software Suite Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when an FTP transfer is performed Mark Chart Can only be active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when an FTP transfer is performed Refer to Section 8 Communication on page 245 in this manual and the TrendMan ager Software Suite manual for setting up FTP transfer Secure FTP The GR Series recorders support a Credit enabled function for doing secure FTP data trans fers since the n
281. e two will appear next to the incomplete part of the event When a scheduled event is displayed it will show the next time a scheduled cause is due 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 203 204 NOTICE Remember that Cause 1 2 3 OR Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 AND Effect 4 Cause and Effect numbers are not linked eg Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked Comms Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms General See General Status on page 204 Modbus See Modbus Status on page 204 SMTP See SMTP Status on page 205 FTP See FTP Status on page 205 Peers See Peers Status on page 205 This screen contains a description of the type of comms currently being used and its status General Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Comms General Description and Status of comms on the recorder Displays Ethernet or RS485 in an Active or inactive state and the recorder s IP address Modbus Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt Modbus 2 ModBus Status Description Status Transport Ethernet Address Dynamic 160 221 36 31 Device ID 1 Protocol ModBus X Good Messages Bad Messages Internal Errors Description and Status of Modbus Transport Ethernet Transport Ethernet or RS485 Address the IP address of your recorder and if it is fixed or Dynamic Device ID Recorder ID number Protocol Modbus or Modbus X Good Messages
282. e when Increment is selected as the Event Action Enter the number at which you want the counter to increment by when the event cause is triggered ee Reset To only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action and Sub Type is set to User Enter the number at which you want the counter to reset to when the event cause is triggered Max Mins Reset Use this as an effect of an event to reset all Max Min values Chart Control The chart activity can be controlled as an effect of an event The chart control options are Pause Stop Resume Clear and Prefill DDD 8 Enabled Y Chart Control C m B ee Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Hesume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Hesume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder ee Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed d
283. e when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation See Thermocouple CJC Compensation on page 338 nt Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref erence temperature Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV refer ence external to the recorder Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera ture Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at Ext Input Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan nel to measure the cold junction sensor External Input Only available when CJ Compensation is set to Ext Input Select the input required as an external input Eng Span Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the top of the input range Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Eng Zero Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input scale Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Demo Setup Only availabl
284. e which will appear on the top of every page of the generated report A new folder Images will be created after you select Browse Lo go and be stored along with the application When you use a logo it will be stored in this Images folder for future use You can select any logo image so long as it is either bmp or jpg format It should not be any bigger than 14mm 0 55 height x 63 5 2 5 width Ideal dimensions in pixels are 81x81 96x96 300x300 When the first report with new logo is created Honeywell jpg will be saved in images folder as a backup for future After selecting any logo another file with name logo jpg will be created and placed in the images folder This logo will be used for subsequent reports until user selects another im age If you select logo jpg again from the Images folder a message will appear informing you that this file is already selected and prompting you to select another if this one is no long er required A backup copy of the Honeywell logo will always be kept at this location with name Honey well jpg This can be used at any time to re use the logo again in the report Add a Logo Select Browse Logo and browser the window will open Go to where your logo is located and select it by clicking on Open This logo will now appear on the top of every page of the generated report The logo select ed will be placed automatically into the Images folder an become the default for subsequent report
285. each alarm EG Alarm value 2 Pen 1 96 Alarm value 3 Pen 1 96 up to Alarm value 6 Pen 1 96 Table below shows Alarm value 1 to 6 start and end addresses for Pens 1 to 96 Address Address Description To 51 52 25 66 IC00 7169 Alarm 1 Value Pen 1 A 16 1CBE 7359 Alarm 1 Value Pen 96 A 16 1CCO 7361 Alarm 2 Value Pen 1 A 16 1D7E 7551 Alarm 2 Value Pen 96 A 16 1D80 7553 Alarm 3 Value Pen 1 A 16 1E3E 7743 Alarm 3 Value Pen 96 A 16 1E40 7745 Alarm 4 Value Pen 1 A 16 1EFE 7935 Alarm 4 Value Pen 96 A 16 1F00 7937 Alarm5 Value Pen 1 A 16 1FBE 8127 Alarm 5 Value Pen 96 A 16 1FCO 8129 Alarm 6 Value Pen 1 A 16 207E 8319 Alarm 6 Value Pen 96 end address A 16 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Alarm Status 96 Pens Allows you to read the status of all 6 alarms for each pen up to 16 pens for GR Address Address e See Hex Decimal Description Bley 1980 6529 Alarm Status Pen 1 start address A 16 1 1981 6530 Alarm Status Pen 2 A 16 1 1982 6531 Alarm Status Pen 3 A 16 1 1983 6532 Alarm Status Pen 4 A 16 1 1984 6533 Alarm Status Pen 5 A 16 1 1985 6534 Alarm Status Pen 6 A 16 1 1986 6535 Alarm Status Pen 7 A 16 1 1987 6536 Alarm Status Pen 8 A 16 1 1988 6537 Alarm Status Pen 9 A 16 1 1989 6538 Alarm Status Pen 10 A 16 1 19DF 6624 Alarm Status Pen 96 end address A 16
286. each bank only for eZtrend GR recorder Range Ohms Volts and Amps only Toggle between Preset and User Defined The Preset option will make available a list of Range Types or select User Defined to specify High and Lower Limits Range Type Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when Range is set to Pre set Select for a list of available ranges The factory default range is 12V See User Defined Maximum Input Ranges on page 304 Damp Level The damping filter is an advanced algorithm offering improved response over more traditional methods It works by producing configurable levels of damping but at the same time being able to respond rapidly to large input changes Enter the Damp Level in Engineering Units 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 73 Figure 4 2 Effects of Damping and Rolling Average example Rolling Average of input signal Pen 11 Input signal Pen 67 Damping on input signal Pen 10 Pen 10 Pen 11 Pen 67 26 9798 a 26 4373 i 26 8261 Note the Damping Pen 10 has been offset for this example to be able to see the damping effect clearly Linearisation Tables Ohms Volts and Amps only Select a table from the drop down list if required See Linearisation Tables on page 81 Use Pen Scale Toggle On and Off this is enabled by default Analogue defaults to the corresponding Pen eg A1 will default to Pen 1 If you change A1 to display another pen scale eg Pen 3 you must go int
287. ecify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at Ext Input Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan nel to measure the cold junction sensor Units Ohms Volts and Amps only This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters For Thermocouple and Resistance Ther mometer units see Localisation on page 136 Label Select and enter a identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters Sensor Comp Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units settings Choose from Single Point Dual Point or Multi Point Cal see Sensor Compensation on page 351 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 387 388 Edit Setup Enabled Damp Level Burnout Type AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Info Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O Sensors gt AMS2750 Info The items in this menu are different depending on if the recorder is in Process mode or TUS mode In Process mode this menu is used to track the usage of each sensor TC For TUS mode see AMS2750 Info TUS Mode on page 399 CQ aMs27501nfo v TrackUsage Ln Sample Rate 2Hz 500ms Passive This menu shows Track Usage for a recorder in Process mode 0 0
288. ects 173 Settings Update Sounds Sound Effects 173 Setup Men C AI Calibration Alarm Relay Alarm Digital IO Alarms Menu eee Analogue In Menu Analogue Out Batch Menu CIC Calibration Calibration sse Charts iens Comms Services Counters Credits Daylight Saving Digital IO Edit Recording Edit Setup Email Error Alert es Events Menu eee Events Counters Menu mm 111 PIP ge ES Factory ae ee Feld IQ steer iie 70 Firmware Upgrade see 132 General us Groups IP Address sus Identity eus aene nome reete Language Load Menu Localisation 458 Logging Modbus PEETS iarna a R e te REED Pens oina a n Printer Menu Pulse Input s REPORTS enen earte E ride Save Setup sss Scale Menu Screen Saver Screen Setup SerVICeS eed nee inetd alates TOPP zr seen eher et tnis Tabular Display Temp Units 5c Time ZONE sireenin a LOCALISED ecciesie os Web Enable Share Path NAS Signal Wiring sessen i Single Point Gal eet Slave TD PM Software Software Installation Comms Sound Effects Set Volume sese Update Soun
289. ecurity Log Out closed padlock Security Access Failure No entry sign Security Thermocouple Failure User Mark on Chart and Batch User Start Logging or Totals User Stop Logging or Totals User Pause Logging or Totals A User Reset Logging or Totals 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 189 190 Process Menu Main Menu Process If Max Min Totals and Counters can be controlled from this screen 8 Max Min a vi ou U Vn User Variables Max Min Reset Max Min Maximum or Minimum values by categories Controls for any process in use Totals Start Stop Reset or View Totals by categories Counters View and Reset counters by type Firmware option User Variables Modify and View User variables that have been set up in Maths and Scripting See User Variables on page 192 Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired See Script Timers on page 192 Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event system See Reports Process on page 192 Note on Groups Groups of pens need to be set up to use this feature see Pens Menu on page 84 Max Min Main Menu Process Max Min Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min values by categories All By Groups of pens or by individual pens Use the View button to just display the Max Min values All Select this to reset all values By Groups If Groups of
290. ed Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Analogue Output Channel Numbers The Analogue Output cards are either 2 or 4 channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Analogue Out con nector is on the left of the Analogue slot with a blanking plate on the right Table 2 5 Analogue Output card Card Position Slot B Slot E Slot F Channel number 9 to 12 33 to 36 41 to 44 Analogue Output Connection Details Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Loop NC LOOP Loop NC Loop NC Not Loop Loop NC Loop Loop NC connected Pulse Input Card The Pulse Input card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The Pulse Input card position for the Minitrend GR and for the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic are shown in Table 2 1 on page 25 The Pulse Input card is not available on the eZtrend GR recorder however the 8 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Dig
291. ed Options for each demo trace are NoSimulation Demo traces are deactivated and no simulation traces are available Simulate if board not fitted Simulation is activated when an Analogue In card is not fitted in one of the top two slot positions Configure the Demo Setup in Analogue In Menu on page 73 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 135 136 Resets Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Hesets Setup This will remove the current setup from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset Setup Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current setup This is irreversible and will restart the re corder Select OK to reset the setup or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Layout This will remove the current layouts from the recorder and return to the default layout When you select this button the Reset Layout Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current layouts This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Select OK to reset the layouts or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Data This will remove all log and chart data from the recorder When you select this button the Reset Data Warning box will appear with a message This will delete ALL log and chart data taking approx 80s to complete and will restart during the process Select
292. ed to locate the correct device in TrendServer Modbus only requires the correct Slave ID to connect see Modbus on page 103 If the device is detected using the Slave ID the Recorder ID and Serial Number will be transferred if the device is not detected an extra device will appear in the database containing the Re altime data Depending on the type of network being used it maybe advisable not to use Modbus comms and FTP in the same time to the same PC This may cause the FTP transfer to time out Only data can be sent via Modbus No recorder setups or events are sent for realtime and logged data However a Modbus interface such as Modscan 32 can be set up as Modbus master and used to transmit Totals Digital Input Digital Output a Comms Variable CV or Messages to the recorder Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the reversed byte order of the floating point number The Comms Server provides an integrated facility for testing a device to help decide which modbus protocol variant to use See Edit a Device on page 266 Modbus Mapping and Function Codes see Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps on page 355 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Hardware Installation Device and PC Ethernet connections Connect an Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the back of the device to the Ethernet hub Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the Ethernet hub
293. ed above and press OK For more detailed information on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite software manual Edit a Device Select the Comms port containing the device for editing and right click on the device either in the left or top window The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the config uration for comms with that device Any fields not greyed out can be changed For Ethernet devices the IP address can be changed Any device can be made active or inactive from here For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed For information on the Test button see above Click on the OK button to save the changes Delete a Device Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device ei ther in the left or top window Select Delete Device from the resulting menu The Delete De vice Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device Check this is the correct device for deletion then click on the OK button and the device is removed otherwise the operation can be cancelled Comms Server Logging To set up logging you must first decide where to store the data A database must be set up The database can either be on the PC running Comms Server or on another networked de vice There will be a database already set up by d
294. ed to a pen for display and storage Multiple totalisa tions Maths option are possible with the use of extra pens option Reset may be manual or pro grammed Event option Totalisation values are ten digits plus exponent Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are fully adjustable values of X Y W and V Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications Custom Screens optional not available for the eZtrend GR Provides the capability in the recorder to accept custom screen designs from the Screen Designer Reports Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format AMS2750 Process AMS2750 Process activates the Process Mode screen and the AMS2750 process configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750D specification including Thermocouple tracking Health Watch Maintenance Capability optional The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative mainte nance
295. een Set the orientation to Vertical or Horizontal for Scales and Charts Cycle Scales active with chart and scale combination If ticked the recorder will cycle through each pen in the form of a scale or bar chart depending on which is selected for the Scale Indicator Scale Indicator active with chart and scale combination Select which indicator either bar or pen pointers will indicate on the scale Background Background colour can be set if no template is used Select and choose from the Colour palette Add Screen To add a new screen just select Add Screen and configure as required Delete Screen To Delete a screen just select Delete Screen to produce a list of current screens Select the screen to delete and it will be removed immediately When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 159 Settings Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Settings Use this menu to set up the layout settings for the screens 160 Cycle Screens Tick this to cycle though each of the recorder s screens Cycle List Select which screens you wish to be cycled including non process screens Cycle Interval Enter the amount of time in seconds that each of the cycle screens are displayed for range 5 to 3600 seconds Screen Hold If during cycling screens you wish to investiga
296. een to toggle the pen LL BIN e trace On and Off gt amp Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit About Replay The replay screen facility enables the user to Show greater coverage of elapsed time display more history Zoom in and out further Display data on a chart and DPM screen Display Max Min readings on DPMs Display pens on a chart replay screen that are currently displayed on a DPM screen Add any enabled pen on to a process screen All enabled pens have history even if not dis played on a process screen These can be added onto a process screen at any time to view and replay data There is a Replay Screen time out feature so if the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen See Settings on page 160 Replay and Hot Buttons If any Hot Buttons have been configured to Enter Replay Screen then when the equivalent Hot Button is selected eg HB1 in a Process screen the Replay screen will be started This does not apply to Non Process screens The Hot buttons will appear in the top right of the screen but will not activate on a non process screen 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 231 232 Hot Buttons on Process Screen 0001 Recorder 1 03 Jan 06 08 53 32 Hia Hess wo Pen 3 Zooming When the recorder switches to the replay screen it will represent the chart speed that is on y
297. efault on your PC when TrendServer Pro was loaded This will be called Initial database 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server To set up a database on the PC click the Database Servers icon this will expand to show local Servers i e databases on that PC Click local servers to expand out to show all da tabases 9 Communications Server Communications Server 8 Database Servers fi Database Servers E Communication Ports j fl Local Server x comi Initial Database x COM2 x COM3 c i x COM4 x COMS In the example shown there are two available databases The default database called Initial Database and June FTP Databases can be added by right clicking on the Local Server icon and then clicking Add Database Enter a database name and description click OK and the new database will ap pear on the list To add a database server you will need the IP address of the device that will be the database server Click the new database server button Enter the IP address and a new database server will be added Add databases to this server as above New Database Server Logging Configuration 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 267 268 Communications Server Logging Configuration This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database It can be accessed in several ways Figure 8 7 Logging Configuration
298. el thickness 00008 000000 09008 000000 090061 aaoo o ADDITIONAL SLOTS FOR ANNAAAAAANAAAAAA 45 MM THICK PANEL MOUNTING 45 WM THICK PANEL 1 988 7 869 1 630 4 Mounting clamp positions for 2 20mm panel thickness For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted 10 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation Multitrend GR Dimension details 900088 000000 00000 00000 000000000000000 e 00000000000000 45 MM THICK PANEL SLOT LENGHT OF PANEL CLAMP INCREASED TO ACCOMODATED 45 MM THICK PANEL 300 00 46 83 11 811 1 844 280 00 11 024 Figure 2 5 Multiitrend GRRecorder Dimensions and Mounting slots including 45mm panel thickness Installation Instructions e Minimum panel thickness 2mm 0 078 max 20mm 0 78 Alternate panel mounting available thickness 45mm 1 77 Both recorders must be inserted from the front of the panel Two mounting clamps are supplied and can be fixed either on the top and bottom sides or on the left and right sides of the case 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 11 Mechanical Installation eZtrend GRDimension details 137 50 413 S J 4 Mounting clamp positions For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit either top
299. elay high breaking capacity mini mum 60Vdc rated Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES When using the recorder as portable equipment the optional rear cover must be fitted when hazardous voltages are connected Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury AC Power AC supply is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the power sup ply 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz 40W Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and 50VA DR Graphic and 60W Multitrend GR Absolute limits 90V 132Vac 110V and 180V 264Vac 240V AC DC Power Suppy For the Minitrend GR the supply range is 12 30V DC absolute limits are 12V to 30V DC The DR Graphic and Multitrend GR the supply range is 24V DC 10 absolute limits are 20V to 55V DC the AC range is 20 to 30V AC The Minitrend GR and the eZtrend GR also has an 18V option with supply range 12VDC 30VDC 12VAC 20VAC DC power rating are as follws Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR 40W Multitrend GR 60W DR Graphic 40W Power to the D C variant is connected via a rectangular 3 way connector as identified in page 24 for the Minitrend GR and page 24 for the Multitrend GR and page 26 for the DR Graphic Note Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start for all recorders 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 23 24 Earth screw ground Wire seal provision 24V DC AC Input Analogue Input
300. elect the Speed button and three chart speeds will appear for the replay scree Fast 10x Medium 3x and Slow speed 0 which is normal speed Exit to return to the previous process screen Action Toolbar The Action toolbar can be set to timeout disappear after a specified time To set the time see Menu bar TO Settings on page 160 Print This will print the current replay screen For network printers ensure all printer server information has been entered in Network Admin on page 98 Single This is for a single cursor to be displayed on the replay screen Dual This is a mode that displays an additional cursor showing the time difference between the two When selected the toolbar icons will change A to Swap and Link The two cursors appear on top Action Swap Link of each other and can be moved by dragging one of the cursors using the stylus on the touch screen The cursor with the two grey arrows is the movable one to change this use the Swap button Each cursor can be positioned inde pendently and linked so they can be moved together use the Link button Each cursor will also show its current time date and the digital readings on the right hand side show the max and min between the cursors as opposed to under a single cursor See Figure 6 3 on page 229 P Hg Jump This is a Message jump mode that allows the user to jump to the next or previous message i on the chart the display will centre on the mes
301. elete Screen Demo Traces Deviation Alarm Markers sss 236 Deviation Alarms 88 Diagnostics Alarm Digital IO see Analogue In Analogue Out sss Comms eeeeeeeeeeneennnn nnns Comms Server Event Status Hardware Status Media 5e RES Pulse Inputs Diagnostics Messages m Diagnostics Status Digital IO Card Connections 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Cards Channel Numbers eene Digital Input Event Causes 7 sese 115 Digital Outputs Event Effects 122 Dimensions 10 Discard Configuration s 206 Display Alert Event Effects srecna tns Display Overview sssri Displaying Totals 2 oce ett tuemitds Dual Point Cal 1e esicon ek During a Survey AMS2750 451 E ESS Extended Security System Edit Custom Screens m Edit Layout cotta dM iq dn Add Sereen ecseri eee enn Appearance Delete Screen Screens T SENES MEC Edit Recording scd mph Edit Recording Menu Scheduled Export sse 148 Storage A LAG sorena niina 150 Storage Blas idsdsbose bebe dite te 149 Edit Screen Properties Custom Screens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenen tnnt 176 Standard Screens sss 176 Edit Setup Edit Standard Screens Electrical Installation PAN DC Input kius tinar r tenete AG POWER 6c etie eiteeter tiet Alarm Relay Card Connections Analogue Input Card sss Analogue Output Card oo sss Cables Comms C
302. elevant pen s below Totaliser Is an event effect that can Start Stop Reset or Reset and Start a Totaliser in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Digital Outputs Is an event effect that can switch a Digital Output On or Off Enter which one in Sub Type and select the relevant relay output s Alarm Acknowledge this is an effect of an event that can acknowledge a latched alarm on a Single Pen Pen Group or All pens Select the pen and the number of alarm to be acknowledged Email Is an event effect that will send an Email when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Totaliser Starts Effect Email is sent ee Sub Type Auto Single Line User or Multiline User Auto will enter what the Event was eg Scheduled or Alarm triggered Single Line User can have up to 69 characters of text or use Embedded Process Values on page 119 Multiline User can have up to 80 characters per line with up to 1000 characters including spaces carriage returns and line feed in total They can also include embedded process variable Maths variables as embedded variables on page 120 can be used in an email Recipients Enter email recipients from the list If no email recipients are present in the list they must be entered first in the Email menu see Email on page 106 ee Embed Screenshot This feature allows a screen shot of the current screen to be attached
303. ence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Stop Pause TUS Start Stop AMS2750 TC Tim ers Process Timers TC Health Monitor Analogue Inputs The Event Effects include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Acknowledge Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefil Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Reports Update Tabular readins Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen Change Chart Speed Each event marker can be recorded for analysis using the TrendManager Software Suite Fast Scanning mode For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per second 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the DR Graphic Minitrend GR and 8 inputs for the Multitrend GR Totaliser Sterilisation optional One totaliser per pen Totaliser value must be assign
304. enu Screen Touch Test Use the Touch test feature to see if your touch screen is calibrated correctly Select this but ton and touch the screen using the stylus If the centre of the cursor follows the stylus around the screen then the touch screen is calibrated correctly If the centre of the cursor is not where the stylus is touching the screen then go to the Calibrate button and recalibrate the Screen 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 179 180 Batch Setup Batch Groups Main Menu Batch Batch is a firmware option which can be activated from Credits on page 131 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch mode has changed to allow for concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Setting up a batch requires information to identify where the batch starts and stops Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart If the groups in Batch Control are greyed out you need to go to the Pens menu and assign individual pens to a group See Pens Menu on page 84 Up t
305. er First Time Login Levels see A loli Reset Passwords sse User Administration lc c Passwords AMS2750 Passwords Setup First time ESS 208 l 0 NUT EP Peers StAtUs Pen Overview Status Pen Pointers sss Pen Report Information Pens Meni eetousqa detailed bd Mame EN Alarms Logging Scale Totaliser Pens for TC s Process Mode 389 Play Sound Event Effects 2e tete ertet 125 Policy Passwords 1a eene smit 165 Ports Comms Ports Ethernet Post Trigger Set Post Trigger time eee 151 Power up ssec Pre Trigger Acquiring Alarm Rate Configuration secerni ario in e it eieia Enable Event processing Export aienea Importing Logging Type Post Trigger Restart ssssnceenes Set Pre Trigger time Preface ene Oe Preset Markers Print Screen Event Effects es 123 Print Support sssssssssrsrsseosrrersssessrrrereerorsssssss 44 Printer Ment Lassen betta pte 141 456 Printing Message List oat entente 188 Messages Screens 187 Status Screens Status Screen printing Process Menu een Counters View and Reset Max Min eene REPONS alnar irn oa tha eti dise Script TIMErS ssip nn E Totals Start Stop Reset User Variables Process Mode AMS2750 Process Screen Overview Processor Board Battery Safety 4 eee Pro
306. er st Cal Control ae In TC Due Green TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired Process Inst Select the on screen buttons to set the countdown timers for each timer individually and fol low the on screen instructions The AMS2750 process screen for the recorder will display the countdown timers for the SAT TUS Instrument Calibration and the Control Thermocouple calibration The number of days remaining are displayed on a colour coded button The furnace name and the furnace class is also displayed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode Running 13 40 00 pajgeua sawn en 3H 03 epeBdn semu SEPIWD 40J JJO uo 4eMod Bis E AMS2750 Status Furnace Furnace 1 Class 2 TUS Due Inst Cal SAT Due Control Process In due In In TC Due Inst Example of a process screen on an SX recorder Countdown Timers SAT TUS Control TC and Instrument calibration timers When a SAT TUS Instrument Cal or Control TC button is pressed you may be asked to enter user name and password if this function is enabled See Passwords AMS2750 on page 419 The timer reset screen is displayed that shows the next suggested date for SAT and TUS depending on Furnace class material and instrumentation type or provide a date 1 month in the future for Control TC or Instrument calibration The SAT TUS Control TC and Instrument Cal timers are sep
307. er Supply 12VDC 30VDC 12VAC 20VAC 50083235 501 50082335 504 50083235 503 Minitrend GR 5 7 Black Display Touch Screen Assy Minitrend GR Grey 5 7 Display Touch Minitrend GR QX RAL7032 5 7 Dis play Touch Screen Assy 50083254 501 50082354 504 50083254 503 Minitrend GR Black Bezel Touch Screen Assy Minitrend GR Grey Bezel Touch Screen Assy Minitrend GR QX OXE RAL7032 BE ZEL TOUCH SCREEN ASSY 50081202 501 50084219 501 Minitrend GR 5 7 Display amp Cable 5 7 LVDS Display Cable 23 50001782 501 Minitrend Multitrend GR Speaker 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 283 284 Table 10 1 Minitrend GR Spares 24 51453071 501 Minitrend GR Case and Back Plate Assy 28 50006787 501 Minitrend GR Multitrend GR Battery Kit of 5 29 50086626 505 8GB External SD memory card Not shown 43 51453071 502 Minitrend GR Case Handle and Not shown Terminal Cover 44 50005224 501 Minitrend GR Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 48 30755050 502 Minitrend GR Mounting Hardware kit Not shown 2 Mounting Brackets 49 51453083 501 Minitrend GR Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 54 50086625 502 1GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM CARD 50086625 503 2GB GR INTERNAL SD MEM
308. er list bllot x Get index of Batch lot No list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch name list Blname x Get the index of Batch name list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Batch user list Bluser x Get the index of Batch user list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x This variable is local to this script There is a maximum of 20 local varia bles per script SD card free storage space CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the SD card CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Returns value in Degrees F C or K depending on the localisation setting CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Always returns value in degrees C Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n 1 to 96 Digitals Dn Get the value of Digital Input or Digital output n 1 to 48 Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots where n 1 2 or 3 Slot G H amp I respectively Returned as a 16 bit word 0 to 65535 A channel config ured as an output is set to O EC1 to EC 20 EC1 Event Counters 1 to 20 File Transfer Protocol FTPHRS Returns the number of hours of safe recording recording hours left time available Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x This is a global varia ble accessible to all scripts There is a maximum of 200 global variables 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May
309. erature in C above which the contributions to FO 100 90 120 temperature can be counted Reference The reference temperature for sterilisation normally 121 11 C Temperature 121 11 C can be altered if required If TRUE contributions to Fo can be included after the target FALSE Include value has been reached and while the temperature is still cooling phase above the start temperature If FALSE these contributions are not included The maximum Fo totaliser value can be set if Include 15 1 999 Completion cooling phase is not selected the totaliser will stop at Value this value of Fo For setting up the Fo calculation refer to the Totaliser Menu on page 90 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix H Calibration Al Calibration and CJC Calibration For Al and CJC Factory and User Calibration see Calibration on page 132 Sensor Compensation Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an ad justment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units To set this up in the recorder see Sensor Comp in the menu for Analogue In Menu on page 73 or for AMS2750 Process and TUS modes see Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 386 Choose from Single Point Dual Point and Multi Point Cal Single Point Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount determined by the user Enter the Offs
310. ere the measured process is new or the ideal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy Logging is ideal as it adapts the log rate to the input signal and can therefore find the opti mum logging rate for you Tolerance band widths Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and be low the input signal A second band width can be set this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a percentage of the scale range the tol erance band allowed above and below the input signal See Logging Menu on page 86 Figure 18 1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings a Band 196 4 Band 2 4 Trace lt Band 2 q Band 1 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 121 1 TPC The significance of Fg The Fo value is used in the pharmaceutical and related industries in the sterilisation of items A brief summary is included here to give the essence of the meaning of the terms used When items are subjected to sterilisation by heating the rate at which micro organisms are killed is dependent on the temperature Traditionally items were sterilised by holding them at 250 F 121 11 C and the Fg value for a sterilisation is simply the equivalent time at this temperature that would produce the same effect For many average micro organisms each minute at 121 11 C reduces the number present by a factor o
311. ernet Interface Only Device Y with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 will respond sending a packet with the Ethernet address of device Y back to device X Now device X and Y have each others Ether net addresses to which data can be sent 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 343 344 Email General operation of the e mail system The recorder sends messages for distribution by an e mail server The e mail server is located by its IP address or it s name as set up in the communications set up options When the recorder sends an e mail message it locates the e mail server and uses SMTP Simple Message Transfer Protocol to send the message to the e mail server SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an e mail server without having its own e mail address because of this the e mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder When setting up the e mail address list it is important to include the e mail administrator address The Administrator e mail address is the e mail address to where the e mail server will respond in the event of any problems with the delivery of e mail messages The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any e mail messages sent by the recorder Most e mail systems require a Reply To address as part of an e mail message since the recorder does not have its own e mail address it uses the e mail administrator as the Reply To address Any e mail message will consist of a delivery list
312. es Error writing to NV EEP 21 3 3 Could not write the initial resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error writing Al Initial loop resistance to EEPROM Messages No board serial number on 0 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be confirmed as correct Diagnostics power up Error reading Board ID serial number failed CRC check Messages CRC error on reading setup 1 3 3 The setup file stored on the I O board has become corrupted Diagnostics from NV memory EEP Error reading Board Setup failed CRC check Messages ROM There are readings missing 0 4 4 50Hz acquisition is not possible whilst active burnout is selected Diagnostics from channel 10Hz operation is the maximum Messages 50Hz acquisition with active burnout caused lost readings use 10Hz max More data than buffer can N A N A More data than buffer can hold only part returned but some has Diagnostics hold some overwritten also been overwritten Messages Can t execute invalid state 0 4 4 The stored calibration is for an illegal range Invalid gain in Read Diagnostics WorkingCals Messages Can t execute invalid state 1 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take a CJC reading Diagnostics Invalid state in CUC state machine on Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 2 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take read operate a dig Diagnostics ital Invalid state relating to DIG board pointer update Messages Can t execute invalid state 3 4 4 The I O card in
313. es Function code received N A N A I O card did not recognize the command sent to it Diagnostics unknown Messages The 2 fn code bytes failed N A N A I O card did not recognize the command sent to it because the Diagnostics validation test code and inverse code were different Messages Slave still processing previ 0 2 2 l O board communications error Character received from SPI Diagnostics ous message when host should be waiting Messages Slave still processing previ 1 2 2 l O board field port diagnostic communications error Diagnostics ous message Character received from FieldPort before ready for next com Messages mand Slave still processing previ 2 2 2 l O board communications error Non clocking char received Diagnostics ous message from SPI when should be clocking reply Messages Cannot execute this com N A N A The command could not currently be executed because the I O Diagnostics mand in present state card is in the wrong state to accept the command Messages Wrong number of arguments N A N A The message sent to the I O card was invalid it had the wrong Diagnostics for this message number of arguments Messages Arguments of the message 0 4 4 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid frequency sent to SetAcqFreq Messages Arguments of the message 1 4 4 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics were invalid Invalid frequency sent to GetAcqFreq Messages Arguments of the message 2
314. es are made using the Edit button the Sum mary of Changes button becomes active this will show the last changes made to any of the channels for this configuration only The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window showing available channels for logging logging will stop for this channel The set up is complete and the logging to the database should start immediately To check the setup go back to the Comms Server screen 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 269 270 Communications Server Comms Server Status Screen If you have a graph open Comms Server should be showing that the recorder is operating by displaying flashing green lights in the Active column Click and highlight the recorder Click the Database logging Tab The screen should now show all the pens logging for that recorder and their log rate Figure 8 1 Comms Server Status Screen mIE3 Communications Server Administrator ga ap i Database Servers Local Server Initial Database ID No Name Mode Status Channels Active 1P Address KI Furnace1 Realtime xs 100089 June FTP Saved Data Andy FIP Junes 2 X n List of Database Servers x COM2 x COM3 on Derek suum Rate nee x COM6 Local Client 1 Pen 1 Temp 1sec Sample 3 com Local Client 1 Pen 2 1sec Sample 3 coms Local Client 19 Pen 3 isec Sample LP Ghent Loc
315. esigner see Loading a Layout into a Recorder on page 239 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 163 Passwords Main Menu Configure Passwords The Password system manages the security within the recorder menu system It allows re stricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels If your recorder has ESS Extended Security System enabled the password system cannot be disabled An Administrator should be nominated to have control of the password system A Passwords Change Pwds e NetSync First Time Login The First Time Login only relates to ESS Extended Security System purchased with the recorder Non ESS user For users without ESS once you enable the password you can add a user at adminis trator level and finish apply etc Then go into the menu system and enter the login and it will give you a message that you password has expired and would you like the enter an other you click yes If the first user is not entered and changed to administrator defaults to operator and saved you will be denied access as an operator because an operator level will not allow you to get back in the passwords The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first ti
316. ess Settings Supervisor access a Confi mue un eui Layout L e Settings a m Passwords v Le j J Set Time Set Volume Update Sounds ui Pwds Pwd Net Password menu Operator access See Figure 5 4 for Password menu Rr User A z Settings menu Supervisor access Permission Area 23 access Permission Area 36 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 5 3 Default Password access from the Setup Menu Setup menu Technician access Permission Area 18 Edit Supervisor access Save Technician access Load Technician access Save and Load setup buttons require Technician access Permission Area 17 P Edit Setup Edit menu Supervisor access See Figure 5 5 for Edit Setup Field 10 menu access Permission Area 19 Events Counters General z a az Reports Recording Figure 5 4 Default password access from the Password Menu Password Menu Operator access Permission Area 36 User Administration ad User Admin Administrator a S Change Password Operator access Delete User Unlock User 8 Reset Pwds Finish User Admin Administrator access only Password Net Sync Administrator access only Pwd NetSync 5T Type Finish ONU Change Password button requires Operator access Permission Area 12
317. ess the Batch button the screen will have changed to give you the Batch Controls The batch control buttons enable the user to Stop Pause Resume Abort or add a Comment to the current batch that has been started A Batch is complete when it has been stopped When a batch is stopped E appears as a mark on chart on the screen If the batch is aborted it is not a complete batch and will be marked on the chart with an A to show it has been aborted If the recorder is not logging starting a batch will automatically start the logging However stopping the batch will not stop the logging If a batch is Paused P will appear as a mark on chart and the Pause button on the Batch Control menu is replaced with a Resume button When Resume is selected the screen will be marked with R Figure 4 7 Batch Control screen and Messages screen p ADate 3 9 25 2013 Grade 5 Bolts Stopped ws 9 25 2013 2000 parts 9 25 2013 3 8 inch x 6 in 9 25 2013 1546783 9 25 2013 Rob 76346 4 9 25 2013 Start Logging on Pen Group Group 1 9 Batch a gt Stop Pause Abort veeeeevu tus 9 25 2013 Grade 5 Bolts Start 3 9 25 2013 All message lists cleared Ki 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK When the batch is stopped the Batch Control screen reverts back to the Batch Setup screen so the user can start a new batch Batch Setup screens using Batch Wizard on page 181 As well as a Mark on Chart for ever
318. essage Code Flash Description Cause Type code Cannot read board hard 0 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics ware identity Error reading board ID type invalid board type configuration Messages Incompatible hardware ID 0 1 1 The number of channels reported by I O board was invalid Error Diagnostics reading board ID type can t determine how many channels Messages Incompatible hardware ID 1 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type setting up working variables Messages Incompatible hardware ID 2 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type getting board capability Messages Incompatible hardware ID 3 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type AcqTimer Onlnterrupt Messages Incompatible hardware ID 4 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type on board initialisation Messages Incompatible hardware ID 5 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst read Diagnostics ing life stats Invalid board type when reading stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 6 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst reset Diagnostics ting life stats Invalid board type resetting Life stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 7 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type resetting Sess
319. est hour The data collected before synchronization will be preserved 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 127 128 General Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General From this screen select the buttons required for General recorder configuration m Error Alert 3 Identity Unique recorder information Name Description and ID See Identity on page 128 Error Alert Setup and customise the Alert box information See Error Alert on page 129 Factory This menu contains Credits for activating recorder options Firmware Upgrade Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup and Localisation See Factory on page 131 Batch The Batch menu is for entering the Batch requirements for starting a new batch including using a Barcode reader Batch Menu on page 138 Printer The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer See Printer Menu on page 141 Groups Groups of Pens can be specified and named with a Group name or number See Groups on page 142 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Identity Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup General gt Ident Unique recorder information Name Enter the recorder s name Maximum characters 32 Description Enter a description for the recorder using the on screen keyboard Maxi mum characters 64 I
320. est your USB key before using it for recording and transferring data 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 3 Overview Functions and Features Up to 16 Analogue Inputs for the Minitrend GR 48 for the Multitrend GR up to 12 for the eZtrend GR and DR Graphic mA external shunt ohms Volts mV Thermocouple RTD Data Storage media Minitrend GR DR Graphic Up to 192 soft alarms 6 per pen Minitrend GR Multi Multitrend GR Up to 576 soft trend GR SD Card and alarms 6 per pen DR Graphic eZtrend GR Up to 144 soft Option for eZtrend GR alarms 6 per pen USB ports 2 0 for key board mouse and storage Minitrend GR DR Graphic Minitrend GR and DR Graphic Up to 4 Analogue Outputs Multitrend GR Up to 8 Ana Minitrend GR and DR puts Multitrend GR Up to 24 Graphic Up to 8 Pulse In Minitrend GR and DR Graphic Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs Multitrend GR Up to 24 Re lay Alarm Outputs eZtrend GR Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs Minitrend GR and DR Graphic Up to 16 Digital Inputs 24V Outputs Multitrend GR Up to 48 Dig ital Inputs 24V Outputs eZtrend GR Up to 8 Digital In puts 24V Outputs Up to 32 Totalisers 1 per pen eZtrend GR Up to 24 Total isers 1 per pen Multitrend GR Up to 96 To talisers 1 per pen Fast Scanning Mod
321. et adjustment required and this is added or subtract ed for all future readings Dual Point Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal input reading The Dual Point adjust ment works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input It is recommend ed that the two points should be more than 50 of the engineering units away from each other Low Eng and High Eng are the two points where the adjustment offset is made The user can enter their own adjustment points on the signal input and enter the Offset for both points Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Field IO Analog In Sensor Comp Figure 20 1 Dual Point Compensation Comp Type Dual Point Low Eng 0 0 Low offset 5 0 High Eng 100 0 High offset 5 0 am ess fA em 1i 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 351 352 10V 10V Single Point Sensor Compensation is Sensor Compensation Compensation Type select from None Single Point or Dual Point compensation Low Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the Low limit for the Engineer ing units Low Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the Low Eng value High Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the High limit for the Engineer ing units High Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the High Eng value Figure App H 21 Sensor Compensation Solid line shows without compe
322. ethods will produce the Add Device Details box Areas of the box become greyed out as the selections are made 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server Device Details Add Device Details Protocol Modbus X Y Modbus Profile XXXXXX XXX Communications Port IP Address D Ss B Slave ID xxxxxx Network ID xs xxx Recorder Name Socket Test Profile Find Device Protocol The protocol should be matched to that set on the recorder It will be Modbus X by default so leave it at that unless you changed it on the recorder For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed Modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed Modbus Profile The Profile name box is used to tell TrendServer Pro how to access the data on the recorder This profile is automatically generated from the recorder setup that was downloaded to TrendServer Pro previously The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data and creates a profile including information for pen scale units etc A set of profiles are available for Honeywell modbus devices The profile Name is made up from the Recorder name Type and ID number Once the setup or data has been imported it will display in this window the next time that it is opened no need to restart Comms Server For GR recorders drop down the list and select the recorder from the li
323. etup Edit Setup Comms Network Admin This must be set up to ensure network printing can be performed and emailing made easier without being prompted for this information each time you want to print or email This infor mation will remain after a firmware upgrade Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared or work group printers Shared or work group printers must contain the correct file path see Printer Menu on page 141 The Network Share Path NAS can be used for loading and saving layouts lay and or set up files set saving exporting reports any messages Diagnostic system etc loading sound files from this network share to recorder This can also be used to print to file and this file can be saved to this network shared folder The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network con nectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Scheduled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder not being updated Note The network share folder cannot be used to upgrade firmware remotely Firmware up grade needs to be done locally using local USB or local SD card Username ES05040 Password soto ak Domain pacrim1 Use Share Path v Share Path Mie67tcsj52bsltestl 4 s Ja coon to A v jid Username Enter your network Logon username Password Enter you network password For a local
324. etwork aware software package for real time viewing and archiving of data with com munications to the recorder It supports all the capabilities of TrendManager Pro plus real time data acquisition FTP File Transfer Protocol and web browser access TrendServer Pro provides secure multi level multi user access to the recorder data by various departments with security Stand ard features of TrendServer Pro include data archive tools Email set up and alarming graphing print import and export data facilities Trend Manager Pro with OPC Server provides the same functions as the TrendServer Probut in cludes the added function of an integrated OPC Server to allow easy interfacing to third party HMI soft ware packages that support an OPC Client This provides a real time interface between serv ers and clients Modbus Profile Configuration Tool this is a tool that comes as part of the Trend Server software that allows the user to set up Modbus Device Profiles for use by the Communications Server It allows the user to set up other Modbus devices other than the Minitrend GR and Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorders to get real time data into Trend Server Communications Server The Communication Server is supplied with TrendServer Pro It manages real time communica tions distributed access to the stored data time synchronisation over Ethernet networks The Com munication Server provides security for the transmission and storage of process data
325. eviation The total time taken for all TC s to enter the soak from the previous setpoint or start of survey It shows the first TC to get within the temperature tolerance eg 6 This reading stops when all the TC s are within the tolerance of the setpoint T C lag into Soak Shows the time difference between the first TC and the last TC comes into the tolerance band hottest and the coldest Lag is the time difference between the first and last TC s entering the setpoint tolerance band Stable Soak Duration Measures the length of time all the TC s are with in the toler ance band of the setpoint When in stable soak show the Max TC and Min TC readings for the entire run period TC1 10 Diff difference and TC SP Diff are also displayed Meets Class On a successful soak period the actual class met by the soak is shown The survey auto detects the next TC to test when last one has either completed or failed out of band width and will carry on testing the others The TC s Stabilized button This button will only be enabled available when a soak has all TC s within the soak and acceptable tolerance pressing the button will override the stability detection and put the cur rent soak from soak mode to stable mode 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 407 TUS mode TUS Survey Process screen Lower panel The graph will display the current state of the highest and lowest temperature sensors as the TUS is not run
326. exported when the export data function is performed and this will also allow event chart controls to be enabled The Clear Setup Cache button will remove all setup files Network Settings is for PC s with more than one network card fitted to access devices on other networks The network cards are displayed here for selection If the Use NIC Default IP Address Selection is ticked then the first network card that was added to the list will always be selected Preferences The Timing Setups tab displays the current timings for the current com munications setup These entries should be configured correctly and not require any changes by the user Contents Enables the Help files About Communications Server Gives the version of the software Add a new Device to a communications port Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to Communications port Other ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie Ethernet and select the Add Device option Or select a comms port in the left window right click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device See Add a Device on page 262 Configure Database Logging s Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database Other ways to configure logging are to right click on a comms port or a device in the left window or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port Connect to a new Data
327. f 10 so a 15 minute hold at this temperature would reduce the number by a factor of 1015 Time min os Time min 20 30 Figure 1 Figure 2 If it were possible to heat a sample from ambient to 121 11 C in 1 second hold it there for 15 minutes and then cool it back to ambient in 1 second the temperature time profile would look something like the trace in Figure 1 on page 349 and the Fy value would be 15 representing 15 minutes at 121 11 C In practice of course to reach this temperature the object would have to be subject to an initial heating period up to that temperature and later a cooling period back down again to ambient temperature more like the profile shown in Figure 2 on page 349 During all this heating up holding at temperature and subsequent cooling micro organisms are being killed at different rates and the Fo value is calculated by summing the effect at each tem perature provided it is over some defined starting temperature see below This calculation is performed by using the expression where T is the temperature in C and At is the time spent at that temperature The z factor that appears in this equation is the tem perature coefficient for the destruction of micro organisms and is the increase in tempera ture in C that produces a 10 fold increase in sterilisation rate This summation is only performed once the sample temperature has reached some speci fied starting temperature For examp
328. f the Standard Screen 21 characters max includ ing spaces Enabled Toggle On and Off to activate this Standard Screen Template Type Select from a list of pre defined templates ee DPMs Select which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values ee DPMs and Bars Select which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values ee Charts and DPMs Select which pen is displayed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 157 ee Charts and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activate which scale is required to be displayed Charts DPMs and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activate which scale is required to be displayed Tabular Select which pens are to be displayed in a table style layout See Tabular Screen on page 146 Circular Chart and DPMs Select which pens are to be displayed in a circular and DPM style layout Available for Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Edit 2eu it Srraanc aes ED Standard Screen 3 Circular Chart and DPMs m Im Showing Pens 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 m feos AMS2750 Process This screen is required when the recorder is being used in AMS2750 Process Mode Refer to AMS2750 Process Menu on page 379 ee Template If a template is being used it will appear here ee Alarms Select by either Pens or Groups Showing either the pen numbers or the Group
329. figuration see Ports on page 96 ee Network Name Ethernet only Enter the Modbus Slave IP address ee Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use the Ethernet or RS485 ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations ee Transaction 1 8 A request for a register or set of contiguous registers Enabled Toggle On to enable the first transaction request Direction Direction for the data to flow In to or Out from the recorder Command This is the type of Registers used by the slave device Refer to the individual memory map for the register type used for each type of device Data Type Refer to individual memory maps for each type of device to deter mine the type of data Eg signed 16 bit int unsigned 16 bit int or IEEE float GR Series devices use IEEE float 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Start Addr This is the register address number to start the transaction from No Of Items Enter the number of items from the start address that are included in the transaction For example displayed here will be 10 SCV 1 1 1 1 1 10 This means the transaction will take 10 items from the start address with a Serial Comms variable of Slave
330. folder NAS or select Do not ex port The removable media device needs to be fitted to the recorder when the report is run and have enough memory available To Export to a NAS folder Use Share Path needs to be set up in Network Admin on page 98 and NAS devices enabled in Media Config on page 137 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Run a Report Once the report details have been completed in the report menu you can run your report either manually or by using the Event system Fora manual report see Reports Process on page 192 Forareport triggered using the Event system see Event Effects on page 119 Pen Report Information Currently pens provide real time values max min and totals Reports need some history of these values to be maintained so a set of period based data is maintained The periods be ing an hour day week and month The recorder builds up the current hour day week and monthly data and keeps the previous completed hour day week and month stored At any time it is possible to access the current hour day week or month for Max Min Av erage and Totals also you can get access to the previously complete whole hour day week or month for each pen An hour is a whole hour starting on the hour eg 10 00 to 11 00 A day starts at one second pas
331. ges Configuration Loaded N A N A Notification that the configuration has been successfully loaded System Status and Messages Setup Changed N A N A Notification that the user has changed one or more items on the System Status and recorder setup Messages Pen x using scripts but N A N A Scripts are selected on Pen X but the recorder options disables Diagnostics and option not available scripts System Status and Meassages Invalid number format N A N A The number entered was not in the correct format Diagnostics Status Exponential numbers must DIO and Messages be entered in the format 1 23E 12 AUTO OPS Failed to load N A N A Configuration remote download has failed remotely uploaded configu ration Configuration remotely N A N A Configuration has been remotely downloaded successfully System Status and loaded Messages FTP transfer operation time N A N A The requested FTP operation has timed out System Status and out failure Messages FTP transfer operation failed N A N A The requested FTP operation has failed System Status and Messages FTP transfer finished suc N A N A The requested FTP operation has completed successfully System Status and cessfully Messages Scheduled Export data per N A N A The scheduled data export completed successfully System Status and formed Messages Media Missing N A N A Report that the specified media is not inserted System Status and Messages Media Full N A N A Report that the specified med
332. ges buttons require No Login access Permission Area 3 Screen Menu No Login required See Figure 5 7 for Screen menu access Permission Area 2 Screen M Replay Clean Screen EN Back Calibrate Touch Test iz Messages ag Fee r i RI E All 31 Alarms 28 System Diagnostics 3 TEES Users Finish Messages Menu No Login required Permis sion Area 1 Except Clear Messages requires Engi neer access See Figure 5 10 gt gRecording a Qt Stop Export Now Start Recording 15 pens recording Export Required In 1d 0h 39m 24s Schedule 1 Hour to USB1 Media Full Int 20 Days FTP Export Requir Om 00s Recording Menu Operator Access This is a view only screen All of the buttons on the Recording menu re quire Operator access Permission Area 11 215 Figure 5 2 Default password access from the Configure menu Layout menu Supervisor access Setup menu Technician access All of the Layout menu buttons require See Figure 5 3 for Setup menu access Permission Area 18 Supervisor access Permission Area 24 Edit Layout see Figure 5 7 Layout P amp Configure menu Operator access EE sae Load Permission Area 13 Setup Technician access Bn Layout Supervisor access Passwords Operator acc
333. ges etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to exter nal media A batch report for a Temperature Uniformity Survey can be produced Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Heports Menu on page 153 Update Tabular Readings Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update and show the latest set of readings Enter Replay Screen An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen to enter the Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen so that the recorder will Exit the Replay Screen Change Chart Speed An event can be set so that the effect is to change the Change Chart Speed The speed of the chart can be set in the Sub Type section for Fast 6000mm h Medium 120mm h or Slow 10mm h When that event gets triggered selected chart speed will be set to the current active screen Event triggering from scripts Trigger an Event This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Clear Event Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive executions
334. gged into the system message list Events AMS2750 Two new Event Causes have been added TUS Temperature uniformity Survey This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select either Start or Stop TUS When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect AMS2750 Timer This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or the TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu A new Event Effect has been added Update Tabular Readings Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update and show the latest set of readings This does not show any periodic readings but shows a new line when the add tabbed data event effect is triggered For full details on Event setup see Events Menu on page 111 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Audit Trail AMS2750 When running a TUS on the recorder the recorder does provide an audit trail of the actions that occur during the TUS and these can be seen on the trend graph or reviewed as part of the recorder s Message screen An actual message screen showing the system messages that occurred during the TUS Messages 0 10 00 0 11 00 00 12 00 00 3 00 00 08 05 Sep 09 O5 SepOS 0 ne Sap gg EL 100 00 A Max TC Tc 1002 3 a4 4 4 4 E c i uu um Ui m LI uz n un I t oc c o 23 a ES v a 22 Min TC ag TCi a A g o
335. gled on in Admin Network and NAS devices are enabled in Media Config on page 137 and an warning Access Denied for Media will appear If ther Network Share folder is not available or incorrect then the fol lowing error will appear Please check folder is shared and network admin settings are cor rect Load Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Load Layouts can be loaded from a SD card USB key removable storage media or to a Network Share folder NAS Plug in a removable storage media device and the corresponding but ton on the screen will become active Select the relevant media button to display the layout files available to load Select the file and click on the Load button For Network Share folder select the NAS button and the Load Layout from NAS dialog will open Select the Layout file required and click Load All screens loaded from another recorder via SD card USB a Network Share folder NAS or Screen Designer will over write the existing screens on the recorder The SD card and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the recorder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 See Storage Media Format on page 184 for formatting information of SD card cards and USB keys SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR recorder When loading layouts from Screen D
336. graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only 50 Mbyte hard disk free disk space 2 Gbyte for TrendServer TCP IP installed for TrendServer SD card reader or USB port TCP IP z Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is the main transport pro tocol used on the Internet for connectivity and transmission of data across heteroge neous systems With all Honeywell software performance improves with more RAM faster CPUs and faster and larger hard disk drives NB It is recommended that at least 100 Mbyte of free hard disk space is available for archiving data Please note the more logging and data being stored the more free space on the hard disk is required This is not required with TrendViewer 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Comms and Trend Manager Suite Software Installation The Comms server is only available with the TrendServer software The comms server will auto install with the TrendServer software Ensure the same communications information is entered into the hardware and the software in order for the communications link to work e g Device name and ID IP address of the device etc Install TrendServer from the TrendManager Pro Suite folder and the comms server and database servers install automatically Before installing the software on to your PC it is recommended to close down all other ap plications including any programs that automatically load during the start up procedure It is not
337. gure Setup Edit Recording Scheduled Set up Scheduled exports to transfer data at timed intervals from internal flash memory to externally attached devices SD card or USB storage key SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR Note The use of the network folder for Scheduled export is not recommended since network connectivity and network problems could result in the risk of missing data due to the Sched uled export not being performed at the scheduled time and the folder It is advisable to use other media USB SD card for scheduled export See Recording Methodology on page 184 and Storage Media Format on page 184 Select the Scheduled button to reveal the scheduled menu Schedule Export Tick to enable Export Device Select the device you wish to export data to USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder SD card is avail able as a credit option for the eZtrend GR A network share path may be available here if configured but use USB or SD card for scheduled ex port if possible See note above Update Period Select how often you wish data to be exported from the list provided 10 30 minutes 1 2 12 or 24 hours 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when a scheduled export has been performed Mark Chart Only active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart
338. h gen erates a full report Configure Confirmation Wizard The Start and Configure buttons display the configuration confirmation wizard which dis plays the currently configured details and consists of two configuration screens Screen 1 of the wizard shows the furnace and temperature profile ramps amp soaks details allowing the user to edit the configuration or load a saved configuration You can accept the details and progress or cancel out of the wizard at this point Screen 2 of the wizard shows the sensor configuration specifically the sensor ID posi tion and status Changes can be made here to the sensor configuration you can at this stage proceed or cancel the wizard You are prompted for additional notes as a free format text when starting a TUS This will display the currently configure furnace details and the target soak information for the TUS the user has 4 options on this page 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 403 404 TUS mode TUS Configuration Confirmation Name Furnace 1 Manufacturer XYZ Furnace Co Model No QW 234 Y 45 Class 2 Type Parts Rectangular Setpoint 1 400 00 Deg F 30 Mins Setpoint 2 600 00 Deg F 30 Mins Setpoint 3 1000 00 Deg F 30 Mins TUS Configuration Screen 1 Load Config Configurations can be loaded via external media into the recorder manu ally this will allow you to load in a new configuration to perform another furnace survey Edit Config will
339. h of a thermocou ple using Event Cause Effect system Following errors can be generated on each chan nel of TC 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 115 116 ee Active burnout almost failed on Al channel ee Active burnout S C detected on Al channel ee Upscale burnout on Al ee Downscale burnout on channel Al channel ee Qut of burnout on Al channel Configure the event effects for the above mentioned errors accordingly The diagnostic messages are logged in the recorder Scheduled Events A scheduled event can be set up as a cause so that when a scheduled event occurs it trig gers an effect With scheduled events you can specify the time and date for something to happen Eg A schedule can be setup every weekday at 12 00pm to send an Email Enabled Type Sub Type Scheduled Specific Days Day of the W Mon Tues Weds Thurs Fri Time Of Day Count 10 12 00 00 PM ke je nm id Enabled Tick to enable Type Scheduled Sub Type Set Once Interval Specific Days or Month End Once This is a once only occurrence Interval A scheduled can be setup at timed intervals eg every 12 hours Specific days Select the day s time and how often count the schedule will occur Eg Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for 10 weeks or Monday through to Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for two weeks Month End If Month End is selected with a count of 10 it w
340. hangeAcqFreq command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 5 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics SetMainsF command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 6 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition Diagnostics attempting restore in ChangeAcqF req Messages Failed writing Al ADC values Failure writing output value 7 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition Diagnostics attempting restore in ChangeRange Messages Failed writing Al ADC values Failure writing output value 8 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics WriteAlConfig command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 9 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics WriteAlChanConfig command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 365 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Failure writing output value 10 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics SetActiveBurnout command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 11 1 1 Cannot turn ohms measurement current off suspect Al board Diagn
341. hanges finish and commit There will be a message that comes up and says that to perform this function the batch needs to be stopped and do you want to do that Answer yes and stop the batch and save the setup changes Calendar Function Day of week restriction is required for all levels apart from Administrator this will consist of any combinations of 7 days An everyday selection is available 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 209 210 Password Policy See Policy on page 165 Duplicate Passwords Duplicate passwords are allowed for different users otherwise this would alert a user that the same password is available on another user login The User name and password cannot be the same Note Ensure that passwords entered are a mix of capital letters small letters numbers and special characters Retry Lockout A password retry lockout option is available if the user enters the incorrect password for a preset number of times in a row the account must be de activated and only an Administrator can re activate the account The account can be reactivated in 2 ways Retry amp Preserve Password Reset retries unlock and preserve password allowing user to have another try Retry amp Reset Password Reset retries unlock and reset password which must be changed on first login User Interface requirements No Activity Timeout A no activity timeout programmable from 20 to 3600 seconds which will automatically log out a u
342. hart speeds can be set independently for each chart Display speeds are independent of logging rate Messages Screen The message screen displays system information and records any setup activity that has been changed It also provides warning and error message updates lists alarm activity and will display user defined marks on a chart CE Conformity CE Mark Immunity Product Classification Enclosure Rating Installation Requirements This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Direc tives 2006 95 EC the Low Voltage Directive and 2004 108 EC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Complies with EN61326 1 2013 Class Cord Connected Panel Mounted Industrial Control Equip ment with protective earthing grounding EN 61010 1 2010 Front panel designed to NEMA 3R IP55 for Multitrend GR only and NEMA 3 IP55 for Mini trend GR and eZtrend GR Optional NEMA 4X IP66 DR Graphic recorder NEMA 4X NEMA 3 IP55 std Optional NEMA type 4X IP66 Category Il Overvoltage EN 61010 1 2010 Pollution Degree 2 EMC Standards Emissions EN61326 1 2013 Immunity EN61326 1 2013 Industrial Levels Safety Complies with EN61010 1 2010 Panel Mounted Equipment Terminals must be enclosed within the panel Specification Analogue Inputs Number of Inputs Minitrend GR amp DR Graphic recorder can hav
343. hat triggers just one effect eg A pen going into alarm a Totaliser starts Max Mins reset and a Batch starts This could have the effect of starting Logging Anevent can have one cause that has up to 4 effects eg A pen could go into alarm and the effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started there is a Mark placed on the chart and an Alarm is sounded See Event 1 example on page 114 Anevent can have up to 4 causes that have up to 4 effects eg A pen goes into alarm and a Totalisers is started A scheduled export starts and Max Min values are reset The effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is displayed to show the start of the totaliser an Email is sent to notify a scheduled export has been made and a sound effect is played to identify the Max Min values have been reset In summary Cause 1 2 3 or Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 and Effect 4 When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 4 4 Events Cause and Effect Cause Effect Into Alarm Alarm Out of Alarm Mark on Chart Acknowledge Alarm Logging Start Stop Totaliser Totalisers Reset Digital Outputs Rollover Alarm Acknowledge On E Email Digital Inputs Off State Change T C Burn Out Analogue Input Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month
344. he channel menu to produce the setup screen Channel Mapping Setup screen In the Channel Mapping Setup screen select where the data is from Data from Pen set what the object is going to be showing Current Value Minimum value Maximum value Average pen reading or Total pen reading Data from Alarm for Pen set the alarm number Data from nput Channel set the channel number and what the object is going to be showing Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse Select the pen number required On a widget you can select the Parent this will assign all the objects in the selected widget to the same pen Select objects individually on the screen to assign different pens to each object within the widget 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 177 Number of the Pen Alarm for Pen or Input Channel Showing is what is displayed on the screen The selections will change depending on what is selected in Data From Showing For Pen Current Value Minimum Maximum Average or Total value Showing For Alarm for Pen List of available Alarms Showing For Input Channel Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse Figure 4 4 Channel mapping Setup Screen for a selected widget or object Channels ALM MKR 1 TEXT 1 DIG 1 TEXT B Channels ALM MKR 1 Pen No 1 Alarm No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pen No 1 Total Pen No 1 Total Select a Pen Toe Fs a o s Joe omm
345. he parameters for the process furnace details as well as the countdown timers and ther mocouple tracking status To enable the process timers select any Screen go to Template Type and select AMS2750 Process Mame Standard Screen 4 Enabled emm Template Type AMS2750 Process gt w Group Name Group 1 i Show Scales X d e ENTER EZ c B The screen has a group name selection where you can select the groups 1 to 6 This relates to the furnaces 1 to 6 as configured in O AMS2750 Process Mode on page 383 Furnace configuration menu NOTE Pens must be assigned to the individual groups in the Group item in Pens Menu on page 84 For details on the complete Screen menu go to Screens on page 157 AMS2750 Process Screen Process Screen details When the AMS2750 Process screen first appears all the buttons are grey until the due dates are set Select the button on the screen to set the due dates Use the Screen button at the top of the recorder screen to change the screens using the Next and Previous buttons 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 379 380 AMS2750 Process mode Example of a Process 72a 3 b E screen on a Minitrend GR Menu 0 21d 35 Screen Stopped or eZtrend GR recorder AMS2750 Status Furnace Class 2 AMS2750 Process screen TUS Due SAT Due Shows countdown timers In In that can be set manually by the us
346. heck on the current configuration of the recorder A number of status information screens are available to the user these will provide information for re porting and diagnostic purposes All Status screens can be saved to removable media or printed For AMS2750 mode a new TC Usage button is displayed middle right on the menu screen Please refer to Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 390 gt m Recording n m The following Status screens are available System Contains general information about the recorder setup such as Device infor mation software and firmware versions and the recorder s IP address Plus a list of Firmware options and I O cards in the recorder See System on page 195 Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details including Pen Value Name Maths Scale In Alarm Pen Rate Alarm Total and Group See Pen Overview on page 197 Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diag nostics and preventative maintenance notification Health Watch Maintenance is availa ble as a firmware option See Maintenance on page 198 Recording Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system Pen Value Recording Log Rate Alarm Rate and Group See Hecording on page 199 Diagnostics Complete diagnostics is shown for each of the following categories Hardware including Analogue In Analogue Out Digital IO and Pulse Inputs
347. hen the recorder time will be synchronized to the nearest hour Digital Input Choice the input pulse through one of the channels supported 1 to 4 Time sync will only happen on the configured channel when digital input is received on that configured channel Once the time synchronization is complete message will be send in the system messages to show time changed on digital input This will notify the user that system time has been synchronized to the nearest hour due to digital input Time synchronisation is at best pre cise to 1 second Time changes eg daylight saving During resetting the time or updating the time change in the recorder no data gets collected during this interval and a system message will show evidence of time change In the case of daylight saving if recorder clock is behind the hour there will be a gap in data collection For example when recorder receives the digital input and there is a state change the re corders system clock is showing 11 58 AM i e behind the hour then there will be a gap of 2 minutes in data collection as the time will be synchronized to the nearest hour If recorder clock is ahead of the hour then there will be duplicate data entry For example when recorder receives the digital input and there is a state change the recorders system clock is showing 12 02 PM i e ahead of the hour then there will be a duplicate data entry of 2 minutes as the time will be synchronized to the near
348. her pens for saving to TrendManager Suite software for additional analysis TUS periodic data logging The data logging for the TUS populates a single set of readings taken from the Data item table of the latest processing cycle this is aligned to the top of an even minute 2 4 6 past the hour for example The logging runs on a TUS enabled recorder at all times so when a TUS is started the most recently populated time can be used as the first log The data readings are built at the end of the relevant processing cycle on the aligned 2 minute time period they are compiled into a single record which has a total capacity for 48 inputs Each record contains a Date and time an event indicator 48 readings and a CRC A logged data file is generated on internal SD card this provides the storage for the full TUS logged data and will contain only the logged data TUS Soak data The soak information is maintained in a single NV SRAM record this stores all information relating to Max Min deviation and timers for all 48 channels Only the active channels are populated The information will be built up over the period of the ramp soak Once a soak have been completed the soak record will be saved to a soak data file The soak data file will hold a maximum of 6 soaks and will be pre generated on the internal SD card in the root directory Power loss during TUS If power is lost during TUS the TUS resumes when power is re applied if the power
349. how quickly other screens update the memory allocation information Eg the Recording screen will adjust Export Required In time depending on chart speeds pens rate and how far the slider is moved Storage Alarm Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Storage Alarm The storage alarm function is linked to the Error Alert system when there is a requirement for a time period to be set to alert the user before the storage media is full Internal memory Set the amount of time before the internal memory becomes full and data is lost and for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours Export media Set the amount of time before the data being exported to a media becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK FTP Memory Set the amount of time before the FTP memory becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Pre Trigger Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Pre Trigger The pre trigger functionality function captures a high resolution trend leading up to an event triggered by
350. ia is full System Status and Messages Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because the media was removed System Status and media removed during during transfer operation Messages export Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because of an unknown cause System Status and unknown media error Messages Scheduled export failed N A N A The scheduled export failed because the export folder was not System Status and could not create export present and could not be created Messages folder Scheduled export failed no N A N A The scheduled export has failed because no media is present System Status and media present Messages Media space too low for next N A N A The space available on the media is too little for the next sched System Status and scheduled data transfer uled operation Messages 374 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Unable to load N A N A Unable to load requested file Diagnostics and System Status and Meassages Message time earlier than N A N A No chart data exists for time of message the data blocks have System Status and oldest chart data been recycled Messages Layout not valid or incorrect N A N A Layout specified is invalid or invalid for the recorder type that itis System Status and rec
351. ibration Company Representative Generate PDF This will start process of generating SAT Report PDF Cancel Shows message box Do you like to exit SAT Report Wizard If user selects Yes then wizard will be cancelled 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 425 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 2 Obtain location to save SAT Report PDF This screen helps in obtaining the location to save PDF file Reports can be saved on your local PC remote machines or on any external devices attached with the machine Reports can be saved only in the PDF format Save in 8 Desktop L a My Documents i5 Y My Computer My Recent my Network Places Documents E Desktop My Documents My Computer File name SATRepart v My Network Save as type PDF file pdf v An egg timer message is produced informing you that the report is being created Please Wait SAT Report PDF creation is in progress When the report is created a message is produced informing the report has been success fully created and shows the path location to where the file is now saved Once the report is created if appropriate version of acrobat reader is installed then user will be prompted with the message box Would you like to open print the generated report If user selects Yes then report will be opened with installed Acrobat Reader The SAT report is complete 426 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK V1 001I
352. ications The input to the recorder would be a measure of flow rate eg In litres per second and the total amount that has flowed over a specified time period Multiple totalisations are possible with the use of extra pens firmware Credit option Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent NOTICE IEEE floating point numbers with large unit factors beyond the IEEE range may incur incremental errors specially if incrementing by a small amount each time If this is your type of application a work around would be to set the Unit factor to 1 and then divide the total by your original unit factor 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Click on Totaliser to set up the totalising profile per pen Totaliser menus showing Normal and Sterilisation types Menu path to current menu Enabled iv Enabled Type Normal Type Sterilisation Tag Totali Tag Total 1 Add to Msgs F AddtoMsgs Units None Temp Input U Celsius Time Factor 1 000 w Start Temper 100 000 IM Ss Um Ca Select Totaliser from the Pen screen to display the totalising setup menu Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate totalising for this pen Type Select this for a list of Types of totalising Normal or Sterilisation Normal totaliser function is usually associated with flow monitoring applications Sterilisation is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time Each pen can be totalised according to th
353. ices and databases held on Database 1 and Comms Server 1 Data Logging and Transfer Using the TrendServer software the device s details are added on to a database in TrendServer Once the device has been configured and enabled data can be retrieved Data is logged to the internal memory This data can be exported to TrendServer via SD Card USB removable media transfer setup and data Network Share folder NAS Modbus RS485 Ethernet transfer data only FTP Ethernet transfer Setup and data 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 249 250 Hardware Installation Secure Comms transfer Setup and data Exporting does not remove the data from the device but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Data can be imported from devices and logged to a Database known as Stored and His toric data Databases are managed by a Database Server The data can be retrieved graphed exported to spread sheets e mailed or transferred from devices to other data bases located on Remote Database Servers Using the Comms Server actual current data can be sent from a device straight to the server using Ethernet or RS485 links This actual current data can then be logged to a database and viewed on a graph in real time this is known as Realtime data Different types of data realtime logged and historic data can be displayed next to each other on a split graph screen The comms
354. ics after SetDiagInterval command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM 366 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Unable to write configuration 10 3 3 The AI configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetBdTestData command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 11 3 3 The AI configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetBdGuid command Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 12 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrAlConfig command Error writing Al config to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 13 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrAlChanConfig command Messages Error writing Al config to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 14 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after WrBoardSetup command Messages Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 15 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetMainsF command Error writing Al setup to EEPROM Messages Unable to write configuration 16 3 3 The d
355. if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output Set User variable UVSET x y Returns the result of x the user variable and y the value Sin sin x Returns the SIN of x SinH sinh x Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x Square Root sqrt x Returns the Square Root of x Square sa x Returns the square of x i e x multiply by x Subtract 5 Returns the result of the subtraction 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 325 326 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Tan tan x Returns the TANGENT of x TanH tanh x Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x Trigger an Event TRIGE x This will trigger Event x 1 to 20 TRIGE x will return 1 when the event is fired otherwise it will return O Functions use radians 27 radians 360 degrees Event triggering from scripts This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive exe cutions re t
356. igh or Low outside the Pen Scale or outside the Input Range Note It is recommended to display DPMs on a chart to identify over range and under range activity Table 6 2 Screen Markers Pointer DPM Bar horizontal Chart chart Upscale Burnout A A A Outside Range High A A A A A amp Trace at Max Input Range Top Pen Scale Top amom ewe we a a aaa a a Trace Displays as normal 1234 567 Valid n s m Data Pen Scal Bottom x u Input Range Bottom i i Outside Range Low y y Y Y Y v Trace at Min Down scale Burnout Y Y Y Invalid Reading kk x KKKK y Trace at Min 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Screen Designer Screens not available on the eZtrend GR Screen Designer screens known as Layouts file type lay can be created in the Screen Designer software on your PC and then loaded onto the recorder This can be done via SD card USB or Network Share folder NAS transfer Templates created in Screen Designer can also be loaded into the recorder added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed Refer to the Screen Designer manual for further details For layouts to be loaded into the recorder Custom Screens must be enabled as a Firmware option See Section 7 Firmwa
357. igital configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change after WrDigConfig command Messages Error writing DIG Cfg to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 17 3 3 The AO configuration could not be written on configuration Diagnostics change after WrAOConfig command Messages Error writing AO Cfg to EEPROM Unable to write configuration 18 3 3 The Al configuration could not be written on configuration change Diagnostics after SetActiveBnout command Error writing Al Cfg to EEPROM Messages Watchdog timer timed out 0 4 4 COP I O Watchdog timer timeout I O board has failed COP Fail Diagnostics ure was triggered Messages Error reading NV EEP 0 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be identified by the I O Diagnostics ROM firmware Messages Error reading Board ID serial number couldn t read EEPROM Error reading NV EEP 1 3 3 I O board setup information could not be read Error reading Diagnostics ROM Board Setup couldn t read EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 2 3 3 The Al card calibration history could not be read on power up Diagnostics ROM Error reading Al calibration history from EEPROM on power up Messages Error reading NV EEP 3 3 3 The AO card calibration history could not be read on power up Diagnostics ROM Error reading AO calibration from EEPROM on power up Messages Error reading NV EEP 4 3 3 The AO card calibration history could not be read Diagnostics ROM Error reading AO calibrat
358. igure Passwords User Admin Users This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system and their access details Select a user to produce the following User Name Displays the user name Level Select a permission level from the drop down list Custom Activate this to allow customisation of the permission area access for this user only The custom settings will reflect the original Level set when the user was first added Edit Allows customisation of the permission areas The Administrator can re assign the permission areas for individual users at any level Login Days Select the days on which this user can Login Delete User Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Delete User This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system The Ad ministrator can delete users from a drop down list Note Administrator cannot be deleted When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit or Discard Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Unlock User Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Unlock User This will list the current users that have been entered into the password system The Admin istrator can unlock a user that has been timed out eg password expiry by selecting a user from a drop down list Select the user and choose Re enable Current or Reset to Default that will set it back
359. ill show Sensors refer to Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 Analogue Out Select this to configure each Analogue Output channel See Ana logue Out Menu on page 76 Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Alarm Digital IO Select this to configure Relay Alarm Output card or Digital Input Out put card See Alarm Digital IO on page 77 Pulse Inputs Select this to configure each Pulse Input channel See Pulse Input on page 80 Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input sig nal to be used See Linearisation Tables on page 81 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 4 1 Card Positions and Channel Numbers Minitrend GR we Channel Slot position Card type numbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1108 Pulse Inputs 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16 Pulse Inputs 9 to 12 4 Analogue Out 9 to 12 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1t04 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Multitrend GR T Channel Slot position Card type n mbars Slot A 8 Analogue In 1108 Pulse Input 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16 Pulse Input 9 to 12 Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24 Pulse Input 17 to 20 Slot D 8 Analogue In 25 to 32
360. ill carry on for 10 months The recorder refers to a built in calendar and clock and will schedule the event to occur at midnight on the last day o f each month Date Time Only available when Once is selected as a Sub Type Select the time and date for a one off occurrence Period Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Set the time interval for how often this event should occur eg every hour would be 1h 00m 00s Alignment Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Select and enter a value from the list to align the scheduled event at specific intervals For certain applications it maybe desirable for a relatively fast schedule interval event for example every 10 minutes to be aligned with a particular time For example on the hour When the alignment function is not used the schedule interval starts immediately on 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK committing the configuration When the alignment function is used the schedule inter val starts when the first interval event coincides with a subsequent interval that lines up with the desired alignment ie Top of the hour Figure 4 9 Interval alignment Time 1 00 1 10 1 20 1 30 1 40 1 50 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 2 50 3 00 Bean Hhhh thh qe I3 I 3 3 4 Example of a schedule interval event started at 17 minutes past the hour Figure 4 9 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with
361. ilure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Figure 2 15 Analogue Input connector 13 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21122 23 24 LC LJ C This Analogue Input card can be used as an option to add up to 6 more Analogue Input channels for the eZtrend GR recorder This will fit into Slot B and will display as channel numbers 9 to 14 The standard fit Analogue Input card is fitted in slot A with up to 6 channels channels numbers 1 to 6 To fit this option card into the eZtrend GR recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder Figure 2 16 Input signal wiring Active Burnout Passive Burnout Volts mV Thermocouples Thermocouples Current x MENE zac tis x if 10R a Ve ve ve ve ve 4ve i E n 4 wire R T 3 wire R T 2 wire R T x laia Tae R T R T Recorder setup will be required if wiring changes are made for Active Burnout Thermocou ples See Thermocouple Wiring Changes on page 76 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 31 32 Electrical Installation Thermocouple Active Burnout status can be viewed in the Main Menu Status Diagnostics Analogue Input screen Input column The Health Watch Maintenance firmware option must be active to access the Maintenance and Diagnostic buttons See Diagnostics on page 200 For the eZtrend GR recorder A
362. in Table 4 3 on page 95 Table 4 3 Number systems Minimum Value Maximum Value Entered Decimal Value Entered Decimal Value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 95 96 Table 4 3 Number systems Minimum Value Maximum Value Octal 000 000 000 000 0 0 0 0 077 077 077 077 63 63 63 63 Decimal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 Hexadecimal 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0 0 0 0 0 Oxf Oxf Oxf Oxf 15 15 15 15 Remember When entering a Decimal Static IP address no preceding 0 should be added for example 192 168 015 019 must be entered as 192 168 15 19 The provision for Entering IP information in different number system is applicable for TCP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS and WINS DNS WINS MDNS Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms TCP IP DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name Sys tem WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Managed Data Network Services Auto DNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off With this deactivated the DNS Server address can be changed from the default if required Pri DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Sec DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Auto WINS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On
363. in in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a no alarmed state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until it is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 236 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm All Select this button to acknowledge all active alarms latched and normal alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge any alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu By Pen Select this option to acknowledge any alarms for individual pens Configure This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To change the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Alarms Menu on page 88 menu and select the alarm then activate Allow Change View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details When complete go to Finish to commit the new set up 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 341 342 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix E Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet is a local area network LAN technology that transmits information between com puters and other devices at speeds of 10 or 100 million bits per second Mbps Each Ether net equipped de
364. ing Select an alarm number to edit the setup of each alarm When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear for each alarm depending on the type of process screen See Alarm Markers on page 236 Enabled Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the alarm Disable Enabled Always or Dig Enabled Enabled by Digital Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled Select and choose which digital signal s will enable this alarm on this pen only Type Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms High Low Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the Alarm Level or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the Alarm Level Deviation is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen before triggering 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK an alarm See Deviation Level and Ref Pen Rate Up and Rate Down Alarms are used to trigger an alarm when the signal changes a defined amount over a specified time See Deviation Level and Time Period Level Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered Deviation Level Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation in engi neering units For Deviation enter the amount of deviation allowed on a designated pen Ref Pen before an alarm is triggered
365. ing a new recorder in TrendManager software to be transferred to a recorder the Maths capabilities will be available but will only become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and potential of these features Important Note Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available See Firm ware Credit System on page 241 Notes if elseif amp else are followed by expressions in curly brackets lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e g every execution path must have a return statement As soon as a return is executed the script finishes make sure that the return is the last operation to be executed every expression within curly brackets does not have to include a return Small values fractions entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the deci mal point Eg 0 5 Decimal point and not comma must be used always Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values Nowhite spaces Syntax is not case sensitive 500 character limit for scripting NOTICE Full Maths and Scripting functions ar
366. ing on Surface of panel or wall Procedure Refer to Figure 2 15 and follow the procedure below to mount your recorder on a surface panel or wall NOTE Three 3 screws must be supplied by the user for attaching the mounting hardware brackets and support hook to panel or wall Using two flat head 10 32 x 1 4 inch screws supplied with the recorder fasten the support hook into the recess at the back of the recorder case as shown in Figure 2 15 1 Using 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screws and lockwashers attach a mounting bracket to each side of the case Leave the screws slightly loose so as to permit some adjust ments of the brackets On the panel mark the locations for the three holes as shown by the hole pattern in Figure 2 15 Using a drill of appropriate size for user supplied screws drill a hole in the front of the panel for the eye of the support hook Insert the screws for the support hook into the panel allowing the screw head to pro trude approximately 5 16 inch Hang the recorder support hook on the screw Make sure that the locations for the other two holes marked in Step 3 are correct If not make sure that the recorder is aligned vertically and use the brackets as templates to mark the proper locations 6 Remove the recorder from the panel and drill the other two holes 7 Hang the recorder on the screw by the support hook and insert the other two user sup plied screws through the brackets into the panel
367. into a Recorder One or more Layouts can be loaded into a Recorder and displayed To save a Layout in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu Configure Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Select the desired layout and press the Load button Go to Main Menu Configure Layout Edit and the new layout will be loaded into the list of Screens If the Custom Screens option is disabled in the credit system the screens will not display To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens Note When importing X Series layout files to use on GR Series certain changes must be made to the layout file by the user as per the new resolution and vice a versa for GR Se ries layout files being used on X Series recorder Table 6 3 on page 240 Changes are required for Custom Screens for the GR Series for this Screen Designer should be used 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 239 Table 6 3 X Series Screen Resolution GR Series Screen Resolution eZtrend QXe 320 x 240 eZtrend GR 320 x 240 Minitrend QX 320 x 240 Minitrend GR 640 x 480 Multitrend SX 800 x 600 Multitrend GR 1024 x768 Note Non Process Screens are not supported in Screen Designer Bitmaps
368. ints has been completed Select Export TUS A TUS data file is generated with all the relevant information for the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to produce a survey report The user is prompted to enter free format notes which is included in the TUS When the entire survey has been completed you can export the TUS data file to the remov able media The file can be exported prior to the completion of all the survey setpoints but those not completed would be indicated as not having been completed when the report is generated The data file being exported is a completely separate data file from the recorder s normal saved data name tus When loaded on the media this data can be imported to the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool to generate the actual hard copy Temperature Uniformity Survey report These data files can be saved to a folder on the PC for archival purposes but the AMS275D Report Gen eration Tool is require to actually open these files and to create the report The recorder only archives a single TUS report in the recorder s buffer the files should be archived in the PC or on a CD for permanent record retention The survey ends when the user presses the stop survey button or the survey runs for a con tinuous period of 72 hours including stable time A simple report is generated within the recorder that is available as with other recorder based reports An event is triggered to indicate a TUS has ended and a message is lo
369. ion Type option The report can give you the pen Max Min value for every Hour Day Week Month the Cur rent max min pen value or Do Not Include Max Min values Averages Select this to include the Average values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Average value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current average pen val ue or Do Not Include Average values Pens Pens only available when either Curent Pen Value or Max Mins is set to Included Select which pens this report will be run on Totals Select this to include the Total values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Total value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current total pen value or Do Not Include Total values Totaliser Pens only available when Multiple Pens is selected for Selection Type This will display any pens that have been set up as a totaliser pen See Displaying Totals on page 93 Messages Select this to include the Messages of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Messages for the Last Hour Last Day Last Week Last Month All messages or Do Not Include Messages Message Lists Select which type of messages are required for your report Alarm
370. ion history from EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 5 3 3 l O board could not correctly determine whether this is the first Diagnostics ROM time this board has been powered up so could not default the Messages values Error reading FirstPower up signature from EEPROM Error reading NV EEP 6 3 3 Could not read the initial resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error reading Initial loop resistance from EEPROM Messages Error reading NV EEP 7 3 3 Could not read the current resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error reading Current loop resistance from EEPROM Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 367 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Error writing to NV EEP 0 3 3 General error writing persistent data EEWriteLong Diagnostics ROM Error writing data to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 1 3 3 I O board has completed first time power up defaulting however Diagnostics ROM could not log the fact Error writing FirstPower up signature to Messages EEPROM Error writing to NV EEP 2 3 3 Life stats could not be persisted on I O card Error writing to Life Diagnostics ROM Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 3 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on Al card Error writing to Al Diagnostics ROM Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing
371. ion stats Messages Incompatible hardware ID 8 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified Diagnostics Invalid board type finding history size Messages Incompatible hardware ID 9 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst getting Diagnostics life history Invalid board type getting life history Messages Incompatible hardware ID 10 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst getting Diagnostics session history Messages Incompatible hardware ID 11 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified during writ Diagnostics ing life stats operation Messages Incompatible hardware ID 12 1 1 An invalid unsupported I O card has been identified whilst in Diagnostics diagnostic mode Invalid board type writing FieldPortDiagOutput Messages Unable to read board revi 0 1 1 Invalid or unsupported board revision for I O board firmware Diagnostics sion Error reading board revision conversion request or reading value Messages Invalid board revision 0 1 1 Invalid or unsupported board revision for I O board firmware Diagnostics Error reading board revision value read was not recognised Messages Board not marked as having N A N A Board has not passed ATE test return to factory Diagnostics passed post mfr test Messages Unable to read valid configu N A N A Could not read a valid I O board configuration Diagnostics ration from E2 Messages Unable to read history stats 0 3 3 Could not read history or stats informa
372. ions data The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 69 Layout The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Saved or Load layouts in the recorder See Layout on page 157 Passwords Manages the security and access to full password configuration that allows restricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels Administrate Load and Save passwords from this menu See Passwords on page 164 Settings Recorder settings such as Set Time to configure the recorder s time and date See Settings on page 173 Settings Select a button to take you to the next menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 67 68 Setup Menu Main Menu Configure Setup In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires stores and actions da ta The Setup screen gives access to the Edit menu where the majority of the recorder con figuration is done also Save and Load setups from this screen Edit Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 69 Save Setup Main Menu Configure Setup Save The Save button will produce a list of destinations to save
373. is presented with a user name and password box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for E Wm the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu in will turn to Log Off once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen User Log in Log Out Method Users can log in and out of the system or web page easily using the touch screen or an at tached keyboard Users and Groups Number of Users The system will support up to 50 users Multiple Log On s Users are allowed to log on to the system more then once allowing the same user to log on from different areas e g via the user interface and via web browser at the same time User Name Each user must have a user name this is a maximum of 20 characters in length and cannot be duplicated Numeric characters and symbols can be used in the user name but no spac es User Group Each user can be allocated to a group these are defined as follows 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 207 208 Administrator Administrator has access to everything and it is possible to have more than one user at the administrator level The Administrator will have unlimited access to the system and provide the ability to setup other users With the exception of Administrator who has access to everything the other 4 groups per mission areas c
374. is service is responsible for launching database related components See Comms Server Start up on page 258 System Setup The system can be set up two ways 1 For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices Using the TrendServer and Comms Server software create a database for the device s and configure each device for logging using the comms server When the devices are in place and connected check the IP address for Ethernet devices only and the device ID is correct 2 For larger networks Set up the hardware first noting each devices ID and IP address Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log ging for each device The devices will need to be set up on the TrendServer software before the connections can be tested and become active Shutdown Server The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar at the bottom right of the screen Right click on that icon and you will see the pop up below Open Comms UI Start Server Shutdown Server About Versions Preferences Customize Select Shutdown Server and the following message box would pop up Communications ServiceUl Shutdown of this server will terminate all communications to clients ih Realtime and OPC and any database logging Are you sure you want to shutdown Select Yes and the following events will happen 274 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 20
375. it has been acknowledged See Reflash Change Log Toggles On and Off Select this to change the Log speed when an alarm occurs The Log rate changes when alarm is active and stays at the alarm rate for as long as the alarm is active then returns to the normal logging rate Set up the new alarm logging rate in Alarm Rate in Logging Menu on page 86 Mark Chart Toggles On and Off Selecting On will place a Mark on the Chart with automated messages when the alarm becomes active From the position of the Mark on Chart the chart background colour will change to show it is in an alarm state Email Alarm Enable this to send an email when any alarm is triggered on this pen This function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu gt Credits on page 131 Recipients Only available when email has been enabled Select your recipients from the list provided Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email on page 106 Hysteresis not available for Deviation Toggles On and Off When this is activated you can set a tolerance level for an alarm It allows a specified percentage value of the span of the scale to be added to the alarm level Hyst Level not available for Deviation alarm Enter as a percentage of the span of the scale This is how much tolerance the signal can have past the set alarm activation 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 89 90 point until the alarm is de activated The
376. ital I O card option can be used as pulse inputs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 303 Analogue Input Analogue Input User Defined Maximum Input Ranges For values entered for the Range Type in the Analogue In Menu on page 73 Table 12 1 Analogue In Ranges Preset Ranges ae Preset Ranges Maximum Voltages Voltages 50V 52V 1000mV 14V 25V 26V 500mV 600mV 12V 13V 250mV 300mV ev 6 5V 100mV 150mV 3V 3 25V 50mV 75mV 1 5V 1 6V 25mV 36mV 0 6V 0 8V 10mV 18mV 0 3V 0 4V 5mV 9mV Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 304 Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic recorders have one slot for digital inputs and alarm relay outputs All alarm card channels provide 240V AC isolation channel to chan nel and channel to recorder Digital I O channels will provide isolation to 100V AC test volt age not for mains connection The Multitrend GR recorder has three available expansion slots for Digital Input Relay Alarm output cards Inputs are automatically debounced to remove switching oscillations All Digital Inputs are volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max Relay Alarm Output Card Options There are two card options split into two types 4 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240 VAC 3 Amps rated resistive load The relay contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression 8 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240V AC 3 Amps rated resistive load Two channels on the 8 Rela
377. ital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4V to 50V DC 8V to 50V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 35 Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Pulse Input Channel Numbers The Pulse Input card has channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Pulse Input connector is on the right of the slot with a blanking plate on the left Table 2 6 Pulse Input card Card Position Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1to4 9 to 12 17 to 20
378. itrend GR Analogue Output 2 or 4 outputs available per card for the Minitrend and DR Graphic with 2 4 6 or 8 outputs available for the Multitrend recorder Output type 0 20mA or 4 20mA Not available for theeZtrend recorder Nema 4X IP66 Nema 4X IP66 protection available as an option Portable Recorders Portable cases available as an accessory item Digital Input 2 inputs on 8 channel Alarm card 8 inputs on 8 Digital I O card and 16 inputs on a 16 Digital I O card The digital inputs allow users to initiate from a remote location through a dry contact closure selected recorder functions only 8 Digital I O available for the eZtrend GR recorder Pulse Frequency four frequency inputs per board are available to measure pulse signals up to 25 kHz max 2 cards Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder but 4 pulse inputs can be used on the Digital I O option card to 1kHz max Pulse Inputs The 8 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Approvals CE cCSAus cULus approvals for Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Recorder CE cCSAus Approval for eZtrend GR Recorder Minitrend GR Multitrend GR also have FM class 1 Div 2 approval 24VAC DC or 48VDC Power Supply 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC for the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic 12 30 VDC 12 20 VAC for Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR
379. k extracted into the report The tables can contain just a single entry effectively acting as a single point calibration and will be applied across the whole range A total of 9 points are available allowing you to specify 1 to 9 calibration points and the sen sor correction from that cal point e g cal point 300 deg C correction 0 6 This would add a 0 6 degree C correction at 300 degrees C Low or ox Jj If only one cal point is entered then it will be taken as a single point cal and that correction applied across the whole range If two or more points are added then a reference table will be generated this will use the standard reference table functionality currently within GR Series and apply that to the sig nal All thermocouple calibration adjustments will be performed after the existing single or dual cal has been applied to the signal 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 389 LJ Recording EN Back 390 AMS2750 Process mode Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 Main menu Status TC Usage Thermocouple Usage Tracking is available with both TUS and Process options It provides a means to track the usage of thermocouples within the recorder when being used as a process instrument This give an indication to when thermocouples need replac ing dependent on load cycles and other factors specified in AMS2750 Thermocouple usage tracking is shown as a status screen within the recorder It shows the
380. k removal of link JP2 should be performed by an authorized person 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 6 Screen Configuration Process Screen Overview Figure 6 1 Minitrend GR Process Screen Standard Screen example Chart and DPM Message List icon allows quick access to Batches Recording menu allows Batch Detail User Mark on Chart and Messages stop start recording D r HL k A gt immediate download Batches Detail Mark Msg Exit of recorded data Select Options for Group 3 This grey area will appear if you are viewing a batch related screen View Alarms Alarm Status Print Modify Replay List of View Acknowledge Configure orSave screen chart available available all Alarms Individual Alarm screen layouts history Screens screens Acknowledge Ee Ack View Detail ta y c Exit Print Edit Replay Exit Enter recorder 0001 Turbine 1 Setup menu Recorder ID No amp Name alternates to display the Screen Name Time and Date 69 00 Pen 3 26 00 Chart Area Yellow area shows when Pen 1 was in alarm state Realtime Pen Pointers Alarm Marker marks the chart to show when Pen 1 was out of its alarm state Pen Digital Read out Touch the screen to activate a short cut to Settings such as change the chart speed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May
381. l device port The New function will just im port any new data since the last import was made 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 257 Communications Server Communications Server 258 Comms Server Overview The Comms Server and the Database server will run as a Service and can run indepen dently of the TrendServer interface Refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite Software Manual Installation instructions The Comms server will enable the user to Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port up to 8 ports and an Ethernet connection Setup local and remote databases Setup local and remote servers Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports Enable and disable ports Add edit and remove devices Log to database or client local connections Comms Server Start up To start the CommServer Go to Start gt All Programs Trendview Recorders gt TrendServer Pro Launch Communications Server application and this will bring the tray icon The comms server manages the communications status of devices on a serial port RS485 or through an Ethernet connection Only Modbus protocol is available for GR devices see Modbus on page 246 Comms Server Administration and Toolbar Database Servers Communications Ports Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview 7 Communications Server cm Esa h Database Servers IP Address Description 3 Communication Po
382. l handshaking secure communication channel will be estab lished and data flowing between these two end points will be encrypted Only WSD clients with valid certificates can connect to WSD service Data transfer between Recorder and Trend Server software will be in secure mode 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 8 4 Import recorders Recorders External Import Select type of import Pen data and events C Setup only Import Close m Source Location From Directory From Network FTP Browse for Folder Please select the root directory where your storage device is General options IV Auto graph the data T Make a log file in the program directory S a Local Disk C F Include extra diagnostic details s Local Disk D Q Audio CD E SB Apps F SP Data H 5 e Personal 1 4 S Common on uk22nt2n UK22_Data X Se Removable Disk Z amp My Documents My Network Places When the External Import box appears select Setup only use the Change button to browse for the device Select the import button to import the setup to TrendServer Pro 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 255 256 Comms and Trend Manager Suite Or for Ethernet connections the setup can be down loaded from the recorder via FTP Select Setup only as shown but change From Directory to From Network FTP External Import Select type of import aand events
383. le in Figure 2 on page 349 if this starting tempera ture has been set to 100 C a common value then the Fg summation would begin at t 8 minutes when the temperature first reaches this value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 349 350 Because of this small but increasing contribution to Fg once T reaches 100 C and the fact that in this trace the temperature exceeds 121 11 C the Fo value reaches 15 at time t 20 minutes at which point the sterilisation is complete and cooling begins For some applications it is allowed to report the Fg value that is finally achieved as the sample cools back to the start temperature in this example 100 C and so the contribution under the curve up to t 22 minutes would be included in the reported Fo The final Fg value might then be 16 1 say with 15 having been achieved up to t 20 minutes and the extra 1 1 having accumulated during the cooling back to 100 C between t 20 minutes and t 22 minutes The terms used in setting up the Fo totaliser together with their default values are summa rised in this table Term Definition Default Allowed values Range The equivalent time in minutes at 121 11 C that would pro Fo duce the same degree of sterilisation This is the totaliser out put value The temperature increase in C above the reference tempera 10 5 20 z factor ture that will produce a 10 fold increase in the rate of sterilisa tion Start The temp
384. lect ed independently currently English only available To configure local settings languages time zones daylight saving temperature units and mains frequency for input filtering see Localisation on page 136 section Default Time Zone Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Localisation Time Zone The recorder is set to the default Time Zone for Eastern Time US Canada GMT 5 00 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 4 Time and Date Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure Settings Set Time Set the Recorder Time and Date settings see Set Time on page 173 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 5 Firmware Options Go from the Main Menu to Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Check your recorder has been set up with the correct amount of credits displayed as a number against the Credits item in the menu Then select the Options item in the Credits menu and enable the firmware options you require by changing the cross to a tick Check symbol When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Menu Path As each button is selected in the menu system a menu path will appear at the top of the Screen to enable the user to know where they are in the system The user can select these buttons to return to
385. led in a strong plastic bag Failure to do this will invalidate your warranty Environment and Location The recorder is designed to be mounted into a panel See Installation Instruc tions on page 11 Mounting angle is unlimited Choose a suitable location with an ideal viewing angle See Mounting and Viewing Angles on page 8 The location should be free from vibration The environment should be of non condensing humidity The ambient temperature should be between 0 C and 50 C 32 F to 122 F The relative humidity should be between 10 to 90 Inthe presence of sustained strong EM Field 10V m or higher deviation from the accuracy specifications may occur To improve performance under such installation scenarios we recommend using twisted pair cables and or ferrite cylinders over individual wires 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 7 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Installation Mounting and Viewing Angles Mounting The Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and eZtrend GR recorders have an un limited mounting angle Viewing For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed Minitrend GR 55 from the left or right 40 looking down and 50 looking up at the recorder dis play Multitrend GR and DR Graphic70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 look ing up at the recorder display eZtrend GR 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder
386. lo o LI Analogue Input Pulse Input wo 5 gt e Be a as o EOD c siege ea SO ER e r DEG 9 m wuducdao Jl b IHE LL E31 _ z Ee T Figure 2 12 DR Graphic slot positions and connections 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation oc c co ce COS Figure 2 13 DR Graphic Electrical connections DR Graphic cards selection jumper table Table 2 2 Al AO Pulse J8 amp J9 Link 1 amp 2 Slot B Alarm DI DO J8 amp J9 Link 2 amp 3 NOTE Do not disturb J4 amp J5 jumpers in positions 1 amp 2 for Slot A These are for future provision 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 27 Electrical Installation Wire seal provision AC supply 100 240 VAC Earth screw ground 12 to 30VDC 12 SPNC Relay to 20VAC Input Instrument power option 24V TX Power Supply Output Analogue Input card option slote Alarm Relay or Digital I O Slot G option CJC Sensor not shown Analogue Input Ethernet connection ETHERNET card std Slot A Figure 2 14 eZtrend GR Rear panel 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation Analogue Input Card Each Analogue Input card has up to 8 input channels for the Minitrend GR and the Mul titrend GR and up to 6 channels for the eZtrend GR Connections are made via 2 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear
387. load Digital Input Functions The digital inputs can be used for the following actions A Digital contact on an input can be used to enable or disable one or any combination of alarms Can be used in Maths expressions Can have current status indicated on DPMs Bars and Charts Failsafe Relay Positions Table 12 2 eZtrend GR Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Relay Positions no alarms active NO NC Normal Relay Output Power On Open Closed States Power Off Open Closed NO NC Failsafe Relay Output Power On Closed Open States Power Off Open Closed AMS2750 Process Mode Provides on line monitoring in the process recorder to alert the user to potential AMS2750 non compliance issues Monitors and alerts the user concerning days until next SAT days until next TUS days until next control T C change out and days until the recorder requires calibration The recorder also provides an overview of T C usage for all survey T C s provid ing a colour coded for early warning screen 5 day expiration AMS2750 TUS Mode The Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorder monitors a temperature uniformity survey and generates a data file that can be used to create a TUS report It tracks a number of pa rameters during a TUS which includes the ramp time the time between the first T C entering dwell zone and the last T C entering dwell zone the point where all t C s are stable and lie within
388. ls For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 281 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 59 Wire seal Earth screw ground 12 to 30VDC 12 to 20VAC Input Instrument power option Analogue Input card Slot B option Functions and Features eZtrend GR Rear Connections AC supply 100 240VAC Common Relay Output SPNC 24V TX Power Supply Output Alarm or Digital I O Slot G option 100 240VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is recommended when using Thermo 60 couples as the measurement device and to protect the wiring and terminals For the rear cover part number see Section 10 Spares List on page 281 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Multitrend GR Rear Connections AC supply Wire seal 100 240VAC pm erc z Analogue Input Earth screw Soe M 7 Pulse Input ground Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D 24 48V Instrument Analogue Input power option Pulse Input Analogue Output Slot E Common Relay alte Output SPNC Alarm or Digital I O 24V TX Power Slot G Supply Output Slot H Slot CJC Sensor Slots A to F Ethernet USB Host RS485 100 240VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel An optional rear cover is available for this recorder it is re
389. ly over the Ethernet link Security Total Data Integrity data is stored in secure encrypted files making it easy to retrieve the data dependent on process information Data is automatically recognised without having to remember file names Password Protection Up to 4 levels of password protection with up to 50 different users are available Multiple levels of password protection and an audit trail of actions enhance the security of the data Password Network Synchronisation is a credit function in the recorders that provides a means of keeping the passwords of users in sync for network connected recorders It uses a Password Master Slave setup to update password changes Extended Security System option ESS provides features including entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords time out of password entry password expiration and traceability of user actions ESS is compatible with the requirements of 21CFR part 11 Hardware Configuration Lock The Hardware Configuration Lock feature located on the processor card and works in conjunction with the Credit function to prevent any configuration changes once the configuration switch has been set to the locked position See Options on page 196 The switch must be reset to the unlock position to make configuration changes See Hardware Configuration Lock on page 224 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Events Events is a firmware opti
390. m y Alamsl Almsl x y z Get the current alarm level set Pen x 1 96 Alarm y 1 6 New level to set z Eg P3 almsl 1 1 A3 will set Pen 1 alarm1 and show A3 pen P3 Alamst Almst x y Get the current alarm state for Pen x Alarm y active 0 inactive Di Di x Get the state of Digital input number x Glbv Glbv x Get the value of global variable number x Locv Locv x Get the value of local variable number x Pen Pen x Get the value of Pen number x Tot TOT x Get the current value of totaliser x Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description AND amp amp Returns a true or false result from testing if two tests are both true e g IF A122GLBV1 amp amp A2 GLBV2 Assign Assigns one variable to another e g GLBV1 A1 GLBV1 becomes the value of A1 Equal to Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 Greater than gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater than another Greater than or equal to gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater or equal to than another Less than lt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than another Less than and equal to lt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than or equal to another NOT Returns true if the result is 0 otherwise returns false 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015
391. m h Slow Speed 1mm h 5mm h and 10mm h 20mm h 144 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Once the charts speeds have been set up in the strip for circular chart menu go to a process screen displaying data on a chart and touch the screen This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of the screen select this to display the 3 categories set See Chart Speeds on page 235 Circular Chart Speed Selection Edit Setup Screen Setup Strip Slow Speed Smm h pen T Hour Alignment 23 recie zi Circ Fast Speed the required to fill circular chart data in 1 hr Circ Med Speed the required to fill circular chart data in 1 day Circ Slow Speed the required to fill circular chart data in 1 week Hour Alignment the alignment hour for daily charts Day Alignment the alignment day Sunday 0 Monday 1 etc for week charts When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Brightness Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Brightness Set the recorder s screen brightness using the instant brightness slider Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness Set the brightness level tick to agree then go to Finish Commit to permanently apply the change For information on increasing the display life by reducing backlight brightness see Back lights
392. me user is reinstated if the password system is reset For recorders with Extended Security System ESS see First Time Password System Setup on page 208 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Administrator This is the top level access to all menus Only the Administrator has access to the password setup The Administrator is responsible for adding users and assigning their levels of access throughout the recorder menu system More than one Administrator can be set up User Administration Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin The Administrator can set up the recorder s password policies permission levels of access in the menu system and can add delete and unlock users and assign their permission lev els Passwords can be Reset from this screen The recorder will display a default setup that can be customised to suit This is set out in Level Permissions on page 211 NOTICE When creating passwords it is recommended to use a mix of capital letters small letters numbers and special characters to create a strong password Policy Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy At the top of the Policy menu are four levels to be assigned these are the permission levels that will allow access to specific areas of the recorder menu system The names of these levels can be edited here Pwds Enable Tick to enable the password menu Level 0 Name Administrator Highest permission level
393. me of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below ASIA PACIFIC EMEA Honeywell Process Solutions Honeywell Process Solutions TAC Phone 80012026455 or hfs tac support Qhoney 44 0 1344 656000 well com Email Sales Australia FP Sales Apps Honeywell com Honeywell Limited or Phone 61 7 3846 1255 TAC FAX 61 7 3840 6481 hfs tac support honey Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 well com Toll Free Fax 1300 36 04 70 China PRC Shanghai Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 4568 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 AMERICA s Honeywell Process Solutions Phone 1 800 423 9883 Or 215 641 3610 Sales 1 800 343 0228 Email Sales FP Sales Apps Honeywell com or TAC hfs tac support honey well com Specifications are subject to change without notice For more information To learn more about Paperless Recorders visit www honeywellprocess com Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager Process Solutions Honeywell 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston TX 77042 Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Honeywell House Skimped Hill Lane Bracknell England RG12 1EB Shanghai City Centre 100 Jungi Road Shanghai China 20061 43 TV 25 41 Rev 4 0 May 2015 Honeywell 2015 Honeywell International Inc www honeywellprocess com
394. me type as that run previously however Diagnostics changed x channels previ has a different number of channels This will be as a result of a Messages ously currently y channels board upgrade downgrade Slot setup mismatch AO in N A N A An AO board was detected on the previous run but now an Al Diagnostics setup updating to Al board has been detected therefore the Al setup will be used Messages instead of the AO Slot setup mismatch AO in N A N A An AO board was detected on the previous run but now a pulse Diagnostics setup updating to Pulse board has been detected therefore the pulse setup will be used Messages instead of the AO Slot setup mismatch Al in N A N A An Al board was detected on the previous run but now an AO Diagnostics setup updating to AO board has been detected therefore the AO setup will be used Messages instead of the Al Slot setup mismatch Al in N A N A An Al board was detected on the previous run but now a pulse Diagnostics setup updating to Pulse board has been detected therefore the pulse setup will be used Messages instead of the Al Slot setup mismatch Pulse N A N A A pulse board was detected on the previous run but now an Al Diagnostics in setup updating to AI board has been detected therefore the Al setup will be used Messages instead of the pulse Slot setup mismatch Pulse N A N A A pulse board was detected on the previous run but now an AO Diagnostics in setup updating to AO board has been detecte
395. ministrator reset by an administrator authorization Access Denied to Area N A N A Access to the area that the operator tried to access is refused because the operator has not got the authority level necessary Password Failure N A N A User has tried to login and has failed Inactivity Timeout N A N A Recorder inactivity has timed the current user out so the user must re log on Unknown Password Error N A N A Password system has failed to start up correctly for an unknown reason Supplied username con N A N A A username cannot contain space characters tains space characters DPPQ FATAL ERROR N A N A Acquired I O card data has been lost Diagnostics Status DATA LOSS IO and Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 375 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Data reset has been per N A N A The data held internally has been deleted System Status and formed Messages The touch screen was NOT N A N A The touch screen requires calibration System Status and calibrated Messages 376 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities AMS2750 and the GR Series Recorders The recorders can operate in 2 Modes 1 Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS Stand alone recorder that measures T Cs in oven furnace only available on an Multitrend GR and DR Graphic recorder 2 Process mode Screen amp Timers
396. mple of a set of non linear signal inputs X and the required values in engineering units Y that have been entered into a linearisation table They would pro duce the following curve Figure 4 3 Example of a 0 10V non linear input signal 10 8 E Y 6 i Eng Units 2 pft 0 Signal Input A straight line is drawn between each point as shown by the continuous red line in Figure 4 3 For a more accurate curve as shown by the dotted line blue add more data points into the linearisation table The Linearisation tables that you set up here can then be used in the Analogue In Menu on page 73 If the full input range is greater than the range used in the linearisation tables then the signal will carry on following the slope of the last two inputs For example if we had a 50 to 50V range and just used the 0 to 10V linearisation table then the signal would look like Figure 4 4 If the Analog input has been set to millivolts and that the span is greater or equal to 1000 mV then the linearisation table X values should be specified in Volts 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 4 4 Linearisation table used for part of the range 50 40 30 20 10 Y Eng 0 Units 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 X Signal Input The last two points are used to follow the slope for the rest of the signal At the bottom of the 0 10V table the las
397. mps appear on the Trend Screen instead of the date and time stamps for chart speeds of 10mm hr 20mm hr 30mm hr and 60mm hr if ena bled When the recorder screen is put into replay mode As you zoom out the time stamps on the chart background change from minutes to hours Show Chart Start Stop this will show or hide the Chart Start Stop Message when the chart has been started or stopped Hot Btn 1 HB1 to HB4 select Name to rename the Hot Button Tick to enable the Hot Button appearing at the top right of active trend screens Once enabled any corre sponding event that has been setup will be triggered after clicking on the hot button 4 Hot Buttons available for the Multitrend GR and DR Graphic 2 Hot Buttons available for the Minitrend GR 1 Hot Button is available for the eZtrend GR 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mi 14 Screen Pen 2 PV 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 Pen 6 PV 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 Appearance 0001 Recorder 1 Pen 3 PV 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 Pen 7 PV 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 PV PV 03 Jan 06 08 53 32 Pen 4 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 Pen 8 49 92 Max 49 92 Min 49 92 Chart background colour and graduations and the chart background colour when the record er goes into an alarm state can all be changed The same set of characteristics can be changed for a chart in Replay mode using the colour picker The colour of the Time Stamp at the top of the chart
398. n be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 50 000 hours to half brightness when used at 10096 62 500 hours with 8096 brightness 25 deg Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches eZtrend GR Recorder Display size and Type 5 7 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution QVGA 320 x 240 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 50 000 hours to half brightness when used at 10096 62 500 hours with 8096 brightness 25 deg Maximum luminosity 450 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches Display Update Rate Display values updated every second Status Display A status bar at the top of the recorder s screen displays the real time icons of the recorder status such as Time left and alarm active Communications Ethernet 10 100 base T with RJ45 connector supporting Modbus TCP FTP Internet DHCP or fixed IP address RS485 not available for the eZtrend GR Mathematics Basic maths include Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulo and power Full Maths and Scripting option support up to 100 character free form math expression for each pen Lik
399. n page 411 2 See Soak mode on page 412 3 See Stable in soak mode on page 413 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK w Menu 0 Furnace Name Furnace 1 Model No QW 234 Y 45 Instrument Type B Setpoint Status Tol 600 00F 10 0 1000 00F 10 0 NA 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 400 00F 10 0 0 00F TUS mode Detect mode Detect Light Blue starts when the point value for the survey setpoint begins to rise 0001 Multtrend SX 29 Aug 08 15 22 26 gt md M 17h 130 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Time Stop TUS Username M Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1m 16 Soak Duration Class Class 2 Condition Running Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp Diff Overshoot duration TCO TCO 0 00F 0 00F TCO TCO 0 00F 0 00F Toco TCO 0 00F 0 00F Max TC TC s Stabilized Manual zs Override TCO Too 0 00F TCO 0 00F TCO 0 00F TC0 TC0 im 16s 0 Mins 0 00F TCO TCO 0 00F TCO TCO 0 00F TCO 0 Mins 0 00F TCO 0 00F 0 Mins Restart Soak 15 20 00 41400 00 23 Aug 8j 15 10 00 23 Aug 08 14 00 00 14 20 00 23 Aug 08 14 30 00 29 Aug 08 14 40 00 23 Aug 08 14 14 10 00 00 25 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 Max TC TC 359 64 When the recorder is in Detect phase the timers for monitoring the duration of this step will start
400. name Maximum 32 pens per group for Multitrend GR 26 for Minitrend GR 8 oreZtrend GR and DR Graphic 158 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK MaxMin Select by either Pens or Groups Showing either the pen numbers or the Group name Maximum 32 pens per group for Multitrend GR 76 for Minitrend GR 8 oreZtrend GR and DR Graphic ee User Variables Select from the User variable list ee Script timers Select the Timers required from the list ee User Counters Select this to disp lay any User Counters already set up ee Status Select this to display the Status screen ee Totals Select this to display the Totals screen ee Messages Select this to display the Messages screen Options fto display All Alarm System Diagnostics Security or User messages Select By This gives you the option of selecting Pens or a pre defined Group of pens that will be displayed on the screen This will be the default if AMS2750 Process screen is selected in Template Type Showing Pens Only available if Pens is selected in Select By Select pens from the on screen selection to be displayed on this screen Available pens will be in bold text on the selection screen and pens that are already selected will have a blue edge Group Name only available when Group is selected in Select By Select which group of pens is to be displayed on this screen To assign a pen to a group see Pens Menu on page 84 Orientation Not on the DPM scr
401. nc the firmware option needs to be acti vated in the Credit system see Section 7 Firmware Options on page 241 2 Only recorders with the Password Net Sync option enabled in the Firmware options will be available to the designated Master or Slave and be accessible in the password group 3 Ensure that the networked recorders to be included in the password groups are on the same IP subrange of A B C x such that A B C is fixed and only x is variable 4 Ensure that all recorders to be included in the same password group are configured to be in the same Set with the same Start Port and have Peer Services enabled This can be checked from the Menu Configure Setup Edit Comms Services Peers menu Unless the network administrator states otherwise there is no reason to change the default Start Port value of 8955 For more information see Peers on page 110 5 Ensure that passwords are enabled from Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy on all of the recorders to be included in a password group 6 Recorders in the same Master Slave password group must have the same revision of firmware 7 Recorders set up with ESS Extended Security System and non ESS recorders can not be mixed in the same password group 8 Choose a recorder to be the Master of the password group and go to the Pwd Net Sync dialog on that recorder from the Menu gt Configure gt Passwords menu Set the Type field to Master
402. nd Po sterilisation calculation Custom Screens Note 2 4 Import custom built screens that have been created in Screen Designer Reports 3 Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format AMS2750 Process 5 AMS2750 Process activates the Process Mode screen and the AMS2750 process configuration menus for furnaces and sensors in accordance with AMS2750 specification including Thermo couple tracking Health Watch 2 The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative Maintenance maintenance notification Including Power cycles Last powered up Total On time Total Off time Longest off time Battery life left Backlight life left at 100 brightness SD Card insertions Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations Print Support 2 Enables the printer option to print text from various screens using a standard PCL Printer Com mand Language printer connected to the USB 2 0 port or to the network 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 241 Firmware Credit System Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value AMS2750 TUS
403. nd display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum is up to 16 extra pens for the DR Graphic Minitrend GR 12 extra pens for the eZtrend GR recorders and 48 extra pens for the Multitrend GR recorder Hardware Lock Uses the paswword permission areas to lock access to the hardware configuration functionality leaving some areas view only Specification table for Sterilisation The definition of Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250 F 121 11 C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different proc esses however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temperature is not specified for example F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions Parameter Reference Rated Extreme Transport amp Storage Ambient Temperature 67 F to 77 F 32 F to 122 F 32 F to 122 F 14 F to 140 F 19 C to 25 C 0 C to 50 C 0 C to 50 C 10 C to 60 C Relative Humidity RH 50 to 65 10 to
404. nd inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank To avoid damage ensure that a channel selected as ohms or R T remains floating i e the sensor is not connected to any external voltage Alternatively if an ohms or R T sensor must be biased to an external voltage ensure that the other two channels within the same input bank are floating or are biased to the same voltage i e inputs of all three channels connected to the same voltage Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Analogue Output Card Not available on the eZtrend GR recorder The Analogue Output card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plug that fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The Analogue Output card position for the Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic shown in Table 2 1 on page 25 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 33 34 Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a barrier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintain
405. nd you want to Totalise in litres there 1 litres in 1 litre so your unit factor would be 1 so every 1 second 1 1 unit is added If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in Cubic meters there are 1000 litres in 1 cubic meter so your unit factor would be 1000 so every 1 second 1 1000th of a unit is added No Backflow Normal Totaliser only If the flow reading should go into a negative value eg The flow meter has been switched off and No Backflow is inactive the totaliser will subtract from the total value When No Backflow is active any negative values are ignored and the total value is held while the flow meter is off until the backflow level is exceeded Backflow Level Only active when No Backflow is set Set the level at which totalising will stop if the signal flow goes below this limit and if the No Backflow option is active Restrict Range Normal Totaliser only Toggles On and Off When active the totaliser restarts at Min range once it reaches Max range Min Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range to Max Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from Use Remainder Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Toggles On and Off If the total exceeds the maximum r
406. nel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK else BLKV1 treset 1 return tget 1 Return the current paused timer value If itis reset the timer 1 to zero return the current zeroed timer value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 335 336 Full Maths amp Script Processing Example 4 Commenting in Scripts This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts you can use the standard C commenting inline comments use for example if A1 10 return 9 If A1 greater then 10 return 9 or for block single or multiline commenting the to open and to close these are C style comments and work as follows if A1 10 return 9 f A1 greater then 10 return 9 for single line or if A1 10 if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9 return 9 these are also useful for commenting out code to try different things for example if A1 gt 10 else return A1 return 9 return 20 Here the else statement is commented out so it won t be included but can easily be re in troduced if required Maths Error Messages When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry out Syntax and other checks When it comes across operations functions brackets etc not
407. nge Once this is done press the Calibrate button Next the Calibration Neg ative Range box appears instructing the user to apply the bottom range limit When this is done press the Calibrate button When the calibration is complete the icon changes to the User cal icon under the chan nel to show that the channel is using the user cal 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 133 134 Calibration Input Ranges This table shows which input range is used for each input type Table 4 9 Calibration Input range table Input Type Input Range K Type TC 50mV R Type TC 25mV S Type TC 25mV B Type TC 10mV J Type TC 50mV T Type TC 25mV E Type TC 100mV N Type TC 50mV C W5 Type TC 50mV G W Type TC 50mV Chrome Copel 50mV L Type TC 50mV M Type TC 50mV P Platinel 100mV D Type TC 50mV PT100 RTD 100mV PT200 RTD 250mV PT500 RTD 500mV PT1000 RTD 1000mV Nickel 100 100mV Nickel 120 100mV Cu10 50mV Cu53 50mV 200 Ohms 50mV 500 Ohms 100mV 1000 Ohms 250mV 4000 Ohms 1000mV 0 20mA 250mV 4 20mA 250mV 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK CJC Calibration For Thermocouple Input calibration only There is a single CJC sensor for each Al card but the temperature across the connector will not be constant The CJC calibration allows the user to compensate for temperature gradi ent 4 licac Calibration a Calibrate CJC AI Slot A 3 I
408. ning this will simply show the full scale i e not zoomed in to any specific soak 14 20 00 14 30 00 14 40 00 14 50 00 23 Aug 09 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 09 23 Aug 08 15 00 00 15 10 00 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 The pens on the graph area show two thermocouples one minimum temp and one maxi mum temp When the TC s reach the soak period the chart reconfigures and zooms in on the setpoint area contained inside the tolerance width band The lower panel displays digital readings of the two TC s Max and Min hottest and coldest and a third pen displays a dig ital reading of the difference in temperature between the two TC s 15 40 00 415 000 iii i Max TC TC 405 00 Min TC TC1 403 34 p335 000 385 000 It also will automatically Zoom in when the temperature reaches the lower limit as defined by the AMS2750 specification for the defined Furnace Class So for example if the furnace being surveyed is defined to be a Class 2 furnace and you are doing a survey SP at 600 F the trend graph will switch from a full scale graph say 0 to 1100 F to a Zoomed in scale that shows the configured SP the Furnace class limit 408 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode e SP1 setpoint 1 and SP2 setpoint 2 Time t1 the ramp time for the first ramp Time t2 time between first TC entering Dwell zone and Last TC entering Dwell Zone for setpoint 1 SP1 Point P1 The
409. nnel Maintenance AI last user cal 4 7 Fri Mar 07 2007 13 50 25 AI last user cal 4 8 Fri Mar 07 2007 13 50 25 Relay 1 cycle s D cvcle s Relay 2 cycle s 0 cycle s Relay 3 cycle s 0 cycles Relay 4 cycle s 0 cvcle s Relay 5 cycle s O cvcle s Relay 6 cycle s 0 cycle s Relay 7 cycle s Ocyclefs Relay 8 cycle s 0 cycle s Fixed 0 cycle s Relay cycle s Displays the amount of relay cycles per relay listed Fixed reports common relay output cycles Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Recording Main Menu gt Status gt Recording gt Recording Status Recording Log Rate Alarm Rate re Trig Group 14 46 Fuzzy No Group 25 36 Continuous Sample No Group 49 92 95 Continuous Sample Mo Group Overrange Continuous Sample No Group Overrange Continuous Sample No Group Overrange Continuous Sample No Group cm 49 92 95 Continuous Sample No Group 49 92 95 Continuous Sample No Group 3 48 Continuous Sample No Group 70 96 95 Continuous Sample No Group Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system Pen Displays the Pen number and will display a tick when recording and a cross when recording has stopped Value Displays the current pen value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 199 Recording Displays either Continuous or Fuzzy logging Log Rate Displays the Log rate set in Hertz
410. not affected This menu includes Furnace Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 385 AMS2750 button Sensors Configuration Menu Process Mode on page 386 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 383 B3 Bi B x Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO 384 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode AMS2750 Button Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 This button produces the Furnace Configuration Menus Furnace Configuration Menu Process Mode Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 and Tables 6 7 8 amp 9 ea d Furnace 1 Furnace 1 Furnace 2 Furnace 3 Furnace 3 Furnace 4 Furnace 4 Furnace 5 Furnace 5 Furnace 6 Furnace 6 Edit Setup I O AMS2750 i Furnace 1 Manufacturer Furnace Rite Model Mo 654190 Class Mat 2 Inst Type Edit Setup AMS2750 m aa eo am A Up to 6 furnaces or ovens can be configured and fed into one recorder Furnaces 1 to 6 re late directly to Groups 1 to 6 configured in AMS2750 Process Menu on page 379 Se lect each furnace in turn and configure as required Name Name or tag used to identify this furnace 39 characters of Alphanumeric Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the furnace Model Number Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace
411. not the Re corder SIP Soft Input Panel IP Address Troubleshooting If your recorder s IP address begins 169 this means there is no DHCP Server Dy namic Host Configuration Protocol available to create a dynamic IP address Either make a DHCP server available or allocate a Static IP address see TCP IP on page 94 The recorders IP address can be viewed in the Status menu see General on page 195 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Internet Security Settings Honeywell 4 gt E i QU01 MiniTrend x 2336 Screen 15 May12 12 03 02 Series TM 58400 12 00 00 12 02 00 Pen 1 18 78 96 General Pens Alarms p 25 536 3 Pen 49 0 00 Fen 50 Hardware 80 74 P 51 Remote Viewer 0 12 X Print screen Pen 52 11968 Info 3 Support ES Sales Website Take Control Internet Security Settings Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and above Figure 8 10 Internet Security Windows 7 on page 278 shows an example from In ternet Explorer 10 on a Window 7 The settings shown are for Internet access If the device is to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for local intranet op tion Firewall settings If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall should be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976 this is
412. nput No Temp Value CJ Temp Temp A Slot 1 8 27 88 28 38 6077 4 27 88 28 17 58 70 27 88 F 28 08 59 33 27 88 27 98 Back In this menu there is a button for each slot for Cold Junction Calibration Calibration is per formed per slot card Select the desired slot button If a CJC connector is not fitted a message box will appear The CJC temperature reading is displayed in the CJ Temp column fthe known temperature is different to the recorder s reading an Offset can be entered to make an adjustment to future values The Cold Junction temperature should be measured at the point where the thermocouple is connected in the terminal block Ensure the measured temperature is accurate to within 0 1 C Enter the difference between the CJ Temp on the recorder and the measured reading as the Offset Value The offset is added to all future readings and displayed in the Cal ibrated CJ Temp column The Measured Temp column will display the actual temperature using the Calibrated CJC Temp on channels with T C fitted For more details of how a thermocouple works refer to Appendix C Thermocouple Connections on page 337 Select the tick box to go back and the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Demo Traces Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Demo Traces A set of demo traces available for demonstration or simulation purposes when no Analogue cards are fitt
413. nsation and dotted line shows with compensation High Offset of 5 F Z 410V 100 High Eng Z d 7 Low Offset of 5 10V 0 Low Eng Dual Point Sensor Compensation is used to used to offset the signal input by a user offset the signal input by a user specified specified amount over the full range amount against the Low and High Eng val ues The offset amount can vary throughout the signal input range Multi Point The Sensor comp screen for a mutli point cal will show the user compensation type Multi Point and the number of values in the table To configure the multi point cal table select the value button and the instrument will display a table entry screen This table is a minimum of 2 default points and a maximum of 9 points Additional rows can be added or deleted by using the Add button or select a channel to insert or delete channels above or below the row selected The input temperature is entered in the left column and the respective offset to be applied entered in the right column Once the table is complete the settings are accepted by clicking the tick button All configuration changes are not fully saved until the Finish and Commit actions have been completed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix I Battery Data Location Processor Board Located on the processor board this battery is used mainly for Clock battery back up Type 6032 IEC CR2032 System Li MnO o
414. ntdown in uses days to end of life days left Uses left and how long the TC has been in use 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode By selecting a sensor a dialog box appears showing more information and also providing a configure button for the sensor The additional information is as follows and as shown above Type of TC Expendable or Non expendable and metal type Serial Number unique to that TC Certificate No of sensor Installed on the date when the current TC was connected Calibration on the date when the TC was last calibrated Select the Configure button to take a short cut to the Sensors menu Main Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt l O AMS2750 gt Sensors You can access the thermocouple and change the details for the newly connected replacement TC When a thermocouple is reset a mes sage is added to the system message list to indicate a reset User alert system to display when a thermocouple is reaching end of life and when one or more have reached end of life The colour coding for the TC Status button on the Process screen are as follows Green TC is over 5 days from expiry Amber TC s is 0 to 5 days from expiry Red TC s has expired All Messages Message 16 51 46 08 03 2008 Setup Changed 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan amp 16 51 46 08 09 2008 Upscale bumout on chan 5 16 51 46 X 08 09 2008 Upscale burnout on chan 4 16 5
415. nternet Security Settings on page 277 Messages The Messages list displays the Peer to Peer status Thus includes the Type of message usually a system password message Time Date and the Message information This screen can be cleared or printed Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Media Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Media Pen Pen number Rate Pen speed Store Size How much memory is allocated to this pen Store Time How much storage time is available Remaining How much memory is left before data is over written Store Size Store Time and Remaining are dependant of the pen logging speed how many pens are logging and will be affected by Storage bias allocation of chart and logged data Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 205 206 Finish When the Finish button is pressed at the end of a new set up or a change to a setup the following options are available Commit This will save the new setup or changes to an existing setup over writing the existing one and implement them into the recorder Field validation is performed when a change has been made if a problem is identified an error message is shown and the field in question clearly marked Discard This will ignore the new setup or the changes tha
416. ntrol v Y via Web Page Perm Area 40 Calibrate Y v Screen Perm Area 41 User v 4 4 4 4 Variables Perm Area 42 Clear Popup Y Y Y v Alert 212 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system WE Super e No Login Permission Ar Admin Engineer Technician rator A ermissio ea d ginee visor echnicia Operato required Perm Area 43 Context Menu Y Y Y Y Perm Area 44 Clear Y Y Messages Perm Area 45 Reports Run Y Y Y Y Y and View Perm Area 46 Reports Mod Y Y ify and Reset All Perm Area 47 Script Y Y Y Y Y Timers 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 213 214 Default Password Access Default password access is set up within the recorder and can be changed by the Adminis trator or the Administrator can assign another user to change the access permissions Default permissions Administrator Access is for the Administrator level only Engineer Access is for Engineers and above Administrator level Supervisor Access is for Supervisors and above incl Engineer and Administrator levels Technician Access is for Technicians and above incl Supervisor Engineer and Adminis trator levels Operator Access is for Operators and above incl Technicians Supervisors Engineers and Administrator levels No Login gives access only to unrestricted
417. nts tab in TrendServer Pro set up a cause to trigger the effect of a chart control 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 271 272 Setup Window Communications Server ee Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart Will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed Clear this will clear all the data being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading WARNING Events are credit controlled Eventi Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder User Action _5et cte Iv MaxMins Reset 5 Details of Effect 1 Enabled Type 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server Realtime Graphing To graph real time data on TrendServer Pro press the Real time button located on the left hand side This will list all the recorders currently connected The recorder
418. ny given disk size giving greater resolution on the process Recording time can be extended 3 4 Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC 5 Quicker graphing of data 6 Smaller data files for remote collection How does it work Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line The technique is best illustrated by the diagram below 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 345 346 Input Signal Continuously Sampled data LS 12 points only Y Fuzzy Logged data Changing slope requires more data points to be logged to capture the shape correctly Diagram 1 Points marked O are NOT logged as they lie on an imaginary straight line between points marked The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data looks identical to the graph of the sampled data but has taken less than half the points to build it What about Spikes on my trend line Won t it miss them NO you will not miss any Spikes Glitches or Transients these are what you need to see As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique it will log as fast as it needs to in order to capture everything Although not all points are logged the base Scan Rate of the input is the same as if you were using a standard logging technique 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK What about slowly drifting inputs Again No Problem The algorithm is processed in Real Time i e as the reading
419. o 6 batches can be run concurrently To start a batch enter information in all the required screens that have previously set up in the Batch Menu on page 138 There are two op tions The Single Screen Batch allows you to view and enter all the batch details on a single screen If this is not selected the Batch Wizard will enable separate screens to enter the same information Select a Group With Single Screen Batch enabled this information can be entered on one screen if not the Batch Wizard will provide separete screens see Figure 4 5 on page 181 and Figure 4 6 on page 181 Batch Name Name to Identify the batch up to 19 characters User ID Identification of user starting the batch If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and will be automatically entered up to 19 characters Lot No Starts at 1 and increments by 1 and is user configurable Desc Enter a description of what the batch is up to 17 characters Comment Add any further comments Lot No Desc and Comment are the default field names The Description and Comment field names can be changed in General Batch Properties on page 138 The Lot number is unique for each batch on a recorder and can be modified by the User The Lot number can be entered by the user and starts at 1 and increments by 1 or can be selected fron a predefined list This is irrespective of whether the user is using Batch Wizard or Single
420. o Pen 3 and change the maths to A1 This will ensure that Pen Scale 3 will display A1 input With this enabled the Engineer ing zero and span is the same as the pen scale Disable this and the Engineering zero and span will not reflect the pen scale When disabled see Eng Span amp Eng Zero bullet points below This is not available when using Linearisation Tables Units Ohms Volts and Amps only This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters For Thermocouple and Resistance Ther mometer units see Localisation on page 136 Label Select and enter a identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters SQRT Extract Volts and Amps only Toggle On and Off The Square root extraction in the analogue input is used to linearise certain sensors that have a non linear output for example in the calculation of flow So when you check the Square root extraction in the Analogue input section it carries out the following calculation It ratios the analogue input range that you set to 0 to 1 So any sensor input is represented by a number from 0 to 1 We then take the square root We then re ratio the result back to the user set range 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Sensor Comp Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units set
421. o allow you to remove the bad T C and redo the survey without having to replace the T C before repeating the run u 4 gt Mi AMS2750 TUS 22 Aug 08 16 02 03 Menu 0 7d 102 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Furnace Time Mame Furnace 1 Username NA Started Fri Aug 22 14 30 55 Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1h 31m 07s Class 2 Condition Running Instrument Type B Setpoint Status MaxTC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual Override Restart Soak 14 50 00 15 10 00 15 20 00 15 30 00 15 40 00 15 50 00 22 amp ug08 22Aug08 22Aug08 22Aug08 22Aug08 22 4Aug08 22Aug08 224 1015 000 pabueu dnas pea e5 faunqesadway e 8 5L TUS can be stopped at any time If there is a failure the survey carries on running the test on the others but it is not a valid test because of the failure All 9 TC s would have to run again to complete the test with no failures Example 9 TC s 1 control TC are required for an oven of a certain size The sensors are placed in each corner of the rectangular furnace and one in the middle The control TC is usually placed on the edge of the load No failures allowed With 10 16 TC s one failure is allowed see AMS2750 spec for details 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 415 416 TUS mode Ending the Survey This process is repeated until each of the survey setpo
422. o whether the survey is a pass or fail SP 1 200 F Aborted TUS Test Complies with AMS2750 Standard General Survey Comments Affirmation Authorized Person Comments amp Affirmation are included in TUS Report TUS Test Complies with AMS 2750 or other processing specifications Enter any other compliance required to additional specifications e g Mil 6875 BAC 5621 etc Enter any text required into the General Survey Comments amp Affirmations field Enter the name of the Authorized Person who is creating the TUS report 438 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 11 Save TUS Report This screen helps in obtaining the location to save the PDF file Reports can be saved on your local PC remote machine or on any external devices attached with the machine Re ports can be saved only in the PDF format Save As My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network An egg timer message is produced informing you that the report is being created Ej Desktop my Documents P My Computer amp Jmy Network Places File name Save as type TusReport PDF file pdf v TUS Report PDF creation is in progress When the report is created a message is produced informing the report has been success fully created and shows the path location to where the file is now saved Print TUS Repor
423. of the unit The 2 way CJC sensor should remain fitted in the central 2 way header The Minitrend GR can have two analogue input cards fitted giving up to 16 input channels 2 x 8 channel cards The slot positions are A amp B these are identified on the rear panel on the back of the unit Either slot can be used it is recommended that slot A is used if only one card is fitted The Multitrend GR can have up to 6 analogue input cards fitted up to 48 input channels The slot positions A B C D E or F these are identified on the rear panel PC boards are fitted in order slot A starts from the top The eZtrend GR can use this card as an additional Analogue Input card fitted in Slot B providing up to 6 more channels This card would be used after using the 3 or 6 channel standard eZtrend GR Analogue Input card which is fitted in Slot A see eZtrend GR An alogue Input Standard card on page 32 The DR Graphic Recorders can have two analogue input cards fitted giving up to 16 input channels 2 x 8 channel cards The slot positions are A amp B these are identified on the IO card chassis inside the unit Either slot can be used it is recommended that slot A is used if only one card is fitted Ensure to connect the jumpers on DR Graphic backplane card as per DR Graphic Cards Selection Jumper Table on page 27 before installing the Al cards See eZtrend GR An alogue Input Standard card on page 32 To fit this option card into the
424. og box will appear The recorder enters a default password when a user is added so select Yes to change it Default Password minimum length is 6 characters requires a minimum of 5 alpha char acters Allows the use of symbols and numeric characters no spaces Default Password maximum length is 20 characters 4 Enter your new password then repeat to confirm 5 The password dialog will appear confirming the change has been successful 6 You have now completed creating an Administrator You can now enter the password system to check and reset the default Policies eg Pass word Expiry Time Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Policy Refer to the Password section in the User manual for more information User Name Description User names are case dependent however duplicate user names will not be allowed even if case does not match The user name and password cannot be the same Minimum Access Level If an end user has password enabled and starts a batch the Operator and Technician levels can log in enter the setup area make changes to the setup but when they try to finish and commit it will come back with a message that says they do not have a high enough access level to perform that function Once the batch is stopped the operator and technician level can login to the setup area and make changes When the batch is running all users with access levels higher than operator and technician can enter setup make c
425. oit than 353 Processor Board 1 see 353 Brightness Sereen SAVED oruca eise dua alae 145 CE MaTk eteteteeree im ete een dS CJC Calibration CJC Connectors Cables Calibrate Screen Calibration AI Calibration 2n Appendix H s sssssessessessessessesresseseeseeseeseeseesresresresee CIC Calibration esee cene Maintenance Sensor Compensation eee User Calibration sss 132 Calibration Input Range 134 Card Positions and Channel numbers 71 Card and Slot Positions s 25 Change Chart Speed Event Effects e eee eme meon 125 Change Log Speed Alarms 89 Change Passwords aab oecteneiinnida 167 Channel Mapping Map DUttON 1n eec eee riter eri 177 Parent Pens 5 2 5 nne deret 179 Channel Mapping Objects 178 450 Channel Mapping Widgets Characterisation Tables sss Chart Control Event Effects 124 Chart Controls Byen zs rer ne eder HIER eee 272 Realtime 5 e umeteeveheabane e elei 271 Chart Speeds asesinato t tr ii 235 Char accennare ERE 144 Clean Screen o 179 Cleaning the Recorder 301 Clear All Messages Event Effects eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenetenttnntnnnen Client Server Network Commit Configuration Commit Later Configuration Comms Data Logging and Transfer Getting connected IP Address is Hubs or Switches Internet Securit
426. om a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously Please be aware that continuous mode will repeat continuously until a corresponding stop event is triggered for that sound Also like ring tones the sounds themselves can be replaced on the recorder with custom sounds To update the sounds see Update Sounds on page 173 Display Alert Display alert as an event effect this feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker Select Message Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 127 Select the Message Type as User Defined to enter your own text For more information on the Alert system and how to customise it see Error Alert on page 129 Batch Batch controls can be used as the effect of an event occurring An event cause must be set up so that the effect of the event is to Start Stop or Pause a batch Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens Up to 32 Pens in any single batch group See Groups on page 142 Reports A report can be created as an effect of an event Reports can be generated on a periodical basis using event system to show daily weeks monthly totals max mins avera
427. om this window three additional buttons become active Add Channel selection select each channel for logging Add all Channels for logging and Clear Channel selection 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server Add Channels for Logging As each channel is selected or all channels depending on the button selected the Logging Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each channel individually or all channels If all channels are added the next box will ask how often you want these channels to be logged log rate this can be a sample every second to one sample every 24 hours This selection will apply to all channels If channels are added one at a time using the Add Channel Selection button the same log rate box comes up but a different log rate can be set for each channel When all the required channels have been added click OK When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom window click on Ap ply to enable the channels to log Once the channels are in the Channels logging to selected database window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active The Edit button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to be logged to the database using Trendbus Not available for GR recorders Summary of Logging Changes If any chang
428. omplete solution es pecially in conjunction with the thermocouple usage tracking facility see Thermocouple Usage Tracking AMS2750 on page 390 Note Abbreviated terms used in this document TUS Temperature Uniformity Survey AMS2750 Aerospace Material Specification SAT System Accuracy Test The abbreviation will be used throughout this document AMS2750 Credit Option Main Menu select Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Options AMS2750 Process Mode is available as a credit option this allows the specification of the AMS2750 modes To activate credit options see Options on page 196 AMS2750 Process Mode requires 5 credits to be enabled If more credits are required please contact Honeywell see back page for contact details TC DEAN Pwd Net Net Sync Extra Pens 0 0 a Joo a A AMS2750 Process option enables the AMS2750 process mode and thermocouple usage tracking This option is available for theMultitrend GR Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic recorders 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode Scroll down the menu and select AMS2750 Process AMS2750 Process Menu Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens Available on the Multitrend GR Minitrend GR eZtrend GR and DR Graphic recorders A dedicated status screen is available for the process mode based on a group this displays t
429. on page 101 TCP IP Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol for communication between computers recorders and other devices Automatic DNS Names The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the re corder This allows you to locate the recorder for browsing if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol TCP IP Settings Static IP Toggle On and Off With this enabled the IP address will be the same every time the recorder is powered up With this feature Off the recorder s IP address is cre ated dynamically using a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server With this feature On the IP address can be fixed by entering a known available IP address Preceding 0 should not be added when entering a Decimal Static IP address for example 192 168 015 019 must be entered as 192 168 15 19 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK IP Address Available when Static IP is On This is an identification address for com munications between two devices The IP Address identifies a specific recorder Please see Entering IP address details on page 95 Sub Net Mask Available when Static IP is On Acts as a filter when identifying an IP address Please see Entering IP address details on page 95 Gateway Available when
430. on page 301 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 145 Tabular Display Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Tabular Display CI Screen Setup Screen Saver Charts Brightness WIENER MET Update Method Periodic or Event Update Period Configuration of periodic display can be set from 10 seconds default per update to 86400 secs or 1440 minutes 1 day per update this will show a new line of data readings at this elapsed time period Alignment an align configuration would be provided to align the tabular display to the nearest minute or hour Tabular Screen Main Menu Screen Edit Screens or Main Menu Configure Layout Edit Screens Name o Standard Screen 5 Enabled Chart DPMs and Scales E oem AMS2750 Process ww 146 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK A Tabular screen will display tabular readings in lines from top to bottom of the screen with the latest readings at the top of the screen The template will auto size for Minitrend eZtrend and Multitrend recorders allowing 6 pen values per line for a Minitrend and eZtrend and 12 pen values per line for an Multi trend Spacing will be fixed so that there will always be room for 6 and 12 per line on default Screens custom screens can be created to display more Up to 32 pens can be configured to be displayed on the tabular display screen as with other canned screens An Event Effect can be
431. on that can be activated using the credit system Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph An Event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm Batch The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch enhances the management of data collected in a non continuous process known as batch processing used in thermal treatment sterilisation food processing and chemical reactions Concurrent batch mode is now available where each batch is associated to a group of pens Other features include Batch logging control Automated batch counters and Event driven batch control Batch feature for the GR Series has been enhanced to have all the data entry on a single screen Batch Wizard is still available The Single Screen Batch allows you to view and enter all the batch details on a single screen The batch fields viz Batch Name User Id Lot Number Description and Comment are available for viewing and entering details on a single page which is unlike the batch wiz ard where you navigate each page to enter details of subsequent fields The Lot number is unique for each batch on a recorder and user can enter the Lot number f
432. on the sensor Tolerance for these input types includes that of the external shunt resistors 0 1 tolerance Reference Accuracy can be improved to 0 4 C 0 7 F using the single point compensation calibration not available on the eZtrend GR Including all Field Cal values Temperature Stability Interpreted as 96 of Full Span per deg C change in ambient from Reference condition Specification Options Pulse Input optional not available on the eZtrend GR 4 isolated inputs per board frequency 1Hz to 25kHz updated once per sec Input Low 1V High gt 4V to 50V or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit Alarm Outputs optional Programmable alarm set points 6 per pen can be configured to activate up to 8 outputs for DR Graphic recorders 16 outputs for the Minitrend QX and 48 outputs for the Multitrend GR Update rate 200 ms for all alarms Number Type 4or8relay contacts SPDT 3A 240VAC 3A 24VAC DC 0 2A 240VDC non inductive internally suppressed 8l Oor 16 I O SPNO 1A 24VDC non inductive internally suppressed 16 O not available for the eZtrend GR Activation Fully programmable internal alarm levels Assignable to any relay or discrete output Analogue Outputs Re transmission Outputs optional not available for the eZtrend GR 2 or 4 re transmission outputs available for the DR Graphic Minitrend GR Recorder and 2 4 6 or 8 re transmission
433. onnections eee DC SAC Power sineira a etes Digital IO Card Connections lure ees Installation Category Pulse Input Card oo SPNCG Relay inane cnornanenee dessen ned Signal WINNE tnter tieng Transmitter Power Supply Card 37 27 1777 Seen eae nee Rees eter a eer on eon ATT 106 Event Effects aisisauacsisaidausatsiiina nice 122 Email Alarm RT 89 Embedded Process Values 119 Eyents MEDU 52i dene theme aS 119 Enable Hot Button ss 160 Ending the Survey asit 416 Enter Replay Screen Eyent Effects 51 nente bcd eet 125 ELO ANE io E URBES 129 Error Messages isss 363 Ethernet Connections eode narra ttr te msi ceste Reat POt inae iepenen eite E nies Ethernet Appendix E Event Causes sussies AMS2750 Timer seen Alarm ween Batch Counters 452 Digital Input sriain renino sr ais Hot Button af Max Mins Reset Scheduled Event Causes SYSE ise irte TC Burn Out 1 un TUS Starts cicer nter tinet man Gere rie ERES TUS SIOP xxdtitesteneriteep Ehe dE Totaliser sse m User Action ss Event Chart Controls EVER Effects ca ice de dde Alarm Acknowledge m Backlight is rdg Change Chart Speed sss Chart Control s Clear All Messages COMETS M EEEn EESE Delayed Event 5 hiccssstesessselads ceeisniecsercossnstatecnasters
434. ons Security Group or user names ffi CREATOR OWNER et Everyone amp Gulhane Sw ffi SYSTEM efi Users IEBZDTCSJ52BS Users phil E505040 PACRIM1 ds honeywell com v Add Remove Permissions for Gulhane Swapnil Allow Deny Full Control Modify Read amp Execute List Folder Contents KI RI ISI EI ESI ES Hum Read Write oO For special permissions or for advanced settings click Advanced Advanced Cancel Apply If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Network Admin require ments 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 99 100 Load Certificates Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Load Certificates The Secure Comms certificate has already been uploaded into the recorder before leaving the factory This button is only to be used if the certificate should need to be reloaded with assistance For any queries regarding certificates please see back page for contact details Secure Communications A Secure Comms certificate is required to host a secure web service Secure Comms is a Credit Option See Credits on page 131 The Secure Comms protocol uses WSD and can be used to transfer data to and from a recorder recorder A Secure Comms certificate will be required for each recorder WSD Web Services on Devices WSD is a web service that can run on devices and conforms to the Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS WSD web service can
435. ons require Technician access Permission Area 15 Max Min Menu No Login required Reset Max Min Reset Max and Reset Min buttons require Technician access Permission Area 16 View requires No Login Permission Area 4 View requires No Login Permission Area 6 Process Counters Menu No Login required User Variables Operator access Permission Area 41 Reset button for all Counters require Technician access Permission Area 14 UVn User Variables J Modify and View buttons View requires No Login Permission Area 7 Script Timers Operator access Permission Area 47 Reports Operator access Permission Area 45 Run and View Archive reports Reset All Engineer access Permission area 46 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 5 9 Default password access from the General Menu General Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 20 General Identit Error Alert ae intel Ident Error Alert and Factory require Engineer access Permission Area 28 Batch requires Supervisor access Permis sion Area 22 Printer requires Supervisor access Permis sion Area 21 Groups require Supervisor access Permis sion Area 26 d Factory a Rar Credits FW Upgrade RA R E i Demo Traces Localisation _ Finish Factory menu requires Engineer ac cess All of the factor
436. or All messages can be viewed The number of new messages to view are displayed on each button as a number in brackets after the label Messages Alarms 28 E Security Message Types All Select this to view a list of All types of messages The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages Alarms This is a list of active alarms that have occurred The screen will display the Type of alarm the Time and Date that the activity occurred and Message details of the activity System This will list a history of system messages The screen will display the Type of messages and warnings and errors that have been generated by the unit The screen will also display the Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Diagnostics Examine a complete list of the recorder s functionality and processes since it was last powered up The screen will display Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Security Audit trail of entries made to secure areas such as Password setup includ ing Log on Log off what area has been accessed time date and the user name Users These are messages that have been entered by the user by entering a Mark on Chart The screen will display the Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Printing Screens All the Messages screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first
437. or more can be achieved saving valuable memory Security tag wire seal provision provides added security to seal the front door and rear when using optional rear cover to prevent undetected entry to these areas of the recorder USB Ports USB 2 0 Front and rear USB host ports for data and setup transfers or remote screen through these ports Attach external devices keyboard or mouse Replay with Zoom Select replay mode and zoom in on a specific area on the screen The data can easily be replayed at the recorder with the ability to zoom The touch screen makes it fast to review and analyse historical data A Jump function allows you to go from the alarm list directly to the trend showing the occurrence of the alarm Hide pens function allows you to display only the pens required for analysis Print Support Network printing from status message and replay screens Plus screen capture facility of process screens instantly using a basic USB standard PCL3 Printer Command Language printer 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Options Hardware Alarm amp Digital IO Cards 4 or 8 outputs relay contacts SPCO 240V 8 Digital I O or 16 Digital I O SPNO 24VDC 16 Digital I O not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Programmable alarm set points can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the Minitrend GR 8 outputs for the eZtrend GR and DR Graphic recorders and 48 outputs for the Mult
438. order type trying to be used on Messages Recorder now operating in N A N A Notification that the recorder is now operating in daylight saving System Status and daylight saving time mode Messages Recorder now operating in N A N A Notification that the recorder is now operating in standard time System Status and standard time mode Messages Setup error N A N A An unrecoverable error was found in the recorder setup file System Status and Messages Reset Passwords N A N A The passwords held in the recorder have been deleted This user is not permitted to N A N A The user is not allowed to log on because it is outside of their log in at this time time allocation You must have at least one N A N A There must be at least one administrator user when passwords top level user in the system are enabled if passwords are enabled Reset password data to fac N A N A A prompt to tell the user that resetting the passwords to the fac tory default This will invoke tory default will automatically cause the recorder to restart a recorder restart Login Failed N A N A General fail message specific cause has already been identified previously Login has failed Error N A N A General fail message specific cause could not be identified Unknown Policy Failed Password N A N A Password system has failed to start up correctly because of a configuration unsuccessful problem with the configuration This account needs to be N A N A This account must be reset by someone with ad
439. ormal FTP protocol is an unsecure protocol See Secure Communica tions on page 100 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 109 110 Peers The Peer services communication function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network containing other GR Series recorders This means that multiple recorders will be able to discover other recorders on the same local network in order to share data be tween them For example basic unit information such as firmware version recorder name and network identity This will be used mainly with the Trend Server software to allow dis covery of recorders in order to transfer data via FTP or Modbus Enabled tick to enable Set Number Default to set 1 this should not have to be changed unless a lot of recorders are being used on the same network Start Port Default port number 8955 End Port Default port number 8970 The port numbers have been specially selected for this type of network communications It is recommended that the ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT net work administrator If this is changed on the recorder it must also be changed on all other recorders TrendServer and Comms Server If you experience and security issues using peers see Internet Security Settings on page 277 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Events Counters Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Events See Events Menu on page 111
440. ort will not occur 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 185 186 amp jDevice Selection ag SD Card USB 1 Free 82 6 MB Free 195 5 Size 122 0 MB MB Size 24 2 MB SExport to USB 1 P New All Required Required Space Space 455 KB 54 MB Device Selection If the Device Selection buttons are greyed out you will need to insert a SD card or USB key into the port or select Network Share folder NAS After a few seconds the button becomes active SD card is available as a credit option for the eZtrend GR USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder If the recorder is powered off and on again the USB keys will have to be refitted in order to know which is 1 and which is 2 Export busy light When data is about to be exported to a device the transfer busy light starts flashing The flashing LED is a warning that the recorder is about to export to media DO NOT remove the media whilst the LED is flashing After a few seconds the flashing LED goes to Full On LED Whilst the LED is fully on data is being written to the media DO NOT remove the media whilst the LED is on When the transfer is complete the LED goes off and the media may now be removed 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Messages Menu Main Menu Messages The messages screen will display message from many different areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories
441. ostics Failed writing Al ADC values in TurnRTCurrOff command Messages An error has occurred during N A N A An error has occurred during factory or user calibration Diagnostics calibration Messages Unable to return all or part of N A N A Some or all of the calibration data was corrupt so none could be Diagnostics cal may be corrupt returned Messages Error during I O board star N A N A An error occurred during I O card startup Diagnostics tup Messages The reply message larger N A N A The I O card reply was longer than allowed and so overflowed Diagnostics than buffer the buffer Messages Unable to read configuration 0 3 3 General error one or more values could not be read from the Diagnostics EEPROM Error reading long value from EEPROM Messages Unable to read configuration 1 3 3 The stored Al configuration could not be read on power up Diagnostics Error reading Al config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to read configuration 2 3 3 The stored AO configuration could not be read on power up Diagnostics Error reading AO config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to read configuration 3 3 3 The stored digital pulse configuration could not be read on Diagnostics power up Error reading DIG config from EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to write configuration 0 3 3 The default board configuration could not be written on power Diagnostics up Error writing Board Setup to EEPROM on power up Messages Unable to write configuration
442. otalise pen to trigger this event The upper limit for the totaliser count is can be selected to prevent an inaccuracy in the calculation above this upper limit Totalizer rollover is also selecatble The Totaliser Rollover occurs automatically once the count reaches the accuracy limit and totaliser starts counting from zero If the user fails to configure the event totaliser it will auto reset The Rollover cause gets triggered each time the totaliser rollover occurs above the accuracy limit Digital Inputs Set to cause an event when a Digital Input is turned On Off or has a State change Select the Digital to trigger this event TC Burn Out Select which analogue input has a thermocouple on that will trigger this event when it goes into a burnout state Scheduled See Scheduled Events on page 116 User Counters See User Counters on page 117 MaxMins Reset A manual reset of the Max Min values by the user can be used as a cause to then trigger an effect Max Min values can be reset in the process menu see Max Min on page 190 System An occurrence in the system can be used as a cause to trigger an event effect System occurrences include Power On Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low and FTP Memory Low The system monitors the memory storage levels and triggers the alert when the low level set is reached To set the memory low level go to the Edit Recording menu go to Storage Alarm on page 150
443. ount icon it will show the current status for the batch related to that group The message list status bar will also show the Batch name state and group name in rotation with the date time display An extra button is now available within the message button on the status bar to show the current status of the batches for all groups 140 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 2 fe fa Group3 Me B Aay OF 15 14 01 2 1 Batches Detail Mark Msg Exit Select Options for Group 3 May Note on non batch screens the message list icon no longer shows the batch state as there are potentially 6 batches running in different states Printer Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Printer The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 131 The screens that currently can be printed are all Status screens Mes sage lists Process screens and Replay screens y The printer network information should be entered prior to printing see Network Admin on page 98 If the information is not entered in the Network Admin menu a dialog box will appear prompting you to enter Username Password and Domain Entering this information into the dialog will not populate the Network Admin menu It is recommended that you fill in this information into the Network Admin menu as it will not be affected by Firmware up grades in the recorder Edit Setup General Allow Printing Y
444. oup Batch Wizard v m erem nom A General Batch Properties Pause Chart Finish Enable this if you require the chart to be paused at the end of the batch The chart will restart when another batch is started for that group Start Log Start Enable this if you require logging to start when the batch starts Batch logging control Pen logging can be controlled by batch start and stop the stop and start logging can be independently controlled so a batch could start the pens log ging but choose not to stop them logging when the batch stops or start logging inde pendently of a batch but have all pens stop logging when a batch stops Only pens within the group of the associated batch will be controlled 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Stop Log Finish Enable this if you require logging to stop when the batch ends See Start Log 9 Start for details Allow Direct Input Enable this to allow the Batch control properties listed below to be edited directly from the batch control screen A barcode reader can be plugged into the front of the recorder and the barcodes scanned in directly NOTICE List driven data fields The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch The names can be overridden to suite the end user application all fields are now 69 character long with the exception of the User ID which is 20 A pre defined list of up to 30 items can be configured to allow users to select inp
445. our current process screen the one you ve just left This will affect how far you can zoom in and out For example if you are using the Medium chart speed what ever it may be set to the screen can zoom in 5 more times to see detail over a shorter time span and can zoom out a further 4 times to view more data over a longer period of time The amount of data displayed on the replay screen is dependant on what chart speed is se lected and how many pens are enabled in the recorder Chart Logged data Slider An adjustable slider shows how much memory is allocated to Chart data and how much memory is allocated to Logged data The user can adjust the slider which will display how long it will take to fill the memory at the current chart speed before the data will start to be recycled See Storage Bias on page 149 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK How Replay works There are three separate queues of data represented by the three different chart speeds As you zoom in and out it switches between these different queues These queues are not all the same length so for example The fast speed at 600mm hr means to cover 24 hours takes approx 30Mbytes for 8 pens The medium speed at 20mm hr means that to cover 24 hours takes 1Mbyte 1 30 of fast The Slow speed at 1mm hr means that to cover 24 hours takes 50Kbyte 1 20 of Medium The result of this is that the slow speed will tend to give you much more elapsed time history but at
446. out assigning all the slaves required You may not know the names of the recorders for the password group at that time When the password group is established each recorder you want to add to the password group can be visited and added as a slave to the password group 15 A login failure on any recorder in a password group after 3 tries or whatever is set up in the Master will lock that user from all recorders in that password group Contact your Password Administrator to reset the password from the master recorder only 16 Slave recorders have limited access to the Password Net Sync system a user pass word can be changed and sent out to update all the other recorders Slaves can also leave a group or promote themselves to Master All the password Admin configuration must be executed through the Master recorder 17 Maximum slaves in any one password group are 31 18 Maximum size of any peer to peers network is 32 recorders 19 Stand alone recorders that already contain a password configuration will have their password configuration overwritten when they become part of a password group 20 A new Master can be elected from any Slave recorder in the password group by going to the Type field in the Pwd NetSync dialog that is available from the Menu gt Config ure Passwords menu and selecting Master Any existing Master will automatically be relegated to a Slave and if the current password group Master was down at the time then
447. outage has been less than 20 minutes a power outage of more than 20 minutes automatically stops the TUS when power is re applied If power is lost during TUS and is less than 20 minutes then the TUS automatically resumes the data is marked that power was lost and the duration for which it was lost If power is lost during TUS and TUS is resumed any uncompleted soak is reset 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Passwords AMS2750 Passwords AMS2750 The GR Series recorders provides full password system to comply with 21CFR Part 11 50 Users with unique ID amp Password time outs expiry of passwords password definitions and audit trail information Extended Security and Password Capabilities Provides security to recorder functions audit trail of actions Password expiration reuse and password customisation 21CFR Part 11 compliant For full information on the password system and setup Section 5 Security on page 207 When passwords are enabled in the recorder these are the areas that are password protect ed TUS Screen The TUS screen can be password protected if passwords are enabled in the recorder to prevent unauthorized individuals from starting the TUS The TUS screen provides controls for the operator that allows them to take some actions relative to the actual data collection process Configuration and Start Stop buttons on the TUS screen The Configure TUS and Start Stop buttons are only available when a
448. over writing non exported data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set Export Alarm Where external media capacity will run out within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee Media Missing External media is missing so a scheduled export is not possi ble FTP Memory Low Display when internal memory is going to start overwriting non FTP d data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee CJC Missing CJC Sensor is not plugged into Al Card ee TC Burnout A TC burnout has been detected Storage Alarm Levels need to be set as to when the system is alerted that the three differ ent memory areas as low This is done in the Edit Recording menu go to Storage Alarm on page 150 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 129 Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 Logged data is being lost en 4 6 3e 01 Pen 5 hes Pen 6 48 98 Pen 7 Border Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message border col our Background Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message back ground colour Auto Clear When Auto clear is switched on the recorder will automatically detect if something has been done to rectify the problem and the message will disappear Eg if the removable external storage media being used for a scheduled export is full and is replaced with media that has sufficient memory available then
449. p 0001 0005 0666 0354 so Only recorders with Pwd NetSync enabled will be displayed here XS 100018 XS 100062 XS 123456 XS 100009 0023 Q063 0301 Recorders in red do not belong to any password group and are availa ble to be added to a group X5 100005 X5 100255 UK225W JLP 0270 0711 0540 Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for X5 123412 K5 100075 password net sync and that already EM En belong to this password group will be displayed in green 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 171 Pwd Net Sync Messages Certain selections may cause the recorder to display specific messages when an entry or action has been executed Here are some examples of some messages that may appear during Pwd Net Sync setup Examples of messages that may appear during Password NetSync set up Pwd NetSync Pwd NetSync Type Type Change of Type Warning Update Failure The type has been changed to standalone Are you sure you wish to Could not leave group please try continue again later None This warns you that you are changing This may occur if someone is accessing the recorder Type in the Group the same group of recorders Slave Master or Stand Alone Pwd NetSync Type Pwd NetSync Info The password system will now rescan F the network for available recorders Update Successful The password system was su
450. pens have been set up this can be used to reset the max min values for particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 84 By Pen Select this to reset max min values for individual pens Totals Main Menu gt Process gt Totals Select a button to Start Stop Reset and View Totals These can be controlled by the fol lowing categories 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK All Select this to start stop or reset all Totals By Group If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to start stop or reset particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 84 By Pen Select this to start stop or reset individual pens View Use the View button to just display the Totals values for each totalising pen Counters Process Main Menu Process Counters T Counters Alarm Counters 5748 PFF tt indies Digital Input Relay Output Finish Select the Counters button to View and Reset counters Counters have been split into the following types Alarm Counters Reset will give you the option of resetting All alarms by pen Groups or by individual Pens View will display all Pens with active alarms Alarms will be counted providing they are enabled The count will increase when the pen goes into an alarm state and increase again when the pen goes out of an alarm state User Counters Reset All will do exactly that reset all of the User Counters Reset
451. ping for custom screens The Replay screen is used to view previous data and has a List button to change the screen currently being displayed There is also a Clean Screen facility and should you require to re Calibrate your touch screen there is a Calibrate function and a Touch Test feature hl al Replay E Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Test Finish Edit Screen Properties Main Menu Screen Edit For Standard Screens the menus are the same as Edit Layout on page 157 Edit Toolbar For Custom Screens Not available on the eZtrend GR Select the Edit button whilst displaying a Custom Screen Layout from Screen Designer will take you to your current process screen and displays the Edit toolbar at the top of the Screen wey la Gia FE g gp wo Map 5napX Expert Exit 20Jul06 14 11 03 p oc EU In Edit mode you can select items on the screen and assign channel pen information to them and move and resize certain items on the screen Expert Non Expert button All process screen are made up from items called Widgets and Objects A widget is a con tainer for one or many objects Objects display data in graphical forms such as Bar Scale DPM Text The Expert button toggles to Non Expert mode displayed with a red cross Ex pert mode allows objects to be selected and Non Expert allows widgets to be selected 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK To select a widget the Expert button must be disabled di
452. play Toolbar The Replay toolbar will appear at the bottom of the screen Action See Action Toolbar on page 230 Rev This is used to scroll back through previous data Touch once to scroll back in incre ments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data Fwd This is to scroll forwards on the chart Touch once to scroll back in increments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data n Zoom In on the chart being displayed Place the chart cursor at the point you wish to zoom in to Zooming In will magnify the chart to show greater detail around the cursor posi tion 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 229 Out Zoom Out on the chart being displayed Place the cursor at the point you wish to zoom out from Zooming Out will decrease the chart to show a larger time span around the cursor position Cursor Chart In Cursor mode the cursor bar can be moved along the chart showing the max min pen readings as they change and are displayed on the DPMs This can be done by touching the line cursor on the screen and dragging it to either side In Chart mode the chart can be moved along behind the cursor bar The DPMs will update reflecting the max and min readings at the position of the cursor bar This can be done by touching the chart on the screen and dragging it to either side or by using a mouse See Figure 6 3 on page 229 Speed set a Fast Medium or Slow chart speed in replay mode S
453. point where all TC s are stable and lie within the SP1 Tolerance limits Timer t3 starts at this point Time t3 the dwell time SP1 Must be at least 30 minutes within SP1 tolerance limits Value mxs1 Maximum temperature value during the SP1 dwell period Value mis1 Minimum temperature value during the SP1 dwell period Time t4 the ramp time for the second ramp Time t5 time between first TC entering Dwell zone and Last TC entering Dwell Zone for setpoint 2 SP2 Value mxo2 Maximum temperature overshoot recorded prior to P2 The value for mxo1 in this example would be the value of the TC at P1 as there is no measured over shoot Point P2 The point where all TC s are stable and lie within the SP2 Tolerance limits Value mxs2 Maximum temperature value during the SP2 dwell period 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 409 410 TUS mode Start a Survey The start TUS button will produce the configuration confirmation wizard see Configure Confirmation Wizard on page 403 At the end of the wizard the Start TUS dialog appears This allows you to enter 150 charac ters of free format notes using the SIP or a keyboard if attached which is included in the TUS data file and the report generated by the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool You can select cancel to return to the process screen but any notes that were entered will be lost When a TUS is running you will not be allowed to enter configuration i e
454. port is for a Temperature Uniformity Survey that can only be used if this option is enabled in the credits menu This type of TUS report is condensed and should not be used as the final report to comply with AMS2750 specifications The full report for a TUS should be generated using the TUS procedure following Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 Selection Type This will be set to Group if Batch is selected for the Style select which group of pens the report will be run on If the Style is set to Normal the following options will be available Multiple Pens This allows you to select which pens to run a report on including Total iser pens Pen Group Allows you to select which group of pens to run a report on All Pens This will run a report on all the currently enabled pens Group only available when Pen Group is selected for Selection Type Select the Pen Group you wish to run a report on from the available groups list To have groups of pens available in this list individual pens must be allocated to a group see Group in the Pens Menu on page 84 Use Group to produce an AMS2750 summary report 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 153 154 Current Pen Value Select whether to include the Current Pen Values of enabled pens in your report Max Mins Select this to include the Maximum and Minimum values of each selected pen All pens or Group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Select
455. previous menus and enables the user to jump back more than one menu at a time Menu path to previous menus Optio ade 100089890302109 Options 28 Credits in Use A grey arrows indicates a further sub menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 65 66 Help Help is available on all menu screens and is context sensitive from each screen The Help icon will reside either in the top right or bottom right on all menu screens All the Help files have a Home button that will take you to the Help System main index Navigating in the help does not stop the logging Main Menu Main Menu i M WE Select a button Configure Alarms Screen to take you to the next menu e m Recording Messages 102 Process A Configure Configure the recorder through the Setup Layout Passwords and Settings menus See Configure Menu on page 67 Alarms Acknowledge Alarms Alarm configuration and their associated condition and View the current alarm status See Alarms Menu on page 175 Screen The Screen Menu includes an Edit button to configure Pen Channel mapping Replay previous data Screen List to change the screen currently being displayed and Clean Screen facility There are Calibrate and Touch Test features to re calibrate the screen See Screen Menu on page 176 Batch The Batch function manages sections of data Batch markers are configured by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data
456. r pen For details see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 321 Scale Select Scale to go to a sub menu to set up the scale parameters See Scale Menu on page 85 Logging Select Logging to go to a sub menu to set up the logging configuration See Logging Menu on page 86 Alarms Select Alarms to go to a sub menu to set up the alarm profile See Alarms Menu on page 88 Totaliser Select Totaliser to go to a sub menu to set up the totaliser settings See Totaliser Menu on page 90 RAV This will display the Rolling Average for this pen The recorder takes an average of the number of samples entered For example a 1 hour rolling average made up of 1 minute averages it would be 60 seconds per sample with 60 samples and you can increase the time span accordingly so 1440 samples at 60 seconds per sample would give you a 24 hour rolling average made of 1 minute averages Enable the RAV function Enter the Number of Samples Then enter the Sample Interval or how often a reading is taken in seconds 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Prefill works as follows if you setup a 60 sample rolling average a 10 second samples that will create a 10 minute rolling average with each sample being accumulated as an average from the current recorder processing rate 10Hz say so each 10 second sam ple is added to a queue of 60 samples and each 10 seconds the new rolling average is calculated The prefill simply takes
457. r shows Max Min and temperature differences for the current survey setpoint and the lag time it took for the first and last TC to enter the soak mode It also provides a running record of the time that the recorder has been in the Stable mode The Stable mode is the actual time and reading taken to determine the uniformity of the furnace at this partic ular setpoint and is the temperature readings that get documented in the Survey Report Done Done Red or Green the setpoint survey step has completed minimum of 30 minutes and recorder indicates whether that survey setpoint was successful or not u x gt la Mall 0001 Multitrend SX 29 Aug 08 16 06 43 Menu Furnace Mame Furnace 1 Tol 0 600 00F Detect 10 0 1000 00F 10 0 NA NA 6 NA 14 20 00 14 23944908 23 Au 16h 135 Screen Temperature Uniformity Survey Running Time t Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 Model No QW 234 Y 45 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 45m 34s Stop TUS Instrument Type B Class 2 Condition Running Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual re Override O00F O 00F 0 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F TCO TCO TCO TCO 0 Mins Remove TC s Restart Soak 11100 00 14 40 00 14 50 00 15 00 00 15 10 00 15 20 00 15 40 00 16 00 00 2944908 23 Agg08 29
458. r time is held in the recording menu in the setup configuration under a separate button called pre trig ger Pre Trigger on page 151 The alarm rate for each pen will be used for the pre trigger rate The alarm rate must be set to less than 10 seconds per sample for pre triggering to operate Pre trigger will only operate when the logging is in continuous sample mode pre trig gering will not be available with fuzzy logging or Max Min Method Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select from a list of Methods Sample logs the last sampled reading Average logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log Max Min logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the last log Align Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select and enter a value from the list to align the logging at specified intervals This will hold the start of logging until the aligned time selected occurs based on the recorders real time clock Auto Fit Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off AutoFit ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the signal goes out of the tol erance set in Band 1 or Band 2 When displayed on a graph the input signal will auto matically fit to this last logged point This gives a better fit for stepped input changes 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 87 88 Band 1 Only available if the logging Type is set to
459. r to set up each channel profile Cards available are 2 types of Alarm Relay cards 4 Alarm Relay Output 8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 2 types of Digital IO cards 8 Digital Inputs or Outputs 16 Digital Inputs or Outputs Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Alarm Relay Card 4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 6 fixed outputs and 2 configurable Digital Input or output cards Digital IO Card There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs The Dig ital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The op erating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low 1V High gt 4 5V to 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit To view and log a channel selected as a Pulse input set up an extra pen with a Maths func tion of LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 321 For connection details see For connection details See Alarm Relay Channel Numbers on page 39 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 77 78 eS Fi tens ret TS RON Edit Setup Field I O Marm Digital ro H Menu path to current menu Digital I O 1 D1 Pulse Input Hz B The Digital IO screen Digital I O 2 D2 Input displays all the available Dotanos V Da Pusemout t P gt
460. r you wish to totalise eg T3 Pen 4 is now set to totalise the value of Pen 3 It may be necessary to set a larger scale for the totalising pen pen 4 as the totalising value may become larger than the pen scale of the pen being totalised pen 3 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Go to the recorder s process screen and select a screen showing DPMs The totalising pen pen 4 will display the totalising value of pen 3 Rest at 16M Accuracy table for totaliser count over 16 million Totaliser menu Reset at 16M disabled Table 4 2 Loss in Recorder Exponent Data Range Precision Accuracy Error 23 8388608 16777215 0 24 16777216 33554431 1 25 33554432 67108863 2 26 67108864 134217727 4 27 134217728 268435455 8 28 268435456 536870911 16 29 536870912 1073741823 32 30 1073741824 2147483648 64 31 2147483648 4294967296 128 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 93 94 Comms Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Comms Services See Comms Services Menu on page 101 TCP IP See TCP IP on page 94 Newtwork Admin See Network Admin on page 98 Load Certificates See Secure Communications on page 100 Load Certificates Finish Services Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers See Comms Services Menu
461. rder s web page type the device s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet Explorer If Microsoft WINS system Windows Internet Name Service is avail able then the device name can be used to search for the device web page To find your re corder IP address see TCP IP on page 94 The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol On recorders with password security enabled further login will be required to access Full Re mote Control of the recorder from the web page and to enable a keyboard and mouse For users with Password functionality enabled Login is required Enter your User name and Password in the box to gain access to the recorder web page Note When using remote viewing with password control a user s password can be viewed at the recorder Care is required to prevent exposing a user s password during the remote entry of the password For Users without Password security just choose a language option to access the web page Select Remote Viewer to enable a desktop user interface This will allow you to view and control your recorder in realtime NOTE When using the remote control function for the recorder if you need to enter pass word in the recorder it is recommended that you use the external keyboard and
462. re Options on page 241 It is recommended to save Screen Designer layouts directly from the software onto a SD card USB key or to a Network Share folder NAS This will contain all the files required for loading the layout into the recorder If the Screen Designer layout is saved to another loca tion before being transferred onto removable media ensure that both the bcf and lay files are copied over A warning message will appear if the bcf file is missing Loading a Template into a Recorder One or more Templates can be loaded into a recorder added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed To save a template in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu Configure Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Enter a new file name if required and press the Load button Go to Main Menu Configure Layout Edit and select Add Screen Go to the Template Type option and your template will be listed here Select either GR Series or X Series re corders and then the recorder type Minitrend QX GR Multitrend SX GR DR Graph ic Select your template and it will be added to a screen re name the screen as required To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens Loading a Layout
463. re build number Diagnostics firmware build number Messages Unable to determine the N A N A Unable to determine the firmware serial number Diagnostics firmware serial number Messages Unable to determine the N A N A Unable to determine the firmware revision number given when Diagnostics board s GUID first ATE tested Messages Unable to determine the life N A N A The life history is not available from card Diagnostics history Messages Failure writing output value 0 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output Diagnostics value Note that subsequent writes may succeed Problem writ Messages ing AO value detected first attempt to send failed Failure writing output value 1 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output value Diagnostics on the second occasion Note that subsequent writes may suc Messages ceed Problem writing AO value detected second attempt also failed Failure writing output value 2 1 1 There was an error setting the specified AO channel output value Diagnostics because the last selected channel was not deselected first Prob Messages lem writing AO value detected last channel wasn t deselected Failure writing output value 3 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics ChangeRange command Failed writing Al ADC values Messages Failure writing output value 4 1 1 Failed to set the identified Al channel correctly for acquisition in Diagnostics C
464. recipients a subject and an optional message body The message body may be omitted for very short messages or where the message is to be sent to a paging system The e mail subject may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail subjects The e mail message body may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail message blocks Event markers are restricted to 80 characters each The two e mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters each Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as used in the event markers When the recorder sends an e mail message that includes a message body the recorder name recorder number and the time date will be appended to the end of the message body text This is to allow easy identification of when the message was send and by which recorder Any e mail message is sent as an action within the recorder events system so anything that can be configured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an e mail message Any e mail message may be sent to up to 12 of the recipients If the e mail server supports named groups of e mail addresses an e mail message may be sent to a combination of e mail addresses and e mail group Mail Server Ethernet Recorder g LAN Local Area Network 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix F Fuzzy Logging What is Fuzzy Logging Fuzzy
465. recommended to load multiple installations on the same PC Load the CD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start If autorun does not commence follow these instructions goto My Computer select CD ROM drive select Launch exe Follow the instructions on the screen During installation you will be asked to select or confirm the following Which language variant where applicable Destination folder for the software A destination folder and file path will be designated but this can be changed if required by using the browse button Select which version of the application software to install This will be dependant on which version has been purchased TrendViewer TrendManag er Pro or TrendServer Pro Select to install Enter the code and organisation as supplied with each particular version of software The code can be found inside the CD case No code or organisation is required with TrendViewer NB This is an alpha numeric code and must be entered exactly in upper case Codes from other Honeywell software will not work each code is unique to the software supplied The TrendManager Suite may find it necessary to automatically upgrade certain applica tions within your PC to complete installation The setup will require a re start re start your computer to complete installation Upgrades There are three software packages available TrendViewer TrendManager Pro Suite and TrendServer If your software
466. rend GR recorder is intended to operate as a stand alone piece of test equipment A total of 40 sensors can be monitored and the data incorporated into a single report by the Multitrend GR recorder These are consecutive pens from 1 to 40 on a 9 sensors system this assumes the pens are 1 to 9 and map directly to analogue inputs 1 to 9 The probing method for a TUS survey AMS2750 3 5 15 1 is supported using MODBUS master within the DR Graphic amp Multitrend GR recorder performing the TUS retrieving the additional information via MODBUS from compatible controller recorder instruments TUS mode is selectable using a specific option in the credits system 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode AMS2750 TUS Credit Option Main Menu select Configure Setup Edit General Factory Credits Options AMS2750 TUS Mode is available as a credit option this allows the specification of the AMS2750 modes To activate credit options Options on page 196 AMS2750 TUS Mode requires 10 credits to be enabled If more credits are required please contact Honeywell see back page for contact details Edit Setup Tm TREE X n en CE unum m C AMs2750 rus 10 w AMS2750 TUS option enables the recorder to carry out TUS this also enables the thermo couple usage tracking TUS is ONLY available on the DR Graphic amp Multitrend GR re corder and is not provided on the Minitrend GR and e
467. ress for network communications from a DHCP server Mod bus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders RS485 Modbus the RS485 connection allows process data to be transferred to other devices or to record data received in MODBUS RTU protocol slave mode only Modbus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders RS485 not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The recorder can be synchronised over the eth ernet network via a SNTP client or synchronise other recorders via a Server Web Server with the recorder connected to a LAN all process variables alarm and mes sages can be viewed from an internet browser values are automatically refreshed Data Storage Internal Data Storage 1GB to 4GB of expandible internal non volatile flash memory is available for data storage and chart history replay of data on the display Internal memory Logging rate 1 sec Type Pens 1GB 2GB 4GB Minitrend GR 4 1000 days 2000 days 4000 days eZtrend GR 4 1000 days 2000 days DR Graphic recorders 4 1000 days 2000 days 4000 days Minitrend GR 8 500 days 1000 days 2000 days eZtrend GR 8 500 days 1000 days DR Graphic recorders 8 500 days 1000 days 2000 days Minitrend GR 16 250 days 500 days 1000 days Multitrend GR 16 250 days 500 days 1000 days DR Graphic recorders 16 250 days 500 days 1000 days Multitrend GR 32 62 days 155 days 310 day
468. rg elyt Voltage 3 0V Cell Type Typical Capacity Weight mAh 6032 230 mAh 3 gms Approx Percent age 96 of total weight Active Materials Maganese dioxide mnO 29 Propylen carbonate PC 4 3 1 2 Dimethoxiethan DME 2 1 Lithium metal Li 2 Carbon C 0 9 Lithium perchlorate LiCIO 0 3 Passive Materials Stainless steel 57 6 Plastic 3 8 Safety Guidelines Keep batteries out of the reach of children especially those batteries fitting within the limits of the truncated cylinder as defined in ISO DP 8124 2 2 In the case of ingestion of a cell or battery the person involved should seek medical assist ance promptly It is of extreme importance that batteries are inserted into equipment correctly with regard to polarity and Do not attempt to revive used batteries by heating charging or other means Do not dispose of batteries in fire Do not dismantle batteries Do not short circuit batteries Batteries should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be dis posed of with normal refuse 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 353 354 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps Modbus Memory Map Supplement Refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66 Rev S NOTE Some Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering 180
469. rget time date for the timers Upon reset a message is logged into the system message list This is password pro tected for tracking See Passwords AMS2750 on page 419 SAT interval timer The SAT timer is based on tables found in AMS2750 that are dependent on Furnace class Instrument type and if it is a parts or raw material furnace Instrument Cal Due In A countdown timer provides a countdown to the next instrument calibration This can be changed by selecting this button and changing the date using the on screen date selection This will reset the next instrument calibration date Instrument Cal Timer Reset Please enter the date for the next Instrument Cal Enter the new date to change it and use OK to confirm or Cancel to exit You may also enable disable this timer Instrument Cal date mm d v x 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Process mode The user can change the date and select OK this will reset the timer to countdown to the new date The button marked with the X will simply return the user to the process screen with the countdown timer unchanged The disabled button will set the timer to an Unused state by setting the time to 0 The timer will then be displayed as Unused with a grey button To re enable the button is pressed and a date entered and ok selected Control TC due A countdown timer provides a countdown to the next control thermocouple calibration This can be changed by
470. riggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being over loaded by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrespective of the CLRE x being called for that event Damping examples Example 1 if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1 damp A1 P1 3 will damp the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C any change over 3 degrees between readings will be damped but by a small amount Example 2 P5 damp A2 P5 A3 will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input A3 note the reference parameter P5 is always the same as the pen it is being used in this should always be the case Table 14 3 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description RHc rhe x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees C and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees C 9c RHf rhf x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees F and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees F Caf c2f x Converts a temperature in C to one in F F2c f2c x Converts a temperature in F to one in C Hi hi x y Returns the larger value of x amp y Hi4 hi4 x y x1 y1 Returns the larger value of x y x1 y1 Inside inside x y z Returns x if between y amp z otherwise returns 0 Lo
471. rms Pens All Messages Analogue In Menu ss Analogue Input Card CJC Connectors Channel Numbers Connection Details Current Input oo Diagnostics is iss Signal WING 5 oho entire Analogue Out Ment sssrin Analogue Output Card Channel Numbers Connection Details a Dia ghosts srera e etes Analogue Output Specifications Appearance s Appendix A Quality and Safety Appendix B Maths Expressions Appendix C Thermocouple Connections 337 Appendix D Alarms 45e 341 Appendix E Ethernet s 343 Appendix F Fuzzy Logging 345 Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 349 Appendix H Calibration Appendix I Battery Data Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps Appendix K Troubleshooting Appendix L AMS2750 Capabilities sss 377 Audit Trail AMS2720 Lis cuneos 417 449 B Backlight Event Effects Bach MS assente Barcodes for Batch ss Batch Event Causes eene Eyent Effects ninun annee preteen ts Batch Commands ees Batch Mark on Chart Batch Menu Barcodes for Batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch Setup Control Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart Batch process screens Batch Overview Battery Data Appendix I 353 Battery Safety est
472. rnace configuration within the setup and are as follows Name Name or tag used to identify this furnace 39 characters of Alphanumeric Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the furnace Model Number Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace 19 characters Alpha numeric Class Enter the Furnace class 1 to 6 numeric Mat Type Enter the type of material or load Parts or Raw material furnace Shape Furnace shape rectangular cylindrical or other Meas Units Furnace measurement units Metres millimetres feet or inches Height Furnace height dependent on shape Width Furnace width dependent on shape Depth Furnace depth dependent on shape Note these are the dimensions for the qualified working area Inst Type Instrument Type A to E Refer to AMS2750 section 3 3 1 1 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Into cycle at used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses When the furnace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set in the menu below this is a complete temperature cycle Eg Into cycle is set to 110 can go higher in use once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg Out of cycle is set to 90 the cycle is complete Out of cycle at Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to Stability Detect and setpoint menus Stability Detect Main Menu
473. rom the recorder This is irrespective of whether you are using Batch Wizard or Single Screen Batch to enter the batch details You can also set the above fields except Lot Number from a set of prede fined list Batches are controlled with command lines entered into the recorder these include Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Batch Markers are placed on to the recorder s chart and entered into the messages system for every batch command applied Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event A Counter Effect can be used to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters depending on hardware avail ability Other counters available are Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 53 Functions and Features Other Standard features CE Mark Conformity with 2006 95 EC Low Voltage and 2004 108 EC EMC Directive Soft Alarms 6 software alarms per pen are easily set up to display and record selected out of limit conditions These can be tied to the relay or digital outputs to activate the user s external equipment Common Relay Output A separate relay output at the rear of the unit can be set up as an alarm output Communications the recorder supports FTP Modbus TCP IP master and slave mode Web and E mail over Ethernet DHCP standard
474. ror that the I O card channel specified has failed to Diagnostics channel make a measurement or set the output Messages Calib vals not written prop 0 3 3 The calibration values written in factory or field calibration could Diagnostics erly in factory or field cal not be read Reading EEPROM cals failed so did attempted Messages default read CJC port error detected 0 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver OverRun error Messages CJC port error detected 1 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Framing error Messages CJC port error detected 2 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Parity error Messages CJC port error detected 3 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Receive Buffer Overflow error Messages CJC port error detected 4 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Noise error Messages CJC port error detected 5 1 1 Communications to the CJC failed subsequent retries may have Diagnostics succeeded CJC driver Idle error Messages Cannot enable ADC chip 0 4 4 The I O card internal and or external communications have failed Diagnostics to be initialized correctly Messages Failed to configure and enable SPI master Cannot enable ADC chip 1 4 4 F
475. ror writing to NV EEP 13 3 3 Board stats could not be persisted on pulse card Error writing to Diagnostics ROM PI Board Stats in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 14 3 3 The I O board serial number could not be saved Error writing Diagnostics ROM Board ID to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 15 3 3 The I O board calibration information could not be saved Error Diagnostics ROM writing Board Calibration to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 16 3 3 The I O board stats information could not be saved Diagnostics ROM Error writing Stats to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 17 3 3 The AO board calibration information could not be saved Error Diagnostics ROM writing AO Cal values to EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 18 3 3 The AO board calibration defaults could not be saved Error writ Diagnostics ROM ing defaults to AO cal history in EEPROM Messages Error writing to NV EEP 19 3 3 Could not write the initial resistance held for active burnout Error Diagnostics ROM writing Al loop resistance to EEPROM at start up Messages 368 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Error writing to NV EEP 20 3 3 Could not write the current resistance held for active burnout Diagnostics ROM Error writing Al Current loop resistance to EEPROM Messag
476. rt Restart Once the files for a pre trigger have been exported and all alarms on pre trigger enabled pens have cleared the pre trigger buffers are reset and the existing pre trigger information has been exported then the system returns to the acquiring state If a configuration change is performed then the pre trigger system will be restarted the user will be warned before committing that they will restart the pre trigger buffering if an export is pending they will also be asked to perform the export procedure or lose the existing pre trigger information Importing Once exported the import into TrendManager Pro can be performed from removable me dia or via FTP the imported information will show the pre trigger pens as overlapped data This will automatically be displayed utilising the TrendManager Pro overlapped pens fea ture to clearly show the pre trigger data See TrendManager Pro software manual Export Format Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Recording gt Export Format Export Format decides the format in which the logged data is to be exported to the client There are two options TV Encryption Scheme Exports the data as DAT files The client then uses the TrendManager Pro to analyze the data CSV format The CSV format exports all or new data based on the selected option in CSV format This data is can be exported to the client using USB or SD card The data is useful to the client who does not wi
477. rt has been generated you can save it in a location of your choice for easy retrieval You are able to save the completed SAT or TUS report in PDF format to a specified direc tory drive The reporting tool is currently only available in English Installation The Report Generation Tool is a stand alone application that is installed separately from the TrendManager Suitesoftware and requires a separate code to enable its use this will be supplied with the software The software is compatible with Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional Enterprise and Ul timate Edition Windows 8 and Windows Server 2008 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 421 If you have problems with this program and it worked correctly on an earlier version of Windows select the compatibility mode that Compatibility mode Run this program in compatibility mode for Windows XP Service Pack 2 Settings E Run in 256 colors E Run in 640 x 480 screen resolution E Disable visual themes E Disable desktop composition E Disable display scaling on high DP settings Privilege Level V Run this program as an administrator Show settings for all users Additional install Adobe Reader The AMS2750 Report Generation Tool generates files in PDF format that you can view and print on the same PC as the AMS2750 Report Generation Tool The installer shall prompt you to install a compatible version of Adobe Reader if it is not al
478. rts x COM1 x COM2 x COM3 x COM4 x coms x COM6 x COM7 x coma x9 Ethernet Database Servers 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices Communications ports Databases and Database Servers The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms serv er the database servers and the communications ports The display area s to the right will display details of any item selected in the left window Depending on what has been selected the right window will split in two to give logging information Items listed in the left window that have a sign against them contain other items click on the sign to reveal the list of items contained within The sign will change to a sign when all the items are displayed To close the list click on the sign Comms Server Toolbar Administration The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server it contains Shutdown Server From here the comms server can be shut down this will disconnect the comms server it will also shutdown the database servers at the same time Preferences The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is opened The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window this will display properties and values of a selected device Send Hecorder Events is an option that needs to be enabled to allow event data to be
479. rver are all registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 1 Safety Safety P3 SD SDHC and SDXC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD SD 3C LLC in the United States other countries or both For the purpose of this manual the and symbols will not follow their own trade mark names or registered trademark names in every instance Company names and Product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their individual owners The GR Series range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 2010 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Labo ratory Use and UL 61010 1 3rd Edition and CAN CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 12 as options If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired The GR Series range of instruments are compliant to the requirements for Class 1 Div 2 Hazardous Classified Locations Refer to the Model Selection Guide Symbols One or more of the following symbols may appear on the recorder labelling Table 1 2 Safety Symbols Symbol Meaning Caution refer to manual for instructions Caution risk of electric shock gt gt Direct Current Protective conductor terminal Earth ground terminal Static Electricity Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic
480. ry or Realtime buttons replace the Edit button when Standard Screen 1 a circular chart is selected for either data types when Standard Screen 2 using a DR Graphic recorder Standard Screen 4 y 55 amp 2 dA 9H Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Speed Exit cancel Screen Menu Bar e Print Instantly prints the screen you are displaying To set up your printer see Printer Menu on page 141 Every pixel is sent to the printer Save a screen shot of the cur rent displayed screen to external removable media Edit From a standard process screen this gives quick access to Screens Settings and Appearance View all available Screens and modify certain screen properties including Screen name Template Type Orientation and Pens being displayed See Edit Layout on page 157 for details Use Settings to set up screens for cycling Cycling screens will display specific screens for an allocated amount of time before switching to the next When the DR Graphic recorder has a circular chart selected the Edit button is replaced with History or Realtime buttons depending on the type of data being shown The Edit button is still available in circular mode from the Main menu Con figure gt Layout For Custom Screens this will enable the Edit tool bar go to the Edit Toolbar on page 176 This is for Pen Channel mapping and Expert mode for moving and resizing items on the screen 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 227 Replay Give
481. s es 247 I TIO AMS2750 TUS sss 394 I O AMS2750 Process Mode 383 IP Address IP Address Entry IP Address Troubleshooting Identity RC P Installation eee eee 24V DC Input ettet Alarm Relay Cards occ Analogue Input Card Analogue Output Card ds Comms Connections eee 453 Digital IO Cards esse Environment and Location Mechanical Installation sess Panel cut out size Pulse Input Card SPNG Relay iiec ertt reed Transmitter Power Supply Card 37 Installation Category sssrin 22 Internal SD Memory sesi 150 Internet Security Settings ss 277 J J mp feat r eacsseiierdi tei enin Rent 188 K TOO 1017 rro FREE 44 L LED Flash COGS Lese utere 317 Language Layout Menu AUG Screen emet etie ded Appearance Delete Screen Edit Layout Edit Settings Load Layout Save Layout Screens Layout Settings Level Permissions Table mmm 211 Levels PaSSWOFdS nein IE 166 Linearisation Tables Analogue Input sss 81 Load Certificates ionis uiid 100 Load Layout Load Setup Load layout NAS eui ee ote Di ERU D IM EEr 163 Local Area Network COMIS sete orte Dre eee ti eese 249 454 Local Settings Default Time Zone Localisation conii Daylight Saving Language Line Hz
482. s Multitrend GR 48 40 days 103 days 206 days Multitrend GR 96 20 days 51d days 103 days 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 49 50 Functions and Features Data Export Removable SD Card and USB flash 2 0 storage device provides multiple data storage alternatives Data is stored in a secure binary encrypted format with the re corder s configurations providing added security of the data files SD Card is available for the eZtrend GR recorder as an option Optional CSV export capability Removable SD Card and USB flash storage devices SD card option for eZtrend GR 8ce External USB 2 0 Devices The Minitrend GR and the Multitrend GR recorders have two USB host ports one front and one at the rear 2USB ports for DR Graphic are extended inside the case to a dual panel mount receptor above the power supply USB peripherals wires can be connected on the panel mount con nector for inside the case The eZtrend GR recorder has one front USB Host The USB ports can be used for attaching external USB devices such as a keyboard mouse or a USB data storage key The keyboard and mouse can be used to navigate the recorder s screen along with text entry SD CARD 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Functions and Features Default 1GB SD Card for internal SD card CAUTION SD CARD Handling precautions Do not store or use the SD memory card in places with static electricity near electri cally charge
483. s Perm Area 9 Configure v v v Y v Alarms Perm Area 10 Batch v Y v Y v Control Perm Area 11 Recording Y Y v Y Y Perm Area 12 Change v v Y v Y Password Perm Area 13 Main Config Y v v v Y ure Menu Perm Area 14 Configure Y v v v Counters Perm Area 15 Configure Y v v v Totals Perm Area 16 Configure Y v v v Max Min Perm Area 17 Load Save v v v v Setups Perm Area 18 Main Setup Y v v v Menu Perm Area 19 Edit Setup amp v v v Edit Recording Perm Area 20 General Setup Y Y v Menu Perm Area 21 Printer Setup Y v Y 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 211 Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system raai Super No Login s r Permission Area Admin Engineer visor Technician Operato required Perm Area 22 Batch Setup Y Y Y Perm Area 23 Configure Y Y Y Settings Perm Area 24 Configure Y Y Y Layout Perm Area 25 Screen Setup Y Y Y Perm Area 26 Pens Y Y v Perm Area 27 Events Y Y Y Counters Perm Area 28 General v Y All Incl Hardware Lock Perm Area 29 Comms v Y Perm Area 30 Comms Y Y Modbus Perm Area 31 Comms v Y Web FTP Perm Area 32 Comms v Y SNTP Perm Area 33 Comms Y v TCP IP Perm Area 34 Comms Y Y Email Perm Area 35 Field IO v Y l O AMS2750 Perm Area 36 Passwords Y Perm Area 37 View Status Y Y via Web Page Perm Area 39 Full Co
484. s 279 The TrendManager Pro Software Suite eere 279 X Series amp GR Recorder Screen Designer eee 279 Database Management Tool eee etit tenete areas 280 Report Generation Tool AMS2750 csssseseseeseeeeeeeeee nennen 280 System Requirements Section 10 Spares List ondes encantan aun dx EE HG nad Ed dd Lue U vao kku rd asc Edi 281 Minitrend GR Recorder eei nre lous aa o ua EEE d 281 Multitrend QR Recorder sse 285 eZirend GR Recorder eios arn e epe 291 DR Graphic Recorder esaia eee uror ir rae ba repere REA 295 Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance nnn 301 Instrument Care and Maintenance 4 eese eee esses senten tese sns en aeneus tuse 301 Cleaning INSITUCHIONS sreo rot 301 DU 301 BJ HT TPAEITITAPINTI CASE 301 TOUCH SCTCOM 302 Calibration E M 302 Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications Field IO Specification cccccscscssssscsssesssssscssscsssessesssscssssssessssssessssssesssessenses Analogue Input Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Relay Alarm Output Card Options eese teen 304 Digital Input Cards iseuce citet i viii ote besito rides 305 Specification Tables i one eene eier epi rate 307 Input Range Performance Accur
485. s analogue input CJC Only for Thermocouple inputs Displays the final adjusted value of a Cold Junc tion Calibration on this channel in degrees C Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen or Save screen to removable media Displayed in the Input column may also be the Thermocouple Active burnout status 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 201 Table 4 14 Thermocouple Active Burnout Status Label Descriptions Disabled Active burnout disabled Normal Active burnout enabled input ok Degraded Thermocouple degraded difference measurement 10 to 99Q increase Failing Thermocouple Failing difference measurement 100Q to 200Q increase Failing Thermocouple Failing absolute measurement over 230Q increase Almost Failed Thermocouple Almost Failed difference measurement over 200Q not failed Almost Failed Thermocouple Almost Failed absolute measurement 330 to 2kQ Open Circuit Thermocouple Failed No data on passive channel Thermocouple Failed but no error on passive thermocouple channel Thermocouple Failed also failed status on passive channel Short Circuit Possible thermocouple wiring short circuit detected significant reduction in Q any increase is measured from the level when the recorder is first powered up Analogue Out Status Main Menu Status Diagnostics Hardware Analogue Out Not avail
486. s inactive Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters Reports To This will acknowledge the Alarm Digital IO to a selected destination Select User message to add the Digital IO occurrence to the messages list only Select Mark On Chart to display the occurrence on a chart and to the messages list When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 79 Pulse Input Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Field IO Pulse Input Only available when a Pulse Input card is fitted as an option The Pulse Input card operates up to a frequency of 25kHz max See Pulse Input Channel Numbers on page 36 Input Low 1V High gt 4V to 50V DC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit If a Pulse input card is fitted in slot A the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu as default to display the pulse reading For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 321 Edit Setup Field I O Pulse Input y Menu path to current menu Pulse Input 1 PIL Frequency Measure H The Pulse Input screen Pulse Input 2 P12 Frequency Measure Puse Input 2 Biba glee displays all the available Pulse Input 3 PIS Frequency Measure Hz be
487. s limited only by PC resources and RS485 can provide comms for up to 31 de 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 251 252 Comms and Trend Manager Suite vices Included as standard is the ability to e mail graph print and export data Device data can be entered into any PC on the LAN Local Area Networks and automatically viewed and graphed at any other PC on the LAN One of the unique features of the TrendServer software is the Realtime facility in con junction with the Communications Server Realtime data can be retrieved from the device to a PC via an Ethernet and or RS485 connection This data can be viewed graphed and logged into the system Data from the device can be logged to a database and held on a database server Remote servers can be added to the comms server to allow access to remote devices on remote databases not on a local network Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put com puter to sleep which will stop real time data logging See Database Size Management on page 261 System Requirements Following minimum specification 1GHz Pentium IV processor or higher CD ROM drive Monitor recommended screen resolution 1024x768 minimum requirement high colour Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows 8 Win dows Server 2008 and Windows 2012 server 4GB Mbyte or more of RAM min 4GB Mbyte recommended 16 bit colour
488. s quick access to the Replay Screen and the Replay toolbar See Replay on page 228 List List of all available screens select to change the current screen Prev Displays the previous enabled screen in current selection e Next Displays the next enabled screen in current selection Exit Exit this menu return to the current process screen Replay The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay mode The replay screen con sists of a chart and DPMs For standard screens the replay chart is vertical or horizontal de pending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Use the print button on the replay bar to print the replay screen DR Graphic History Mode in Circular Chart Mode The top status control has been modified for Circular Chart screen to include the ability to go back and view the previous chart This item is available by selecting the top status bar screen button The Edit button is overridden in the event that the current screen is showing a circular chart Tthe Edit facility is still available from the Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout The status bar toggles the button depending on whether real time or historical data is being shown Standard Screen 4 05 Dec 14 10 17 28 L vel 2 RY 1 hd Print Realtime Replay PAE EL CC X D 14
489. s to lock access to the hardware configuration functionality leaving some areas view only Ext SD 5 This feature is available only on the eZtrend GR Access to external SD card for setup load save or data export would be credit based If the external SD credits are enabled than only user will be able to access external SD for tasks like setup load or save data or report export 242 Notes for Table 7 1 on page 241 Basic maths is standard in all recorders Basic Maths math comprises of Add Subtract Multiply and Divide 1 Additional pens Extra Pens can be used to display and store the results of calculations totalisers variables imported via communications or to store values 2 Custom Screens must be built using Screen Designer lay Screens from V5 Screen Designer versions cannot be imported lyt not available for the eZtrend GR 3 Event markers are required to automatically reset the totalisers for example on a periodic basis or on an exter nal condition Not necessary if the totalisers are reset manually 4 Not available for the eZtrend GR 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Firmware Credit System Credits can be applied to the Firmware functions until the total number of credits purchased has been used up See Applying your Firmware credits on page 243 Additional credits can be purchased later if new features are to be activated and not enough credits are available to support these a
490. s until another is selected O Graphics EA s V Company logo jpg het Image logo jpg gt My Recent het Document logo jpg Documents File name My Network Files oftype BMP JPG 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK AMS2750 Report Generation Tool SAT Report Wizard When you select the SAT Report menu option the wizard will be started This will help cre ation of SAT Report Step 1 Obtain information This information will be printed on the SAT report SAT Report Wizard Please provide information for creating SAT Report Oven Name ID Furnace 3 Manufacturer Big Oven Manufacturer Location Ft Washington PA Procedure Number P100 1A If not performed In house SAT Calibration Company Name SAT Calibration Company Representative Control Sensor Tolerance Oven Class Additional Comments Gente PO Oven Name ID enter the name or ID of the furnace or oven Control Sensor enter an identifier for the Control Sensor Manufacturer enter Manufacturer of the furnace or oven Tolerance of the furnace or oven Location enter the location of the company site Oven Class Refer to AMS2750 Procedure number enter a procedure number for the SAT where applicable Additional Comments Add any comments to appear on the report If the SAT test is not performed In house e enter SAT Calibration Company Name e enter SAT Cal
491. se read the section on Safety on page 2 and Warnings and Safety Precautions on page 3 All connections to the unit are made via the rear panel the layout of which is shown in page 24 Note The eZtrend GR Analogue Input card Slot A Cable screen must be well connected to the recorder case using a low impedance bond Also avoid use of a length of wire between the cable screen and the recorder case Signal Wiring A WARNING ENSURE SAFETY EARTH CONNECTION Always ensure the unit is connected to safety earth when connecting to an AC or DC supply Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Your recorder is intended for panel mount use and only the front face is intended to be exposed to the operator Disconnection from the supply MUST be made possible by means of a switch circuit breaker or other means of supply isolation The disconnection device must be included in the panel installation clearly marked in close proximity to the recorder and within easy reach of the operator The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the analogue or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltage 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Electrical Installation A CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE CONTROL To protect against component failures the user should fit an external fuse for the DC input power supply The value should be 4A time d
492. sed for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs The relays should be used for non inductive loads only where a device requires a voltage to operate it such as a 12 Volt buzzer connect it to the normally open NO contacts unless the fail safe setting is activated The maximum voltage which may be used with the alarm relays is 240V Alarm Relay Channel Numbers The Alarm Relay cards are either 4 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even though the cards only operate on 4 channels or 8 channels The 8 channels Alarm Relay card has 2 digital inputs available on the last 2 channels There are no Digital Inputs available on the 4 channels Alarm Relay card Table 2 7 Alarm Relay card 4 channel Alarm Relay card 8 channel Card Channel Digital Card Channel Digital position number Inputs position number Inputs Slot G 1to4 N A Slot G 1to8 7 amp 8 Slot H 17 to 20 N A Slot H 17 to 24 23 amp 24 Slot 33 to 36 N A Slot 33 to 40 39 amp 40 DR Graphic recorders alarm card slot position and channel number mapping Table 2 8 Alarm Relay card 8 Card position Channel number Digital Inputs Slot B 1to8 7 amp 8 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 39 40 Electrical Installation Figure 2 17 Alarm Relay Card connector details CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NC C
493. sed midnight A week starts one second passed midnight on Sunday A month starts at one second passed midnight on the 1st of the month Access to this is provided automatically via reports but this information can also be included in maths scripts and by using embedded variables Examples below Pen Report Maths In maths the following syntax is available prmax x y z Pen report Max value prmin x y z Pen report Min value prave x y z Pen report Average value prtot x y z Pen report Totaliser value where x Pen Number 1 to 96 y period 1 Hour 2 Day 3 Week 4 Month z report set 1 Current 2 Previous completed e g P1 prmax 23 2 1 Max value so far for current day for Pen 23 Continued on next page 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 155 Pen Report Syntax the syntax for the embedded variables is as follows PRPtttxynn v ttt is the type of variables required and can be MAX Max value MAT Time max value was recorded MIN Min Value MIT Time min value was recorded AVE Average Value TOT Totaliser value STM Start time of the reports set X is the report set and can be C Current working hour day week month L Last completed hour day week month y is the period and can be H Hour D Day W Week M Month nn is the pen number from 1 to 96 e g of some embedded variables PRPTOTLM1 v Total for last complete month for pen 1 PRPMAXCD23 v Max so far for current da
494. ser after a defined period of inactivity at the menu system or web page Level Names The level names such as Operator Technician Supervisor Engineer are for internal refer ence and are displayed as defaults it is possible for the user to change the group names to suit their personnel structure This is stored in the policy set up for the Password configura tion Audit Trail A full audit trail is available and is stored as a message log Trail Rules The audit trail cannot be turned off and will always be generated for the password system Audit Trail Entries Audit trail is generated for the following actions Userlog On Off and source Recorder Web Failed password attempts Areas where access was attempted but denied Password expiry nactivity timeouts auto logouts Temporary User entry 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Level Permissions Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system Permission Area Admin Engineer super Technician Operator No Login visor required Perm Area 1 Messages Y Y v v Y Y Perm Area 2 Screen v Y Y Y v A Perm Area 3 Status Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 4 View Totals Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 5 View Alarms Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 6 View Max Min v v v Y v v Perm Area 7 View Counters Y Y v Y Y Y Perm Area 8 Acknowledge v Y v Y v Alarm
495. set See Pulse Duration The alarm will trigger again when it goes back into an active alarm state NOTICE Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values Pulse Duration Output only Available when Single Pulse is selected as an Output Specify the pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Select and enter the pulse length Failsafe Output only Toggles On and Off Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Fail safe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associ ated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed See Failsafe Relay Positions on page 306 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Label Select and enter an identification label Up to 16 characters Active Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes active Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters Inactive Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm become
496. set up on Modbus will be in the list The recorder will be in the list under the name that you gave it when entering the device details Either click and drag the recorder name from the list to the graph area this will add all the recorders pens onto the graph or click on pens to list the pens available and drag the re quired ones onto the graph As soon as the pens are on the graph they should start to update in real time The graph will be split into two as below Figure 8 9 Realtime Graphing Default GRAPHOO3 Default GRAPHOO3 DER Drag and Drop Recorder from the list onto the graph area Realtime Modbus The white background area The blue background area button recorder is the historical data is the real time data The white area for historical data will display the data that is stored to the database At this point we have no data being stored to the database it is simply being acquired and graphed if the graph is closed any data downloaded via Modbus will be lost More information about graphing on TrendServer Pro and the options for arranging pens etc are available in the Trend Manager Pro software manual for this product If this doc umentation is unavailable it can be downloaded at www honeywellprocess com 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 273 Comms Server Database Comms Server Database On system start up the Communications Service will start automatically Th
497. setup whereby the tabular readings can be updated each time it was triggered If the recorder is put into Replay mode the standard chart replay screen will be shown a xd gt ai Standard Screen 4 Menu 0 25d 5 Screen 29 Aug 08 13 52 41 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen 2 3 Pen 3 4 Pen4 5 iPen 5 6 Pen6 13 52 39 55 49 97 00 14 32 84 21 28 27 81 37 23 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 5 Pen 5 6 Pen6 13 52 29 70 57 87 00 14 13 81 40 25 94 81 46 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen 2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 52 13 83 65 77 00 13 43 80 87 26 11 77 57 23 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen 2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 5 Pen5 6 Pen6 13 52 09 33 43 67 00 15 81 8171 21 80 83 00 23 Aug i Peni 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 S5 Pen 5 6 Pen6 13 51 59 38 96 57 00 11 36 82 42 22 55 82 13 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 5 Pen5 6 Pen6 13 51 49 99 70 47 00 12 19 82 88 22 04 82 97 29 Aug t Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 5 Pen 5 6 Pen6 13 51 39 35 57 37 00 12 45 82 32 20 10 82 42 29 Aug i Pen 1 2 Pen2 3 Pen3 4 Pen4 S PenS 6 Pen6 13 51 29 86 98 27 00 1171 80 50 17 21 87 51 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 147 148 Edit Recording Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Scheduled see below Storage Bias on page 149 Storage Alarm on page 150 Pre Trigger on page 151 Export Format on page 152 Storage Bias Storage Alarm 2 Pre Trigger Export Format 4 Finish Scheduled Main Menu Confi
498. sh to use TrendManager Pro Note If the CSV data is huge in several MBs like more than 50MB it may take more time to export It is recommended to use the schedule export once or twice a day to avoid huge ac cumulation of data 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Reports Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodic basis using the event system to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to the external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors A batch report for a Temperature Uniformity Survey can be produced Before a report can be run the report menu must be configured In the Reports Menu select the first or next available Report Edit Setup fen exem re Report 2 oven 2 batch report EN amp Report3 V or Enabled Y X Report 4 i Name group 1 report Report 5 X Report5 N Style Normal Report 6 amp Report 6 v Selection Type Pen Group ae bo ae A C Group 1 Group i Report 3 Report 4 Curr Pen Value Included v Ce po Jen Enabled Set to a tick to enable Name Enter an identifiable name of your report Style Select Batch for running reports on current batches Select Normal to run reports on specific pens all pens or groups A TUS re
499. sing one of the following methods Flush in a panel Flush in a panel for recorders with NEMA 4 Onthe surface of a wall for panel Choose the method that meets your mounting requirements use the associated dimension drawings for reference How to remove knockouts for conduits Before you mount the recorder remove the appropriate plugs in the bottom and or sides of the recorder case for wire entry via 1 2 12 7 mm conduits Refer to Figure 2 8 for plug locations To see recommended use of conduits for various types of wiring refer to Figure 2 12 and Figure 2 13 Figure 2 8 DR Graphic recorder dimensions Mounting Flush in panel new cut out Procedure 1 At the appropriate location make a square cutout in the panel Cutout dimensions should be 12 7 0 060 inches by 12 7 0 060 inches 322 56 1 52 by 322 56 1 52 millimeters See Figure 2 9 2 Orient the recorder case properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel Support the recorder as shown in Steps 3 and 4 3 Refer to Figure 2 9 From the back of the panel attach a mounting bracket to each side of the recorder case using a 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screw for each bracket mount ing hardware supplied with recorder Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets 4 While holding the recorder firmly against the panel slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK
500. sor can be allowed or from the Cal point in degrees C before being regarded as out of calibration EG cal point 1 100 5 cal point 2 300 1 0 cal point 3 500 75 Looks for the setpoint 150 and works out the sensor cal for 150 See Ther mocouple Calibration Adjustments on page 389 e Copy Cal Adjust the ability to copy settings from one input to another with copy capability up to 12 TC survey with 9 TC Cal Configure one channel competely including the adjust factors then select Copy Cal Adjust at the bottom of the screen Cal Adjust Cert No w A IT a When the Copy Cal Adjust is pressed a multi selection screen is displayed which allows the choice of multiple channels to copy to A channel is selected by touching the corresponding channel number and when completed the user applies the changes by touching the tick the finish amp commit as usual Note that the source channel will always be blocked by a no entry sign as it is not pos sible to copy a channel to itself as shown below In this example channel one is being copied to channels 2 through 10 This capability is available in both AMS2750 survey and process modes and what is copied is listed below 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode Each channel has a number of pieces of information that are used by the instrument and the generated survey report The copy function does not just copy the Cal Adjust ment
501. splaying a red cross A widget has green resize handles that appear when it is selected To select an object the Expert button must be active with no red cross showing Objects have blue resize handles when selected When a widget or object is selected it can be moved and resized Figure 4 3 Expert and Non Expert selection Standard Screen 1 0001 MiniTrend Expert Exit 20 Jul 06 14 16 42 Expert Exit 20 Jul 06 14 17 57 Pen 4 5 0e 00 Non Expert mode selects the Expert mode selects the Object Widget with green resize handles with blue resize handles part the whole DPM of the DPM Map Button Map button The Map button in the Screen Menu bar enables the user to associated channels to pens so the pen being displayed on the object or widget will display the actual signal on that chan nel Channel Mapping Widgets Channel configuration can be done per widget or per object Configure the widget if all the objects on the widget are to be mapped to the same channel Select the widget and go to the Map in the Screen menu toolbar Widgets have green grab handles around the edge Pen and or channel information will appear for each object within the widget Each object in the widget can be assigned to the same or different Pen For example a DPM menu will display the pen currently being used and a set of channel information associated to the text digital and alarm marker objects within the DPM widget Select any of the objects in t
502. ss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 405 406 TUS mode TUS Survey Process screen Middle panel Middle section lists up to 6 setpoints that have been entered for the survey This section shows the currently configured soak levels If you only have 2 setpoints eg 600 and 950 this would give a temperature difference of 300 Check AMS2750 spec to see if a temperature difference of 300 is allowable if not an additional setpoint may need to be added Each setpoint in the list has a tolerance width band see table in spec Status shows what stage of the survey is running There are four stages of the survey Detect Soak unstable Stable soak and Done These are shown in more detail in During survey on page 410 Furnace Mame Furnace 1 Model No QW 234 Y 45 3 4 5 6 Time Username NA Started Fri Aug 29 15 21 07 No of TC s 8 Elapsed 1h 25m 53s Stop TUS Class 2 Setpoint Status Max TC Min TC Max TC Diff Max TC SP Max Ramp Ramp TCLaginto Stable Soak Meets Tol 00F OF 1000 00F Detect TCO 100 0 00F NA NA NA 15 00 00 15 10 00 TOU 29 Aug 08 23 Aug 08 29 Aug 08 Other colour codes are Green when the survey is complete grey when the TUS has been 0 00F Diff Overshoot duration Soak Duration Class TC s Stabilized Manual Override TCO TCO TCO TCO TCO 10s 0 00F 0 00F 0 00F T n 15 140300 5 5 JU 600300 b 10 00 620300 b 30 0U0 640300 1 234ug08 29 Aug08 29 Aug 08
503. st It will be in the list under the same name as the setup previously saved If any equipment other than GR recorders is to use TrendServer Pro to log and graph data then a profile has to be generated The Modbus Profile Tool is available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other devices see Modbus profile tool data update on page 265 For more detailed informa tion on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite software man ual NOTE The Recorder ID number is NOT the same as the Slave ID Number Communications Port Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for COM ports 1 to 8 This may already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend GR recorder 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 263 264 Communications Server IP Address Go to Main Menu gt Status gt System gt General In this list is the recorder IP Address The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote serv ers GR recorders can also be located using their network ID Network ID GR recorders will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus
504. ster but maps to exactly the same place as CV1 21880 Both map to the comms variables CV1 Pen Alarm Value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Modbus registers CV1 1880 CV32 ECV1 2400 ECV 96 361 Modbus Function Codes Modbus Function Codes These are described in document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66 Pages 14 to 25 inclusive For GR Series recorders only use codes 01 02 03 04 16 and 17 Supplemental to Function code 16 with standard address 0004 can be used to send Supplemental to Function code 17 Report Device ID e Page 23 Slave ID for GR Series recorders is always 05 e Page 24 Device description Item Size in bytes Contents Device Description 16d 0x10 Recorder type space software version The length is extended to exactly 16 bytes by trailing 0x00 characters Recorder type is a combination of the OEM series name followed by the OEM device name truncated to 16 characters Software version is of the form nn XX eg 00 FQ e Page 25 Number of data block records byte 23 always equals 05 for the Trendview range data blocks are always in order 00 Analogue inputs 02 Digital inputs 03 Digital outputs 06 Pens 09 Totalisers 362 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Appendix K Troubleshooting Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror M
505. stes tn statu ntn 245 PYOLOCOIS T V 246 Hardware Installation sisssscisscsccssssssscsssssssescssvscassesssassesessssccsecessseaceeasesseaseeses 247 Getting connected IP Address essere 248 Local Area Network Setup iar enne ene eiie erii aus eee gus Links to Remote Networks Data Loeginge and Transfer uiti bere ppt ttai enmt oin opea Comms and Trend Manager Suite eee eere ee esent eene nennt 251 System Roguiremenls ae seva at nen i n ETAT e e Eee te 252 Software Installation iege ener et rie cba ER e EE Re E eR bake sinn 253 Start Up iv 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Communications Server eese esee eee eee sese eene see teet Pee Pepe one e een Pe eee eno 258 COMMS Serve OVervi6W iua ec enit etie ea RIS k AAPA E ETHER ERR Er REESE 256 Comms Server Start up eese ettet rtt itte tte e e EEEE E EITE S SETETEST 256 Comms Server SUP 261 Comms Server Logging ccrte ttt ttti ri sasis STi Co ETASAN tort iE ed ona 266 Comms Server Database ROM m Shutdown Server Modbus Capabilities semir sas edet inris eaa pane aca sea 275 Web Browser 276 Internet Security Settings sssssssesssssssssssssssessesssscsosesssssovs sossseossscsrssso esess sesss 277 Section 9 PC Software Suite cccscssssssesssssnssssseesesnsessnsessnansesensnsnssonen
506. t Once the report is created if appropriate version of acrobat reader is installed then user will be prompted with the message box Would you like to open print the generated report If user selects Yes then report will be opened with installed acrobat reader tool The TUS report is complete A final dialog appears asking if you wish to exit the application 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 439 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Header and Footer report information The header and footer information that is auto displayed on the report includes Header Report Reference Number Customer Name or Reference Furnace Tag Name or Reference Logo option Footer The Footer information includes Page Number of total number Report Generated by TUS Report Tool 440 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS Report Example The next few pages show selected pages from a sample test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant Equipment Furnace 1 Temperature Uniformity Survey Report Customer HestTestment Plan wwe eara Pere SP1950 0 F Survey Passed Failed SP2 1200 0 F Survey Passed Failed Report Generated By AMS2750 TUS Report Tool All measured values excep the comro TC are corrected Page 10f12 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 441 Sample pages taken from a test TUS report Report Reference Number 345 Customer Heat Treatment Plant
507. t This refers to the amount of zeros that will be added to the embed ded batch counter Eg BATCH 2 GC 000001 This has to have the same amount of digits to accommodate the largest number the counter will reach which will be the Roll over value If this is not enabled the leading zeros will not be shown Ctr Start This refers to the number at which the batch counter will start Ctr Increment This is how much the counter will increase or increment by Ctr Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to reach before it starts again Show name List only appears when Auto Pop Wizard is off Enable this to allow any additional list item names to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show User ID List enable this to allow any addition list item id s to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Lot No List Add a batch Lot No if required up to 11 characters Show Desc List Enter a description of what the batch is up to 17 characters Show Comment List Add any further comments NOTE Batch mode no longer operates on pens that do not belong in a group so when up grading to the new version existing users need to add pens to a group to use the batch func tionality Batch process screen To show a batch related process screen the screen must be configured to display the group being used for that batch Under the message c
508. t Setup d E Events Counters General Screen LJ Recording Reports Finish Select a button to take you to the next menu Field IO This button displays a sub menu containing Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO and Pulse Inputs card menus See Field IO Menu on page 70 If AMS2750 mode is selected in the credits this button will show 1 O AMS2750 refer to Appendix L GR Series AMS2750 capabilities on page 377 Pens This button displays all the configuration areas for setting up Pens including Scales Maths Alarms Logging and Totalisers See Pens Menu on page 84 Comms This button displays Services TCP IP and Network Admin Services takes you to a sub menu containing Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers menus See Comms Services Menu on page 101 Events Counters Events and counters are firmware options that can be activated using the credit system Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence See Events Menu on page 111 User Counters can be set up and used as a Cause or Effect in the Events system to count an occurrence See Counters Menu on page 126 Preset Markers are also available to be configured for use in the event system and as a mark on chart and Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input General This button displays a sub menu containing general recorder information including recor
509. t for all other clamps 6 Tighten the screw using a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver and the clamp will secure against the panel A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not over tighten mounting clamp screws Minitrend GR and eZtrend GR torque setting should be 0 5 0 75Nm 4 4 6 6lbf in Multitrend GR torque setting should be 0 5 0 70Nm 4 4 6 2lbf in Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Multitrend GR See Figure 2 7 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness Use either a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit 4 Position the circular mounting boss in the hole on one side of the case with the lip of the boss inside the case Ensure the front of the clamp is up against the panel 5 Fix the second clamp on the opposite side of the unit 6 Tighten the screw using a Number 1 Phillips or Straight slot screw driver and the clamp will secure against the panel 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 13 Mechanical Installation DR Graphic recorder See Figure 2 8 This section provides instructions for mounting the DR Graphic recorder u
510. t have been made to the existing setup and not implement them into the recorder Commit Later This gives the user the option for a configuration to be partially completed but to be commit ted at a later date This will retain the new set up or the changes to the existing setup until they are required A partially completed setup will not be maintained over a power failure If Commit Later has been executed a warning message will display for Edit Setup Edit Lay out and User Admin Passwords screens This is to alert the user that the changes have been made to the configuration and not committed in the recorder The user can Discard the changes or continue to do changes and then Commit them Setup Modified This setup has been modified but not committed Select to discard the existing changes or continue 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 5 Security See Hardware Configuration Lock on page 224 Password Security Log On Off If ESS Extended Security System Password security is active on your recorder a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available with out logging on see Table 5 1 on page 211 When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On User
511. t two inputs are X20 Y 0 and X 2 Y 6 At the top of the 0 10V table the last two points are X28 Y 9 8 and X 10 Y 10 Figure 4 4 shows these last two inputs at the top and bottom of the 0 10V signal 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 83 84 Pens Menu Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Pens Select the Pens button to display all the pens available Menu path to current menu Pens 2 P Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 The Pens screen displays y Pen 3 10E9 to 10E22 all the available pens Each pen displays its o Pens 4 v Pen4 10E1 to 10E6 scale settings Pens 5 Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 p gt Select a pen number to Pens 6 Totals edit the setup of each pen y Pen 6 20 00 200 0096 gt v including the Scale Logging Alarms and Click on individual pen number to set up each pen profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Tag Select and use the on screen keyboard to type in an identifier for the pen Up to 47 characters Description Screen Designer screens only Enter a screen description in this field that will then be displayed on the Screen Designer screen Maths Type Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented as a pen Basic maths is standard in all recorders Full Maths or Math Scripting are options that must be activated See Options on page 196 Edit Maths Edit the Maths for this particula
512. ta Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped This Batch menu is the setup menu where you can configure all the Batch and Group prop erties before starting a batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch mode has changed to allow concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group Up to 32 Pens in any single batch group Edit Setup Pause Chart PS Start Log 5 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 General General Batch Properties Group 1 BATCH 1 GC iili Ctr Reset button will produce a warning BATCH 2 GC v gt aee ewoege Allow Direct I BATCH 4 GC v Name Props Batch 1 Name BATCH STIGC v gt I User ID Props Operator ID zd Field 1 Props y Vegetables Field 2 Props y Meat dialog asking if you want to reset all Field 3Props y Dairy counters When a group is selected then the counters can be reset by gr
513. take you directly into a setup edit and into the AMS2750 configuration page to edit furnace and soak details you can modify the details as required Once completed you will be returned to the wizard page showing the newly loaded configura tion details Note if a configuration is changed so that it requires system restart then you will not be returned to the same place in the wizard and any parked configurations will be over written Cancel will take you back to the TUS screen but this will not cancel any changes made in the load or edit config options Next will move you onto the second page of the configuration confirmation wizard this will provide an overview of the currently attached sensors included in the TUS and their status the screen is as follows Screen 2 shows the following information on the thermocouples TC Number the number relating to the analogue input for the thermocouple Position The text position of the sensor within the furnace Status the current status of the sensor with relation to the thermocouple tracking The status will display good for a thermocouple whose usage or calibration is ok and not within an expiry period Warning for a thermocouple whose status is OK but a calibra tion or usage is due to expire shortly or expired for a thermocouple that has expired on either usage or calibration 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK TUS mode If a thermocouple is included in the TUS but
514. te a certain screen for a longer period than the cycle interval you can enter a time period here for the amount of time that screen will be displayed range 0 to 3600 seconds Alarm Screen Select which screen is to be displayed when any pen goes into an alarm state Only changes colour if Mark on Chart is enabled in the Alarms Menu on page 88 Alarm Screen Name Only active if Alarm Screen is enabled Replay Screen TO TimeOut If the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen Replay TimeOut only active if Replay Screen TO is enabled Enter how long in min utes before the replay screen returns to a process screen Defaults to 10 minutes Menu Bar TO When you select an item from the menu bar along the top of the proc ess screen it will produce a sub menu bar This sub menu bar can have a display time assigned to it before it automatically disappears and returns to the main menu bar Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden For screens that have been created in the Screen Designer software and have been designed specifically without the menu bar being displayed The menu bar at the top of the screen will appear on the recorder automatically but can be hidden so the full area of the screen can be displayed Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden Hourly Stamps The Hourly sta
515. ternal state is unable to take a reading for all Al Diagnostics channels Invalid state of AdcStatus for SPI master Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 4 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to update for all AO chan Diagnostics nels Invalid state of DacStatus SPI master AO board Messages Can t execute invalid state 5 4 4 The I O card internal state is unable to take a reading for all Al Diagnostics channels Invalid state of ReadingType Al board Messages Can t execute invalid state 6 4 4 The communications to the I O card have failed due to the I O Diagnostics cards internal state Messages Invalid state of MessageStatus Host or FieldPort Can t execute invalid state 7 4 4 Error whilst making an active burnout measurement Diagnostics Invalid state of Active Burnout measurement type Messages Can t execute invalid state 8 4 4 Error whilst making an active burnout measurement Diagnostics Invalid state of gain in Active Burnout calculation Messages Unable to execute unspeci 0 4 4 The measured pulse frequency is too high for the digital I O Diagnostics fied reason board try using a dedicated pulse card channel Messages Unable to execute unspeci 1 4 4 The command referenced an illegal invalid board channel Diagnostics fied reason number on the DIO board Messages Unable to execute unspeci 2 4 4 I O card is not able to operate on SPI bus Invalid board type for Diagnostics fied reason SPI master function Messages Unable
516. that Recorder calibration is checked at least every year or in accord ance with your industry regulations to ensure maximum accuracy See Calibration on page 132 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications Field IO Specification Analogue Output Not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Each recorder is capable of supporting analogue output function The AO card is available as a 2 or 4 channel option and will plug into any of the analogue input slots Analogue Outputs are used to support Re transmission of Analogue Input values Re transmission of Math Results Re transmission of Process values Control Outputs Analogue Output Specifications Resolution 0 00296 or better Accuracy 0 1 0 500ohm load 0 25 500ohm 1Kohm load Maximum load resistance 1Kohm Isolation 300V AC Outputting 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA over range capability to 21mA Update rate 250mSec per channel Pulse Input Card The Pulse Card is available as an option and will fit in slots normally allocated to Al cards The frequency output from the card can be used in a Maths block and is represented by HPULn where n is from 1 to 4 when the card is fitted in the top slot Frequency 1 Hz to 25kHz this will update once per second Inputs 4 x isolated inputs A separate Pulse input card is not available for the eZtrend GR recorder however the first 4 inputs on the Dig
517. that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 character and 0 will disable 4 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders Password Min Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 0 will disable 6 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders Min Alpha Set the minimum amount of alpha characters to be used in the Password 0 to 20 characters Min Symbol Set the minimum amount of symbol characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters Min Numeric Set the minimum amount of numeric characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters Pass Retries Set how many times the incorrect password can be entered before the user account is locked out 1 to 10 retries O will disable 1 to 6 retries and no disable for ESS recorders Pass Expiry Set how many days before the current passwords will expire 1 to 365 days and 0 will disable For ESS recorders 1 to 180 days and no disable Expiry Warning Set how many days before the passwords expiry date that a warning notice will appear 1 to 20 days and 0 will disable no disable for ESS recorders When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Select the Back but ton to return to the previous menu Levels Main Menu Configure Passwords User Admin Levels The Level permissions are the 4 user levels that have been set up and named in the Poli
518. that con tains information that enables certain functionality including the total credit value 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 131 132 Options This displays how many credits are currently in use Select this to produce a list of Firmware options available and their credit values Toggle each option On or Off to enable the feature within the recorder If there are not enough credits available More credits are available from your supplier For a complete lists of all the firmware options and their functionality see Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 241 Firmware Upgrade Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder via a USB key or a SD card The file type required to upgrade the Firmware has the file extension xsu Contact Honeywell for more information Firmware downloads are available from http www honeywellprocess com Insert the SD card or USB key with the latest revision of Firmware xsu file format and press the FW Upgrade button The recorder will scan and check the files on the external de vice with the current version running in the recorder Any later version files on the external device are copied into the recorder If there is no external media fitted or the file is corrupt a Firmware installation dialog will ap pear If this occurs check the file is the correct format xsu
519. the SP tolerance limits for the defined furnace class the dwell time minimum of 30 min for the survey the maximum temperature value during the dwell period and the mini mum temperature value during the dwell period The on line TUS tracking screen shows the current status of a survey for up to 6 set points furnace details status Min amp Max TC read ings Max differences Max Overshoot durations and the Class of furnace the survey met 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Tables Specification Design Attributes Digital indicators and Display Minitrend GR Recorder Display size and Type 5 7 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution VGA 640 x 480 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 50 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 62 500 hours with 80 brightness 25 deg Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Recorder Display size and Type 12 1 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution XGA 1024 x 768 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 ca
520. the server details One method of finding this information is to go to Microsoft Outlook Tools Email Accounts select View or change existing email accounts Select your email server from the box eg Microsoft Exchange Server and click on the Change button The server name you require is displayed in the Exchange Server Settings dialog Enter this name exactly using the on screen or USB keyboard Authentication Indicates whether a username or password is read by the server Check with your IT Admin For Network printers and drivers if you intend to connect the recorder on a Microsoft net work administered as a domain you may have to authenticate the recorder as a user with sufficient permissions to use the resources that you want network printer network drive Usually several devices computers or recorders can be authenticated on the same net work with the same name Username Your network email address or this could be a generic name used to identify the recorder Password Enter your password associated with your user name If you have a system where the log in password expires and requires you to change it periodically you will need to update the logon password in the recorders when you are forced to change your PC pass word User Address Your network email address Or this could be a generic name used to iden tify the recorder No spaces Recipients Address Enter up to 12 email addresses of the destination yo
521. this field can be left blank Customer specific Process information can be entered for Job Name Customer Name and Comments TUS Report Wizard 0000000 Customer Name Heat Treatment Plant Location Address Washington Contact Name Please enter the name of the Survey Testing Company if the survey is not performed in house Customer Specific Process Information Job Name Heating Parts Customer Name Airship Comments 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 433 434 AMS2750 Report Generation Tool Step 7 Furnace Thermocouple Positioning This screen is used to show the positions of thermocouples inside the furnace This will de fault to the image of 9 thermocouples rectangular square The down arrow will provide more options for commonly used layouts found for survey layouts These are static bitmap images and cannot be changed care needs to be taken to make sure that the position of the T C as positioned in the furnace matches the diagram Add and references or comments in Add Notes These will appeatr in the TUS report Alternatively you can upload your own Custom layout graphic image Currently Selected Positioning S thermocouple rectangular square Default layouts include 9thermocouple rectangular square 5thermocouple rectangular square 5thermocouple cylindrical 9thermocouple cylindrical A 9thermocouple cylindrical B Add Notes Allows the user to add furnace identification details or
522. tings Choose from Single Point Dual Point or Multi Point Cal see Sensor Compensation on page 351 High Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the high limit value Lower Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the lower limit value RT Type Only available when Type is set to RT Resistance Thermometer Select this for a list of available RT types Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to TC Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a current The T C is wired differ ently for Active and Passive Burnout see Figure Figure 2 16 Input signal wiring on page 31 Active Burnout is not available for the eZtrend GR recorder Active Burnout checks the health of the thermocouples every 30 seconds if your proc ess requires continuous check of the thermocouples to see if they are in burnout you should use Passive Burnout Active burnout is an implementation of thermocouple health and provides error warning messages for a range of thermocouple activity failure conditions Passive burnout does not provide any error warning messages If the thermocouple wiring changes and the channel is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change to update burnout settings Show Burnout Only availabl
523. tion Mee 51 52 25 66 1880 6273 Comms 1 start address A 7 1882 6275 Comms 2 A 7 1884 6277 Comms 3 A 7 1886 6279 Comms 4 A 7 1888 6281 Comms 5 A 7 188A 6283 Comms 6 A 7 188C 6285 Comms 7 A 7 188E 6287 Comms 8 A 7 1890 6289 Comms 9 A 7 1892 6291 Comms 10 A 7 18BE 6335 Comms 32 end address A 7 Extended Comms Inputs 96 comms values max Address Address Description prend 51 52 25 66 2440 9281 Extended Comms Input 33 start address A 7 1 2442 9283 Extended Comms Input 34 A 7 1 2444 9285 Extended Comms Input 35 A 7 1 2446 9287 Extended Comms Input 36 A 7 1 2448 9289 Extended Comms Input 37 A 7 1 244A 9291 Extended Comms Input 38 A 7 1 244C 9293 Extended Comms Input 39 A 7 1 244E 9295 Extended Comms Input 40 A 7 1 2450 9299 Extended Comms Input 41 A 7 1 2452 9301 Extended Comms Input 42 A 7 1 24BE 9407 Extended Comms Input 96 end address A 7 1 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Modbus Memory Map Supplement Communications Inputs can be set by using Modbus function code 16 Pen Values 96 pens max Address Address Description UE 51 52 25 66 18C0 6337 Pen 1 start address A 8 18C2 6339 Pen2 A 8 18C4 6341 Pen 3 A 8 18C6 6343 Pen 4 A 8 18C8 6345 Pen 5 A 8 18CA 6347 Pen 6 A 8 18CC 6349 Pen 7 A
524. tion from I O card Error Diagnostics from E2 reading board statistics Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 363 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Fatal startup error 0 1 1 l O board could not be initialized suspect I O board Diagnostics Errors when trying to initialise board after numerous attempts Messages H W error prevents execu 0 1 1 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer Al board Messages H W error prevents execu 0 1 1 Al board could not be initialized suspect Al board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer Al board Messages H W error prevents execu 1 1 1 PI board could not be initialized suspect pulse board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer PI board Messages H W error prevents execu 2 1 1 DIO AR board could not be initialized suspect I O board Failed Diagnostics tion of command to set acquisition interrupt timer DIO AR boards Messages H W error prevents execu 3 1 1 AO board could not be initialized suspect AO board Diagnostics tion of command Failed to set acquisition interrupt timer AO board Messages H W error prevents execu 4 1 1 Internal I O card failure Diagnostics tion of command Triggered Clock Monitor Failure Messag
525. to an out going email the attachment is in bitmap bmp format Email Text Only available when Single Line User is selected as a Sub Type Enter text here to add a Mark on Chart when the Email is sent Email Template Only available when Multiline User is selected These are sets of text scripts that can be pre written and assigned to an Email Select a template from the list To set up templates for multiline text see Email on page 106 122 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 4 11 Event Effect using a Template with Embedded values Enabled Type Email Sub Type Multiline User Recipients Phil d gap underground com From Gap Phil D loc 5 Sent Wed 13 09 2006 10 29 To Email Text Pen 1 Temperature Test Cc Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test ili ii Event Cause Sub Type Trigger Time Scheduled Interval 2m 00s Pen 1 Temp 18 197 deg C Screen Change or Backlight On Off Select Screen Change as an effect to change the screen when triggered by an active alarm or sytem alert message Eg Pen 1 goes into Alarm and the screen changes from a chart to a DPM screen where Alarm markers are visible ee Backlight select On or Off When the Event is triggered the effect is to turn the backlight to what state has been selected On or Off If an active alarm is trig gered it will override this state as it has a higher priority ee Screen Name select
526. to execute unspeci 3 4 4 An illegal operation on the I O board firmware was found Diagnostics fied reason Messages 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 369 Error Messages Table 23 1 LED Errror Message Code Flash Description Cause Type code Unable to execute unspeci 4 4 4 Error sending data to SPI for Al Active Burnout readings Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 5 4 4 Data received for Al Active Burnout indicates an error condition Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 6 4 4 Error ADC not ready while taking Active Burnout readings Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unable to execute unspeci 7 4 4 Could not initialise active burnout will try again next power up Diagnostics fied reason Messages Unspecified error has N A N A I O card failure An unspecified error has occurred Diagnostics occurred Messages Unable to enable or disable N A N A l O card failure Unable to enable or disable timer interrupts Diagnostics timer interrupts Messages Error with RS232 port 0 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort OverRun error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 1 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Framing error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 3 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Receive Buffer Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port 4 2 2 Diagnostic FieldPort Noise error Diagnostics Messages Error with RS232 port
527. tocols e Pulse Input Card Channel Numbers Connection Details Diagnostics 22 7 Pulse Input Menu Q QX Rear Connections 59 QX Standard Screens s 57 OX and OXe Portable Case 284 294 QXe Rear Connections sss 60 Quality and Safety CEUMIEE ooreen aa E AT 319 Safety Quality and Safety Appendix A R RS485 Minitrend GR2 and Multitrend GR3 and DR Graphic recorders Rate Up or Rate Down Alarms Re Start Recorder Realtime Chart Controls sss Recorder Functionality Overview 47 Recorder Setup cu onttsrnttirccastienseseietinnicds 63 Default Time Zone n 265 Local Settings 65 LogOn Off 64 Main Menu 2 66 Main Menu Access EP 2 63 Menu Path essen 65 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Recording Ment acsi Gasman Device Selection Export Now Export busy light Recording Methodology 184 Recording Methodology 184 Recording Status Guseuissseditued inq 199 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 304 Remote Control Viewer Overview 52 Remote Networks COMMS e E ANO Report Generation Tool AMS2750D 280 Report Tool Installation Introduction Overview PDF support SAT Report Wizard SAT Report example TUS Report Example TUS Report Wizard User Interface
528. tory Pre Trigger Batch Printer E Groups Back Comms Menu Engineer Access See Figure 5 11 for Comms access All of the Comms menu buttons require Engineer access Permission Area 29 amp Comms 3 Services a Network Admin Finish e TCP IP Back Edit Setup Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 19 Field I O Engineer Pens Supervisor Comms Engineer Events Counters Supervisor General Supervisor Screen Supervisor Recording Supervisor Reports Engineer ad L3 Screen Setup A Screen Saver Charts Brightness Screen Setup Menu Supervisor Access Permission Area 25 id Edit Recording Supervisor Access Permission Area 19 General menu Supervisor Access See Figure 5 9 for General menu access Permission Area 20 Reports menu Engineer Access Permission Area 46 218 Edit Setup 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Report 1 group 1 report P E Report 2 v oven2 batch report Report 3 X Report 3 gt Report 4 X Repott4 Reports X Report S gt Report 6 Report 6 v lt Back P Finish a Figure 5 6 Default password access from the Alarms Menu Alarms menu No Login Ack Alarm Operator Configure Operator
529. trend GR Recorder Multitrend GR Minitrend GR also have FM class 1 Div 2 approval 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 313 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Specification Options Extended Security System ESS optional Provides full support for 21 CFR Part 11 Includes features for entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords timeout on inactivity 1 to 10 min password expiration 1 to 365 days up to 50 users pass word re entry lock out for incorrect entry of password more than 3 times no re use of passwords pro grammable 4 to 12 times traceability by user name Miscellaneous Optional customer ID Tagging 3 lines of up to 22 characters each line Firmware Options Math Algorithms optional All analog input channels have a math expression text block This is a fully user programmable 100 char acter free form math expression for each pen Math calculations available on all pens one per input plus 16 extra pens for the DR Graphic Minitrend GR 48 extra pens for the Multitrend GR recorder and 12 extra pens for the eZtrend GR Scripting maths includes conditions and multi line scripting in pen maths expressions Allow functions permanent variables constants and timers 500 characters maxi mum Scripting is not available on the eZtrend GR Events optional Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and date of an occurr
530. tric requirements for thermal processing equip ment used for heat treatment System Requirements Minimum System requirements for TrendViewer Minimum System requirements for TrendServer Pro TrendManager Pro and Screen Designer 1 GHz Pentium processor or higher with a mouse CD ROM drive 1 GHz Pentium processor or higher with a mouse CD ROM drive Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit Professional and Ultimate Edi tion 64 bit Windows 8 Windows 2008 Server and 2012 Server Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit Professional and Ultimate Edition 64 bit Windows 8 Windows 2008 Server and 2012 Server 4GB or more of RAM min 4GB recommended 4GB or more of SRAM min 4GB recommended for generating IQOQ reports 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only 50 Mbyte free hard disk space 2 Gbyte Hard drive free disk space Flash card reader or USB port for X Series recorders Flash card reader or USB port for X Series recorders 3 5 floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders 3 5 floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders TCP IP installed Graphics Card amp Direct X control installed Screen Designer To browse multiple recorders IE8
531. ture Units that the recorder is set to for temperature measurement Pen scale units may need to be changed accordingly See Pen Scale Line Hz Toggle between 50Hz or 60Hz Mains power frequency Used to optimise analogue input filtering Note The default value is set based on the model number but can be changed here Paper Size Switch between A4 or Letter 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Media Config Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Factory Media Config This menu contains the list of Storage media with Save and Load Options Enable this option if you want to allow user to access specified storage drive or disable X if you want to restrict user from accessing the device Load NAS Save NAS Only available if User Share Path is enabled in the Network Admin screen see Network Admin on page 98 NOTE If device is already configured for Scheduled Export or Report then user will not be able to restrict access to that device For restricting access to that media device user need to go Scheduled Export or Report and change the Export device 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 137 138 Batch Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup General Batch Batch is a firmware option that can be activated from Credits on page 131 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Setting up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of da
532. ty Stability will deemed to be achieved when all TC s are within tolerance band required for soak for class and no TC continues to change in temperature by more than a user defined degree step between readings Degree Change This becomes enabled when Auto Enable is activated Default is 0 5 degree over 2 mins looks for an amount of temperature drift on any TC When all the details are complete select Finish and Commit or go Back to Furnace or Set point menus 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 397 398 TUS mode Setpoint Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt I O AMS2750 gt AMS2750 gt Setpoint The configured setpoint or soak level this is the level configured for each thermocouple con figuration as per AMS2750 Up to 6 setpoints can be configured individually as a part of a single survey The setpoints must be done in an increasingly progressive order Edit Setup I O AMS2750 AMS2750 Enabled Setpoint 150 0 Deg C Stable Soak Time 30 Mins Tolerance Override v Tolerance 2 0 Deg C Enabled Default is off Check to enable Setpoint Enter the survey setpoint value as a temperature Stable Soak Time soak time for the actual survey period Per AMS2750 the minimum survey soak time is 30 minutes Tolerance Override Check to enable This will become the working tolerance for the soak in the TUS as opposed to the tolerance for the class Tolerance set a tolerance override temp v
533. u want the email to be sent to Templates These are user defined templates containing email text If you require standard text to be sent out in an email then set them up here and give it a template name These templates can be used with the events function to send an email as an effect of an occurrence See Event Effects on page 119 Select a template from the list add a Subject heading up to 50 characters and Message Body text as you would for a normal email Type into the message body text box up to 80 characters per line and up to 100 lines of text can be entered including Embedded Process Values on page 119 This will include specific pen data to your email Contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Server name requirements 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 107 Figure 4 6 Templates for Email using Embedded Values Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test gt IPLT P1 P1 U Message Body CP1 T P1 P1 0 SNTP Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server Server Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to make this recorder the server Other recorders set up as clients can synchronise their time to this server recorder Client Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to set this recorder to synchronise time with the server See
534. un the report details must be entered in Reports Menu on page 153 Oncea report in selected from the list then report is immediately created 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK View Archive This will produce an archive list of all reports that have been run Select a report on the screen and press the display button From this screen you have the option to Print or Export the report The archive will only hold the last 10 reports not more The printer settings must be configured in Printer Menu on page 141 To export the report to a USB key SD card or Network Share folder NAS ensure the media is fitted to the recorder and there is enough memory available marki Sat May 26 2007 15 18 00 Pen Overview 5 0571 18 333 System Max Mins Information Pen Max Reset All This action will reset all hourly daily weekly and monthly max mins totals and averages System max mins and totals shall remain unaffected A warning dialog will appear to ask if you are sure you wish to continue Figure 4 8 Email Report example Pen Overview 8 3737 dee C 19189 deg C Invalid 3 66 deg C 1 56 dC Q 22h07m55s 22h26m42s 1799 deg C l71ldeseC 22h04m04s 22h34m53 Hourly Averages between 22h 00m 00s and 22h 59m 59s 24 01 2008 Average 3 10 degC 17 61 degC 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 193 194 Status Menu Main Menu Status Use the Status menus to easily c
535. unt of time to fill the chart memory ie chart history will decrease accord ingly Note that as you allocate more chart memory the recorder gives preference to medium and slower chart speeds The log information displays how many pens are currently set for logging recording The shortest pen means the pen that will take the shortest amount of time to fill it s part of the log memory before it starts recycling that is overwriting the oldest data with the newest The longest pen is the pen that will take the longest amount of time to fill it s part of the log mem ory before it starts recycling The recorder will where possible balance the times so the shortest and longest pens fill the log memory at approximately the same time Depending on the different log rates the allocation of memory will vary per pen When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to returInternal n to the previous menu Internal SD Memory The SD cardis the internal memory architecture inside the recorder which has two partitions One partition has OS image used by the recorder and the size reserved for this partition is 256MB fixed The second partition is available space for use So for example a 1GB card then 256 MB is used by recorder for storing OS image and is never released for use NOTICE Because pens only begin to use extra memory when it is required there will be some delay in
536. unters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ethernet amp RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slave device while also being a master Remote Viewer Remote Con trol Tool Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email optional Setup email accounts to send the following When an Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Inter val Specific days Month End Pwd Net Sync optional Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group up to 32 recorders can be in a Password group this include the password Master Secure WSD WSD is a web service that can run on devices and conforms to the Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS Extra Pens 4 pens optional 4 extra pens to store a
537. upgrade is for the same package the software will au tomatically over write the previous version Local database information will not be affected and all devices data and setups are retained Any other remote database servers will have to be added manually If you have purchased a different package to what is already installed the new software will detect this and only make available the same package To install a different package first un install the previous version There is no need to save databases or data these will not 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 253 254 Comms and Trend Manager Suite be lost when un installing the previous version Devices and data held on a local database are retained for use with the new package as long as it is installed into the same directory Start Up The TrendManager Suite has been installed on the hard drive of your computer in pro gram files unless during set up you have changed the destination folder To re start the software click on Start go to Programs and select TrendManager Suite then select either TrendServer Pro TrendManager Pro or TrendViewer according to which version of software has been installed A shortcut for your desktop is automati cally created 7 Start up TrendServer Pro by double clicking the desktop shortcut or from the ve programs menu It is advisable to ensure that each recorder has a unique Record er ID number this will make identifying individual re
538. ur 48 32 screws on each of the three mounting brackets so the ends of the screw threads are flush with the face of the bracket NOTE Screw heads to be flange side of brackets 3 Insert the case with gasket into the panel opening 4 Install one left hand and one right hand bracket with 1 4 x 3 8 long bolts and lockwash ers on each side of the case NOTE The notch on each bracket should be facing upward towards the top of the unit Do not tighten the hex bolts at this time 5 Install the remaining right hand bracket on the top with the 1 4 x 3 4 long bolt and lock washer Do not tighten the bolt at this time 6 Place a screwdriver blade on the notch of each bracket and firmly tap so that each bracket firmly mates the case with gasket to the panel NOTE Keep brackets parallel to case Tighten the three 1 4 hex bolts to hold the brack ets in place 7 Start to tighten the 48 32 x 1 2 screws on the right side bracket Alternate screws at opposite ends until all four screws have a minimum of 10 Ib in of torque applied Do the same to both the left side and top brackets When completed all twelve screws should have a minimum of 10 Ib in of torque applied This assures the case and panel gasket are adequately sealed against the panel 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Mechanical Installation Figure 2 14 Panel Mounting with NEMA4 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 19 20 Mechanical Installation Mount
539. ur lots of recorded data but not only is this extra analysis later but a real time display is required The application is easily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder represented in pseudo code the script is as follows If input 1 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 1 and display and record input 1 If input 2 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 2 and display and record input 2 If input 3 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 3 and display and record input 3 If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest so make the global variable 1 equal to channel 4 and display and record input 4 Display the global variable 1 on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given time Pen 5is chosen to record the highest channel input and channel 6 is chosen to record which input is the highest oon The greater than gt is used the AND amp amp Boolean is also used and the global variable GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number Converting this to an actual script gives the following If A1 gt A2 amp amp A1 gt A3 amp amp A1 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 1 is more than 2 3 and 4 GLBV1 1 If yes then set display indicator to meter 1 return A1 And return the current flow reading elseif A2 gt A1 amp
540. urce or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being com municated A third tab Diagnostics can be enabled using the Administration button and selecting Preferences Send Recorder Events Comms Server has a set of chart controls that can control the chart on the recorder from your PC This can be done in Realtime chart controls on page 271 or can be setup as an Effect of an Event Furnace 1 Edit Device Configure Logging Delete Device Send Recorder Event Recorder Chart Functions Properties ast Prefill Chart v Fast Prefill Chart Normal Chart Pause Chart Right click on an active recorder to produce the drop down menu Realtime chart controls Right click on an active recorder in Comms Server Ethernet or RS485 from the recorders listed in the left hand window or from recorders in the main window From the list select Send Recorder Events and the Recorder Chart Functions box will appear If the option is not in the list go to Preferences in Administration on page 259 Select a chart control function for immediate effect on the recorder Because TrendServer Pro is graphing the data that is being transferred in realtime the recorders running on TrendServer Pro will not be affected Event chart controls The same set of chart controls can be activated using the event system in TrendServer Pro Chart controls can be used as an effect of an event happening In the Eve
541. urrent screen number where x in the screen number this can be used to detect what screen is being displayed Global Alarm Status ATOTt x ATOT O0 will return the total number of alarms that are currently enabled in the recorder ATOT 1 will return the total number of alarms in Alarm state in the recorder E g P1 ATOT 1 ATOT 0 100 would set P1 to give alarm state percentage for the recorder Ln In x Returns the Natural Log of x Log log x Returns the Base 10 Log of x Modulus X Y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y Multiply d Returns the result of the multiplication Pen Edit Maths vmemavail Scale 0 to 1048576 K Pen Edit Maths memavail Scale 0 to 1048576 K Power pow x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Can also be represented by Power xy Returns the value of x raised to the power y Reciprocal recip x Returns the reciprocal of x i e 1 x Root root x y Returns the y root of x Round round x Rounds x to the nearest whole number Serial Comms Variable SCV x y Z Returns serial variables during Modbus comms X Slave number y Transaction number z Item number Set clear a digital output SETD x y This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set
542. ut for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time E g a user might have 8 different products running though the same process these can be pre configured so when starting a batch the user can pick from a list of products The pre defined lists have to be enabled in the in dividual group screen eg Show List Sets of functions are available to retrieve the list index from within Maths allowing state based processing during user selection See Figure 14 1 Maths Variable Table on page 322 Name Props Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen see Batch Setup Batch Groups on page 180 User ID Props Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The User ID display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the per son logged in through the password system will be automatically entered Field 1 Props Defaults to Lot Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addi tion list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen
543. vice operates independently of all other devices on the network All devices attached to an Ethernet network are connected to a shared signalling system Ethernet signals are transmitted serially one bit at a time over the shared signal channel attached to each device It is up to the high level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that the data is correctly received at the destination device Devices attached to an Ethernet network can send application data to one another using high level protocol software such as TCP IP protocol suite High level protocols have their own system addresses such as the 32 bit addresses used in the current version of IP The high level IP based networking software in a device is aware of its own 32 bit IP address and can read the 48 bit Ethernet address of its own network in terface but it doesn t know the Ethernet addresses of the other devices on the network To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP based devices on the network another high level protocol is used For TCP IP this is done using a protocol called Address Resolution Protocol ARP Example Device X has an IP address of 195 23 37 1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to another IP based device Device Y with IP address 195 23 37 2 Device X sends the pack ets of information containing an ARP request The ARP request is asking the device with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 to identify the address of the Eth
544. vious menu Screen Saver Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Screen Screen Saver Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions The default state for the Screen Saver is disabled The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear When active the back light is off and nothing on the display is visible The screen saver will not function in Setup Menus or in test mode Enabled Toggle On and Off Timeout Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is how long the Screen Saver will display on the screen Programmable between 1 and 720 minutes in software when disabled the screen will remain on permanently enter 0 to disable Saver Type Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is set to Normal 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 143 Dim Saver Only available when the Screen Saver function is active Dim Saver will help to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen brightness for night time use Use Saver Brightness or Off Always Saver Level Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use Saver Bright ness Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers the screen brightness Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness Normal backlight MTBF at 100 brightness is 50 000 hours at 100 brightness opre rating at 25 For backlight life and brightness see Specification T
545. want the counter to Rollover At The default maximum Rollover value is 3 3e 38 When the count reaches the rollover number entered it will restart the count from your Start At number Once a User Counter is setup it has to be assigned something to count eg as a part as an Event See User Counters on page 117 126 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Preset Markers Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Preset Markers Set up marker text that can be used to mark the chart as a part of an Event Effect or manual added from the process screen as a Mark on Chart The mark on chart functionality has been extended to include the use of 20 separate preset markers With some markers configured when using mark on chart the user has the option of starting with blank text the previously entered text or one of the preset markers Preset markers are also used in the Mark on chart effect and the Alert system effect See Error Alert on page 129 To add text to a marker select the next available marker and enter the text via the on screen keypad Hit the tick mark to accept the text and then go to Finish to confirm Time Sync Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Setup Events Counters Time Sync This provides Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input Enabled Select the tick to enable Time Sync Trigger When recorder receives the Digital Input and there is a state change i e On or OFF t
546. when a scheduled export has been performed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu If a manual Export Now is in progress during the time when a Scheduled export is to occur the scheduled export will hold off until the manual export is finished Storage Bias Main Menu Configure Setup Edit Recording Storage Bias An adjustable slider can be used to determine how much internal flash memory is allocated for storing chart data and how much internal flash memory is allocated to storing logged da ta The User can adjust the slider to increase and decrease the internal flash memory stor age allocation Displayed under the Total Available Space bar is the amount of internal flash memory allo cated to chart and log data This will update as you move the slider The amounts shown display how much time it will take to fill the internal flash memory allocations at the current chart speed before the data will start to be recycled The default for the slider time coverage wise is set to a bias in the recorder to initially pro vide more space for data storage than chart replay You should set the bias to what best meets your data storage vs chart replay requirements The recorder is set to balance time coverage wise the chart and logged data equally depending on how many pens are enabled and what current chart speeds are
547. which screen will be the result of the Screen Change effect to now including non process screens Print Screen As an Effect this will print the current screen when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Digital turns on Effect Print Screen To set up network printer information see Network Admin on page 98 Counters Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters A User Counter must be set up first before it can be used as a part of an Event See Counters Menu on page 126 Enabled Tick to enable Event ee Type Counters e Event Action Increment will add by whatever value is entered in Increment By Reset will restart the counter to whatever number is entered in Reset To Sub Type only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action Select to reset User Pulse Events Digital Inputs Relay Outputs or Alarm counters Selecting any of these Sub Types will activate the corresponding menu item s So you can then specify the number of the Sub Type to be reset To view counters using a maths equation see Maths Variable Table on page 322 User Counters only available when Sub Type is set to User Select the User Counter number to be used from the available list Counters will only be available if they have first been set up in the User Counters Menu 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 123 124 Increment By only availabl
548. work consisting of 2 Password Groups Password Net Sync Configuration Type To set up the Master recorder for the password group first select Master to make this recorder a slave device and select Slave Password Group For a Master recorder enter the password group name using the on screen keypad or keyboard For a Slave recorder select a password group from the list to join this recorder to an existing group Associated Slaves For Master recorders only Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for password net sync and that already belong to this password group will be displayed in green Recorders not available because they are a part of another group or do not have the firmware option enabled will not be displayed Select the back button and if all is correct confirm using the tick button This will have imme diate effect The update could take up to 2 minutes 170 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Figure 4 2 Password Network Synchronisation setup Pwd NetSync Type Password Group Associated Slaves Turbine Station X5 100015 XS 1 Pump Station If Master is selected a keypad will be displayed to enter the new password group name If Slave is selected a list of existing password groups will be displayed This screen is available for a Master recorder so associated slaves can xS 100023 xS 193331 xS 100061 S 100015 be added to its password grou
549. y Alarm card can be used as digital inputs The relay contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression The 8 amp 2 Relay Alarm card this 8 channel card will have 8 mains rated relays of which 2 of the 8 channels can be configured for use as digital inputs 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Latched or Single Pulse The relay outputs can be set by the user to be either Latched or Single Pulse Latched A latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarmed state or a second Event has been activated to disable the relay Single Pulse The relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state re mains Single Pulse Relay Settings User can specify Pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Fail Safe Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Failsafe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an
550. y Settings Local Area Network e ccmmmR Modbus Capabilities oo sss PC Ethernet Connections Protocols erret Remote Networks Remote Viewer ene Software Installation Standard Communications Interfaces Web Browser COMMS Connections Comms Diagnostics FTP Status Modbus Status sss Peers Status sss vest SMTP Status 2o terrere rere test Comms Menu DNS WINS MDNS eee IP Address eem IP Address Entry POTIS sen ernn aane tEn Services TCP IP ME USB Comms Ports mmm Comms Server sees Add Pens for Logging Add a Database Add a Database Server Add a Device Add a new Device Administration eee Client Connections Comms Server Overview Configure Database Logging Connect to a Database sss Connect to a Database Server 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Database sirnaan nre E ANRE 258 Database Logging Delete a Database Delete a Device Diagnostics Edit a Device Logging Configuration 268 Network Settings see 259 Preferences 2 2 mener mereces Shutdown Status Screen Summary of Logging Changes 269
551. y command applied to the batch you can check the Mes sages screen for details of the batch activity Batch Commands S Start Batch E End or Stop Batch this will complete the batch run P Pause the batch in progress R Resume batch Only available when a batch has been paused A Abort batch If the batch is aborted it is incomplete and the batch will be cancelled User ID Displays the user entered ID or User ID entered automatically by the Pass word function D Description User entered description of the batch in progress L Lot No User entered Lot number for the batch in progress C Comment Extra comment field of additional information for the batch in progress Barcodes for Baich Batch markers can be created using independent barcode software The barcodes can then be read using a barcode wand or reader Any type of Batch marker can be encoded into a barcode using the same control characters used to build up a batch marker 4 8S 216 Lf E FRED This example shows a barcode encoded to start a batch S Start Batch 216 Batch Name User ID is Fred A barcode with up to 25 characters including spaces can be read into the recorder using a USB ASCII barcode reader 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 183 184 Recording Menu Main Menu gt Recording This will display the current recording status of the recorder and allow recording control Recording Methodology Th
552. y for pen 23 PRPMATCD23 v Time max was recorded for current day for P23 PRPSTMCD23 v Start time of report for current day for pen 23 156 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK Layout Main Menu Configure Layout The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Save or Load layouts in the recorder d Edit Layout JJ p Layout A amp Es 3 a r Settings Appearance Edit Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit The Edit Layout menu displays a Screen button to enable and display Standard and Custom screens The Settings button is used to enable screen cycling alarm screens and replay screens The Appearance button is used to change the chart background colour for normal charts and charts in replay mode Screens Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit gt Screens This section allows the user to configure and modify the standard screens on the recorder The Edit button will produce a list of available screens in the recorder In each screen you can enable check and change the screen properties The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 206 Select a standard or a new screen to view the following menu list Name Select to Change the name o
553. y key no size restriction but must be formatted FAT FAT16 TFAT FAT32 Internal Data Buffer Minitrend GR Multitrend GR and DR Graphic Recorder Non volatile 1GB upwards to 4GB Internal Data Buffer eZtrend GR Recorder Non volatile 1 GB upwards to 2GB Setup and screens Stored internally on non volatile memory Manual Saving Data saving by inserting SD card or USB memory stick Data Saving Period Related to log rate number of pens totals and alarms Each pen is capable of its own independent storage rate Minitrend GR and Multitrend GR Recorder 20ms to 60h eZtrend GR Recorder 100mS to 60h Data Format Honeywell binary encoded format Recycling Mode Internal memory has FIFO First In First Out capability where the newest data over writes the oldest data Power Requirements Minitrend GR Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 240VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 12VDC 30VDC 12VAC 20VAC Power Consumption 40 watts 12VDC 30VDC 12VAC 20VAC Multitrend GR Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 240VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption AC 50VA max DC 60W max Typical 30W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption lt 40 watts DR Graphic Recorders Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 240VAC auto select Frequency 50 60H
554. y menu buttons Calibration require Engineer access Permission Area 28 Figure 5 10 Default password access from the Messages Menu Messages Menu No Login Required Except to clear the messages from each area requires Engineer access Messages Diagnostics 3 iz System Messages lt Type Time amp Date Message A Back Finish 16 19 18 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 16 19 03 08 06 2007 Power On Off for m 33s 16 18 21 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 16 15 41 09 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 16 15 26 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 41s 16 14 42 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 16 03 51 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 16 03 36 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 40s 16 02 54 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 15 10 30 08 06 2007 Failed to copy group 1 report F _ 15 03 12 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 15 02 14 08 06 2007 Setup Changed All messages screen have a button to clear remove the existing messages v stored in the recorder for that particular area of messages Permission area 44 gt Ce eee Loe 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 221 222 Services Load Certificates Figure 5 11 Default password access from the Comms Menu Comms Menu Engineer access Permission Area 29 Services Permission Area 29 TCP IP Permission Area 33 Network Admin Permission Area 29 Lo
555. z Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption AC lt 50VA max DC lt 40W max Typical 25W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption 40 watts eZtrend GR Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 240VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Inrush Current 75A max High Line Cold Start Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 12 to 30VDC 12 to 20VAC Power Consumption 40 watts Common Relay Output SPNC NC common alarm relay Two contacts normally open when the recorder is powered no active alarms Rating 24V 1 Amp Battery Battery backed up for clock replaceable Lithium battery Type CR6032 3 0V 10 years life Recorder powered 1 year life typical Recorder unpowered Password Protection Multiple Administrator control of password setup and management with four levels of password protection for Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Up to 50 different users are avail able Password protection restricts user entry to the recorder set up and specific screens Engineer Highest access to all levels Supervisor Technician and Operator Supervisor 2nd highest level including Technician and Operator access Technician 3rd level including Operator access Operator 4th and lowest level of access Languages English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovakian Czech Turkish
556. z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Power Relay PWRREL Returns the status of the fixed power relay Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x Persisted global variables maintain their value through a power cycle There is a maximum of 50 per sisted global variables PRC PRC Power Relay Counter Pulse Inputs Al slots HPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Pulse card n 1 to 48 25kHz max Pulse Inputs DIO Slots LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input card when in Pulse mode n 1 to 48 1kHz Max RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mV RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mA Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 Returns the value for the Modbus Slave Comms Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n 1 to 96 43 TV 25 41 Iss 4 GLO May 2015 UK 323 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description UC1 to UC16 UC1 User counters 1 to 16 USB1 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted initially front or rear USB2 free storage space USB2FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted after the first USB has been fitted front or rear UV1 to UV32 UV1 This allows a system to be setup where val

GR Recorders User`s manual, 43-TV-25-41

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents